Home

Liberty Paint Liberty 32/64 Artist`s Manual rty Paint ty 32/64 t`s Manual

1. 4371 4 18 8 Adjust Mask Button eee 4 372 Adjust Mask Popup em 4 374 Mask Channels Button sse 4 375 Mask Channels 4 376 S Limits amp V Limits Sliders sess 4 976 Channels Clamp Button eee 4 377 Clamp Tolerance Slider 4 382 Preview Button ep 4 382 Active Buttons ic nieder 4 382 OK BUIOTD cest rte stc i eR eee poat de 4 382 Cancel B tton a eie cei 4 382 4 18 9 Fill Mask Button 4 383 Table of Contents xiv Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Fill Mask Popup eeH Hem 4 384 4 18 10 Match Mask Button nennen nnne 4 386 Match Mask Popup eeee me 4 387 Match RGB and Hue 4 388 4 19 Mask Tools 2 Panel 4 389 4 19 1 Safe Title Button ecc eeeeeee eene eene 4 389 Safe Title Popup pete pee 4 390 4 19 2 Mask Grid Button 4 391 4 19 3 Clamp Mask Button senes 42391 Snap amp Ramp
2. 4 249 Select Points 4 250 Table of Contents x Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Clear Select Points Complement Select Points Button Previous Select Points Shift Select Points Button Add Points Button Move Points Delete Points Button Insert Point Button Duplicate Points Button Close Curve Button 3 Break Button d ic dee ran JOIN usu tested Fera favs ver Recall Points Button Save Points Button Erase Points Button Curve OK and Cancel Curve Palette Button eese Gravity Button Transform Points Functions Transform Axis Button Scale Points BUON ide Center Points Polygon Button X Rotate Points
3. Y Rotate Points Z Rotate Points Button Bias Button Tension Button MO ONERE Resolution Button esee Reverse Points Button Point List Button eese Corner List BUON sipi ernn a a 4 13 3 Shape Popup eene Circle Button ree Ellipse Button Square Button Rectangle Button Triangle Star Button Polygon Button Erase Button Genter Button et ete aan Move Buttoh x oe Dre Leiter ie Transform Shape Button Trans Shape Gradation Button Shape Fill m Shape Outline Button Shapes Popup Cancel Shape Palette Revision A Xi Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation 4 13 4 4 13 5 4 13 6 4 13 7 4 13 8 4 13 9 4 14 4 15 4 15 1 4 15 2 Recall Shape and Save Shape Shapes
4. ennaa 5 137 Morph Between Button 5 138 Morph Reverse Button 5 138 Morph Recall Canvas Button 5 138 Morph Swap Temp Canv 5 138 Triangle Morph Add Points Button 5 139 Triangle Morph Delete Points Button 5 140 Triangle Morph Move Points Button 5 140 Triangle Morph Color Button corner of Move 5 140 Triangle Morph Add Keyframe Button 5 140 Triangle Morph Copy Keyframe Bultton 5 141 Triangle Morph Delete Keyframe Bultton 5 142 Triangle Morph Reset 5 142 Triangle Morph Lock 5 142 Triangle Morph OK Button 5 143 Triangle Morph Keyframe Slider 5 143 Line Morph Add Button sseeeeeeee 5 144 Line Morph Delete Button 5 145 Line Morph Move 5 145 Line Morph Color Button seeeeenes 5 145 Line Morph Tune Button 5 146 Line Morp
5. 5 119 5 7 3 Cycle Actor Popup eee 5 119 5 7 4 Filmstrip Actor Popup eene 5 120 Filmstrip Source Buttons sees 5 122 Filmstrip Hdisk Button seseeeee 5 122 Filmstrip Src VTR Button 5 122 Filmstrip Tar VTR Button seee 5 122 Extract Button De interlacing 5 122 De interlacing Popup esee 5 123 Hints About Field Order eee 5 124 Filmstrip File Button 5 124 Filmstrip In B tton e oae tice 5 124 Filmstrip Out Button eeee 5 125 Filmstrip Speed 5 126 Dynamic Speed Control Speed Keyframe Button 5 127 Motion Blur and Trail 5 128 5 7 5 Text Actor Popup een 20 129 Text Color Button 5 130 5 7 6 Write On Actor Popup 5 131 Write on Color Button seenn 5 132 Brush Mode Button 5 133 Write on Paint Mode 5 133 Revision A xxi Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation File B tton eite ttn lad ening 5 134 5 7 7 Morph Actor Popup
6. 5 9 Scroll Down Button v sss 5 9 Home B tton eere e eee e 5 9 ANIMATION CONTROL MENU 5 10 Source Button src sese 5 12 Target Button 5 12 Timecode Window eene 5 12 Shuttle Button 5 13 Button J sesseeee emen 5 13 Timecode Elevator eene 5 13 Cue BUtton eene 5 13 Stop Button ie entire te nete EROS 5 13 Play B lton ipe ene das 5 13 Replay Button sse 5 14 VTR Setup 5 15 Source Setup 5 19 Target Setup 5 22 File Type Popup ini ertet irit iere 5 25 Chyron Motion File Setup 5 28 RAW YUV Files for Disk 5 31 The Target Rescale 5 33 Dropframe Button 5 33 Preroll 5 33 OK B ullon 5 33 Recall Animation 5 34 Animation Save Button 5 35 Check Animation Button
7. eene 1 3 1 3 2 Menu Buttons and the Tablet 1 3 T33 Slider Scales 1 3 4 Calculator di 1 3 5 Number Windows Text Windows 1 5 1 3 6 Keyboard EILEEN 1 5 uia 1 6 9 Login Environment 2 1 THE LOGIN ENVIRONMENT 2 1 User Login 251 A Note for Beginners 2 1 3 Configuration Environment 3 1 Configuration Environment 3 1 3 1 4 Configuration Environment Functions 3 1 3 1 2 Customizing Menus eren 3 5 3 1 3 Color Scheme Palette eese nnns 3 5 Menu Color Scheme Palette Elevator 3 5 Revision A iii Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 3 2 1 Changing the Colors of the Menu 3 6 Default Scheme s Button esses 9 6 Get Scheme 9 7 Set Scheme 3 7 System Info Button 77 License Info Button eene 3 9 USER PANEL eet Ernie torneo noe sees 3
8. 4 992 Clamp Mask 4 393 4 19 4 Difference Mask Button eene 4 393 Difference Mask Modes 4 994 Difference Mask 4 395 4 19 5 Field Mask Button 4 399 4 19 6 Paste Mask Button cessere eese enne 4 399 4 20 TEXT PANEL MENUS 400 4 20 1 Text Panel nri danita danii 4 401 Text Edit Button cn iiio tree br 4 401 Font Elevator i ertet 402 Move 4 402 Refresh Text 4 403 Text Size BUttON cece cccce se eeseeceseeceeceseeeeseeeseeeseeeees 4 403 Center Text Button sess 4 404 Leading BUON irte Neue 4 404 Align Text Button 4 405 Kerning Button as 4 406 Erase Text Button unii Pee ikea 4 407 Erase All Button insi tm ree eee ris 4 407 Transform Text Button 4 407 Render Text 4 408 Text Save and 4 410 4 20 2 Intern
9. 5 173 Gamma Mode pee eret WR 5 174 Chroma Key 5 174 Ultimatte Plug in 5 178 Mask File Button eee m 5 178 Mask Invert Button eee 5 179 Mask Inplace Button 5 179 5 7 12 Reference amp Troupe Actor Popups 5 182 Show Troupe Button see 5 182 5 7 13 Shapes Actor Popup 57184 Shapes Actor 5 186 Inbetweening Timeline eee 5 186 Shapes 3D Paste 5 190 Shapes Actor Rendering Modes 5 191 Canvas 5 192 Other Canvas Mode variations 5 192 none dE dere 5 193 Plug injActOr oer Eee tette 5 193 5 8 MORPHING 2 tci eee cu ceruice rece eere 5 194 5 8 1 Triangle Morph Step by Step 5 196 5 8 2 Line Morph Step by Step 5 200 5 9 Motion 5 204 5 9 1 Motion Tracking cccceseeeceseseneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseenseeeesnees 5 205 Motion Tracking
10. seen 4 348 Chroma Key Button sse 4 349 Chroma Key Popup eerie seed dol Chroma Key Preview Buttons ydo tis TE TE 4 353 Key Adjust 4 354 Dominant Color Buttons eee 4 355 Picked Color Display ey 42000 Chroma Key Settings Elevator m 4 356 Chroma Key Control Sliders 4 356 Glip Golors Sliders ins 4 357 Keep Colors Sliders 4 358 Ultimatte Pl g 4 359 Plug in Button 4 359 Plug in Popup ener eter 4 361 4 17 MASK TOOL 4 363 Mask Buffer in the Buffers 4 363 Mask Panels Description 4 365 4 18 Mask Tools 1 4 366 4 18 1 Use Mask Button eene 49366 4 18 2 Mask Button eene 4 367 4 18 3 Invert Mask Button eere 367 4 18 4 Erase Mask Button eene 4 367 4 18 5 Rectangle Mask Button eee 4 367 Rectangle Mask Modes 4 368 4 18 6 Circle Mask Button eee 4 369 4 18 7 Alpha Mask Button eee 4 370 Alpha Mask
11. 5 161 Color table Duplicate Button DUDS 5 161 Color table Cycle Color table Reveal Button Color table Ncols Table of Contents Xxii Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Color table Edit Col Button 5 162 Color table Smooth 5 162 5 7 11 Mask Actor Popup 07162 Mask Mode 5 163 Mask Mode e Eee eges 5 165 Chroma Key Mode eee 5 165 Brightness Mode essen 5 166 Contrast Mode cere P 5 167 WIN MOOG vets eti rr eo exi he tis 5 167 Ripple 5 168 Filter MOde reete trente enne 5 169 Posterize 5 170 Mosaic Moder 5 171 Sharpen Mode eme 5 171 Bl r MOd6 deer en RE 5 171 HSV and RGB 5 171 Color Correct Mode sese 5 172 Adj st Mode eto ertet ttm ee tiu des 5 172 Noise Mode onte ree 5 173 Bump Map
12. 5 209 Lock Frame Bultton eee 5 209 Size Buttons X and Y 5 211 Revision A xxiii Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation Move Buttons tete Mandi eed 5 211 Separating Points from Image with Warp Corners 5 213 5 9 2 Motion Stabilization eene 5 220 5 10 Animation Playback Functions 5 222 Animation Preview 5 223 Animation Preview 5 223 Animation Preview 5 227 Animation Storyboard 5 281 5 10 1 Record Control Popup ene 5 233 Record Modes sssssssseeeeeene ene 5 233 Erase Functions tein etette 5 234 Record Rate 5 235 Storyboard Resolution 5 235 Storyboard Elevator and Path Window 5 237 File D ta Button eee Rees 5 237 Browse Buttons 2 uice nece IRIS 5 238 5 10 2 Playback Control Popup 9 239 Play Once Button Play 1 5 240 Play Button 5 240 Fast Forward Button 5
13. 4 85 Swap with Temp Button the lt gt button 4 85 Recall from Temp Button the gt button 4 85 Layers Button eicere trente intererit 4 85 l ayers PODUD oe e He trenes 4 88 Individual Layer Controls eee 4 91 Using Paint Image Tools and Mask Tools with Layers 4 94 Layers Function Buttons 0 00 ce eee eee eerie 4 96 Temp Layers Color Codes 4298 Loading Layers Graphically 499 Saving Layers in the Layers File Format Wesen 4 103 Revision A vii Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 9 4 4 9 5 4 9 6 4 9 7 4 9 8 4 9 9 4 9 10 4 9 11 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 2 4 11 4 11 1 Canvas Butter iis e cre o 4 104 Mag 4 105 X and Y 4 105 Alpha A Slider eese 4 105 TRANSFER PANEL _ 4 106 Cut amp Paste Functions 4 107 Cut Button Move Button Paste Button at Benes Paste 4 111 Paste Modes Popup 4 112 Pa
14. T 4 205 Host Button 4 206 Disk 4 206 Directory Button 4 206 File 4 206 Plus Button eode 4 207 Revision A ix Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation Minus Button dtd eae 4 207 Filename list in the File 4 207 File Mode Button seem 4 207 File Mode Popup eem 4 209 Full screen Button Full 4 213 Path Button anie ere tete 4 214 Full screen File Menu 4 217 4 12 1 File Manager Button eee 42219 Scroll to Top Button 4 219 Scroll Up Button sseee 4 220 Scroll Down Button V se 4 220 Scroll to Bottom Button B 4 220 Action Button dein uote 4 220 File Path Elevator eere 4 225 Select Button eerte eee 4 226 Select All B tton niii eret toten 4 226 Clear oen anion Det 4 226 Complement Select Button 4 226 Page Select Button sess 4 226 Browse
15. seen 9 45 3 8 VIDEO FRAMER PANEL 9 46 3 9 OPTION PANEL 848 3 9 4 Hardware Options eene eene 9249 3 9 2 Software Options eee 9250 Expanded Resolution eese 3 50 Motion Tracking 3 50 Cinef sioh 2 ree cete tegere d 1 License options for GIF TIFF LZW Compression 3 51 3 9 8 Active Server eere 3 51 Installing Software Options 3 52 3 10 CURSOR 3 52 3 11 TABLET PANEL 3 54 Tablet Click 3 55 Tablet Top Margin ee 3 55 Tablet Bottom Margin eene 3 55 Tablet Left Margin 3 55 Tablet Right Margin eee 3 55 Reset Button eee nter cete 3 56 Cancel Button eei t hie edi as 3 56 OK seis wie 3 56 3 12 UNDO PANEL te oue oio rr rn rie 8 57 4 Paint Environment 4 1 PAINT ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION 4 1 Environment ButtOns ccccscecceceeseeeceeaesessseseeeeeeseeees 4 5 Revision A V Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation 4 2 4 3 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 Canva Sieno a er ep ves wines so ave E EL PE 4 5 Undo FUNCTI
16. Paint Environment 4 332 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Using X Mirror results in 3 2 1 6 5 4 9 8 7 Preview Active Preview Button s Press Preview to see a preview of the filter When the Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the filter on the masked area 4 15 14 Ripple Button Ripple gives an refracting effect that looks like dis torting glass or water There must be some image in the Canvas to distort and Ripple requires a mask There must be some transparency in the mask because Ripple works from the variation in the transparency of the mask Ripple can give extremely interesting results but it requires some experimentation Its effects are completely depen dent on what kind of a mask you use Revision A 4 333 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Ripple Popup Ripple ak P o 7 preview activa Figure 4 105 Ripple Popup Press the corner button of Ripple to call up the Rip ple Popup The Ripple Slider controls the refrac tion index or intensity of the ripple effect It s most powerful at the top To ripple an area of the Canvas e Mask the area you want to ripple e Press the corner button of Ripple The popup appears e Move the slider to a high value e Press OK
17. 5 96 Timecode Button labeled 5 36 Dropframe Button labeled Dropfr 5 36 Duration Button Dur 5 37 LOOPS Button ss oci Ee ta doe 5 39 In BUON iin Rr Ep ue 5 39 Qut B lttOrizi cente ete tetrum 5 40 Holdin Button 2 rient 5 40 Table of Contents Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 4 5 4 1 Holdout Button 5 40 Skipin Button iieri reete recien 5 41 SKIPOUL Buttons 5 iion DRE HIER 5 41 Preview Animation Button In 5 43 Animation Storyboard Button In Brief 5 43 Animation Environment Record Animation Button In Brief 5 43 Run Animation Button In Brief 5 43 Animation Actor 5 44 Animation Actors in brief 5 44 Actor Type 5 45 Gel Acto r o RED ege 5 45 Cycle ACIOr sin ro 5 46 Filmstrip ActOor eerie Bee E 5 46 TeXtACEIOE ear itm en ee ARS 5 46 Wiite OnAGtOF iieri teret iw ceres 5 46 MoOrph AGIOQE se nt Cerea Coe oe e d t a 5 47 Macro AGIOL nien Ene tbe rede 5 47 PlugsIn ACEITE iii IE RR PORE UE esetiecs 5 47 Switcher Actor nearest ind 5 47 Color table
18. sssssesssssee 3 29 Fast Masks Button 3 29 Fast Exit Button 3 29 Into BUTLONS 3322 epe 3 30 Button Configuration 3 31 DIRECTORY PANEL ccce 3 32 Create Directory Button 3 33 Delete Directory 3 33 Rename Directory 3 34 User Setup Button essen 3 34 Re label ImageStor 3 35 VIDEO PANEL rien nette tn einn nnn 3 36 Table of Contents iv Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Video Recording and Video 3 37 3 7 CONFIGURING VTRS 9 97 Define VTR Button Defining VTR 3 37 Model Lists ate RR eR me 3 38 Control Button ecrire retten 3 39 Video Button esee eene eene 3 41 Type Window reete ttti genes 3 41 Address Window esee 3 43 Source Button SRC sese 3 43 Target Button Tar sse 3 44 Comm co n eder te merge ied 3 44 V Adj BUttOni terre ete eri ie cR E 3 45 Config OK Button
19. Browse Browse Off 5 4 227 Browse Off 4 228 Alpha B tton etre 4 229 Make Browse 4 230 SOM BUITOnL ee cei eb deis 4 230 SOM POPUP ueteri dert inc reor eaten ere 4 231 Free Space 4 235 Total Selected Display 4 235 Prefix Buttoris eet eee edente reise 4 235 OK Button d rettet eerte ds 4 235 Cancel B tton ona eet e Dei 4 236 Loading Layers Graphically 4 237 4 13 PAINT PANEL etui eei 4 240 4 13 1 Painting Functions een 4 242 Paint Button 4 242 Line Button ioter Pert cutee em cipes 4 242 Curve eene deti net ERR 4 242 Shape 4 242 Paint Gap 4 243 Curve and Shape Gap 4 245 4 13 2 Curve Popup 4 247 utei gH RI 4 248 Curve Tangent 4 249 Curve Elevator enirn erant 4 249 Select Points Functions
20. Press the Video Button to set the video path for the video device When selected the Video button will highlight Use the Type window and Address win dow to configure the video path Type Window The type window is used to set the type of commu nication for device control when the Control button is selected and video I O when the Video button is selected The available types of communication are Ethernet SCSI Serial A 1 serial port 1 and Serial B 2 serial port 2 Not all type of communication are available on all devices see table 3 2 Ethernet and SCSI are utilized for DDR devices while Serial is usually utilized with a VLAN device in conjunc tion with a VTR If no DDR or VTR is hooked up or a camera is attached to your video board select none Address Window The address window is used to set the specific address for device control when the Control button is selected and video I O when the Video button is selected The Address window is used in conjunc tion with the Type window and sets the specific communications address for the selected type of communication For a DDR in Ethernet mode enter the network host name of the DDR For a DDR in SCSI mode enter the path of the SCSI or disk device under IRIX refer to the Liberty 6 0 Techni cal Reference Manual for details For VLAN con trol select the VLAN slave number For SMPTE control select the SMPTE address Revision A 3 43
21. R Preview Story Record RUN Figure 5 55 Playback Buttons Press the main part of the button to turn on Preview Mode Press the corner button to display the Preview Animation Popup Animation Preview Popup Wiretrane Dutline Render Figure 5 56 Preview Animation Popup The Animation Preview Popup contains three mode buttons Wireframe Outline and Render Press the OK Button to confirm your choice of mode and make the popup disappear The three Preview modes do not save or record anything but display on the screen only Revision A 5 223 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Wireframe Preview When this mode is active the animation plays repre senting each actor by a separate rectangular bound ing wireframe This is the fastest playback mode since it uses only wireframes with no rendering It is useful for getting a quick general sense of the motion in an animation Press the Run Button to start playback You can press and drag the Preview Handle the cur sor at the top of the timeline to dynamically view the motion The Preview Handle is red when the Render Preview Mode is chosen otherwise it s white Outline Preview When this mode is active the animation plays repre senting each actor by an outline based on its alpha transparency For example a Cel Actor containing a logo saved on a transparent background displays the logo s outline shape Press the Run But
22. seen Sharpen Popup 4 15 12 Blur Button Blur 4 15 13 Filter Button Filter 4 15 14 Ripple Button Ripple Popup 4 15 15 Bump Map Button eene Bump Map Popup 4 15 16 Mosaic Button Mosaic Popup 4 16 Image Tools 2 Panel 4 16 1 Edge Button eene Edge Popup 4 16 2 Edge Detection Button esee 4 16 3 Tri Morph Button 4 16 4 Line Morph Button 4 16 5 Even Field Button esee 4 16 6 Odd Field Button sees 4 16 7 Wrap Button eee Wrap Mode Popup 4 16 8 Motion Tracking Button 4 299 ADITU A NETT 4 303 MEE 4 305 4 309 EA Eee Ee TUAE 4 309 o UE 4 310 P 4 311 4 313 M 4 314 4 315 Revision A Xiii Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation 4 16 9 Color Matrix Button eee 49343 Dither BUttOH s ihi AO pte See enema head 4 344 Color Matrix Popup eeee 4 345 Dither Popup t ceri pce ve 4 345 Hints About Dithering
23. Equals and Timecode Mode time The numeric display window displays the current number being entered or the current cumulative result of an operation Just like a pocket calculator Liberty s calculator has precedence rules Divide and Multiply have higher precedence than Add and Subtract This means that the evaluation of Adds and Subtracts is delayed until another Add or Subtract is specified or until you press the Button Paint Environment 4 68 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual There are parentheses buttons in the second calcula tor panel to override the above precedence rules Multiple levels of nested parentheses are allowed The left Paren Button is highlighted as long as a left parentheses is active until all left parens have corre sponding right ones The Clear clr Button clears the calculator so that you can start a fresh computation setting the numeric display window to 0 Neither the calcula tor s memory nor constants are cleared The Memory Buttons allow you to save a value in the calculator s memory for later use The MC Button zeros the memory the MS Button stores the current number from the numeric display win dow and the MR Button recalls the last saved value for use equivalent to entering the number using the Numeric Menu Buttons but faster Numeric Entry Buttons include the digits 0 9 a ow decimal point for entering fractions and a Timecode Separato
24. Figure 5 51 Morph Actor Popup Animation Environment 5 194 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual You start a morph animation by setting up the con trol points Triangle Morph or the line segments Line Morph that define the beginning keyframe of the morph Then you move or modify the keyframe to create a distortion in the ending keyframe of the morph Then you set a duration for the animation and render the morph using the Storyboard or Record functions Both Triangle Morph and Line Morph allow mor phing of a single image or morphing between two images You can add keyframes between the beginning and ending of any morph The discussion of each type of morph begins with a step by step description of how to animate a morph between two images This is followed by a func tion by function description of the morph buttons for each type of morph First Triangle Morph Revision A 5 195 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 8 1 Triangle Morph Step by Step Figure 5 52 Triangle Morph Popup To create a morph animation from one image to another Adda Morph Actor to the Timeline See add ing actors page 5 51 e Adda Cel Actor to the layer below the Morph Actor The Cel Actor should have the same begin and end numbers as the Morph Actor this is not necessary but simplifies the process e Press the File Button in the Cel Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline and assign an image file
25. Paint Environment 4 486 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Triangle Morph OK Button 4 26 Press to render the morph as determined by the position of the pointer in the Keyframe Slider Ren ders on top of the existing picture on the Canvas or under it if the Under Prefix is on Press the OK Button The existing Canvas image is erased before the final distortion of the Temp image is displayed on the Canvas Importing Jaleo Clips Liberty provides the ability to import Jaleo clips in the Paint Environment so that Liberty s comprehen Sive paint tools can apply various treatments to the Jaleo images Liberty gives you the ability to access the source material pointed to by the Jaleo nclp files Jaleo Environment Variable In order for Liberty to recognize the Jaleo clip files and import the high resolution files from the Jaleo directory it is necessary to configure the environ ment variable in the liberty account to recognize the location of the Jaleo files automatically To set the Environment Variable in the Liberty account e 1 Login to liberty account e 2 Open UNIX shell window 3 Set directory to usr people liberty if not set already Revision A 4 487 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 Type the following shell command Is a Verify that there is a file called cshrc 5 Open the file cshrc for editing by typing jot cshrc 6 Set the cursor at the end o
26. Press the X Mirror Button or Y Mirror Button to reflect the image across the X or Y axis The Mir ror Buttons are mode buttons when one or both of them is mirroring takes place Eye Button The magenta Eye Button is used to customize the look of the perspective transformation This is done by defining where the center of projection of the image is located Eye Popup Center of Projection Image Axis Fixed OK X Y Z 345 037 223 25 484 Advanced Settings Figure 4 47 Eye Popup Press the Eye Button to call up the Eye Popup which has three buttons Image Axis and Fixed In Image Mode the center of projection is centered on the middle of the image regardless of where the axis may be In Axis Mode the center of projection is centered on the axis In Fixed Mode you can choose any point in space to be the center of projec Paint Environment 4 134 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Any center of projection has by default a depth dis tance from the Canvas equal to the height of the Canvas You can adjust this depth in Z in all three Eye modes to create unique distortions You can use a large negative depth in front of the Canvas to achieve a parallel projection Reset Button Press the red Reset Button to zero out the current settings Reset has a soft and a hard mode If a distort effect Rotation Scale etc is active press ing
27. Type the file name you want to save the pic ture under followed by the Enter key or press on a filename in the list of filenames The Canvas picture is saved under the indicated file name if you press on an existing filename you will be asked whether to overwrite it NOTE If there is an active mask only the masked area of the canvas is saved File Path Elevator 6 elevator boxes are provided each of which can hold a file path The current elevator box keeps the current path until you change it With the Copy Pre fix you can copy a path into a different elevator box saving it for later quick access Revision A 4 167 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Save Corner Button Press the corner button of Save when you want to use special settings to modify how pictures are saved The Save File Popup appears below When you change a save setting it stays changed until you go back and reset it or change it again Save File Popup Shrinkurap Save Inactive Layers Re scale No scaling Cancel File Save Settings Reset Figure 4 59 Save File Popup Re scale Button The Save Popup contains the same rescaling func tions as the Recall File Popup applied to saved files rather than recalled ones For details on the rescale functions see Rescale Popup on page 4 162 When you activate Re scale in the Save File Popup the Save Corner Button in the Transfer panel is high lighted
28. When highlighted the mosaic effect is randomized by varying the horizontal start position of each mosaic block for example try an x value of 15 and ay value of 2 with random on for an interesting impressionist effect Paint Environment 4 338 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 16 Image Tools 2 Panel IMAGE TOOLS 2 Canvas Edge Iri Line Edge Detect Horph Horph Even Odd Wrap Motion Field Field 4 ways Tracking Color Chroma Dither Matrix Key Plug In KPT_Glass_Lens Figure 4 108 Image Tools 2 Panel 4 16 1 Edge Button The Edge function allows you to generate an edge around the masked area in one of 8 directions or in all directions at once Only elements with some opacity will be edged Transparent background is ignored by the Edge function The transparency of the edge is set by the Transparency Slider Edge Popup Figure 4 109 Edge Popup Revision A 4 339 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Press the corner button of the Edge Button to bring up the Edge Popup Edge Direction Buttons The Edge Popup has nine direction buttons The eight outside direction buttons generate the edge in one direction and the center button edges out in all directions If multiple colors are chosen on the pal ette they are interpolated through the width of the edge with the first color on the inside and the last color on the outside of the edge Edge Slider Scale Press and drag to cha
29. Figure 3 2 Color Scheme Palette Revision A Configuration Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Get Scheme Button Press to copy the current menu colors to the palette When you are changing the colors on the palette use to restore the palette back to the current menu col ors Set Scheme Button Press to display the Menu Configuration Palette col ors in the menu 3 1 5 System Info Button Press this button to call up the System Info Popup which displays information about the current ver sion of Liberty software you are running as well as information about your hardware platform It lists the following e Current Liberty version number Date compiled Current date and time Host name Internet ID setting Physical RAM User RAM Free RAM Free virtual memory e Size of Liberty software e Free SYS disk space Press the OK Button to close the popup Revision A 3 9 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 1 6 License Info Button Press this button to display the License Information Popup which displays information about what Lib erty software options are currently enabled It lists each Liberty software option its version number and whether it is enabled available or not Press the OK Button to close the popup 3 2 USER PANEL Add User Delete User Set User Password Set Admin Password a ieee Figure 3 3 User Panel Configu
30. Paint Environment 4 140 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Table 4 1 Numeric Keypad Keys Functions Key Function 9 page up Increases Z position decreases Z rotation increases X Y scale 4 lt Decreases X position increases Y rotation decreases X slant decreases X scale 5 Reset gt Increases X position decreases Y rotation increases X slant increases X scale 1 END In place oy Decreases Y position decreases X rotation decreases Y slant decreases Y scale 3 page dn Center Realtime Paste Distort Preview on Some Platforms On platforms that support realtime performance previews of Paste Distort Warp update smoothly and continuously as the Paste bounding box is changed using the Paste Popup the pen mouse con trols on the Canvas or keyboard controls On slower platforms Final alpha previews are done in software with the previews only being updated when the controls are released for example when the pen is released from the Canvas controls In some cases even on platforms capable of realtime performance in cases of large images or when mul tiple images are being distorted warped in Layers some previews will be done in software with the same interactivity as on slower hardware platforms Revision A 4 141 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Paste Mode Button 4 9 11 The Paste Mode Button toggles through the modes of the cur
31. e l Press on one of the source target devices VTR 1 VTR 2 etc to enable it The button you press is highlighted 2 Press the number window the Pre roll Button to enter a new pre roll duration in seconds Only the active recording device is changed it must be a VLAN controlled VTR Dropframe Button Press the Dropframe Button to turn it on off When on recording grabbing takes place in Dropframe Mode Dropframe Mode affects both the source and target recording device unlike Pre roll Note that Animation Environment 5 18 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual the Dropframe button is only active when a VTR device is selected It is not active nor is it needed for disk paths Show Timecode Show Frames Button Press this button to change between Timecode Mode and Frame Mode This affects the display of all numbers in the VTR Panel Source Setup Popup NOTE The Source and Target Setup Popups are identical in appearance except that the Source Popup has a large blue button at the top labeled Source and the Target Setup Popup has a large pink button at the top labeled Target Each popup provides for the configuration of six possible devices VTRs DDRs etc and six possible disk paths Source Selection Buttons At the right of each of the twelve timecode windows on the Source Setup Popup is a Source Selection Button which you can toggle between Off Canvas Temp
32. 4 182 IMAGESTOR Save As 4 184 Re label IMAGESTOR essere 4 188 4 11 5 iNFiNiT Setup Functions 4 189 INFINIT Setup Menu eem 4 189 FTP set up controls esse 4 190 4 190 Save Local 4 191 NTSC and PAL Buttons 4 191 13 5 MHZ D ttOn ss ceeds coe ce tech tee ste ident 4 191 Elevator of Pre sets 4 191 Saving INFINIT Files sseseeeeeee 4 192 Check for Overwrite c ccccccececeeceaeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeaee 4 193 TIFF File Format roten 4 193 TIFF Setup Menu esee 4 194 JPEG File Format esses 4 196 JPEG Setup Menu seen 42197 Re scale On 4 198 Setup Button ee entente 4 199 Shrink wrap Mode Button 4 199 Compress Button sss 4 199 Rescale B ttoh oec eye eerta 4 199 Save As Orientation Button 4 199 FTP Save As Button rice seri oes cs 4 200 FTP Save As Popup eee 4 201 4 12
33. CHYRON Corporation Panel at the left of the Canvas The Buffers Panel contains a Mask Elevator which contains six differ ent masks including the current one You can also store masks on the disk using the Save Button The Mask Buffers Panel also contains the Mask Display functions with which you can change the color transparency mode in which masks are displayed on the Canvas when active For more details on the Mask functions in the Buffers Panel see the section on the Buffers Panel page 4 74 Saving and Recalling Masks To save a Mask to disk e Use a Mask Button to mask an area of the Canvas e Press the Save Button in the Transfer panel The File Popup appears e Press either end of the File Mode Button until it displays the word Mask the file button is the pink button labeled Canvas when the file popup first comes up file name for the Mask to be saved under followed by the keyboard s Enter key The Mask is saved with a yellow color coded dot next to its file name in the file list When brows ing files in the Full Screen File Menu masks appear as white silhouettes on a black back ground To recall a Mask e Press the Recall Button The File Popup appears Press either end of the File Mode Button until it displays the word Mask Paint Environment 4 364 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press on a file name in the file list type the file name to b
34. Liberty Artist s Manual Reverse Points Curve Popup 4 260 RGB Mode 4 42 Ripple Button 4 333 Rotation and Scaling of Actors Larger Than the Screen 5 49 Rotationi n Paste Distort 4 132 Rotoscope button 4 453 Rotoscoping 4 430 rotoscoping 4 453 Rotoscoping layers undo 4 446 Run Animation Button 5 256 S Safe Title Button 4 390 Save and Recall State Buttons 4 415 Save As Button 4 169 4 225 Shrinkwrap Button 4 199 Save Scheme Button 3 7 Save to Temp Button 4 85 saving 4 167 animations 5 35 curves 4 255 File Mode Button 4 207 File Popup Menu 4 205 foreign file formats 4 169 4 225 masks 4 364 text 4 410 Saving pictures 4 106 Scale in Paste Distort 4 133 Revision A Index 23 CHYRON Corporation Scale Lock Button 4 133 seamless rectangle for tiling 4 283 selecting files 4 226 4 235 Set Button 3 7 Set Magnify Button 4 65 Set Scheme Button 3 7 Set User Password Button 3 12 Setup VTR Popup 4 438 4 442 5 20 5 23 Shape Button 4 242 Shape Popup 4 262 color of the shapes 4 268 filling and outlining shapes 4 267 Gradation Button 4 267 recalling and saving shapes 4 268 rotating and scaling shapes 4 267 Shift Colors Button 4 38 Show Button 4 155 Show Troupe Button 5 56 5 182 Shrinkwrap Button 4 199 Shuttle and Jog Sliders 4 427 size of the file in KB 4 219 Skipin and Skipout Buttons 5 41 Skipin Button 5 41 Skipout Button 5 41 Slant in Paste Distort 4 133 slider scales 1 4 num
35. Paint Environment 4 114 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 9 6 Press the Plus or Minus Adjust Buttons to move the object by the number of pixels shown in the window of the Adjust Button along whatever axis is turned on X or Y or both diagonal Press the Plus Button to move in a positive direction Press the Minus Button to move in a negative direction Each time you press the object moves incrementally the number of pixels in the Adjust window You can tap repeatedly on the Plus or Minus Buttons or hold them down for continuous movement To change the number of pixels moved press in the window of the Adjust Button and type in a new number The OK Erase and Cancel Buttons Perform the final paste by pressing the OK Button Press the Erase Button to perform the final paste after erasing the Canvas Press the Cancel Button to remove the popup without performing the paste The Paste Elevator The current settings of the popup are saved in the current Paste Elevator level When you press on another elevator level the settings in the popup change to those saved in the new level You can save six different paste set ups in the elevator giv ing each of the set ups a name with the Name But ton if you want to Press in the Name Button and type in a name then that name will be displayed whenever you press on that elevator level Paste Color Mode Use Paste Color Mode to paste a blurred copy of the ob
36. This copy colors procedure works the same for a group of colors in Multiple Color Mode as for a sin gle color Current Color Button The large box above the green Color Mode button displays the color of the currently selected palette color If the palette is in Multi Mode the upper left most palette color will be displayed Paint Environment 4 52 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Background Color Button The box above the Current Color Display is the Background Color Button It displays the color of the transparent background in the Canvas To change the color of the transparent back ground If Multiple Colors is on turn it off e Press the box in the palette that you want to copy into the Background Color Button e Press the Background Color Button The underlined palette color is copied into the Back ground Color Button After a momentary pause the transparent background color in the Canvas changes to match the Background Color Button 4 4 GRID AND DIRECTION FUNCTIONS Solid Air Program User Curate Browse Undo Help Redo Figure 4 22 Grid Buttons in the Brush Display Revision A 4 53 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 4 1 The Grid and Direction Buttons are below the red Erase Buttons They allow you to constrain various Canvas operations to grid points or to specific direc tions Grid Functions Grid Button The Grid function when turne
37. To create a sequence of files in Multiple using the Filmstrip File Menu Figure 5 22 Adda Cel Actor into the Timeline e Press on the word Single in the lower right corner of the Cel Actor Popup The Multiple Cel Popup appears e Press on the File Window The File Popup appears Revision A 5 109 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Insert Replace Delete Figure 5 24 Filmstrip File Menu in the Full screen File Menu Revision A 5 111 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Press on the button labeled film on the File Popup It is next to the full button used to access the Full Screen File Menu The Full Screen File Menu appears with a new popup at the bottom This is the Filmstrip File Menu The Insert Mode Button should be on Make sure Filmstrip Sort Mode is on If it isn t you can turn it on by pressing the Sort But ton and then turning on the Filmstrip Button Press on a browse image of a single file or a filmstrip in the full screen file menu The file name turns blue Press in the empty strip in the Filmstrip File Menu browse image of the file appears in the Multiple Cel File Popup The original in the Full Screen File Menu does not disappear Repeat Step 6 and 7 until you have several browse images in the Filmstrip File Menu Liberty reads the sequence from left to right Use the arrow buttons on the right of the popup to scroll right and the a
38. When using Temp or Mask as a source mode use the number window at the right to set which number Temp or Mask to use That source will then be input to Temp 1 Temp 2 etc when you press the Grab or Rotoscope Button on the VTR Panel To set up a source device e On the VTR Panel press the corner button of the Source Button The Source Set up Popup appears 2 Press of the source devices 1 VTR 2 etc to enable it The button you press is highlighted e 3 Choose Off Canvas Temp or Mask on the Source Selection Button Will default to Canvas if only one device is set up Revision A 4 441 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 Enter the source timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the source sequence Press OK The popup disappears Grabbing or rotoscoping will now use the indicated device s as source To set up a source hard disk path 1 the VTR Panel press the corner button of the Source Button The Source Set up Popup appears Press on one of the Disk Buttons Disk 1 Disk 2 etc not the windows to set it up as asource The Disk Button you press becomes highlighted Press on the window in the highlighted Disk Button The File Popup appears Type in a filename to begin the source path There must be a number in the filename Usually it would be the starting number 0 or 1 Enter the source timecode in the timecode window
39. of the file format buttons e Press the OK Button The Save File Popup dis appears e Press the Save File As button The file saving menu appears Revision A 4 169 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Type a filename for the file to be saved under followed by the Enter key Liberty saves the Canvas picture as usual but converts it into the desired format and gives it an appropriate suffix NOTE Some formats don t support alpha transparency which means that transparent areas of the Canvas are saved as opaque pixels of the current background color Other formats can be saved either with or without alpha depending on settings in their set up menu in the Save File As Popup Also in the Save File As Popup buttons for formats which currently have saving of alpha enabled have a small alpha symbol drawn next to the format name This helps provide an additional cue as to which formats are being saved with alpha Save File As Popup The Save As File Popup contains buttons for all of the available non Liberty file formats and also con tains buttons to enable disable compression enable disable shrinkwrap enable disable rescaling to set up file format specific parameters and to specify parameters to transfer the file to a remote host via FTP Paint Environment 4 170 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual AU 288 BMP D1B Cineon Shrinkurap ImageStor c INFINIT Setup Prisms 5 Scitex
40. sure the Image Source is Video if you want to see the video in sure the video standard Video but ton is set properly in the Install Menu sure the Image Source is Memory if you want to see what is in frame memory and that the monitor is set to the line that is com ing from the Vidjet not the video board If you are losing frames from memory or you can t print or grab sure memory is not full Free Frames z 0 Even if you have the image source set to Video if you press the Print 1 key and there are no free frames you can not print This is because the Vidjet will do a temporary grab for you it won t be reflected in the Menu until the image data has been sent to the printer Make sure you have not changed Video stan dards and have the Line field set to Auto When the video input signal changes mem ory will be cleared Make sure you have not changes resolution or the Color In toggle button unless you don t need what is in memory since doing so will clear frame memory Paint Environment 4 470 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 25 Warnings If the buttons on the Vidjet have been manually adjusted while you are running the Vidjet software the Menu you are seeing may not reflect the actual state of the print manager Subsequent commands may not execute properly You should restart the paint environment so the Menu on screen will
41. 2 This can be a cel or filmstrip actor type e 10 Click on the File window and select the filename of the image s to be tracked and composited over the base actor e l Click on the Edit Path button to bring up the Curve Popup e 2 Click on the Point List button and select the Point List filename as saved in Step 5 above 13 You can now preview the tracked animation or render it to a storyboard disk VTR or DDR Motion Tracking Procedure Corners Mode The procedure for Motion Tracking Corner Mode consists of two main procedures building the corner list very similar to building a point list and com positing the tracked element s Animation Environment 5 216 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Build Corner List Paint Environment 1 10 11 Press the Motion Tracking Button on the Image Tools 2 panel to activate the Motion Tracking Popup Click in the File window and select first filmstrip file to be used to select reference point The selected image is recalled to the Canvas In the Start window enter number of base or beginning cel of filmstrip sequence Click in the End window enter number of last cel of filmstrip sequence plus 1 Click in the Output window to select a directory and type a filename that will be the recorded corner list Click on the Point Corner button and make sure it is set to Corner Click on the desired component buttons luminance R G B
42. A Speed Curve can only redistribute the speed between two keyframes it cannot actually change the speed of the actor The Duration of the Actor remains the same and it still must travel through its path and keyframeable attributes in the given time A Speed Curve can be set to control Path spatial position e Alpha Rotation Revision A 5 97 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Reference Point center of rotation Scale Slant Warp Warp Corner Points Effects Mask and Write on Actor keyframe sliders You choose what attribute the Speed Curve controls by pressing on one of the colored buttons along the bottom of the Keyframe Timeline To choose one of the Speed Curve Buttons e Press on the desired Speed Curve Button It becomes highlighted The default shape of the Speed Curve is a flat line This default gives a constant speed with no accelera tion By pressing and dragging the Speed Nails the little red points at either end of the Speed Curve you can alter acceleration between the keyframes A Speed Nail is automatically added for every key frame If you add more Speed Nails to the Speed Curve you can press and drag them to create ever more complex acceleration and speed variables A downward slope from left to right applies a decel eration An upward slope from left to right applies an acceleration Animation Environment 5 98 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual
43. Back v Canvas OK path full brstemps core artstar editmacro rescale renderpop dsksetupop pstmskmode pntgrabmode fieldmode vtrerabmode v diffpop vtrsource B diffmode Figure 4 71 File Popup with Path Activated Use the Path Button to access other paths besides Liberty s standard Host Disk Dir File path To change into Path press the button marked path on the File Popup The File Popup changes to Path mode To switch back to the standard path Host Disk Dir File just press the Path Button again to turn it off When you switch from the standard path to Path the standard path you are in changes to Path notation for example usr people aurora image local hd0 demos pic1 If no host was selected is displayed When you turn off Path the source image direc tory is displayed To Use Path When the Path first comes up if you press on a directory name in the list of directories the directory is added to the current path Each time a new direc tory list is displayed you press on a directory to add Paint Environment 4 214 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual it to the path until you come to a filename list the end of the directory path where you can press on a filename The file is then recalled or saved In Path any time you press on a filename the file is immediately recalled or saved You can use the keyboard to enter directory names and filenames instead of pressing directly o
44. Line Morph Erase Button 4 477 4 25 3 Triangle Morph eee 4 477 Triangle Morph Add Points 4 478 Triangle Morph Delete Points Button 4 479 Triangle Morph Move Points Button 4 479 Triangle Morph Add Keyframe Bultton 4 479 Triangle Morph Copy Keyframe Button 4 480 Triangle Morph Delete Keyframe Bultton 4 481 Triangle Morph Reset 4 481 Triangle Morph Lock 4 482 Triangle Morph Recall and Save buttons 4 482 Triangle Morph Cancel Button 4 482 Revision A xvii Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation 4 26 Triangle Morph OK 4 483 Importing Jaleo 4 483 5 Animation Environment 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 2 5 3 Animation Environment Introduction 5 1 Number Windows the Animation Environment 5 2 Creating Curve Paths and Keyframes 5 5 ANIMATION TIMELINE 5 5 Layer Number Buttons sese 5 6 Scroll Up Button
45. Press to make a mask on the Canvas based on the difference between the picture in the Canvas and the picture in the Temp Buffer Differences create a mask on the Canvas corresponding to the difference The difference can be based on various channels Revision A 4 393 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation i e on luminance differences on red differences etc The channel displayed in the window in the Difference Button is the active channel The more different the pixels the higher the mask values Difference Mask Modes alpha Figure 4 130 Difference Mask Modes The window in Difference displays the current mode Press directly on the mode label to call up a popup displaying all the mode buttons The mode buttons also appear on the Difference Popup the corner button of Difference You can base a Differ ence Mask on Luminance Red Green Blue Hue Saturation Value or Alpha transparency Press on the desired mode button in the popup and press the OK Button You can cycle through the modes by pressing on either end of the window in the Differ ence Mask Window Paint Environment 4 394 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Difference Mask Popup Press the corner button of the Difference Mask But ton to call up the Difference Mask Popup Figure 4 131 which contains the Diagram Curve the Differ ence Ramp and Clamp functions and related fea tures The Diagram Curve re maps the curre
46. Revision A 4 109 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Emboss Distort 3D Perspective The small window inside the Paste Button shows the current paste mode Pressing on the sides of the win dow cycles through the paste modes see Paste Modes Popup on page 4 112 Pressing directly on the center of the mode name brings up a list of all the paste modes Press on one of the mode buttons to choose that mode To paste an element into the Canvas e Press the Paste Button There must be image in the selected Temp Buffer e Move the cursor onto the Canvas A preview of the image to be pasted appears on the Canvas You control its position by moving the pen or mouse The preview of the element to be pasted depends on the current preview setting in the Paste Popup e Press down when the previewed image is where you want it The image is pasted perma nently into the Canvas at full resolution using the current paste mode Normal Shadow Emboss etc The setting of the Transparency Slider in the Palette Panel determines the transparency of the pasted ele ment In the Mask Tools Panel Paste Mask pastes the alpha of the contents of the Temp Buffer into the Mask Paint Environment 4 110 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Paste Popups There are two ways to use the Paste functions One is just to press in the main part of the Paste Button and paste the image manually into the Canvas as d
47. Revision A 4 193 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation via the Setup button in the Save As popup This menu also allows the user to save TIFF files with inverted Y Note that 8 bit RGB and RGBA files are the most commonly used and widely supported formats NOTE You may need a separate license for the TIFF LZW format to work in Liberty All other TIFF formats do not require special licenses If you need to use the TIFF LZW format contact your Chyron Liberty sales representative or customer ser vice representative TIFF Setup Menu Save Matte Inhibit Matte Save greyscale 8 Bit TIFF gt d b Save color map Save RGB Flip Y Save CMYK Figure 4 66 TIFF Setup Menu Illustration Save Greyscale When activated images are saved as 1 4 8 or 16 bit greyscale 16 bit is film resolution Save Color map When activated images are saved as 4 or 8 bit color mapped The uniform optimal dither and noise buttons are used in color space reduction for saving greyscale and color mapped files These determine how the Paint Environment 4 194 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 32 bit image being saved is converted to an image with reduced color resolution To assist in this pro cess the TIFF set up menu has a Preview button When in color mapped or gray scale mode set the number of bits and the uniform optimal dither and noise buttons as desired The Preview button then previews
48. To move the angle manually ensure that the Angle of Shadow button is highlighted then press on the canvas near the shadow wireframe box and drag it The Angle Button changes to reflect the changes you re making manually on screen The offset dis tance of the shadow from the original image also changes when you drag the shadow wireframe box if the Offset button is highlighted Revision A 4 119 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation You can also press on the Angle Button and drag the dot around the outside of the clock The angle of the wireframe box on the Canvas is updated to reflect the changes you re making on the Angle But ton The distance does not change The window at the bottom of the Angle Button shows the angle in degrees You can change this value by pressing directly on the window and typing in a new number followed by the Enter key The window at the top nght of the Angle Button shows the offset distance in pixels You can change this value by pressing directly on the offset window and typing in a new number followed by the Enter key Source Color for the Drop Shadow At the top of the Angle Button is a Color Source Button controlling the source of the color for the drop shadow The label of this button cycles among three modes Palette Image and Light In Palette Mode the drop shadow is pasted in the current color Normally you would choose black in the Color Palette In Ima
49. You shouldn t have to alter the settings in the Comm Button in fact this button s popup is only active if a serial control type is selected If necessary use this function to set the communications parameters for the control protocol Note that the AMT 7422 DDR has its own Comm popup Contact Chyron Customer Service for assistance Press the Comm button to call up the Comm popup with the following functions baud If Control is serial selects the baud rate Most com mon is 9600 except for SMPTE devices which are always 38400 baud data If Control is serial selects the number of data bits either 7 or 8 Almost every VTR uses 8 parity If Control is serial selects the parity polarity None is most common except for SMPTE devices which expect even stop If control is serial 1 or 2 stop bits Most common is 1 some recorders require 2 The Comm OK Button Press to confirm changes to the other buttons on the Comm Popup The Comm Popup disappears Revision A 3 45 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation V Adj Button Use the Video Adjust button when you are not satis fied with the video signal coming out of the video board It allows you to adjust the configuration of the specific video board installed on your platform Press the Video Button to start the setup application for your installed video board The corresponding menus will appear on top of the Liberty menus If yo
50. path full i Select Cancel logos htgradr btgradT bflyr bnaut tnautl fishl Figure 4 37 Full Screen File Manager w Temp Loader Revision A Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Saving Layers in the Layers File Format You can save all layers as part of a single disk file When you recall the file each individual layer is recalled into its corresponding position in the stack along with all its attributes in their saved state The Layers File Format saves the images in all active layers as well as their individual layer settings including position alpha etc in one file on disk The Canvas is saved in the file as well Thus you can save the composition you are working on and come back to it later without finalizing the settings of the layers When the Layers File is recalled the Canvas and all layers and settings are restored from the disk Also when layers are recalled from disk the levels into which they are loaded are turned on even if they were off prior to the recall Note that if there are cur rently fewer RAM Temps than there are layers in the recalled file only the layers loading into current RAM Temps are recalled This only happens if you ve reduced the number of RAM Temps since saving the Layers File The Layers Mode Button is a cyan colored button in the File Mode Popup You call up the File Mode Popup by pressing on the colored File Mode Button pink Canvas by default
51. saye swap rec Add Del SubPixel in out path alpha rotate ref pos scale slant under warp effects Figure 5 21 Keyframe Timeline Revision A 5 99 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Speed Nails Speed Nails are the red control points on the Speed Curve You can add as many Speed Nails as you like to the Speed Curve You can press and drag the Speed Nails up and down changing the slant of the top of the Speed Curve thereby changing the rela tive acceleration speed of the actor on its curve path Boundary Speed Nails There is a separate speed curve segment for each neighboring pair of keyframes Each such speed curve segment by default has two speed nails called Boundary Speed Nails located at the same timeline positions as the keyframes themselves The Bound ary Speed Nails cannot be deleted or moved away from the ends of the corresponding speed curve seg ment Boundary Speed Nails can be moved verti cally only The two Boundary Speed Nails define the beginning and end speed of the Speed Curve segments path or attributes Moving the Speed Nails To move a Speed Nail thus changing the speed acceleration of the actor at that point press on the Speed Nail you want to move and holding the pen down drag the nail to its desired position The Speed Curve changes accordingly Speed Nail Tangents Each Speed Nail has two tangents represented by tiny green dots on either side of the S
52. tion Environment using elements created in Paint or imported from another source such as a VTR ora 3D software package The Animation Environment has four main parts Animation Playback Menu The Animation Playback Menu controls playback recording of an animation Animation Timeline The Animation Timeline con tains the actors or basic elements of the animation Actors are represented on the Timeline by color coded horizontal bars There are several different types of actors each with a different function or effect An actor s type is indicated by the color of the bar that represents it Actor Edit Menu The Actor Edit Menu appears at the left of the Timeline and allows you to create position and time individual actors in the Timeline Actor Popup The Actor Popup appears at the right of the Timeline and contains the data and special ized functions of the actor selected on the Timeline Revision A 5 1 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation When you select each type of actor its Actor Popup appears at the right For the most part the menus of the Animation Environment remain constant How ever the Actor Popup displays different popup menus for each type of animation Actor The Animation Environment contains some familiar functions from the Paint Environment the Prompt Window Magnify Buttons Undo Erase Erase All Grid Direction buttons and the Prefix Buttons 5 1 1 Number Windows in the An
53. Copy Kf To copy a keyframe to a new place on the Timeline move the marker to the keyframe you want to copy press the Copy Kf Button and then click on the Timeline at the desired location of the copied key frame This is useful when you have created an in between keyframe and want to put it somewhere else on the Timeline About Shape Points The Link Keyframe Button Link Kf The Link Keyframe Button allows you to control how a shape s points change between keyframes For example when creating a keyframe between two shapes with the same number of points Liberty makes its best guess as to how the points should cor respond in the new keyframe The Link Keyframe Button allows you to adjust which points in the first shape correspond to which points in the second shape Internally each shape s points have a certain order and each shape has a start point When you choose a keyframe using the slider or the lt gt Buttons on the Inbetween Timeline the start point is red The rest of the points in the shape are ordered in either a clockwise or counter clockwise direction The sec ond point one point either clockwise or counter clockwise from the start point is yellow which helps you visualize how the points are ordered When a shape in betweens to another shape the points are interpolated based on their order The start point of the first shape in betweens to the start point of the second shape while the se
54. FIP operation from the hard drive As in normal operation you can recall to Temp Mask and Layers by changing recall modes with the colored File Mode Button Remote Navigation Once you are browsing a remote directory in the File Manager you can navigate to different directories by selecting them in the directory listing at the top of the popup in the same way as you normally would when browsing images on your hard drive When using FTP the File Manager is always in Path Mode The current directory is displayed in the Path Window and you can enter directory or file names in the highlighted File Window Also you can use the Back Button to go to the parent directory the next level up in the directory hierarchy If Browse Mode is Off Browse Mode may be off when you are logged into a remote directory The Browse Button has a corner button that calls up a popup that allows you to set what file data should be displayed when Browse Mode is off Press one of the popup s buttons to enable a mode If the List Size and Date mode is on sizes and dates of the files are displayed if possible some types of remote systems don t provide such informa tion If the List Dimensions mode is on the dimensions are not shown since such information can t be provided from remote systems If the Dis Revision A 4 147 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation play File Format mode is on the format for each file is
55. KC zeros all 10 constants KS pressing KS followed by a digit i 0 9 stores the number from the display window as constant number i Pressing KS followed by an operation fol lowed by a digit 1 0 9 takes constant number i and the current number from the display window per forms the specified operation and replace constant number i with the result KR pressing KR followed by a digit i 0 9 recalls constant number i Paint Environment 4 70 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual log takes the logarithm base 10 of the number In takes the natural logarithm base e of the num ber 360 multiplies the number by 360 rand generates a random number between and 2 3 I sqr takes the square root of the number x2 squares the number I x inverts the number int truncates the fraction of a decimal number The calculator has numeric entry keys as well so you can use the keyboard When the calculator is up use the following keys for 0 9 enters the corresponding digit enters a decimal point m recall number from memory M store number in memory same as button on calculator menu enable disable timecode mode clear C clear memory enter left paren enter right paren same as on calculator enter same as on calculator space same as on calculator Revision A 4 71 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation
56. Mask Mode 5 165 Mask Mode Popups 5 163 Mask Panel Menu 4 363 Index 16 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mask Tint Button 5 167 Mask2 Panel 4 389 masks 1 3 4 363 adjusting 4 372 blurring 4 372 fast 3 29 painting into 4 241 recalling into 4 159 saving and recalling 4 364 unmasking 4 363 masks growing 4 373 masks shrinking 4 373 Match Mask Button 4 386 matchsticks 5 69 5 70 5 97 math 4 67 measuring distances on the Canvas 4 39 menu buttons activating 1 3 Menu Color Configuration Palette default colors 3 6 Menu Color Scheme Palette Elevator 3 5 Menu Configuration Palette elevator 3 5 Read Button 3 7 Reset Button 3 6 Set Button 3 7 Menu Configuration Panel Menu 3 28 Alt Style Mode 3 32 Bevel Mode 3 31 menu parameters 3 6 menus 1 3 Revision A Index 17 CHYRON Corporation Minus Button 4 207 Mirror Buttons 4 134 mixing colors 4 49 Morph Actor 5 47 5 194 Line Morph 5 144 5 194 step by step 5 200 testing 5 149 Morph Actor Popup 5 137 Triangle Morph 5 139 5 194 step by step 5 196 morphing 4 467 animations 5 194 Line Morph 4 467 4 469 step by step 4 469 testing 4 476 Triangle Morph 4 468 4 477 step by step 4 477 Mosaic Button 4 338 Motion Tracking 5 205 mouse using Liberty with a 1 3 Move Actor Button 5 53 Move Button 4 108 Move Keyframe Button 5 72 moving files 4 225 multiple files 4 226 Multiple Color Mode 4 50 Multiple Colors Mode 4 35 N nest
57. Paste Distort allows extra precise positioning of ele ments being distorted and pasted An image being pasted does not have to be deposited pixel for pixel on the image below it but with a slight offset or overlap of the edges of the pixels it s being pasted on Certain filter options Adaptive allow user def inition of how fine a grid to use to position the ele ment You can also use this feature if you have Liberty s Animation Option for very slow moving elements NOTE For sub pixel positioning to occur the keyframe must have either a non zero rotation slant or three position set or scale value s other than one set if only positional movement is desired set the X and Y scale to 0 99 to invoke sub pixel positioning In addition use either the bilinear or adaptive filter to achieve subpixel positioning See About Filters on page 4 137 for more information Perspective Transform and Warp Corners The Distort Paste Popup has two distinct modes that you interact with differently Perspective Transform allows you to set up a full three dimensional world in which to manipulate images Warp Corners allows you to perform arbitrary perspective mapping Paint Environment 4 130 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual between the original image and a user definable quadrilateral In the middle of the left panel of the Distort Popup is a button labeled either Transform or Warp Corners Press this button to toggle ba
58. Press on one of the 8 levels to choose it and display its 10 brushes The User Brush OK Button When you press the OK Button to confirm your choice of User Brush the underlined User Brush is installed into the Current Brush Display and the User Brush Popup disappears The User Brush Hard edge Button Hard Clamps all transparency in the current user brush to full opacity 255 The result is a hard edged aliased brush Like Normalize this affects only the display of the brush in the Current Brush Dis play not the original user brush in the popup The User Brush Normalize Button Norm Normalizes the current brush If the brush does not contain all alphas transparency levels from 0 to 255 the range is stretched before it is displayed in Revision A 4 31 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation the Current Brush Display Normalize affects only the display of the brush in the Current Brush Dis play not the original user brush in the popup The User Brush Save Button Save Saves the current elevator level of brushes to disk Saves all ten brushes The User Brush Recall Button Recall Recalls a previously saved set of ten brushes into the current elevator level Replaces all ten brushes in the current level The User Brush Define Button Def Press the Define Button when you have masked the on Canvas area you want to turn into a User defined brush See page 4 30 for a step by step descri
59. The Apply Popup has three basic options Apply which gives a straight line gradation of color to the masked area Circular Apply which gives a concentric gradation of color to the masked area and Radial Apply which gives a radial sweeping gradation of color to the masked area Revision A 4 309 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The OK button in the apply popup applies a grada tion to the canvas based on the settings in the popup It also brings down the popup The Cancel button brings down the popup without applying a gradation Once the user has adjusted settings in the Apply Popup the main Apply Color button in the Image Tools 1 Panel applies a gradation to the canvas based on the settings in the popup but without bringing up the popup Linear Apply Button on the Apply Popup When the Linear Apply Button is highlighted you are in Linear Apply Mode In this mode which is the default multiple colors chosen on the palette are applied to the masked area in a linear gradation The direction of the gradation depends on the Direction Button see page 4 59 The gradation always starts with the upper left most color selected in the palette and proceeds to the lower right most color selected in the palette Circular Apply Button When the Circular Apply Button is highlighted you are in Circular Apply Mode In this mode multiple colors chosen on the palette are applied to the masked area in
60. The Red Green and Blue Revision A 4 315 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Buttons map only onto R G and B respectively The Hue Saturation and Value Buttons map onto H S and V Map Popup Map Mask values to Palette Colors Color Hue obey Mask 4 cance Red Saturation Green Value preview Blue active Figure 4 99 Map Popup Press the corner button of the Map Button to call up the Map Popup The Map Popup has buttons for the same modes as the Map Modes Popup but also has the Obey Mask Button and preview tools Obey Mask When Obey Mask is on Map does nothing for pixels where the mask is zero For example if you do a gradated rectangle mask in the middle of the Canvas and choose red and green in the Palette Map will make the gradated mask a color gradation from red to green If Obey Mask is off areas where the mask is zero the area outside the rectangle for example will become red If Obey Mask is on nothing happens to these areas since zero values are not mapped Paint Environment 4 316 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the map When the Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the map on the masked area 4 15 8 Reveal Button Color Hue Luminance Figu
61. Use the Edit Path Button to create a curve path for the file to follow see page 5 60 Use the Edit Key frame Button to create and edit the actor s key frames Use the Preview page 5 223 or Storyboard functions to preview the animation you ve created Loops 1 0 00 00 00 End 0 00 01 00 Insert Delete Swing Once Edit Path Figure 5 26 Cycle Actor Popup Filmstrip Actor Popup The Filmstrip actor is similar to the Multiple Cel Actor except that it must use a sequence of num bered files The Filmstrip Actor can also grab its images from a recording device such as a DDR or VTR instead of from the hard disk The Filmstrip Actor only goes forward through its files and there is no Filmstrip Swing Button Animation Environment 5 120 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Name The Filmstrip Actor can contain a curve path for the series of images to follow during the animation as well as keyframes for DVE type rotation in x y and z These keyframes also control attributes such as Transparency Scale Slant Mirror and Under Begin HDisk Sre VTR lar VIR Camera Figure 5 27 Filmstrip Actor Popup To create a Filmstrip actor Add a Filmstrip actor to the Timeline The new actor is selected in the Timeline See adding actors page 5 104 Press the File Button The File Popup appears Select a picture file from the File Popup by pressing on or typing its filename The file name appears in the Fil
62. Value Menu Field Menu Field Dur 90 Holdin 0 Loops 1 Holdout 0 In 420 Skipin 30 Out 510 SkipOut 61 In order to render the middle section of the timeline to the beginning of the DDR the SkipIn Time must be subtracted from the In time If the In time is left at 450 then the DDR will leave 30 frames of old mate rial or black and start recording at frame 480 To have a 15 frame freeze of the last frame in the animation Animation Environment 5 42 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Render Control Render Control Value Value Menu Field Menu Field Dur 90 Holdin 0 Loops 1 Holdout 15 In 450 Skipin 0 Out 555 SkipOut 0 Preview Animation Button In Brief Allows you to preview the animation in Wireframe Mode Outline Mode and Render Mode Animation Storyboard Button In Brief Allows you to render the animation as a preview movie to be played back through Liberty Animation Environment Record Animation Button In Brief Allows you to render the animation to a recording device VTR DDR hard disk etc Run Animation Button In Brief Press to start rendering the animation in Preview Storyboard or Record Mode The Run corner button calls up the Run Popup to choose among various rendering options Revision A 5 43 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 4 5 4 1 For more information on the Preview Storyboar
63. What to 1151 when browse off List size KB and date List dimensions List image file format Imagestor data Figure 4 74 Browse Off Popup Press the corner button of the Browse Button to dis play the Browse Off Popup which allows you to choose what file data display when Browse Mode is off List Size and Date in Kbytes If the List Size and Date mode is on sizes and dates of the files are displayed if possible when accessing a remote system via FTP the size and date information may or may not be displayed depend ing on the type of remote system List Dimensions If in List Dimensions mode the dimensions are shown when accessing a remote system via FTP the file dimensions are not normally displayed Paint Environment 4 228 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual List Image File Format If in List Image File Format mode the file format for each file is displayed when accessing a remote system via FTP the file format is not normally listed it will be listed for Imagestor files with thumbnail files in the same directory or with entries in the Imagestor database ImageStor Data Once ImageStor Data mode is enabled when Browse is off a row of text appears for the file name followed by the five database fields For non ImageStor files these fields are blank For Imag eStor files the fields contain the database informa tion entered when the file was saved
64. Y or Z The image always Paint Environment 4 132 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual rotates around the axis position as opposed to the center of the image For example the axis can be placed at the corner of the image so that rotation occurs around that point Refer to the previous sec tions for information on how to position the axis Slant Button Press on the word Slant to enable Slant Mode Press and drag on the wireframe s handles to slant the image in X or y Scale Button Press on the word Scale to enable Scale Mode Press and drag on the wireframe s handles to scale the image in X and or Y Dragging on a corner han dle scales the image in both X and Y Dragging on a handle in the center of a side scales the image only in X or Y The scale of the image can be represented as a ratio 1 0 100 or as a size in pixels Tap on the small arrow to the right of the word Scale to toggle back and forth between the two modes Scale Lock Button The Lock Button just above the Mirror Buttons is the Scale Lock Button Press it to turn it on or off When on one edge of the image is held stationary while you drag the opposite edge and scale the image If the image has already been rotated you may have to unlock global positioning the Axis Lock Button to truly hold an edge in three dimen sional space Revision A 4 133 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Mirror Buttons
65. ally plays back the current Storyboard file see below When thus using the Preview handle in Sto ryboard Mode be sure that the animation on the Timeline matches the animation in the current Sto Revision A 5 229 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation ryboard elevator In Storyboard Mode the animation in the current Storyboard Elevator plays not the ani mation currently on the timeline Animation Environment 5 230 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Animation Storyboard Button Record Contro Dverurite Insert Append Start 8 Erase Block Erase One Erase A Record Rate Requested 15 88 Resolution 242 Filter Normal Coarse Path jora imaye local hue hayty test my File Data Browse ID ME la z Figure 5 58 Record Popup The Animation Storyboard functions allow you to record and play back rendered previews of the cur rent animation using the SGI Movie extension Revision A 5 231 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation and the Quicktime Movie extension mov formats Four different resolution settings are avail able for the Storyboard preview as well as variable playback speed The SGI Movie files are readable by SGI media collaborations such as Moviemaker Movieplayer and ShowCase To render a Storyboard preview of an anima tion e Create an animation in the Timeline or recall one from the disk e Set the duration of the animatio
66. and field 1 through field 4 cause the files to be sorted based on the corresponding ImageStor database field Note that non ImageStor files are grouped together and sorted by name when one of these sort modes is active Other Sort Criteria Filmstrip Lists under one Browse image all files which have identical names except for a number 1 pic2 pic3 pic4 Selecting that Browse image selects all the files of the filmstrip Above the Browse image are six filmstrip func tions Head H displays the first Browse picture i e picl Tail T displays the last Browse picture the arrows play the filmstrip forwards and backwards smoothly or frame by frame Note that Revision A 4 233 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Raw YUV files always sort as a film strip since they are each one large file playable by the filmstrip mode By Type Group files by type Canvas Select etc before date name or size Reverse Reverse the current sort order Hide Files Causes files beginning with dot to not be displayed Filter by ImageStor Field Allows you to filter the current directory listing based on the ImageStor database fields of its files by the use of the five text entry windows one for each database field in which you can enter text and wildcards When a window is blank filtering is not done based on the corresponding database field When a win dow contains text only the
67. bring up a pop up selecting one of these modes Paint Environment 4 386 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Match Mask Popup Preview b active 10 M Les 10 mask only 1 i Delta Smoath Figure 4 125 Match Mask Popup Press the corner button of Match to call up the Match Mask Popup The popup contains two slid ers the Delta Slider and the Smoothness Slider The Delta Slider sets a greed factor for the color mask If its setting is low then only the nearly exact instances of the current palette color are masked on the Canvas If it is set high then Canvas colors are masked that are similar to the current color The Smoothness Slider sets how hard edged or soft edged the mask is A high Smoothness setting results in a softer edged mask To adjust the Delta factor and make a Match Mask 1 Choose a color in the palette or use Pick Color 2 Press the corner button of the Match Button The popup appears Revision A 4 387 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 13 Adjust the Delta Slider The higher the Delta value the more is masked 4 Adjust the Smoothness Slider The higher the Smoothness Slider the smoother the edge of the masked area The Smoothness value is constrained to be no higher than the Delta value 5 Press the Preview Button to preview the effect of Match Mask before it becomes permanent 6 Press the OK Button The
68. color transpar ency and paint mode For a detailed description of the Shape Popup functions see page 4 262 Paint Environment 4 242 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Paint Gap Popup Figure 4 78 Paint Gap Popup Use this popup to adjust the gap between pen downs as you paint so that you can paint for instance with dotted lines Press the corner button of Paint to call up the Paint Gap Popup When you drag your pen across the tablet the tablet cannot get new coordinates constantly there is a gap between tablet coordinates which increases with the speed of the moving pen By default Liberty fills in the gaps while you paint The Paint Gap Popup controls how or whether the spaces between tablet coordi nates are filled while painting The Gap Slider This slider on the Paint Gap Popup controls the paint gap expressed in percentage of the diameter of the brush Works in either Max or Exact Mode see below The scale is from 1 to 300 At 100 the brushes are placed edge to edge At settings of more than 100 there is a gap between brushes At less than 100 the brushes overlap The Gap Slider is also on the Line Gap and Curve Gap Popups Revision A 4 243 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To change the Paint Gap e Press the corner button of the Paint Button The Paint Gap Popup appears e Press and drag the Gap Slider on the Paint Gap Popup e Press the OK Button Proceed
69. directly above the file path elevator in the Recall and Save Popups You can also toggle through the file modes by pressing on the left or right edges of the File Mode Button There are similar controls in the Full Screen File Manager Menu as well Once you ve selected the Layers mode as described above using the Save Button saves the Canvas and any active layers to a Layers File Using the Recall File Button while in Layers Mode displays any Lay ers Files in the directory while you can browse Lay Revision A 4 103 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation ers Files in the Full Screen File Manager Menu Pressing on a Layers File in the Recall Popup or Full Screen File Manager Menu recalls the Canvas and layers from the disk Save Inactive Layers Button By default only active layers in RAM are saved in a Layers File As an option you can save the inactive layers in addition to those turned on in a Layers File You control this with the Save Inactive Layers Button in the Save Pop up accessed through the comer button of Save in the Transfer Panel Press on this button to turn it on it becomes highlighted As long as it is on inactive layers will be saved when you save a Layers File Canvas Buffer Palette Buffers Figure 4 38 The Canvas Buffer The Canvas Buffer is the bottom buffer in the Buff ers Panel It allows quick panning on the Canvas image if the Canvas is magnified The Canvas Buffer d
70. e Press the Stretch Actor Button Press on the Layer Number Button of the layer in which you want to stretch all actors to the maximum available space The first actor in the layer changes its begin time to 0 The other actors maintain their original begin times and stretch their end points to fill all available space in the layer Stretching with the Begin End Windows In the Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline there are two number windows which display the begin and end frames of the actor Press on these number windows to type in new begin or end times Chang ing the begin time moves the actor without changing its length changing the end time changes the actor s length without moving it in the layer Show Troupe Button This button is used with Troupe and Reference Actors Pressing the Show Troupe Button and then pressing a Troupe or Reference Actor either expands or compresses the actor An expanded actor shows all the actors contained in it An compressed actor hides all its actors and displays only on one layer Compress Button Deletes all empty layers in the Timeline Animation Environment 5 56 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 4 3 Actor Popups Name Loops Begin Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 12 Basic Actor Popup no actor selected Each type of animation actor has its own popup menu with functions specific to that type of actor When you
71. example 4 17 3 15 is 4 hours 17 minutes 3 sec onds and 15 frames Entering a new in time automatically changes the out time while maintaining the current duration Revision A 5 39 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Out Button Press to set the out time on the record device This is the end time for the animation to be recorded You don t have to set the out time if you ve set the in time Liberty automatically sets the out time by adding the duration to the in time Entering a new out time changes the duration while maintaining the current in time Holdin Button Holdin 0 00 00 00 Holdout 0 00 00 00 Skipin 0 00 15 29 Skipout 0 00 00 00 Press to set how long to hold the first frame of the animation Type the number of frames or the time code duration of the desired hold at the beginning of the animation For VLAN connections the hold is recorded with a single command to the recording device recording in a single real time pass Holdout Button Press to set the hold on the last frame of the anima tion Type the number of frames or the timecode duration of the desired hold at the end of the anima tion For VLAN connections the hold is recorded with a single command to the recording device recording in a single real time pass Animation Environment 5 40 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Skipin Button Press to set the frame number of the animation at
72. i OK Final Alpha Y 2 Cancel 6380 58 132 50 4 88 Filter TE PR DEI Gr TET Rotation Bilinear x 7 name of settings Transform 4 648 6 08 Adjust Slant kaani Center Inplace 1 000 F Eye Pen Position Y Distort Mirror amp 638 58 132 50 A Mirror Y Paste Modes Figure 5 17 Keyframe Distort Popup NOTE This section similar to the section on Paste Distort in the Paint Environ ment described on page 4 129 The Keyframe Distort Popup is the same as the Paste Distort Popup in the Paint Environment In addition to the standard paste functions the Key frame Distort Popup has tools for rotation in X Y and Z scaling in X and Y mirroring in X and Y and slanting in X and Y Revision A 5 85 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Sub Pixel Positioning Add Del Move OK save swap rec Del SubPixel in out Figure 5 18 Keyframe Edit Menu Keyframe Distort allows extra precise positioning of elements being distorted and pasted An image being pasted does not have to be deposited pixel for pixel on the image below it but with a slight offset or overlap of the edges of the pixels it s being pasted on Certain filter options Adaptive allow user def inition of how fine a grid to use to position the ele ment You can use this feature for animating very slow moving elements Sub pixel Button Press the Sub pixel Button in the Keyframe Edit
73. it to edit it Press the Edit Keyframe Button The Keyframe Edit Popup appears Press the first Keyframe Matchstick to edit it The Shapes 3 D Paste Popup appears Press the Edit Shape Button at the right of the Timeline The Shapes Actor Popup appears On the Canvas the default shape is a square Press the Rectangle Button and press and drag on the Canvas to create a rectangle Press the Replace Keyframe Button Replace Kf Press and drag the indicator on the Shapes Time line to see a wireframe preview of the animation between the first and last keyframes Press the necessary OK Buttons to get back to the main Timeline Revision A 5 185 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Be sure the Fill Button at the right of the Time line is highlighted e Render a Storyboard of the animation and play it back Shapes Actor Popup Press the Edit Shapes Button to bring up the Edit Shapes Popup The Shapes Actor Popup is identical to the Shapes Popup in the Paint Environment except that here the Shapes Inbetweening section at the top is always active and has a minimum of two keyframes Also the Inbetweening section s Add Kf Delete Kf and Copy Kf buttons are grayed out because when edit ing a Shapes Actor you add keyframes to the main animation Timeline in the normal way see page 5 70 For the basic procedure of working with the Shapes Popup see page 4 253 Initially each keyframe contains
74. reflect the actual state of the Vidjet Again buttons should not be manually pressed on the Vidjet If you are using a tablet through serial port 1 and a VTR or VLAN through serial port 2 the Vidjet will take over the port being used by the VTR and communication with the VTR will be lost In order to restore communication with the VTR after using the Vidjet you should de install the Vidjet in the configuration environment and then re enter Lib erty MORPH FEATURES Liberty provides two complementary morph pro grams Triangle Morph and Line Morph Line Morph is quite easy to use and gives the best results but takes more time to render than Triangle Morph In Line Morph you freely position and modify line segments in a gridless system to create distortions Line Morph yields extremely organic and smooth results and is usually well worth the extra rendering time Revision A 4 471 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 25 1 Triangle Morph is more complicated to use but ren ders more quickly In Triangle Morph you set and move control points creating a triangular grid to make distortions General Procedure for Line Morph amp Triangle Morph You start a morph by setting up the control points Triangle Morph or the line segments Line Morph that define the beginning or source image of the morph Then you move or modify the source points or lines to create a distortion for the final or target image of t
75. the Filmstrip Actor in Animation can be used to input frames from the file to do this put the Filmstrip Actor in Source VTR mode and assign the file as the disk path for Source VTR see page 5 120 for more details Paint Environment 4 454 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Note also that Chyron Motion Files do not currently have browse images nor are they browsable as film strips in the Full Screen File Manager RAW YUV Files for Disk Arrays This format is utilized for rendering animations or rotoscoping in Paint to a format that contains all the frames under a single file name a clip file This format is normally used to render or rotoscope to a Disk Array such as the Ciprico MegaDrive or EuroLogic Disk Array Note that when first saving toa RAW YUV clip file the disk path s frame numbers must always start with zero For example when first recording to a RAW YUV clip file in the Animation environment the frame number timecode must be zero or the record will fail This is because the software uses frame zero to trigger the start of aRAW YUV clip file Once you ve created RAW YUV clip file however you can record to different frames within it by altering the target disk path s frame number accordingly for example for a fix you could re render frames 10 20 over the original frames 1 20 To render to a RAW YUV clip the RAW YUV clip file type must be enabled on the Target VTR Se
76. tion actors with curve paths and keyframes The popup for creating curve paths is identical to the Curve Popup in the Paint Environment The Key frame Timeline appears over the main Animation Timeline and provides a timeline for each individual actor When you edit a keyframe the Keyframe Distort Popup appears which is almost identical to the Paste Distort popup in the Paint environment ANIMATION TIMELINE The Animation Timeline Figure 5 2 is the large horizontal window below the Canvas that displays the entire current animation with layers containing color coded bars representing animation actors What is an animation layer An animation layer on the Timeline is like a clear acetate cel in conventional cel animation On the Timeline the highest layer appears on top in the ani mation the lowest layer on the bottom You can use an unlimited number of layers both above and below the Zero layer One layer can hold any number of actors and any combination of actor types What is an animation actor Animation actors carry the information about what happens in an animation An actor is represented on the Timeline by a color coded bar Each actor can have its own curve path along which it moves during the animation Each actor can have a series of key Revision A 5 5 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation frames for DVE type perspective transformations size changes and many other modifications A sin gle
77. whether it is a VTR or DDR or a disk path you have only two ways to record 1 a full color picture Canvas Mode or 2 the matte of the picture Matte Mode Target Selection Buttons At the right of each of the twelve timecode windows on the Target Setup Popup is a Target Selection But ton which you can toggle between Off Canvas and Matte When the button is Off the device or disk Animation Environment 5 22 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual path is not active Either of the other two modes Canvas or Matte causes the device disk path to be an active target The number windows at the right of the Target Selection Buttons are disabled since they are used only for source devices For a normal Canvas render when only one device is highlighted you do not need to enable the Target Selection Button By default the highlighted cur rent device is used as the target and Canvas Mode is used When more than one device button has been configured you can set all the devices to Off and only the highlighted device is used as a target To set up a target device e l On the VTR Panel press the Target Button tar The button is highlighted 2 Press the Setup Button The Target Setup Popup appears 3 Press on one of the target devices VTR 1 VTR 2 etc to enable it The button you press is highlighted 4 Choose Off Canvas or Matte on the Target Selection Button Will default to Canvas if o
78. which you want recording to begin In this way you can skip the beginning of the animation or if you had to abort recording earlier you can pick up exactly where you left off Type the frame number to begin the recording For example a skipin of 4 skips frames 0 through 3 and renders at frame 4 Skipout Button Press to set the frame number of the animation at which you want the animation to end In this way you can record only the beginning of an animation or cut off the end For example an animation of 20 frames 0 through 19 with a skipout of 18 stops after rendering frame 17 For the following examples these parameters apply Animation Duration 90 frames DDR Record In Time 450 frames To record the complete animation Render Control Render Control Value Value Menu Field Menu Field Dur 90 Holdin 0 Loops 1 Holdout 0 450 SkipIn 0 Out 540 SkipOut 0 Revision A 5 41 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To continue rendering animation after stopping midway frame 50 Render Control Render Control Value Value Menu Field Menu Field Dur 90 Holdin 0 Loops 1 Holdout 0 In 450 Skipin 50 Out 540 SkipOut 0 To render a section of the animation timeline frame 30 to frame 60 but start recording on the DDR at the first new frame 450 on DDR Render Control Render Control Value
79. you can cycle through the four different Poly Func tions Draw Add Delete and Move Draw allows you to add points to the polygon New points are always added at the end of the polygon i e after the last point in the polygon Add allows you to add points to the polygon however it differs from Draw in that new points are added between the two Polygon points closest to the cursor Move allows you to move the existing points by pressing and dragging on them Delete allows you to delete points by pressing on or near them Revision A 4 265 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape The Polygon Button stays on as long as you are edit ing the polygon Creating another shape erases the existing polygon To create another shape without erasing the existing shape use a different elevator level Erase Button Deletes the current shape Center Button The Center Button positions the center of the current shape at the center of the Canvas Move Button To move the current shape Press the Move button e Press on the shape and drag it to its new posi tion Paint Environment 4 266 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Transform Shape Button Trans Press the Trans button to call up the Transform Popup which is used for rotating scaling slanting and mirroring the current shape All functions work similarly to th
80. 00 00 End 0 00 10 00 local hd standard black im Mask Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 23 Cel Actor Popup Multiple The Multiple Cel Actor is the second kind of Cel Actor It looks the same as a Single Cel Actor except that in the Cel Actor Popup at the right is a button labeled Multiple instead of Single as you might expect It uses a sequence of images instead of just one It can use filmstrips a sequence of numbered files i e picl pic2 pic3 or unnum bered files or a combination of the two You spec ify the duration that each file is displayed on the screen and whether the Actor holds on the last frame or cycles through the sequence again and again throughout the animation Inserting a Sequence into the Multiple Cel Actor There are two different ways to create a sequence of files for the Multiple Cel Actor to follow You can use the two different methods in tandem but these step by step procedures take you all the way through creating a sequence in each one Animation Environment 5 108 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE The Multiple Cel Actor accomplishes the same effects as combining the Cycle and the Filmstrip actors which are discussed next after this section In this discussion the term filmstrip refers to a sequence of files with the same filename continuous numbers like pic1 pic2 pic3 etc Using the Filmstrip File Menu
81. 1 88 Mirror Y Paste Modes Figure 5 15 Keyframe Distort Popup To edit a keyframe you must have the Keyframe Timeline called up Then you press on a keyframe matchstick and it becomes highlighted and calls up the Keyframe Distort Popup When you edit a key frame it appears as a wire frame on the Canvas as when using Paste Distort in the Paint Environment The Keyframe Distort Popup is called up which is almost identical to the Distort Popup in the Paint Environment see page 4 136 In addition a set of buttons appears at the right end of the Keyframe Timeline containing the Keyframe Attribute But tons Revision A 5 79 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation When you save an animation on disk the actors and the actors keyframes are saved as part of the anima tion To create and edit keyframes e Press on the keyframe matchstick you want to edit The matchstick becomes highlighted The bounding rectangle of the actor s image file appears on the Canvas The Keyframe Distort Popup appears similar to the Distort Popup in the Paint Environment e Use the functions on the Keyframe Distort Popup to modify the actor s bounding rectan gle on the Canvas e Press the OK button in the Keyframe Distort Popup to remove the popup and confirm the modifications you ve made Keyframe Attribute Buttons Preview next prev 255 texture alpha rotate warp scale under slant Figure 5 16 Keyframe Att
82. 10 User Login Accounts seeee 9 10 Add User B tton ene eee eee 3 11 Delete User Button sssssssssseee 3 12 Set User Password 3 12 Set Administration Password Button 3 13 Delete Button peer eee ecc 3 14 User Pop p euet iere 3 14 User Number Text Window eeeem 3 14 User Name Text 3 14 User Password Text 3 14 Next nits a eve e cere terere oa cdd 3 15 Prev B tton retrieve as 3 15 3 15 etd eles 3 15 CANVAS PANEL 5 ics isisssetisisiscsscsccosanssscesesnaeconcserscees 3 16 64 bit Color Range Display Liberty 64 Only 3 16 Messages Functions Liberty 64 3 21 Resolution Functions 2 21 Dots Per Inch Button DPI 3 25 Dropframe 3 25 Fraimie rate Buttons cct terea eec 3 27 MENU PANEL ecrire 3 27 Temp Number Button eee 3 28 Fast Temps 9 28 Mask Number Button
83. 240 Reverse Button Rev 5 240 Fast Reverse Button 5 240 Stop Button sienten tte reti 5 240 Frame Window sss eene 5 241 Start and End Windows see 5 241 Playback Frame 51 5 241 Playback Modes see 5 241 Speed Slider crece Dee 5 242 Rate Selection 5 243 Resolution Windows 5 244 Magnifying Storyboards 5 244 Displaying Full Screen Storyboards 5 244 Storyboard Elevator and Path Window 5 245 File Data Button 5 245 rre tes 5 245 File Control 5 246 Compression 5 247 Permanent Storyboard 5 251 Record Animation Button Final Render Mode 5 255 Background Render esee 5 255 Run Animation 5 256 Rut POpUp 2u a en ice re hatin een 5 256 Index Table of Contents xxiv Revision A 1 Introduction 1 1 1 1 1 INTRODUCTION The Liberty software package is designed to be used by artists with no s
84. 3 2 for correct device control types Revision A 3 39 Configuration Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Table 3 2 Device Control Type Address Listing Control Video Device Type Address Type Address VLAN Serial A 1 Serial B 2 Address AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab generic SMPTE Serial A 1 Serial B 2 Address AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab Abekas A60 Serial A 1 Serial B 2 Address Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname Abekas A65 A66 Serial A 1 Serial B 2 Address Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname Abekas Diskus Serial A 1 Serial B 2 Address Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname SCSI SCSI dev AMT 7422 Serial A 1 Serial B 2 Address AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab Accom RTD 4224 Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab Accom WSD Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname SCSI SCSI dev SCSI SCSI dev AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab RCI Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab SDL QuickFrame Diskcov Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname SCSI SCSI dev SCSI SCSI dev AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab MMS ProntoVideo Ethernet hostname Ethernet hostname SCSI SCSI dev SCSI SCSI dev AVION Centaur Galileo Framer VideoLab Revision A 3 41 Configuration Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Video Button
85. 8 bit RGB or RGBA 8 bit RGBA Targa tga 8 bit B amp W 4 or 8 bit RGB 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA Revision A 4 173 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Table 4 2 Available non Liberty File Formats Format Recall Save TDI 8 and 16 bit RGB 8 and 16 bit RGBA 16 bit only in Liberty 64 RGBA or alpha TIFF 1 4 8 10 12 16 bit RGB 1 4 8 and 16 bit grayscale 4 and 8 bit color RGBA CMYK color mapped 8 10 12 and 16 bit RGB RGBA mapped amp grayscale and 8 10 12 and 16 bit CMYK 10 12 and 16 bit formats only available in Liberty 64 Vertigo 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA YUV YUV no alpha YUV no alpha Where multiple save options exist like TIFF the popup has a Set up Button Pressing this button brings up a Set up Popup with different save options The following options exist Table 4 3 Save Options by Format Type Format Save Options from Set up Pop Up Cineon Matte alpha enable disable color correction sliders DPX Matte alpha enable disable choose 8 10 12 or 16 bits color correction sliders IMAGESTOR Specific type of iNFiNiT system and FTP transfer parameters iNFiNiT Specific type of iNFiNiT and FTP transfer parameters RLA Choose 8 bits or 16 bits Scitex Various options SGI Matte alpha enable disable 8 10 12 16 bits TDI Choose 8 bits or 16 bits TIFF Various options GIF Select number of bits dithering controls inte
86. 88 Adjust Reset 1 688 Eye Lock Mirror amp Y Distort 58 Mirror Paste Modes Figure 4 36 The 3D Paste Popup To go into 3D mode from the 2D Popup press on either end of the Paste Modes Button in the 2D Paste Popup The 2D Paste Popup is replaced by the Paste Distort Popup You can now use all of the distort and warp tools on the popup and the result is updated in the Canvas overlay of the individual layer Press the OK Button to exit the Paste Distort Popup When you exit Paste Distort in this way the layer remains in 3D mode the 2D Button now is labeled 3D and the layer is displayed on the Canvas in its Revision A 4 93 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation distorted form and can be dragged around in X and Y when re positioning a 3D layer its wire frame appears momentarily You can display the Paste Distort Popup at any time by pressing on the 3D Button To return from the Paste Distort Popup to the 2D Paste Popup do not press the OK Button but rather press the Paste Modes toggle button and the 2D Paste Popup reappears A Note on Hardware Platforms There is no limit to how many layers can be 3D On newer hardware platforms with texture mapping previews of the 3D layers are performed in highly interactive real time If there are too many 3D layers to fit in texture memory or if the user is running on an older system 3D layers will be displayed in soft ware In this case th
87. A 5 199 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 8 2 Line Morph Step by Step Add Del Move Color Tune Select add kf copy kf del kf Reset zin Lock Test Figure 5 53 Line Morph Popup To create a morph animation from one image to another e l Add a Morph Actor to the Timeline 2 Add a Cel Actor to the level below the Morph actor The Cel Actor should have the same begin and end numbers as the Morph actor this is not strictly necessary but simplifies the process 3 Press the File Button in the Cel Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline and assign an image file to the Cel Actor you just added This will be the image that starts the morph 4 Add a Cel actor to the level above the Morph Actor Again the Cel Actor should Animation Environment 5 200 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 10 11 12 have the same begin and end numbers as the Morph Actor Assign a disk image file to this Cel Actor as you did with the previous one This will be the image that ends the morph Press the lower Cel Actor to select it Press the Recall Cel Button in the Cel Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline The starting image for the morph is recalled to the Canvas so that you can refer to it while setting the beginning of the morph On the Timeline press the Morph Actor to select it Press the Morph Between Button in the Morph Actor Popup at the right of the Timelin
88. Actor labeled Colortab 5 47 Mask Actor 5 48 Reference Actor labeled Refer 5 48 Troupe ACtor sce sce cece vend tertie rore den 5 48 Cinefusion Actor 5 49 Shapes ACIOF Ep eaten HE Deer eed 5 49 5 4 2 Actor Edit Functions eee eee 0 00 Main Actor Edit Button seeee 5 50 Add Actor em 5 51 Delete Actor 5 52 Off Buttons snp ere REP 5 53 Move Actor Button 5 53 Copy Actor Button recentem riens 5 54 Stretch Actor Button sese 5 55 Show Troupe Button sese 0 56 Compress Button 5 56 5 4 3 Actor POPUPS 0 07 Actor Name Window 5 58 Actor Loops Window E A desl Meyer RTO Actor Begin and End Windows 5 59 Edit Keyframe 5 60 Edit Path 5 60 Curve Functions in Animation Insert Point Button nn Duplicate Points Button eee Point List Button eeeessssssss
89. Button Press OK to perform the adjustment press the Can cel Button to remove the popup with no adjustment Revision A 4 295 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual ramp OK ny High Preview im Contrast yo active PRAT e M 10 19 Normalize reset Contrast Bright Gamma Reset Figure 4 92 Adjust Popup Revision A 4 297 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 15 2 Color Correct Button The Color Correct Button gives you a popup that allows you to correct the Hue Saturation Value or Alpha HSVA of the masked area of the Canvas You can also correct in the color spaces of RGBA CMYK or RGBB If nothing is masked the entire Canvas is affected Press the corner button of the Color Correct Button to call up the Color Correct Popup Color Correct Popup The Color Correct Popup Figure 4 93 contains a set of four sliders and diagrams one for each com ponent You manipulate these sliders and diagrams to alter the way the component is applied to the masked area of the Canvas Changing the sliders performs a global adjustment on the given color component while the diagrams allow more localized adjustments to be made note that adjusting the diagrams always overrides the cor responding slider adjustments The sliders come up straight above the leftmost diagram Each slider is labeled with the corresponding color co
90. CHYRON Corporation 1 4 Type in the User Login Password If you do not want a password skip to step 5 5 Press Enter If you want to create another User Login Account press the Next button and go back to step 2 6 Press the OK Button to confirm the new User Login Account s you ve created The User Login Popup disappears exit the popup and cancel all changes press the Cancel Button NOTE After adding a user s name you cannot edit it instead delete it and re add if necessary Delete User Button The Delete User Button allows you to remove an existing User Login Account When a User Login Account has been deleted its name disappears from the list of User Login Accounts in the Login Envi ronment leaving an empty space for that number You can then add a new User Login Account where the deleted account was To delete a User Login Account 11 Press the Delete User Button User Popup appears 2 Press on the Next and Previous Buttons to cycle through the existing Login Accounts Find the one you want to delete 3 Press the OK Button The User Login Account is deleted and the User Login Popup disappears To exit without deleting an account press the Cancel Button Configuration Environment 3 12 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Set User Password Button The Set User Password Button allows you to create a password for a User Login Account that doe
91. Can vas to the Temp or as a Mask on the Canvas e Press either the Filled Button or the Outline Button to choose to render the text in outline or filled solid mode Outline mode drags the current brush around the vector outline of the text In outline mode the current paint mode Normal Reveal etc is used along with any selected Fold Jitter and Noise settings See Paint Modes Popup on page 4 275 for more information about these modes e Press the OK Button The text is rendered according to the current settings The Erase OK Button erases first then renders An example of an application of outline mode after rendering your text solid to the Canvas choose a small light colored airbrush with the Transparency Slider at a low setting Then Render in Outline mode with the Under Prefix on Liberty draws a soft glow around the solid text Text Save and Recall Use these buttons to save and recall text files settings and text are saved including font style At any time you can use no more than four font styles in one text file since there are four levels to the Font Elevator If you save a text file with four different font styles in it and recall it later the original four font styles are called into the Font Elevator from the Paint Environment 4 410 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual disk if they are not already there If less than four font styles need to be recalled they are loaded i
92. Canvas to the palette e Press the Pick Color Button Single Color Mode should be on e Press the color in the Canvas you want to pick up The picked color appears in the cur rently chosen underlined palette box and in the Current Color Box The Prompt Window dis plays the XY screen position that you pressed the numeric values of the color and the XY dis tance from the last Picked position You can use Pick Color just to measure pixel distances in the picture Here is a sample reading of Picked values in the Prompt Window Paint Environment 4 38 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual X 101 233 HSVA 0 0 144 144 dx dy 5 27 2 06 X and Y values are read from the lower left corner of the Canvas The color values for Hue Saturation Value and Alpha are expressed on a 0 to 255 scale The distance dx dy from the last Picked position are expressed in plus and minus values A minus dx is a distance to the left a plus dx is a distance to the right A minus dy distance is a distance toward the bottom a plus dy is a distance toward the top To Pick a series of colors Press the Repeat Rept Prefix Button e Press the Pick Color button e Press repeatedly on various colored areas in the Canvas If no color is chosen underlined in the palette RGB and XY data is printed in the Prompt Window for each position picked but no colors are actually copied into the palette If one color is chosen i
93. Draw Button 4 242 Index 14 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Line Gap Popup 4 245 Line Morph 4 467 4 469 animations 5 194 step by step 4 469 testing 4 476 Line Morph Add Button 4 470 Line Morph Add Keyframe Button 4 474 Line Morph Color Button 4 471 Line Morph Copy Keyframe Button 4 474 Line Morph Delete Button 4 470 Line Morph Delete Keyframe Button 4 475 Line Morph Erase Button 4 477 Line Morph Keyframe Timeline Slider 4 473 Line Morph Lock Button 4 475 Line Morph Move Button 4 471 Line Morph OK Button 4 476 Line Morph Reset Button 4 475 Line Morph Test Button 4 476 Line Morph Tune Button 4 472 Lock Button Axis 4 132 Lock Button Scale 4 133 login accounts 2 1 3 10 adding 3 11 deleting 3 12 logging in logging out 2 1 passwords 3 12 3 14 uses for 3 10 Login Environment 2 1 Loop Playback Button 5 242 Revision A Index 15 CHYRON Corporation looping animations 5 39 M macro files 4 412 binding to keyboard keys 4 416 editing 4 419 playing 4 414 recording 4 413 macros 4 412 magnify functions 4 63 zooming in and out 4 66 Main 4 457 Main Actor Edit Button 5 50 Map Button 4 315 Mask 4 74 Mask Actor 5 48 Mask Actor Edit Popup 5 162 Mask Brightness Button 5 170 5 171 5 172 5 173 5 174 Mask Channels Button 4 375 Mask Display Modes 4 81 Mask File Button 5 178 Mask Grid Button 4 58 4 391 Mask Hue Button 5 168 Mask Inplace Button 5 179 Mask Invert Button 5 179
94. EEE EB Figure 4 53 The Grab Popup Press the corner button of Grab to call up the Grab Popup By default video is grabbed to the Canvas If the Video to Disk Button is enabled video is grabbed to a disk array See your Liberty Technical Manual for details about the particular disk array installed on your system Revision A 4 149 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Grabbing Video to a Disk Array Press the Video to Disk Button to enable grabbing video frames to a disk array instead of to the Can vas To record a clip of video to the disk array bring up the Grab Popup click on the Video To Disk Button enter the file path you want to save the clip as and enter the number of frames you want to record Then exit the popup and hit the Grab Button Lib erty will tell you to Left Click Spacebar or Return to grab Right Click or Esc to abort The incoming video will be written to disk once you left click for as many frames as you specified There is some delay before the actual transfer starts however so be sure to click a little before the video you want There are no provisions for triggering the start of the grab from an external source Once the video is grabbed to disk you can recall it into Liberty using the disk paths in the Source VTR Set up Popup You can use the Source VTR Set up Popup to assign this clip to a disk path and the clip can be grabbed from a particular timecode location the
95. Elevator You can store four timecode positions in the four levels of the elevator Cue Button Press to cue the current device to the setting in the timecode window Stop Button Press to stop the current device Play Button Press to play the current device Revision A 5 13 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Replay Button Press to replay the current animation on the Time line just recorded on the current device Uses the In and Out settings below Animation Environment 5 14 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual TARGET Devices YTR 1 16 34 52 2 B8 88 88 00 00 88 88 88 88 HELME BB BB BB 1 51 5 Liberty i Rescale Liberty 1 786 88 4 659 Y 494 Liberty 1 Shrinkurap Liberty 7 9 99 99 5 Liberty 1 9 09 99 Liberty 1 9 99 99 Show Timecode Reset All Reset Time Reset Src Dst Modes Figure 5 5 Source Target Setup Popup Revision A Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE The Source and Target Setup Popups are identical in appearance except that the Source Popup has a large blue button at the top labeled Source and the Target Setup Popup has a large pink button at the top labeled Target Each popup provides for the configuration of six possible devices VTRs DDRs etc and six possible disk paths Timecode Frame Number Controls Each device and disk path has
96. H S V to narrow or isolate the tracking of the selected pixel s Press the Point 1 Button and move the cursor over the canvas If desired zoom into the selected area of the canvas for easier pixel selection Start by selecting the lower left point of the warped rectangle that will be defined by the four points Press down on the point area you want to track The X and Y windows display the X and Y coordinates of the point you picked Press on the Point 2 Button and select the second corner point Move in a counter clockwise direction from Point 1 Repeat Step 10 for Points 3 and 4 continuing in a counter clockwise direction Revision A 5 217 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e 12 Press the Size button Enter the size in pixels of the area you want to track 13 Press the Move button Enter the maximum movement per frame you expect the area to move in pixels e 14 Press the OK button The system will automatically recall each cel in the sequence analyze the position of the selected area draw a bounding box on the canvas of the new position and then recall the next cel NOTE It is recommend that you watch the processing of the tracking data to ensure that the reference wireframe is corresponding to the selected area If not press the END key on the keyboard increase the values in the SIZE and or MOVE windows and press the OK button again Compositing Tracked Element Animation E
97. However you can recall palettes or pictures independently of one another To recall a picture without its stored palette use the Ignore Palette button in the Transfer Panel s Recall Popup Press on a color palette box to choose it as the cur rent color it becomes underlined The current color is displayed in the Current Color Box If no color palette box is chosen underlined then Paint functions act as Erase Paint that is they paint with the transparent background color of the Canvas Color Palette Elevator The Color Palette Elevator is the row of 8 small boxes levels above the Color Palette The default palette is the leftmost box but you can press on any level to activate it and display its palette Each level Paint Environment 4 34 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual contains a palette of 32 colors You can copy one level to another level and link some or all of the lev els to one another if you want to work with large numbers of colors at one time To copy one palette level to another e Press the elevator level you want to copy e Press the Copy Prefix Button e Press the elevator box you want to copy to The source palette appears in the target palette Color Palette Functions The Color Palette Functions allow you to work with groups of colors and to modify them in a variety of ways This is useful when for instance creating a multicolored ramp Located below the color pal
98. Inbetweening Timeline Paint Mode Button Paint Modes Window amp Popup Normal nr i Smear Paint eee nre eren Warp Pali nene rapere Pn RERO ots BURP aint RN Sharpen Paint niet pence mete Emboss PaIht i iiir reet er en Burn Paint Dodge Saturate De saturate Clone Paint rei riri e EE Yea Duplicate erem e peces RevealP8iht uus iii etie re e d DE Reveal Paint with Reveal Paint with Reveal Paint with Reveal Paint with Reveal Paint with Pals Scene ode Paste Paint Clone Temp Paint seen Duplicate Temp Paint On Button Fractal Paint Button sess Fractal Popup 5 nieder ittis Fold Button ununi Noise Button 2e
99. Lock once after you ve finished setting the first keyframe points Triangle Morph OK Button Press to render one frame of the morph as deter mined by the position of the pointer in the Triangle Morph Slider Renders on top of the existing picture on the Canvas or under it if the Under Prefix is on Press the Erase OK Button to erase the Canvas before rendering Triangle Morph Keyframe Slider You can move any keyframe in the slider by press ing on the blue keyframe marker and dragging it to a new position This changes the keyframe s place in the Timeline No keyframes appear in the slider until you press the Lock Button When you press on the slider the percent completion of the morph at that point is displayed in the Prompt Window When you press on one of the blue keyframe mark ers the number of that keyframe marker is displayed in the Prompt Window Revision A 5 143 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Morph Edit Lines Button Add Del Move Color Tune Select add kf copy kf del kf Reset Lock Test lox emen Figure 5 38 Line Morph Popup Press to call up the Line Morph Popup The popup is the same as the Line Morph Popup in the Paint Envi ronment A button by button description of the Line Morph Popup follows below Line Morph Add Button Press to add line segments Press on the Canvas once to place the beginning of a line segment then li
100. Menu at the left of the Keyframe Timeline to turn it on off When turned on sub pixel positioning is enabled When turned off sub pixel positioning is disabled Animation Environment 5 86 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual When sub pixel positioning is enabled the image is pasted using the 3D distort even if the keyframe is not rotated scaled or slanted Perspective Transform and Warp Corners The Keyframe Distort Popup has two distinct modes that you interact with differently Perspective Transform allows you to set up a full three dimen sional world in which to manipulate images Warp Corners which is part of the optional Motion Track ing software allows you to perform arbitrary per spective mapping between the original image and a user definable quadrilateral In the middle of the left panel of the Distort Popup is a button labeled either Transform or Warp Press this button to tog gle back and forth between the two modes The wireframe preview on the Canvas displays an XYZ axis when Perspective Transform is active and dis plays a cross when Warp Mode is active Perspective Transform Perspective Transform displays a panel in the mid dle of the Distort Popup This panel has five main modes five different ways to manipulate the image to be pasted These modes are Position Rotation Slant Mirror and Scale Each mode displays co ordinate handles to press and drag the wireframe Dragging each h
101. Motion File Setup Popup The Chyron Motion File Setup Popup allows you to enter set up information to log on to a remote sys tem Node Enter the node name of the remote system such as NFINIT Animation Environment 5 28 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Path Enter the path of the directory on the remote system you wish to access such as C logos message User Name Enter the user name used to log on to the remote sys tem such as guest This user name must corre spond to a user account on the remote system Password Enter the password used to log on to the remote sys tem This password must correspond to the pass word for the user account on the remote system Temp Directory Enter a temporary directory on the local hard drive where temporary files can be stored Normally this is set to usr tmp but you can specify a different location if space is tight on the usr drive All files browsed or recalled via FTP pass through this tem porary directory so it needs at least a few megabytes of free space X Y Offset Position The Chyron Motion File Setup Popup contains text windows for X and Y offset position Since Chyron Motion Files are usually small cutouts you can use these windows to specify the position of the cutout The cutout then will be displayed at this position on the iNFiNiT FTP Settings Elevator Use the six levels of the elevator to save settings for di
102. Paste Mode 4 121 Eye Button 4 134 F fades animation 5 82 Fast Exit 3 29 fast temps 4 86 fast temps and masks 3 28 File Button 4 206 File Button on Actor Popups 5 105 File Mode Button 4 207 File Mode Popup 4 209 File Popup Menu 4 205 navigating 4 219 Unix Path Mode 4 214 Index 10 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual File Select Functions 4 226 File Type Popup 4 444 Fill Mask Button 4 383 Fill Mask Modes 4 384 Filmstrip Actor 5 46 5 120 filmstrips 4 412 5 108 5 116 5 120 browsing 4 234 creating 4 207 Filter Array 4 326 Filter Button 4 326 Filters Distort Popup 4 137 Filters interpolation 4 137 Filters user defined 4 139 First Step 4 422 Fold Paint Mode 4 283 4 342 fonts 4 402 foreign file formats 4 169 browse images 4 230 recalling 4 159 saving 4 225 foreign languages 4 410 4 411 Fractal Popup 4 282 Frame Button 5 241 Frame Numbers in Keyframe Popup 5 66 Frame rate Buttons 3 27 5 36 FTP Popup 4 145 Full page Button 4 64 Full Screen File Menu 4 219 Revision A Index 11 CHYRON Corporation Alpha Button 4 229 browsing files 4 227 foreign file formats 4 230 dating files 4 219 prefix buttons 4 235 selecting files 4 226 4 235 Full screen File Menu calling up 4 213 G Gamma Slider 4 294 Global and Local Modes 4 132 Global Palette Mode 4 36 Grab Popup 4 429 grabbing video 4 428 5 122 Gradated Rectangle Mask 4 369 gradations color 4 35 Gravi
103. Press to recall a Pressure Diagram from the disk 4 14 IMAGE TOOLS PANELS The Image Tools Panels contain functions which operate on the masked area of the Canvas altering it in some way Many of the tools have popup menus which allow you to change settings and preview them If no mask is active on the Canvas the functions operates on the entire Canvas Most Image Tools buttons have a popup invoked by pressing on the corresponding corner button The popup allows settings for the tool to be adjusted Once the settings have been chosen pressing on the tool s main button performs the function using the last settings chosen in the pop up Preview Buttons Most Image Tools popup menus have two preview buttons Preview and Active Press the Preview Button to preview the results of the current settings Press the Active Button to turn on Active Mode which will preview the results of the settings every time you make a change in them Active Mode works well when you have a small area masked in which to preview the changes or a very fast com puter Revision A 4 291 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Image Tools Popup OK and Cancel Buttons Most Image Tools popup menus have an OK and a Cancel button Pressing the OK Button performs the function and removes the popup Cancel removes the popup with no change to the Canvas Applying Image Tools to Temps and Masks The Image Tools Panels have a Canvas Temp M
104. Record Control Popup Press the corner button of the Storyboard But ton to call up the Storyboard Popup Record Modes Press one of the three Record Mode Buttons to choose one They are Overwrite Mode Insert Before Mode and Append Mode Overwrite Mode Activate Overwrite to record a new Storyboard or to overwrite all or part of an existing Storyboard The Start and End Windows The Start and End Windows display the beginning and ending frames of the file to be overwritten If you are recording a new Storyboard file the Start and End Windows are by default set at 0 You can press in the Start End Windows to type in new val Revision A 5 233 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation ues or change them by using the Frame Slider Pressing the main part of the Start or End Windows displays the specified frame on the canvas so you can see which frames will be overwritten The Frame Slider The Frame Slider displays Start and End indicators Press and drag the left indicator to change the Start Window value Press and drag the right indicator to change the End Window value Frames of the cur rent Storyboard file are displayed on the Canvas as you drag the indicators You can also display the start or end frame on the Canvas by pressing directly on the word Start or End You can also change the Start End values by pressing the Decrement lt or Increment gt Frame Buttons at ei
105. Reset Button Press to reset all settings to their defaults Cancel Button Press to remove the popup with no changes Recalling Using Wildcards When entering a file or directory name in the Recall File or File Manager Popups you can use the and wildcards anywhere in the file directory name being entered In such a case the directory listing will be filtered out based on the specified wildcards The wildcards have the following meanings matches 0 or more characters while matches exactly one character For example entering lib im will list all files whose names start with lib with extension Paint Environment 4 166 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 11 3 im Entering lib im will list all files with 6 character names starting with lib and extension im You can use wildcards in multiple places in a file directory name for more exotic pattern match ing For example test red would list all files with names starting with test with the string red in their name and with 3 character extensions Save Button The Save Button allows you to save images and other types of files to the disk In the 32 bit version of Liberty pictures are saved as 32 bit files In the 64 bit version pictures are saved as 64 bit files Both versions can recall either 32 bit or 64 bit files To save a picture file from Canvas to the disk e Press the Save Button The File Popup appears
106. SGI rgb Softim Yertigo vuv File Save As Settings Figure 4 60 Save File As Popup Revision A 4 171 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual In this table 8 bit refers to 8 bits per component or 32 bits total 8 bits each for R G B A 16 bit refers to 16 bits per component or 64 bits total 16 bits each for R G B A The File Buttons include Table 4 2 Available non Liberty File Formats Format Recall Save Alias 8 bit RGB or 8 bit matte 8 bit RGB sim 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA Aurora 280 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA BMP DIB 1 4 8 16 and 24 bit 24 bit uncompressed uncompressed Cineon 10 bit RGB or RGBA 10 bit RGB or RGBA DPX SMPTE 8 10 12 16 bit RGB 8 10 12 16 bit RGB RCBA 10 12 amp 16 bit and RGBA RGB RGBA DPX only in Liberty 64 GIF from 1 to 8 bits from 1 to 8 bits IMAGESTOR 8 BIT RGBA 8 bit RGBA iNFiNiT 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA JPEG various variable compression PDI 8 bit RGBA block 8 bit RGBA interleave RGBA interleave or alpha only PICT 8 bit RGB or RGBA 8 bit RGB or RGBA Pixar 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA Prisms 8 bit RGBA 8 bit RGBA Wavefront 8 amp 16 bit RGB RGBA 8 and 16 bit RGBA 16 bit only in Liberty 64 RLA Scitex CMY CMYK K no alpha SGI rgb 8 10 12 amp 16 bitRGB 8 10 12 amp 16 bit RGB or RGBA 10 12 and or RGBA 16 bit RGB and RGBA in Liberty 64 only Softimage
107. Sliders adjust continuously as well The Distance Settings Press one of the Distance Setting Buttons pixels inches or millimeters to turn it on The distance from the previous Pick displayed in the prompt Win dow is displayed in pixels inches or millimeters Only one can be on at a time The inches and milli meters settings are determined by the Dots Per Inch DPI setting in the Configure Environment For SGI monitors the DPI default is 100 The Display Settings The Display Settings allow you to choose whether to show the color values of the Picked color in a per centage or on a scale from 0 to 255 Press the age Button to turn it on The color val ues of the Picked color are shown as a percentage 0 to 100 Press the 255 Button to turn it on The color values of the Picked color are shown on ascale of 0 to 255 The Averaging Functions Depending on which Averaging Setting is active the Pick function averages neighboring pixels into the Picked color Revision A 4 41 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Press on one of the Averaging Settings to turn it on The Pick function averages a number of surrounding pixels to arrive at the resultant Picked color The Off Setting uses only the single pixel pressed on The other settings range from 2 2to9x9 2x2 averages a 2 x 2 square group of pixels with the Picked pixel at the lower left 3 x 3 averages a3 x 3 square group of pixels with th
108. The Mask Actor starts with the first color and interpolates to the sec ond Double clicking the second color copies the first color to the second The Tint button has a toggle window to select either Hue or amp S Hue amp Saturation modes H amp S Mode Press in the window of the Tint button to alterna tively change between Hue and amp S modes Set to H amp S Mode The tint is applied to Hue and Saturation values of the image Hue Mode Press in the window of the Tint button to alterna tively change between Hue and amp S modes Set to Hue It works the same as H amp S Mode but only the hue is affected This preserves white high lights It works similarly to Tint Hue in the Paint Environment NOTE The Tint Actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the Tint layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Ripple Mode Press the Ripple Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on the Ripple Mode When on a ripple distor tion is performed on the masked area in the actor below according to the setting of the Ripple Slider in the Mask Keyframe Popup The file assigned to Animation Environment 5 168 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual the Mask Actor is used as the mask the ripple refracts with For example a Mask Actor could use Ripple to a
109. The Reset Button Press to reset the Gap Slider to the default 26 and turn on Exact Mode Curve and Shape Gap Popup Reset Figure 4 79 Curve and Shape Gap Popup These popups are identical to the Paint Gap Popup except they do not have the Max Exact and Nofill mode buttons Curve and Shape have no tablet coor dinates to interpret and they always operate in Exact mode The default on the Line Curve Gap Slider is 15 Revision 4 245 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Line Gap Modes Gap OK Cancel single multiple radiate Reset Figure 4 80 Line Gap Popup The Line Gap Popup contains a slider for setting the line gap the gap between brushes painted along a line In addition the Line Gap popup contains three mode buttons Single Multiple and Radiate In Multiple Mode as you repeatedly press on the Can vas the corresponding points are connected with lines using the current brush In Single Mode one press starts a line and the sec ond press terminates it The next time you press a new line is started In Radiate Mode the first press defines a center point Subsequent presses cause lines to be painted from the center point to the points pressed in other words the lines radiate out from the center point You can use the button on the barrel of the pen or the middle mouse button to reset line painting for example to start a new sequence of lines while in Mu
110. The ripple is performed Try using Paint Mask with an air brush to create a mask with varied transparency to see what Ripple does Try some different custom brushes always with a change in transparency Programmed brushes give interesting results Paint Environment 4 334 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the ripple When the Active Button is on every change you make on the slider updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the ripple on the masked area 4 15 15 Bump Map Button This button uses a mask to map out three dimen sional bumps with the alpha value of the mask controlling the height The Direction Button page 4 59 controls the apparent direction of the light source There must be some picture information in the Canvas Bump Map does not have any effect on transparent background To see the effect of Bump Map make a mask using Paint Mask using an air brush Bump Map Popup Dark Range Bright Light p E E ER a 8 Range Height Eley Cantel preview active Figure 4 106 Bump Map Popup Press the corner button of Bump to call up the popup The popup contains four sliders to control the bump map Revision A 4 335 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To Bump Map the current mask e Create a Mask with varie
111. To change the origin position of extra points from a triangle to a star Use the Triangle Button to create a triangle shape e Move the Timeline marker to the beginning of the Timeline Paint Environment 4 272 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press Add Kf A new keyframe appears the tri angle at the beginning of the Timeline Move the Timeline marker to the end of the Timeline e Use the Star Button to create a star shape e Press Add Kf A new keyframe appears the star at the end of the Timeline e Move the marker back to the first keyframe This selects the first keyframe the triangle Press the Move Next Kf pt Button The point on the triangle where multiple points originate turns blue In this case it s the lower left point of the triangle e Press and drag the seven multiple points out of the blue point As long as multiple points remain the point stays blue You can drag the points one at a time past other points in the shape to distribute them evenly two points to a side Note that the points turn green as you move them e Move the Timeline marker back and forth between the two keyframes to see the in betweening When the second shape has fewer points than the first shape the procedure is the same except that you choose the second keyframe and use the Move Prev Kf pt Button See the Shapes Actor section in the Animation Envi ronment page 4 186 for details about how t
112. To move an actor within the same layer using the Actor Begin Window e Press the actor to select it e Press in the Actor Begin Window and type the new beginning number The actor moves to its new beginning point while maintaining its dura tion Revision A 5 59 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To stretch an actor using the Actor End Win dow e Press on the actor to select it e Press in the Actor End Window and type the new ending number The actor stretches to its new ending number while maintaining its origi nal beginning number Edit Keyframe Button The Edit Keyframe Button allows you to assign many attributes to an actor on a curve path includ ing DVE type rotations scaling transparency mir ror and slant settings It also allows you to modify the speed and acceleration of the curve path and other attributes When you press the Edit Keyframe Button the Keyframe Timeline appears over the Timeline Details of creating and editing keyframes begin on page 5 65 Edit Path Button The actor s curve path controls the motion of the actor The Edit Path Button calls up the Curve Popup and displays the actor s current path if any on the Canvas Here you can create a new curve path or change the current curve path NOTE The top Curve Elevator level is used for the current actor s animation curve path The other elevator levels can be used for temporarily storing curves for exam
113. When you use the Add Button in the Curve Popup to add a point to the curve path a Keyframe Match stick is automatically added to the Keyframe Time line Likewise if you delete a point from the curve path its corresponding matchstick will be deleted from the Keyframe Timeline as long as it is set to its default values the corresponding keyframe has been given non default values for instance if it has been manually given a rotation then it will not be deleted The curve point will be deleted and the matchstick will remain on the timeline with its posi tion interpolated between its neighboring keyframes Animation Environment 5 78 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 5 5 Preview Keyframes and Path Points When moving keyframes on the Canvas by dragging their wireframes the changing path always stays smooth throughout its entire length If you want a non smooth curve you can go into Edit Path and move path points and their tangents to modify the curve However if you then go back to editing key frames and move keyframes on the canvas the path will smooth out again Keyframe Distort Popup Image Lock Erase Position OK 1 1 Y 4 cance Filter 638 58 132 58 8 88 m Rotation Bilinear g name of settings Transform 4 64 Center Adjust Slant 1 868 Inplace 8 88 Eye Pen Position K 530 50 Lock Mirror X y Distort 132 50 i
114. Window When you play back the animation the actor repeats this many times An actor loops within its duration For instance if an actor with a duration of 30 frames has 3 loops it makes three 10 frame loops If the actor is using a curve path closing the path makes a smooth loop See Actor Edit Path page 5 44 Animation Environment 5 58 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Actor Begin and End Windows The Actor Begin Window displays the current actor s beginning frame number or timecode num ber This number if other than zero changes auto matically if the duration of the animation is changed The Actor End Window displays the current actor s ending frame number or timecode number This number changes automatically if the duration of the animation is changed The actor s beginning and ending may be displayed in either frame mode or timecode depending on the Frame Number Timecode Button labeled Tmecode in the Playback Menu at the upper left of the Anima tion Environment An actor s beginning and ending changes proportionately with changes in the dura tion of the whole animation If you want to change an actor s position or length on the same layer you can reset the Begin and or End Actor Windows rather than use the Move or Stretch Actor Buttons This gives you frame accu rate precision NOTE Subtracting the beginning frame number from the end frame number gives the duration of the actor
115. a Multiple Cel Actor would take twice as long to complete a cycle once forward and once backward Multiple Cel Once Button Press to turn on off If turned on the sequence plays once through then holds on the last step regardless of the duration of the actor If neither the Multiple Cel Swing Button nor the Multiple Cel Once Button are on then the sequence will play as many times as the duration of the actor allows Rotation and Scaling of Actors Larger Than the Screen You can include actors created at a higher resolution than the display screen This means that they are larger than the screen you are rendering animation in These larger actors include Cel Actors Mask Actors and Switcher Actors A Temp or Mask Buffer large enough to hold the larger file is tempo rarily allocated to do this You ll need sufficient RAM to support this 5 7 2 Motion Stabilization Motion Stabilization is part of the Motion Tracking software option If this option has not been installed the Stabilize Button will be grayed out Motion Stabilization allows the user to automati cally correct for unwanted positional movement in a sequence of image frames Before stabilizing a Animation Environment 5 118 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual sequence of frames the user must choose a refer ence frame from the sequence along with a small rectangle of pixels in it that should remain stable throughout the sequence Sta
116. a ole n Figure 5 2 Animation Timeline Revision A 5 7 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Scroll Up Button Press once to scroll the Timeline up one layer Pressing the Scroll Up Button and holding the pen down causes the layers to scroll up continuously Scroll Down Button v Press once to scroll the Timeline down one layer Pressing the Scroll Down Button and holding the pen down causes the layers to scroll down continu ously Home Button Press the Home Button H to home the Timeline back to the 0 layer The Home Button is in the cor ner of the Actor Edit Button at the left of the Time line For more details about the Actor Edit menu see page 5 44 Revision A 5 9 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 3 ANIMATION CONTROL MENU 37 89 14 Cue Play Setup Replay Dur Loops In Holdin Holdout Skipin Skipout H P Previeu Story Record RUN Figure 5 3 Animation Control Menu Animation Environment 5 10 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Animation Control Menu occupies the space along the left side of the Canvas in the Animation Environment It controls playing back and record ing animations At the top you use the VTR Menu to control the source and target recording devices Below the VTR Menu are windows for setting the timing of the playback of an animation At the bot tom of the Playback Menu are buttons
117. a simple square Shape by default When you are editing a keyframe in the Shape Actor you can use any of the Shapes tools to create or modify a geometric shape for the current key frame Inbetweening Timeline At the top of the Shapes Actor Popup press and drag the marker in the Inbetweening Timeline to choose different keyframes to edit You can also use the Previous lt and Next gt Keyframe Buttons at either end of the Inbetweening Timeline to move among keyframes The current keyframe s shape is visible and modifiable on the Canvas If you try to Animation Environment 5 186 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual edit without having an existing keyframe chosen an error Message appears at the bottom of the screen in the Prompt Window Adding Keyframes While Editing Shapes There is always a one to one correspondence between the actor s keyframes and the keyframes on the Inbetweening Timeline If you want more key frames in the Actor press the OK Button twice and use the Add Keyframe Button at the left of the main Timeline to add a keyframe where you want it Then press on the keyframe to edit it and press Edit Shape Replace Keyframe Button Replace Kf After creating or modifying a shape in a keyframe always press the Replace Keyframe Button Until you do this the new shape doesn t take About Shape Points The Link Keyframe Button Link Kf The Link Keyframe Button allows y
118. accept the selected paint mode with the OK button or cancel your selection with the Cancel but ton Note that if Paint is not on when you bring up the popup it will be turned on after you press OK The modes on the right half of the Paint Modes popup starting with Reveal use the current Temp buffer as a source image For example the user can use Reveal mode to paint the current temp onto the canvas The modes on the left half of the popup starting with Normal do not use the current Temp buffer as a source image They either paint with the current palette color Normal or apply imaging effects such as Blur to the target image Revision A 4 275 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The paint mode popup also contains a Temp Posi tion control with Inplace and Offset buttons These buttons determine how the current Temp buffer image is positioned during modes such as Reveal These buttons apply to all paint modes in the right half of the Modes popup They are grayed out when the modes in the left half of the popup are in use When the Inplace button is on paint modes such as Reveal utilize the in place or original position of the current temp This is the default When the Offset button is on paint modes such as Reveal utilize the temp s layer position which is set by activating the Temp as a Layer and positioning it For example suppose the user recalls a cutout image to the cu
119. already on will turn the Paint button off since it is an on off toggle button Macros will not handle double clicks as on the Erase Button for a full screen erase because Macros do not record time duration and so do not recognize two clicks quick succession If you want to erase the whole screen while recording a Macro press Mask All then Erase once To record a Macro e Press the Record Macro Button The File Popup appears Type in or press on the name for the record ing to be saved under The popup disappears The Record Button is highlighted indicating that you are recording e Perform the operations that you want to record relevant pen presses and keyboard presses are recorded until you press Stop e Press the Stop Macro Button Recording stops Paint Environment 4 414 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Play Macro Button To play a Macro Press the Play Macro Button The File Popup appears showing recorded Macro filenames Choose a Macro by typing its filename or pressing on its name in the list The Macro plays back To play a Macro repeatedly Press the Repeat Prefix Button Press the Play Macro Button The File Popup appears showing recorded Macro filenames Choose a Macro by typing its filename or pressing on its name in the list You are prompted to enter the number of loops or times you want the Macro to play Type the number of times you want
120. also save 8 bit RGB RGBA and CMYK TIFF files using the appropriate buttons Liberty 64 also allows 10 12 and 16 bits per component 8 bit RGB or RGBA are the most common formats for video work whereas 16 bit RGB or RGBA would be used for film work To save RGB TIFF files turn on the Save RGB button and turn on the Inhibit Matte button To save RGBA TIFF files turn on the Save RGB but ton and turn on the Save Matte button To save CMYK TIFF files turn on the Save CMYK but ton the Matte buttons are ignored in this case When saving files in CMYK 4 sliders are provided These allow the user to adjust the C M Y and K values after conversion from RGB when CMYK TIFF files are written and prior to conversion to RGB when CMYK TIFF files are read The sliders work in terms of percentages from 0 to 200 JPEG File Format The JPEG Setup Menu allows you to vary the com pression or quality of the saved JPEG file Paint Environment 4 196 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual JPEG Setup Menu Quality J Figure 4 67 JPEG Setup Menu The Quality Slider The slider setting controls the amount of compres sion of the JPEG file on a scale of 0 100 The Reset Button resets the quality variable to a default of 75 The Quality Slider allows you to trade off com pressed file size for image quality the higher the setting the larger the JPEG file and the closer t
121. animation can contain many different types of actors each with a different function or effect Actors can be any length and several actors can exist in sequence on a single layer Layer Number Buttons The stack of small square buttons running vertically along the left side of the Timeline are the Layer Number Buttons Layers above the Zero layer have positive numbers those below have negative num bers When a layer is empty has no actor in it and all layers above it are empty its Layer Number Button is blank When an actor is added to an empty layer that layer is numbered according to its distance from the Zero layer This is also true in reverse of the negative layer numbers below the Zero layer For example if layer 1 is empty of actors it will be numbered if layer 2 just below it contains an actor The Zero layer The Zero layer is the base layer of any animation represented by a thin purple line in the Timeline No actors can be assigned to this layer and it cannot be edited You can create any number of layers above the Zero layer numbered with positive numbers and any number of layers below it numbered with negative numbers More detailed editing functions using the Layer Number Buttons are discussed in the section on the Actor Edit Menu page 5 44 Animation Environment 5 6 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Pe Met det col zl a
122. as much time as Full Mode However since Storyboard renders to disk the finer the reso Animation Environment 5 236 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual lution the more disk space is required for storage Since there is no limit to how long a Storyboard can be itis possible to use quite a bit of disk space for Storyboards The coarser resolutions use less disk space Coarse render takes 12 KB per frame Nor mal takes 48 KB per frame Fine takes 192 KB per frame and Full takes 1555 KB per frame Use Full mode only when necessary Storyboard renders to the Canvas in full resolution then converts the frame to the currently selected res olution and stores the frame to disk However you may notice that as it renders to Canvas some ele ments look a little compressed This is because actors that are rotated or scaled are rendered to the Canvas at lower resolution to save time during Sto ryboard rendering To see a full resolution frame use Full Mode Storyboard Elevator and Path Window Press on one of the six Storyboard elevator levels to choose it for rendering a Storyboard The Story board renders to the disk path in the current elevator level If the current elevator level contains a Story board when you press Run you are prompted as to whether you want to overwrite it To change the path in the current Storyboard elevator level press in the Path Window and select a disk directory filename for the Storyboard f
123. be acceptable But for high contrast images this may not do the job Adaptive supersampling is more complex It always produces the highest quality render This method looks at the image and finds all areas where there are high contrast changes When it finds them it drops a subpixel grid on the image and approximates the pixel based on an average The point filter is the only filter that doesn t do sub pixel positioning The adaptive supersampling fil ter is very sophisticated Both user definable filters are adaptive supersampling filters Paint Environment 4 138 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual User Def 1 User defined Distort Filters User Def 2 Level Thresholds 0 100 R G 40 30 Advanced Settings Figure 4 49 User defined Filter Popup Press the corner button of the Filter Button to bring up the Adaptive Filter Popup which allows you to define thresholds for the different channels RGBA in the image as well as the resolution for each sub pixel grid to be used The thresholds use defaults that take into account the human eye s sensitivity to the green color channel as well as stair stepping of the image Press the Matte Button to display a white edge trace where the filter finds high contrast changes Press the Level button to specify the num ber of subpixels to be used in the render A level of six means thirty six subpixels will be used for each pixel in the original image Mo
124. be set in the Main Menu include Resolution Res button Revision A 4 461 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Fields 1 2 or both that will print Field button Format of the images Tile 1 per page vari ous Storyboard and Logsheet formats etc Format button Placement of the image on the page center upper left etc Justify button Size of the image Size button Source of the timecode that is optionally printed under an image e Vidjet internal remote or LTC TC Src but ton Timecode to print under the image T Code button Frame number that is currently being viewed Current Frame button Number of copies that will print Copies button Image source Video or Vidjet Frame mem ory Image Source button When the image source is set to Memory the specified images to be printed will come from the Vidjet s internal Frame Memory Grabbing an image places it memory When the image source is set to Video the image to print will come from the video being sent in and not what has been stored in memory Clicking on the inset buttons for the above will cycle through the possible values for each parameter Some parameters are dependent on others For example the user can not change the Justify parameter if the Format has not been set to 1 per page Paint Environment 4 462 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Also the Size p
125. becomes highlighted to lock the layer in its current position in order to prevent accidental movement Press again to unlock it Note that when Lock is on you can still change the layer s position using the layer s X and Y windows 2D 3D Button This button is labeled 2D by default When the layer is in 3D Paste mode described below the but ton is labeled 3D 2D Paste Popup Preview Erase OK 1 1 cance lb la Led name of settings Adjust Center Inplace Pen Position Normal Paste Modes Figure 4 35 Paste Normal Popup Press on the 2D Button to display the 2D Paste Popup for that individual layer The 2D Paste Popup increases your control of XY positioning by making the Adjust tools available as well as the keys in the numeric keypad on the keyboard for incremental Paint Environment 4 92 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Preview Fina 1 lpha Filter Bilinear Transform Center Pen Position K 638 58 Y Inplace 132 adjustments Also available are the Center and In place Buttons Press the OK Button to exit the 2D Paste Popup NOTE The X Y settings in the 2D popup refer to the center of the image not the lower left corner 3D Paste Popup Paste Distort Lock Erase 2 BB Image Y 132 58 Position x 638 58 DK cancel 8 name of settings Rotation 4 68 zZ 8
126. beneath the color chip will turn red Adjust the color sliders to make the color legal PAL Button Press the PAL button to enable highlight PAL color checking for the selected palette color s Gamma Window The value in this window is used by Liberty in the algorithm that converts from RGB color space to NTSC or PAL color space The default value is 1 600 Increasing the number raises the gamma curve and using a smaller number lowers the gamma curve HSV Button Configures the Color Sliders for Hue Saturation Value and Alpha palette color control RGB Button Configures the Color Sliders for Red Green Blue and Alpha palette color control CMYK Button Configures the Color Sliders to Cyan Magenta Yel low and Black palette color control Paint Environment 4 44 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual HSL Button Configures the Color Sliders to Hue Saturation Luminance and Alpha palette color control Color Mixer Brings up the Color Mixer popup instead of the Color Sliders for palette color control Revision A 4 45 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 3 3 Color Slider Scales ETTTTTTTE ILLE Multi clear global inverse lt gt Figure 4 20 Color Slider Scales in the Palette Panel The more than 16 7 million colors available to Lib erty s 32 bit version are set using these three slider scales There are four different color s
127. button has 8 direc tional buttons similar to the Edge Button Pressing each directional button moves the accent mark one pixel in that direction The middle button A is a mode button which when on causes the accent mark to move continuously as long as you press down on a directional button Paint Environment 4 412 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual If you move a character that has an accent mark the accent mark moves with the character 4 21 MACRO PANEL MENU MACRO Play Edit Delete Record Pause Delay Bind Undef Save State Recall State Figure 4 143 Macro Panel The Macro function allows you to create macros that record your actions on Liberty and play them back You can use Macro to perform repetitive tasks that would be tedious to do by hand You can for exam ple use Macros to process stills and large amounts of sequentially numbered files or frames Or you can use macros to remember complex sequences of actions or set ups Revision A 4 413 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 21 1 Recording and Playing Macros Record M acro Button NOTES Use caution when recording macros with toggle on off or cycling buttons Since the result of pressing such buttons is dependent on the button s current value macros may work differently if these button values differ e g if the Paint button gets turned on while recording the macro playing the macro back when the Paint button is
128. button to center the selected points around the transform axis Polygon Button Press the Poly button to cause the selected points to form a regular polygon Three selected points become an equilateral triangle four selected points become a square Five selected points become a reg ular pentagon and so on At the same time the ten sion of the curve is reduced to zero making straight lines between points The curve changes as the points take on the new arrangement X Rotate Points Button To rotate curve points around the x axis e Select some points in the curve e Press the Rot X button e Press and drag up and down on the Canvas The curve changes as the points are rotated Revision A 4 257 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Y Rotate Points Button To rotate curve points around the y axis e Select some points in the curve e Press the Rot Y button e Press and drag up and down on the Canvas The curve changes as the points are rotated Z Rotate Points Button To rotate curve points around the z axis e Select some points in the curve e Press the Rot Z button e Press and drag up and down on the Canvas The curve changes as the points are rotated Bias Button To change the bias e Select some points in the curve e Press the Bias Button e Press and drag up and down on the Canvas The curve changes as the bias of the points changes About Bias Like tension Bias
129. can also branch out into multiple paths which is useful for effects such as lightning The main Fractal Button turns Fractal Mode on and off You can use Fractal mode with any of the painting tools Paint Line Curve and Shape and any of the other painting effects for example Jitter Fractal Popup Roughna OK Cancel Radiate Reset Figure 4 87 The Fractal Popup The Fractal corner button brings up the Fractal Popup with a Roughness Slider and a Radiate On off Button The slider controls the jaggedness random ness of the fractal strokes while Radiate Mode when on causes multiple strokes to branch out as you paint The red Reset Button resets the slider to default and the Radiate Button to off The OK But ton confirms the settings and brings down the popup while the Cancel Button brings down the popup while reverting to the previous settings Paint Environment 4 282 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 13 6 Try using Radiate Mode with Smear Paint on a Can vas image for some nice water color and broken glass effects Also try using Fractal Paint in a Macro Since the random numbers used by Fractal Paint change each time the Macro is run the fractal lines will appear to dance from frame to frame as the Macro renders Cancel Button The Cancel Button reverts to the prior randomness value but doesn t reset the Radiate Button setting Fold Button NOTE The Fold Noise Jitte
130. changing the setting press the OK Button to accept the change Tablet Left Margin This sets the left margin of the active tablet area Its numbers refer to inches on the tablet After chang ing the setting press the OK Button to accept the change Tablet Right Margin This sets the right margin of the active tablet area Its numbers refer to inches on the tablet After changing the setting press the OK Button to accept the change Revision A 3 55 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE The tablet configuration settings may not be changed when using a mouse as a pointing device Reset Button Press the Reset Button to return the tablet settings to their original default values Cancel Button Press the Cancel Button to cancel any changes you ve just made to the slider settings and return them to their previous settings OK Button Press the OK Button to confirm the changes you ve made to the slider settings Configuration Environment 3 56 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 3 12 UNDO PANEL Undo Mode Levels Enable Canvas 7 On Temp 7 On Mask On Roto Layers OTT Undo Configuration Figure 3 15 Undo Configuration Panel Illustration Use the Undo Panel to set the number of levels of Undo that Liberty will provide There are separate controls for Canvas Temp Lay ers and Mask each with a user configurable number of levels and an O
131. choose a video resolution by pressing the appropriate button then press OK In video when transferring the image from the Canvas to the video board you can choose to have no change in pixels 1 1 Pixel Aspect or to maintain the 3 4 video aspect ratio 4 3 Pixel Aspect so that circles stay circular instead of becoming flattened If you are working in film choose the appropriate film resolution Full Half and Quarter while main taining the correct film aspect ratio The Interpolate Button determines whether the image is filtered or not when it is transferred from the Canvas to from the video board Interpolate On causes the image to be filtered when it is resized Configuration Environment 3 22 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual from the Canvas to the video board in video 1 1 there is no re sizing so interpolation is not needed Interpolation On may make the image slightly softer When Interpolate is Off the image is not filtered No interpolation results in some alias ing NOTE It is usually important to configure the Canvas resolution to match your image resolution when recalling large files from disk Images are recalled to the canvas beginning in the lower left corner An image file that is larger than the canvas will be truncated and the extra image data not recalled If the image is saved again only the picture information on the active canvas will be saved and the rest of the data from the large ima
132. cicer erroe ter P a e P Rey 4 24 Brush Mode Buttons eere eene 4 29 Solid Brush Button inaner 4 25 Air Brush 4 26 Programmed Brush Button 4 26 User Brush BUON 4 29 COLOR PALETTE 2 4 33 Palette and Buffers Panels 4 33 About the Palette te 4 34 Color Palette 4 34 Color Palette 4 35 Pick Colors Popup n Rd Color Space Button HSV Schonland iene Golor Modes eina 4 43 Color Ghecklng 4 isto vecti mn 4 43 heater Ret ica 4 45 Color Mixe sio viser c rene eire Ee Y cna vea cre eda 4 45 Color Slider Scales nn nan nii 4 46 Copying Colors in the Palette 4 52 Current Color Button c ccccsccceceeceseessessseeeseeeeeeeeeaes 4 52 Table of Contents vi Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Background Color Button LS STe 44 GRID AND DIRECTION FUNCTIONS 4 53 4 41 Grid Functions eene 4 54 Grid Button c RE oes 4 54 Grid Popup ite eee f te Eom d 4
133. clip file the disk path s frame numbers must always start with zero For example when first recording to a RAW YUV clip file in the Animation environment the frame number timecode must be zero or the record will fail This is because the software uses frame zero to trigger the start of a RAW YUV clip file Once you ve created RAW YUV clip file however you can record to different frames within it by altering the target disk path s frame number Revision A 5 31 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation accordingly for example for a fix you could re render frames 10 20 over the original frames 1 20 To render to a RAW YUV clip the RAW clip file type must be enabled on the Target VTR Setup Popup In addition when setting up the disk path the file pathname for the clip an extension of raw must be added to the filename Once you have rendered a RAW YUV clip file you can recall frames from the clip by selecting the clip as a disk path in the Source VTR Setup Popup The Grab Button in Paint will then grab individual frames from the clip file based on the disk path s source timecode frame number Or the Filmstrip Actor in Animation can be used to input frames from the clip to do this put the Filmstrip Actor in Source VTR mode and assign the clip as the disk path for Source VTR see page 5 120 for more details In addition if the RAW YUV clip is rendered to a Disk Array and i
134. columns 3 and 4 instead of system defined Configuration Environment 3 32 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 3 5 DIRECTORY PANEL Create Directory Delete Directory Rename Directory User Setup Re label ImageStor pop up Directory Management Figure 3 9 The Directory Panel Liberty provides for the creation naming re nam ing and deleting of directories on the hard disk s Use directories to organize your work in ways that make sense to you Keep in mind that others may need to access your directories so simple common sense naming conventions may be in order A direc tory name like PCD421aFINAL2 may be too obscure at a later time no matter how logical it seems now Revision A 3 33 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE Avoid punctuation marks and spaces in directory names This is also true for filenames of any type Create Directory Button Press to create a new directory The file popup appears with the directory line high lighted Type in the desired directory name and hit Enter When you go back to the Paint or Animation Envi ronment you can save files into the new directory Delete Directory Button Press to delete an existing empty directory The file popup appears with the directory line high lighted Type in the name of the directory you want to delete and press Enter or you can press on the directory name in the file list The i
135. create or edit a curve path for the actor Edit Keyframe Button Press to call up the Keyframe Timeline to edit the actor s keyframe attributes Actor Browse Window 5 7 1 This box shows a thumbnail sketch of the image file associated with the currently selected actor Cel Actor Popup The Cel Actor color coded green is the most used of the actor types There are two different kinds of Cel Actors Single Cel Actors and Multiple Cel Actors The Cel Actor can contain a curve path for the image to follow during the animation as well as keyframes for DVE type rotation in x y and z These keyframes also control attributes such as Transparency Scale Slant and Under Animation Environment 5 106 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Single Cel Actor Name Loops 1 Begin 0 00 00 00 End 0 00 10 00 File Mask NE Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 22 Cel Actor Popup Single The Single Cel Actor is simple and easy to use Use it when you want to animate one picture element stored as an image file on disk A Single Cel Actor calls a single image file from disk and displays it in the animation To create a Single Cel Actor you need only specify its image file using the File Button Then if neces sary you can set up a path or keyframes Revision A 5 107 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Multiple Cel Actor Name Loops 1 Begin 0 00
136. curve points on the Canvas with the Add Points Button One curve is active at any time You can store curves in the Curve Elevator or Save them to the disk Curve Paint Environment 4 248 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual points are represented on the Canvas by little white dots The Curve is represented by a red line The Curve Popup has the same functions as the Path Popup for creating curve paths for animation actors in Liberty s Animation Option Curve Tangents Each curve point except the first and last points in the curve has two tangents which define how the curve approaches and leaves the curve point Tan gents are represented by a yellow line You can use the Move Points Button see page 4 251 to drag the end points of the tangents thereby changing how the curve approaches or leaves a point Normally the two tangents for each point are locked together in a straight line so that moving the end point of a tan gent affects the other end You can use the Break Button see page 4 253 to separate the tangents of a point and modify each tangent independently of the other Curve Elevator Press one of the Curve Elevator buttons to display the points of the curve in that elevator level for edit ing You can store acurve on each of the 8 levels of the Curve Elevator Use the Copy Prefix to copy a curve from one level to another Select Points Functions Most of the functions on the Curve Popu
137. digitized scenes before compositing elements Warp Corners Warp Corners is part of the 3D Distort Paste Popup in the Paint Environment or the 3D Distort Paste Popup in the Edit Keyframe function of the Anima tion Environment The artist can pull on any of the four corners of a paste image to distort the image to the desired effect The Warp Corners feature makes it easier to position a pasted image to match a background element Animation Environment 5 204 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 9 1 instead of using the normal paste transform controls See page 4 129 Paste Distort Mode for more infor mation Motion Tracking Motion Tracking is designed to allow you to track an element still or animated along a track ina series of target frames If the Motion Tracking option is not installed the Motion Tracking Button will be grayed out This button is located on the Image Tools 2 panel of the Paint Environment The tracked element can be anything that can be distin guished from its surroundings in some way usually by its luminance value The Tracking function will create a series of points generating a motion curve path Or it will generate a set of four points defining a warp rectangle that follows an area in the target sequence Point Mode In Point Mode you are given one selectable point Pointl When this point is tracked a point list will be generated which has one point that corresponds
138. disk and directory must be set for both Save and Recall and they can be set to dif ferent locations Press on the host name you want to change to or type in the host name and press Enter By convention local is the default local host After you press on the host name the word Disk becomes highlighted The available disks are displayed Revision A 4 205 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Press on the disk name you want to change to or type in the disk name and press the Enter key After you press on the disk name for instance hd0 or hard disk zero the word Dir becomes highlighted The available direc tories are displayed e Press on the directory name you want to change to or type in the directory name and press the Enter key After you press on the directory name the word File becomes high lighted The available filenames are displayed Press the filename to save or recall or type in the filename and press the Enter key Host Button Press on the word Host to choose a new host Disk Button Press on the word Disk to choose a new disk Directory Button dir Press on the word Dir to choose a new directory File Button Displays the file name to operate on usually the previous file name operated on To change the file name you want to operate on press on the desired file name in the file list area or type in the filename and
139. drag the slider pointer at the bottom of the Timeline to move it along the Timeline Revision A 4 269 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Next Previous Buttons lt gt Press either of these buttons to move to the next or previous keyframe on the Timeline The Add Keyframe Button Add Kf To add a keyframe shape to the Timeline Move the Timeline slider to the place where you want to add the keyframe e Create a shape on the Canvas using the nor mal Shape tools e Press the Add Kf Button A keyframe of the current shape is added A keyframe marker appears at that place on the Timeline Once you ve added the keyframe you can change the shape on the Canvas but the contents of the key frame will not change Use the Replace Kf Button to update the shape in an existing keyframe To display the shape in an existing keyframe on the Canvas just move the Timeline marker to the desired key frame and its shape appears on the Canvas Note that if the Timeline marker is right on a keyframe the shape is drawn in white If the marker is between keyframes the shape is drawn in red You can press right on a keyframe s marker on the timeline to go directly to it The Delete Keyframe Button Del Kf To delete an existing keyframe move the marker to the keyframe you want to delete and press the Del Kf Button Paint Environment 4 270 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Copy Keyframe Button
140. e Press the Move Actor Button e Press on an actor and drag it to its new posi tion You don t have to press down while you drag e Press again when the actor is in its new posi tion You can move an actor within the same layer or to a different layer If there is not enough space for the moved actor in its new position it can t be moved there Revision A 5 53 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To move an entire layer to another place on the Timeline e Press the Move Actor Button e Press on the Layer Number Button of the layer you want to move e Press on another Layer Number Button Pressing on the top half of a Layer Number But ton puts the moved layer above it pressing on the bottom half of a Layer Number Button puts the moved layer below it Copy Actor Button The Copy Actor Button works the same as the Move Actor Button except that the source actor or layer is not removed by the operation A copied actor has all the attributes as the original To copy an actor on the Timeline e Press the Copy Actor Button e Press on an actor and drag it to the position to be copied to You don t have to press down while you drag e Press again where you want the new copy of the actor A copy of the actor appears in the new position You can copy an actor within the same layer or to a different layer If there is not enough space for the copied actor in its new position it can t be cop
141. error is found in the ani mation a pop up appears asking if you want to con tinue You can press Yes to continue to the next error or press No or Cancel to stop If you stop the actor which caused the error is highlighted Timecode Button labeled Tmcode Press to change between Timecode Mode and Frame Mode Liberty automatically converts frames to timecode using the currently configured frame per second rate If Liberty is configured for NTSC one second is calculated at 30 frames For PAL one second is calculated at 25 frames For film one sec ond is calculated at 24 frames Dropframe Button labeled Dropfr Press the Dropframe Button to turn it on off When on recording grabbing takes place in Dropframe Mode Dropframe Mode affects both the source and target recording device unlike Pre roll Note that the Dropframe button is only active when a VTR device is selected Itis not active nor is it needed for disk paths Animation Environment 5 36 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Duration Button Dur Dur 0 00 01 00 0 00 00 00 Out 0 00 01 00 Figure 5 9 Duration Window The number in the Duration Window determines the overall length of the animation You can change the duration at any time to any value When you change the duration of an animation all actors in the anima tion change their length proportionately Usually you can run an animation at any dura
142. for example Paint masking a boundary around an image you want to cut out from its background Press on the Fill to Mask Slider and set it then press the OK Button Press on a pixel on the Canvas inside the boundary of the closed mask Mask fills out to the masked boundary The mask fills with the value chosen on the slider Fill Mask Preview Press Preview to see the fill before it becomes per manent Press on Preview then anywhere on the Canvas to see a preview of that fill The Preview Button will only preview one fill at a time Press again on the Canvas to choose a new start point for the fill and re preview it The Mask Only Button dis Revision A 4 385 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation plays the mask as an opaque white on black silhou ette Previewing a Fill Mask is important when filling to a threshold you can set a threshold with a slider preview the mask then come back and adjust the slider and re preview Press the OK Button to make the previewed mask permanent Fill Mask Active Press the Active button to turn it on or off When Active is on the preview of the result is updated continuously 4 18 10 Match Mask Button The Match Mask Button makes a mask based on matching the Canvas colors to the color chosen on the palette Sliders on the popup allow you to adjust what colors are masked The button s text window shows whether the button is in Hue or RGB mode Press on the text window to
143. for example if the still is written as 100 to hostl and 700 to host2 for dual record then database entries are made for both 100 and 700 In addition thumbnails saved for both the first and second dual copies of the still Both thumbnails are transferred to the thumbnail node and path specified in the Imag estor set up menu FTP set up controls This section of the set up menu contains the follow ing fields Paint Environment 4 182 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual user name The name of a user account on the remote system for infinit systems this is often guest e password The password of the user account on the remote system for infinit systems this is often temp dir This is the path of a temporary directory to store files on the local system This is most often set to usr tmp The FTP Button Turn the FTP button ON if you want to automati cally transfer the files and update the database over the network from the Liberty workstation to the specified remote system s on the network after saving the files to the local SGI hard disk Save Local Button When you turn this button OFF the saved image is not archived in the current directory on the local SGI hard disk after the FTP process is finished The image is saved only in the selected directory on the selected remote system s on the network NTSC and PAL Buttons Press one of
144. for multiple uses To use the Repeat Prefix press on the Repeat Button then press the function button you want to use in Repeat Mode Press the Paint Environment 4 60 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual function s Cancel or OK Button to terminate the function You can press the active high lighted Repeat Button to turn it off while using the function For example for repeated recalls from the disk press the Repeat Prefix then the Recall Button for information on recalling files see page 4 21 The File Popup stays up during as many recalls as you like Press the Cancel Button on the File Popup to terminate or just before the last Recall press the Repeat Prefix again to turn it off After you recall another file the File Popup disappears and the func tion terminates because the Repeat Prefix is no longer on Another way to terminate a function that you are using with Repeat is to press the highlighted function button a second time to turn it off Then don t forget to also press the highlighted Repeat Button to turn it off Under Prefix Button The Under Prefix causes functions that put color or image into the picture to put the color or image under what is currently in the picture A picture must have some transparency so that what is put under it can be seen To use the Under Prefix press the Under Button and then press the function you want to operate in Under Mode Use the function You can press
145. for pre press applications like desktop publishing and represents the three pri mary ink colors Cyan Magenta and Yellow plus Revision A 4 47 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation black K Cyan Magenta and Yellow are subtrac tive since when they all equal 255 they give black and when they are all at 0 they give white Liberty provides other tools for pre press such as file con version to and from Scitex file formats in the Save and Recall Popups The four sliders represent C Y M and K from left to right HSL Color Space Control This color space is similar to HSV but has a Lumi nance L parameter that is proportional to bright ness levels measured on an NTSC monitor The top of the luminance scale is white the middle is color and the bottom is black Luminance also takes into account the brightness of different colors i e red is darker than yellow HSV treats pure hues as having equal weight and so may be used for color paint applications HSL gives different weight to differ ent hues and would be used when different hues must be distinguished by their brightness as in choosing colors that must be distinguishable even on a black and white TV monitor Paint Environment 4 48 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Color Mixer Mode Figure 4 21 Color Mixer Popup The Color Mixer provides an area for mixing colors separate from the Canvas The Color Mixer consists of a rectang
146. half the Canvas resolution Normal Resolution The resolution of the frame recorded to the Story board is one third the Canvas resolution Revision A 5 235 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Coarse Resolution The resolution of the frame recorded to the Story board is one fourth the Canvas resolution X Resolution Window Press in this window to type in a new resolution for the width of the recorded image The y resolution is automatically computed to preserve the current aspect ratio Y Resolution Window Press in this window to type in a new resolution for the height of the recorded image The aspect ratio is NOT automatically preserved Thus if you want to change the aspect ratio change x first then y Filter Button Press the Filter Button to turn it on thereby enabling interpolation on the rendered Storyboard frames When Filter is off the frames are not interpolated Interpolation filters the frames giving them a softer look It makes rendering take a little longer Does not apply to Full Resolution images When you try to change the Resolution Mode or the X Y settings while the current Storyboard elevator level has a Storyboard in it you will be prompted Resolution changed Erase Storyboard Press Yes to erase the current Storyboard and change the resolution Generally the Fine Resolution Mode is preferred since it gives a fairly high quality renderings with out taking
147. has a popup that lets you modify the softness of the brush s edge all the way down to no anti aliasing at all Likewise Paste Distort Lib erty s perspective transform function allows several different rendering filters Elevators User defined elements can be stored in elevators so that many elements are on line For instance above the color palette is a horizontal row of eight little squares each of which when pressed calls up another palette Thus eight palettes are instantly accessible Many functions have elevators includ ing palettes temps masks user defined brushes and text fonts See Color Slider Scales on page 4 46 for an example Paint Environment 4 16 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual TRANSFER Recall File have File Save File As File Manager litt tif Paste Horna 1 FIP Grab IMAGE TOOLS I Canvas Color Hoise Apply Adjust Correct Clouds Color Color Reveal Poster Color Color HultTint Blur sharp H amp amp Fast Filter Ripple Hosaic on Canvas Paint Shape Hode Horma 1 MASK TOOLS Use Erase 11 I t Hask ME Hask Rectangle Circle Alpha rectangle Adjust Channel brow Luminance Fill Hatch Hask RGE Figure 4 9 Four Panel Positions Revision A Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Panel Menus The Paint Environment has space for four panels of buttons across the bottom half of the scr
148. highlighted device on the Source and Target Setup Popups accessed by pressing the Setup Button Note that this timecode setting does NOT determine where on a target device to start recording Only the In Button below does that Or if you are recording to multiple target devices you set the time codes in the individual time code windows for each target device in the Target VTR Setup Popup This glo bal timecode window is only for grabbing the time code setting from the current device or setting a new timecode to cue the device to To update the timecode of the current device press the lt button The timecode of the current device appears in the timecode window Animation Environment 5 12 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The timecode window has a set of Bump buttons up and down arrows Press on these to bump the timecode setting by one frame up or down Press directly in the timecode window to enter a new number Separate the hours minutes seconds and frames with spaces 1 09 21 15 would be typed 1 9 2 15 Typing just 5 appears as 0 00 00 05 Shuttle Button S Press and drag to shuttle the VTR forward or back ward When you let up the VTR continues to shut tle at the current rate and direction until you press and drag again or press the Stop VTR Button Jog Button J Press and drag to jog the VTR forward or backward When you let up on the pen the VTR stops Timecode
149. image in both X and Y Dragging on a handle in the center of a side scales the image only in X or Y The scale of the image can be represented as a ratio 1 0 100 or as a size in pixels Tap on the small arrow to the right of the word Scale to toggle back and forth between the two modes Revision A 5 89 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Scale Lock Button The Lock Button just above the Mirror Buttons is the Scale Lock Button Press it to turn it on or off When on one edge of the image is held stationary while you drag the opposite edge and scale the image If the image has already been rotated you may have to unlock global positioning the Axis Lock Button to truly hold an edge in three dimen sional space Eye Button The magenta Eye Button is used to customize the look of the perspective transformation This is done by defining where the center of projection of the image is located Press the Eye Button to call up the Eye Popup which has three buttons Image Axis and Fixed In Image Mode the center of projection is centered on the middle of the image regardless of where the axis may be In Axis Mode the center of projection is centered on the axis In Fixed Mode you choose any point to be the center of projection Any center of projection has by default a depth dis tance from the Canvas equal to the height of the Canvas You can adjust this depth in z in all three Eye modes to create uniq
150. in a range of 0 to 65535 If you want to dis play these same colors but using the more familiar 0 to 255 range press on the 0 to 255 Button Again these settings will have no effect on the picture itself but only on the numbers used to manipulate the colors Resolution Functions Liberty is capable of resolutions of up to 8000 pixels by 8000 lines The resolution you can actually use depends on which Liberty software package you are using and on how much RAM Random Access Memory your hardware configuration has If you try to enter a resolution that is too high for the Revision A 3 21 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation amount RAM your system has Liberty displays a warning You can bypass the warning and continue to operate Liberty but performance may be more or less slowed down Liberty 32 and Liberty Paint are limited to 1000 pix els by 1000 lines The optional Expanded Resolu tion Option offers 8000 pixels by 8000 lines of image resolution Liberty 64 is fully capable of up to 8000 pixels by 8000 lines Horizontal Resolution Button Press to enter a new horiz resolution 16 to 8000 Vertical Resolution Button Press to enter a new vertical resolution 16 to 8000 Defaults Resolution Button Press the Defaults button to call up the Defaults Res olution Popup page 3 25 which has preset resolu tions Each button represents a preset resolution If you are working in video
151. inter lacing If you re pulling images off a DDR you probably would extract with odd for Field 1 and even for Field 2 That would preserve the motion in each field correctly If you did not however want the resulting images to be interlaced you could use odd field for both Fields 1 and 2 That way each from that got rendered would contain the corresponding odd field from the DDR in both rendered fields the image would have lower resolution since each scan line would be replicated twice The image wouldn t be interlaced however For some applications the interlacing is undesirable Filmstrip File Button If the images come from hard disk this button s win dow displays the filename Filmstrip In Button This button displays the number of the first file to be used in the Filmstrip Actor or the frame number or timecode of the first image to be grabbed from a recording device Animation Environment 5 124 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To change the number press in the window of the button and type in a new number Or press the top part of the In label to increase the number by one press the lower part of the In label to decrease the number by one Filmstrip Out Button This button displays the number of the last file plus one to be used in the Filmstrip Actor The Out number is the In number plus the duration the dura tion is the Out number minus the In number T
152. is usually a far exaggerated version though and you must storyboard or final record the animation to see it completely see Preview Animation Button In Brief on page 5 43 for a quick overview When testing morph animations set a very low duration 15 to 30 frames depending on the complexity of the morph Press the Edit Lines Button to exit the Line Morph Popup The Line Morph Popup disappears To morph one image instead of morphing between two you must turn on the Morph Single Button in the Morph Actor Popup In that case you need only one Cel Actor below the Morph Actor Revision A 5 203 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 9 Motion Tracking Motion Tracking is an optional software package for Liberty 32 standard on Liberty 64 that incorporates three features e Motion Tracking Motion Stabilization Warp Corners Motion Tracking Motion Tracking is designed to follow a defined point point mode or warped group of points cor ner mode so that another element can be compos ited over the filmstrip and track the reference points An example of this feature would be to track the license plate on a moving vehicle and replace it Motion Stabilization As a complementary tool to Motion Tracking Motion Stabilization is used to remove undesired movement in a filmstrip to stabilize what should be a stationary reference position This feature is often used to remove film weave from
153. is on the effect happens with ease in and ease out Animation Environment 5 158 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Switcher Softness Slider Press and drag to change the softness of the File controlled Reveal effect When the slider is at the bottom the effect is hard edged When the slider is at the top the effect has maximum diffusion NOTE Generally in the Animation Environ ment you can use any combination of layers and keyframe attributes Thus you can use any combination of Mask Actors Switcher Actors and Morph Actors keyframes attributes including Alpha and Under will work regardless of how you layer the actors 5 7 10 Color Table Actor Popup See Loops 1 0 End 480 File Dups 1 Cycle Reveal Ncols 0 Edit Col Smooth Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 42 Color table Actor Popup Revision A 5 159 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation The Color table actor allows you to create animated color cycle effects You can create cycling effects in which a series of colors cycle through a gray scale ramp in a file created in Paint and saved on disk Or you can create color reveal effects which instead of cycling colors turns the colors on one by one until they are all revealed To create a color table animation e Add a Color table actor to the Timeline Assign a file to it using the File Button The Color table Actor
154. move keyframes in the Keyframe timeline These buttons labeled Del and are at the top of the Keyframe Edit Menu This por tion of the menu also contains 5 level elevator with buttons for saving and recalling keyframes in the elevator labeled sav all and rec The lower portion of the Keyframe Edit Menu below the OK button contains buttons related to the Speed curve including buttons to Add and Delete Speed Nails a 5 level elevator and controls for recalling saving speed nails It also contains in out buttons for zooming the speed curve display along with a SubPixel button to enable sub pixel positioning See 5 6 for more information on the Speed Curve Animation Environment 5 66 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 19 U save swap rec Add Del SubPixel in out path alpha rotate ref pos scale slant under warp effects Figure 5 14 Keyframe Timeline Revision A 5 67 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual About Keyframes and Keyframe Matchsticks On the Keyframe Timeline keyframes are displayed as blue keyframe matchsticks When an actor is created Liberty automatically adds start and end keyframes to it These keyframes have no attributes and thus no effect until edited The animation actor s disk image file is displayed as it exists on the disk If the actor has a curve path the image file moves along the path w
155. new shape erases whatever current shape is displayed on the Canvas To create a new shape without erasing the current one you must use a dif ferent elevator level There are seven elevator lev els each of which can hold one shape Press on the level you want to edit It becomes the active eleva tor level and the shape contained in it is displayed for editing or rendering Use the Copy Button to copy a shape to a different elevator level Paint Environment 4 268 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual h Inbetweenin Shapes Inbetweening E Add Kf Del Kf Copy Link Replace Kf clockwis Move Prev Kf pt Move Next Kf pt Figure 4 84 Shapes Inbetweening Area The Shapes Inbetweening section at the top of the Shapes Popup is used to create intermediate key frames of shapes between shapes that you create using the standard Shapes tools Thus for instance you could create a triangle and a star at two different keyframes and using in betweening create a shape that is between a triangle and a star To activate Shapes Inbetweening press on the Shapes Inbetweening Button at the top of the Shapes Popup Shapes Inbetweening Timeline This timeline is similar to the Morph Timeline You can add delete and copy keyframes or shapes along the length of the Timeline Controls are also pro vided to manipulate the points in a shape so you can adjust how one shape changes into another Press and
156. of the Configuration Environment include Customizing menu colors Configuring screen resolution and animation frame rate Setting Fast RAM Temporary Picture and Mask Buffers Creating renaming and deleting directories e Configuring video recording devices Adding or deleting user accounts from the login list Installing software options Displaying information about your version of Liberty Choosing a cursor style e Modifying settings for the pen and tablet Revision A 3 1 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation The top part of the Configuration Environment con sists of the color palette for customizing the colors of the menu The bottom two thirds of the screen contains four panel menus which can be replaced by other panel menus as needed At the bottom of the screen is a horizontal row of ten buttons called the panel call buttons Press one of these buttons and then press anywhere in a current panel menu to replace it with the new one From left to right the Panel Call Buttons of the Configuration Environment call up The User Management Panel The Canvas Configuration Panel The Menu Configuration Panel The Directory Configuration Panel Video Configuration Panel Video Framer Panel Undo Panel Option Management Panel Cursor Configuration Panel The Tablet Configuration Panel Configuration Environmen
157. of the original image but blurred accord ing to the Blur Sliders In Light Mode the object is pasted as a lighter or darker silhouette over the Canvas However there must be some picture information on the Canvas for this mode to brighten or darken If the Canvas is empty this mode will do nothing and you should use Palette Mode When you have chosen Light Mode a slider scale is displayed the Light Slider Asin other paste modes use the Light Slider to set the brightness or darkness of the pasted image The slider has a range from 100 to 200 Anything below zero darkens the Canvas anything above zero brightens The OK Erase and Cancel Buttons Perform the final paste by pressing the OK Button Press the Erase Button to perform the final paste after erasing the Canvas Press the Cancel Button to remove the popup without performing the paste The Paste Color Elevator You can save settings of the popup in the six levels of the elevator giving each level a name with the Name Button Revision A 4 117 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 9 7 Paste Shadow Mode Paste Shadow Mode works like Paste Normal but also creates and pastes an automatic drop shadow for the pasted contents of the Temp Buffer Paste Shadow Popup The Paste Shadow commands are similar to Paste Color commands with the addition of controls for transparency and the shadow angle and offset In Paste Shadow moving the pen on
158. only uses the gray scale of whatever image you assign but it can be a full color image e Press the Ncols Button and type in the num ber of colors you want to use in the palette For example you might type 8 The cycle will be comprised of the 8 topmost leftmost colors in the palette e Press the Edit Col Button to bring up the Color Palette If you try to call up the palette when Nools is at 0 you get an error message No colors change Ncols This is a palette for just this Actor and has no relation to the palette in the Paint Environment Set some of the top color boxes in the palette to colors that you want to be in your cycle e Press the Edit Col Button a second time to remove the color palette Turn on the mode you want the Actor to use The selected colors will be applied to the levels of gray in the file you assigned to the actor The first color selected in the palette top most left most is Animation Environment 5 160 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual assigned to the darkest color in the gray scale image The cycle travels from light to dark To reverse direction you must invert the values of the original gradation in the file you save to disk See Color Correct Popup on page 4 301 for more informa tion Color table File Button Press to call up the File Popup and choose an image file whose gray scale the Color table actor will use to cycle colors through Any image fil
159. or green areas of the Canvas This fine tunes how much blue or green keys out from the Canvas When you pick blue or green colors from the Canvas the colors are added to the color swatch labeled picked cols which displays the range of colors being keyed out The clr button clears the picked colors and resets the swatch to a default color sample Chroma Key Settings Elevator The Chroma Key Popup contains a 6 level elevator that allows you to set up and save 6 sets of parame ters You can name each level using the text window above the elevator Chroma Key Control Sliders Strength Slider The Key Control Sliders include the main chroma key control tool the Strength Slider near the middle of the popup The Strength Slider controls how much blue or green is keyed out The higher the slider the more blue or green is keyed out Paint Environment 4 356 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Tune Slider The Tune Slider provides a secondary strength con trol Although you will often leave it at a value of one a higher value causes more blue green to be keyed out while a lower value causes less blue green to be keyed out Its effects are slightly differ ent from the Strength Slider and allows more fine tuning of the key Clip Colors Sliders The Clip Colors Sliders provide additional ways to adjust the chroma key Alpha Slider Use the Alpha Slider with two slider markers to clip the key
160. or more layers Temp Buffers Liberty provides Source and Target Set up Menus which allow you to configure your source devices and target record devices for rotoscoping For example you could composite two video clips from separate VTRs along with a sequence of images from the hard drive One clip could go to the Can vas another clip to Layer 1 and the image sequence to Layer 2 Then each time you press the Roto But ton all three sources are updated to their respective buffers You could then modify and composite the frames using Liberty s many imaging tools before each composited frame is recorded Note that Liberty s rotoscoping tools are an enhancement in the Paint Environment of the similar capability in the Animation Environment where you can configure multiple source devices using Film strip Actors and other types of actors in the Ani mation Timeline NOTE The Source and Target Set up Popups are identical in appearance except that the Source Popup has a large blue button at the top labeled Source and the Target Set up Popup has a large pink button at the top labeled Target Each popup provides for the configuration of six possible devices VTRs DDRs etc and six possible disk paths Revision A 4 433 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual R Set up Popup TARGET Devices YTR 1 16 34 52 2 08 88 88 HIM 800 80 80 PLUME 00 86 86 fhdi sierratrms aB Liberty i 7 68 88 R
161. picks up image from the crosshair and paints with it at the cur sor If you want to reset the offset use either the Paint Environment 4 278 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual button on the barrel of the pen available on all but the older model Wacom tablets or the mid dle mouse button Duplicate Paint Duplicate Paint Mode works exactly like Clone Paint except that the offset origin returns to the same place each time you lift the pen mouse This is useful for repeatedly copying the same object to dif ferent places on the Canvas for example replicating trees This tool is sometimes called non aligned Clone Reveal Paint Reveal Paint uses the contents of the Temp Buffer as a source instead of the current color It reveals the contents of the Temp Buffer into the Canvas while you paint The lower the setting of the Transparency Slider the more gradually reveal painting takes place Reveal Paint with Color Paints the color of the contents of the Temp Buffer into the Canvas while preserving the luminance of the Canvas image Only paints into image areas of the canvas Reveal Paint with Hue Paints the hue of the contents of the Temp Buffer into the Canvas while preserving the saturation of the Canvas image Maintains highlights Only paints into image areas of the canvas Revision A 4 279 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Reveal Paint with Luminance Pai
162. plays the currently selected Palette colors that will be used to generate the noise To turn the Palette Button off just press on one of the Color Control Buttons Hue Saturation Bright ness etc and noise will be applied to that channel of the image on the Canvas instead of to the Palette colors Noise Modes Press on one of the Noise Modes to highlight it You can control how the Uniform and Gaussian Modes are applied to the Canvas by adjusting the HSV and RGB sliders at the left You can further control the Clouds Fibers Marble and Fabric Modes by also adjusting the X Scale Y Scale Levels and Time sliders on the left Marble and Fabric Modes can be given additional control by adjusting the Warp Slider X Scale Slider Provides control of the width of the noise for Clouds Fibers Marble and Fabric Modes Revision A 4 307 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Y Scale Slider Provides control of the height of the noise for Clouds Fibers Marble and Fabric Modes Levels Slider Provides control of the amount of granularity of the noise for Clouds Fibers Marble and Fabric Modes The higher the setting the more grainy the noise Warp Slider Provides control of the warp distortion of the noise for Marble and Fabric Modes Marble Mode is directional controlled by the setting of the Direction Clock near the Brush Display at the top left of the Paint Environment To se
163. polated from other matchsticks For example if there are three keyframes on the timeline and the first one is completely transparent and the last one is completely opaque then the middle one does not need to have a transparency specified It will have no light green dot but it will still be halfway trans parent interpolating its value from the other two keyframes When an animation is saved to disk all its keyframe data is saved as well 5 5 2 Adding and Editing Keyframes Use the Edit Keyframe Menu to add keyframes to the Keyframe Timeline You can add as many key frame matchsticks as you want anywhere on the Keyframe Timeline Animation Environment 5 70 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE There can be at most one keyframe per field on the Timeline A warning message will be displayed if the user attempts to add a keyframe to a field already containing one If the actor has no curve path any added keyframes take their X Y positions from the original position of the image file as saved on the disk If the actor has no curve path and you change the X Y positions of a keyframe on the screen Liberty creates and dis plays a curve path accordingly see details of editing keyframes page 5 70 Add Keyframe Button To add a keyframe to the Keyframe Timeline Press the Add Keyframe Button Press somewhere in the space above the green Keyframe Timeline bar keyframe match stick appears abov
164. press on the Re scale Button to enable it it becomes highlighted causing the rendered images to be re scaled before being recorded The X and Y windows specify the resolution of the re scaled image The Re scale Button controls only the current high lighted device disk path When the Re scale Button is active you can use the X and Y windows to enter new resolutions in pixels for the images to be re scaled to Paint Environment 4 456 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Dropframe Button Press the Dropframe Button to turn it on off When on recording takes place in Dropframe Mode Preroll Button The default preroll is 5 seconds On some VTRs you may want to set up a shorter preroll but be care ful that you don t create locking problems by giving it too shorta setting If you are experiencing locking problems you may want to set the preroll at longer than 5 seconds The range is 1 to 10 seconds Rotoscope Button Roto When you have set up the source and target devices press Roto to record the current Canvas to the target device s and fetch the next frame from the source device s Use the First Button for the first roto scope frame fetch only no record Use the Last Button for the last rotoscope frame record only no fetch 4 23 DISK PANEL MENU pom RR L Delefe Mave Copy Browse ft Figure 4 152 Disk Panel Revision A 4 457 Paint Environment C
165. press the Enter key The File Popup disappears and the operation is performed Paint Environment 4 206 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Plus Button 4 When you press the Plus Button it looks for a num ber in the current filename adds 1 to it and per forms the operation Minus Button v When you press the Minus Button it looks for a number in the current filename subtracts 1 from it and starts the operation as if the Enter key had been pressed When the number reaches zero it will not golower The Plus and Minus buttons do not recog nize negative numbers Use the Plus and Minus Buttons to increment and decrement filenames when saving or recalling a series of consecutively numbered files especially when using Macros For more information about Macros see page 4 413 Filename list in the File Popup The standard File Popup lists up to 10 or 14 filena mes and has buttons to scroll the list up and down Each line of the file list consists of a filename in upper and lower case preceded by a color bullet describing the type of the file The colors of the bul lets are coded to match the colored bars in the File Mode Button The colors also match the colored bars of the Panel Menus File Mode Button The File Mode Button is a colored bar in the File Popup labeled Canvas by default It allows you to choose different options when you use Save Recall or another file operation F
166. reset the sliders to defaults The defaults con vert Cineon log data to linear format during recall and linear data back to log format during save A Convert Off Button disables the effect of the sliders so that image data is read written exactly as is This concludes the section on the Set up menus for individual file formats We now resume the discus sion of the buttons in the File Save As popup Re scale On Save This function calls up the Re scale Popup to allow you to re scale the file when saving it See page 4 162 Paint Environment 4 198 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Press the Rescale On Button to activate it then press the in the inset window to call up the Re scale Popup Setup Button Each file format has its own setup controls When a file format is high lighted on the Save As Popup press the Setup Button to see its Setup Popup Some file formats require no setup controls for example Prisms files are always saved as RGBA 32 bits per pixel For such file formats the setup button is grayed out Shrink wrap Mode Button When on saves only the image within its bounding box not the transparent background When shrink wrap is off the size of the saved image will be the same as the current canvas size Compress Button When on compresses Softimage Targa and PDI files Rescale Button This button brings up the File Rescale Popup described on pa
167. resolution not the larger image resolution The recalled image is truncated to the configured canvas resolution Set Magnify Button The Set Button is the easiest way to magnify the Canvas Press it to turn it on off While it is on each time you press on the Canvas the magnification increases one level To use the Set Magnify Button Press to turn on Press on the position on the Canvas where you want to center the magnified image Each time you press the Canvas is magnified by a factor of 2 2X 4X 8X etc up to 32X 16X on some platforms centering where you press When you have magnified the picture you can pan around it by turning on the CanvDrag button and pressing dragging the Canvas You can also use the Canvas Buffer in the Buffers Panel at the left of the Canvas to pan around in a magnified pic ture Thus you can quickly pan around a magni fied picture while for instance simultaneously painting on it Press Set Magnify again to turn it off Revision A 4 65 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Zoom In Button The Zoom In Button is a quick way to magnify but without much control of where the magnified pic ture centers Press to increase the current magnification by 2X The center of the displayed picture remains constant If bound to a keyboard key see the Macro Panel Menu page 4 68 pressing the key centers the dis played picture around the current pen position on the Canv
168. s need to have a user account named guest with the pass word anonymous In addition the SGI system s etc hosts file needs to contain an entry for the still store host system this can also be set up using the System Manager menu in the SGI desktop Paint Environment 4 186 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual toolchest Also networking needs to be set up on the Still Store system itself refer to the User Manual or Chyron Customer Support for instructions The Liberty software generates an FIP script to do the transfer The script is equivalent to the following commands gt ftp in lt still store host name gt gt user guest anonymous gt binary gt put lt local file path gt lt file path on still store gt gt close gt quit The above commands are run for the still store image file the thumbnail TN file and the data base information file ImageStore Check for Overwrite When a file is being written to the ImageStore Lib erty queries the ImageStore database to see if the file already exists If it does a confirmation pop up appears allowing the user to either overwrite the file or cancel the operation If the user confirms over write of the file it will be written to the ImageStore and the ImageStore database will be updated accord ingly This write will overwrite the old copy of the file unless the old copy of the file was in a different location on the ImageStore or on a
169. select an actor by pressing on it in the Timeline the popup menu for that actor appears at the right of the Timeline Use the buttons on this popup to edit the actor You can select only one actor for editing at a time To edit the functions of an actor press on the actor in the Timeline The actor becomes underlined in white Its Actor Popup appears at the right of the Timeline containing the data for that actor begin ning and ending frame numbers filename etc The two top rows and one bottom row of the Actor Popups always have the same buttons The middle section of the Actor Popup varies with actor type Revision A 5 57 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Actor Name Window You can assign a name to any actor simply as a reminder of the contents of the actor but it s not nec essary to give an actor a name To assign a name to an actor or change the current name e Press the Actor Name Window e Type a name for the actor The name you type appears in the Actor Name Window The actor keeps this name until you change it Actor Loops Window The Actor Loops Window allows you to type in a number for how many times the actor is to repeat Only the individual actor repeats not the entire ani mation To set the number of times the actor is to repeat e Press the Actor Loops Window Type in the number of times you want the actor to repeat The new number appears in the Actor Loops
170. slider Line Morph Reset Button Press to delete all line segments and reset the morph keyframes are deleted You are prompted Restarted LMORPH Please enter line segments Line Morph Lock Button Initially the morph is unlocked meaning that you are editing the first keyframe and no other key frames exist Once the first keyframe is complete pressing Lock creates the corresponding end key frame which you then edit to define the distortion After pressing Lock you can still add delete or move line segments You only have to press Lock once when you ve set the first keyframe points Revision A 4 479 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Line Morph Test Button Position the slider pointer under the morph key frame whose distortions you want to check Press the Line Morph Test button to go into Test Mode When you press on the Canvas the pixel you press jumps to its original source position and shows as a dot in the alternate color The distance of the dis played dot from the pressed pixel shows you the magnitude and direction of the distortion of that pixel Press Done or another Line Morph button to terminate Test Mode Line Morph Recall and Save buttons The Line Morph Recall button recalls a previously saved Line Morph from disk Pressing on it brings up the file recall menu allowing the user to browse directories and select a file to recall The Line Morph Save button sa
171. tangents If the tangents of two adja cent curve points for example point straight at each other directionally then increasing their length Revision A 4 259 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation doesn t make the curve curvier at all The tangents have to be angled somewhat away from each other for the curve to get curvier Resolution Button Press the Resol button to display the current resolu tion of the curve Default is 35 line segments between points Type in a new number to change the resolution Typing 1 gives straight lines between the points Reverse Points Button The Rev button reverses the order of two selected points To reverse the order of two points e Select the points to be swapped Select just the two points to be swapped e Press the Rev Button to swap the order of the two selected points The curve display adjusts to follow the new order Point List Button The Point List Button is only enabled if you have Liberty s Animation Option When editing an Ani mation actor s path using the Edit Path button in the actor edit menu press the Point List button to recall a Point File Point Files are created with the Motion Tracking function in the Image Tools2 panel when the track ing function is in Point mode tracking a single point in the image The Point File is read in as a curve to be used as a path in the animation actor For exam Paint Environment 4 260 Re
172. the mixer Adjust Button This allows you to modify the entire Mixer area using HSV sliders Single Color amp Multi Color Modes The Color Slider Scales work both in Single and Multi color Modes In Single color Mode they show the values for the single current color In Multi color Mode they show the values for the range of underlined colors Paint Environment 4 50 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual In Single color Mode each slider scale has one pointer indicating its setting In Multi color Mode each slider scale has as many pointers as there are colors chosen in the Palette Press on the arrow buttons at the top and bottom of the slider scales to change the value by one unit at a time The number windows at the bottom of each Slider Scales display the numerical setting of that Slider Scale Press on the window and type in a new num ber followed by the Enter key to change the setting of that slider In Multi color mode the number win dows show whichever color has most recently been changed on that slider So in Multicolor Mode each number window can display the value for a different color To use the Color Sliders to change one color Single color Mode Turn off Multi color if not already off and choose the color on the palette to be changed e Press on a slider scale and drag it to a new position The current color changes accordingly in real time Or Press anywhere on the s
173. the motion path of an animation actor A corner file is recalled into the Keyframe Timeline of an animation actor Luminance H S V R G and B Buttons The Motion Tracking function uses one of these components to track an area on the Canvas Lumi nance is the most common Choose the mode to use that will best isolate the element you want to track For example if tracking a yellow sign highlight the R amp G buttons OK and Cancel Buttons Press OK to start processing the Motion Tracking function All the points are calculated and saved into the currently designated Output File The Can cel Button brings down the popup without starting the tracking while maintaining the current values If the software is unable to track a point in a given frame an error message will appear in the prompt window and tracking will halt If this occurs try Animation Environment 5 212 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual increasing the size or move dimensions or try using a different color component H S V R G B etc As tracking proceeds a red wireframe bounding box is drawn on the canvas when each point is found in the current frame This gives the user a visual cue that the tracking is proceeding correctly Separating Points from Image with Warp Corners To separate the corner points from the tracked image use Warp Corners Mode in the Paste Distort Popup in the Paint Environment For example i
174. the Move button Enter the maximum movement per frame you expect the area to move in pixels Press the OK button The system will automatically recall each cel in the sequence analyze the position of the selected area draw a bounding box on the canvas of the new position and then recall the next cel NOTE It is recommend that you watch the processing of the tracking data to ensure that the reference wireframe is corresponding to the selected area If not press the END key on the keyboard increase the values in the SIZE and or MOVE windows and press the OK button again Compositing Tracked Element Animation Environment 1 2 Go to the Animation Environment Press the red corner box of the Delete Button to delete all layers currently in the animation timeline Press in the Actor Type popup of the Add Actor button Select the Filmstrip actor type Revision A 5 215 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 Press the Add Actor button and click twice quickly on Layer 1 of the timeline to add the Filmstrip actor to the timeline 6 Click on the File window and select the same file sequence filmstrip as selected in step 2 above 7 Click on the In window and select the starting cel This should match the same number as in Step 3 above 8 Click on the Out window This number should match the number entered in Step 4 above 9 Add a second actor to the timeline on Layer
175. the Reset Button resets only the active setting of that effect soft reset If no distort effects are active pressing Reset resets all the settings in the Distort Popup including any changes made to the Eye settings Warp Corners When the Transform Warp Button label says Trans form press it to change to Warp Corners mode the Transform Warp Button is above the Center and Inplace buttons The current Perspective Trans form wireframe is mapped to a Warp Corners wire frame This allows you to do touch up work on the three dimensional distortion NOTE For Warp Corners to work the wireframe must form a convex polygon If the wireframe becomes concave any active paste preview stops updating and the wireframe changes colors To correct this move the corner outward until the wireframe becomes convex Revision A 4 135 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Warp Popup Preview Image Erase Corner A 1 Y Cancel Filter BiLinear 6 88 8 88 Corner m a ana X y name of settings Warp Corners 1251 8 8 88 Center Inp1 Adjust Corner C 1 888 ace Y 1261 9 265 88 Pen Position 4 636 56 Y Corner D R Y Distort 132 58 8 88 265 68 Paste Modes Figure 4 48 Warp Popup The Warp Corners Popup is much simpler than the Perspective Transform Popup Warp generates the entire three dimensional world simply by interpret ing how you defo
176. the Timeline its type corresponding to the type of the selected actor Animation Environment 5 104 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Actor Type Button At the bottom right of any Actor Popup is the Actor Type Button It displays the name and color of the type of actor currently selected in the Timeline Pressing the center of the colored window calls up the Actor Type Popup Pressing either end of the colored window moves through the actor types You can use this button to change the type of the currently selected actor This can be extremely use ful For example if you have decided to use a single unchanging image instead of a filmstrip you need only change the actor type to Cel change it from Multiple to Single and you can still retain all the keyframe and path information To change the type of the selected actor e Press the Actor Type Button The Actor Type Popup appears Press the button for the actor type you want to change to The Actor Type Popup disappears and the selected actor in the Timeline changes color to its new type File Button Press on the text window labeled File to bring up the File Popup You can then specify a file for the actor Recall Cel Button Press to Recall the actor s image file into the Can vas Revision A 5 105 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Edit Path Button Press to call up the Curve Path Popup You can use this popup to
177. the active Under Prefix to turn it off while using the function Add Prefix Button The Add Prefix causes a function to add its result to another Mostly used with elevator levels for example one temporary buffer can be added to another Revision A 4 61 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To add an elevator level or other item to another e Press the source elevator box or other item to be added Press the Add Prefix Button e Press the elevator box or other item to be added to The Add takes place For instance one Temp elevator level is pasted on top of another You can also press Add then Recall to recall a pic ture from disk on top of the current Canvas picture rather than the screen being automatically erased first Copy Prefix Button The Copy Prefix copies one item to another Itis often used to copy one elevator level to another or one palette color box to another Its second function is In place for instance pressing the Copy Prefix then pressing the Paste Button pastes the element into its original position on screen rather than requiring manual placement See 4 9 5 for more details on the Paste function To copy one item to another Press the source item to be copied elevator box palette box etc e Press the Copy Prefix Button e Press the target item to be copied to The source is copied to the target Paint Environment 4 62 Revision A Lib
178. the entire Can vas whether or not a mask is active Recall from Temp Button the gt button Press to recall the contents of the Temp into the Canvas The current contents of the Canvas are first erased Layers Button The Layers Button is a mode button that allows you to turn on off Layers Mode which displays one or more of the Temps as layers over the Canvas Press the Layers Button to turn it on The button is highlighted and the contents of the active Temp lay ers are displayed over the Canvas When you press the Layers Button again to turn it off the layered Temp images disappear from the Canvas Revision A 4 85 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Layers In this document the terms Temps Temp Buff ers and layers are used more or less interchange ably There is a subtle difference between Temps and layers however in that only Fast Temps Temps stored in RAM can be active layers Pro vided you have enough RAM on your hardware platform it may be convenient for you to put all of your Temps into RAM Liberty allows you to configure a number of Temps as active layers which can be simultaneously over laid over or under the Canvas Pressing and drag ging a layers image on the Canvas moves the image to anew position Then when all the layers are posi tioned to your satisfaction you call up the Layers Popup and press the Composite Button to paste the layers onto the Ca
179. the magnified picture will fill the entire screen replacing the menus The F8 keyboard key serves the same pur pose as the Canvas Menus button NOTE When you press the Canvas Button it automatically zooms the Canvas image so that it fills the screen The exceptions to this are 1 If you ve already zoomed when you press Canvas your current magnification is preserved and 2 If the image is too big to fit into the standard Canvas screen no zoom is performed Magnify Mode Button Press to turn on or turn off Magnification Mode If you press it when the Canvas is not magnified the previous level of magnification is restored centered on the center of the screen If you press it when the Canvas is magnified the magnification 1s turned off When Magnification is off the Magnify Button is a quick way to return to the previous magnification When Magnification is on the Magnify Button is a quick way to turn it off Full Button Press the Full Button to turn it on off The Canvas display scales to fit inside the Canvas window regardless of resolution Paint Environment 4 64 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Use Full page Mode for resolutions that are larger than the available picture area All Paint functions work in this mode NOTE If the resolution of a stored image recalled into the Canvas is larger than the Canvas resolution pressing the Full button will only display the maximum canvas
180. to control how you playback the animation The Animation Menu Play Replay Figure 5 4 Animation VTR Menu The Animation VTR Menu is for controlling source and target recording devices If you want to perform rotoscoping use the VTR Menu in the Paint Envi ronment The Filmstrip Actor can also use a recording device as a source in an animation see below page 5 46 The Animation VTR Menu works the same as the VTR Menu in the Paint except that the rotoscope functions are missing Revision A 5 11 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Source Button src Press to enable the Source VTR When this button is highlighted all the VTR control Play Stop etc buttons apply to the source machine With the Source Button highlighted press the Setup Button to call up the Source VTR Setup Popup Target Button tar Press to enable the Target or Record VTR When this button is highlighted all the VTR control but tons Play Stop etc apply to the record device With the Target Button highlighted press the Setup Button to call up the Target VTR Setup Popup Timecode Window This window displays the timecode setting for the current device source or target The timecode win dow does not update continuously because VTRs have different pre roll periods which can cause con tinuous timecode reference to get lost This global timecode window refers only to the single current
181. to restore the previous set of images in the Canvas and each active layer You can access Lay ers Undo through the Undo Browse Popup press the Browse Undo Button in the Brush Panel by tog gling the popup s colored mode button to Layers Mode which displays the levels of Layers Undo Note that Layers Undo does not reset the time codes in the VTR panel For example if you use Layers Paint Environment 4 450 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Undo to go back two levels you will need to decre ment each active source and target timecode by two Then rotoscoping can proceed from that point Chyron Motion File Format With this file format you can render animations to a format that contains all the frames under a single file name When the render is finished you can transfer the file to the iNFiNiT for realtime playback The Animation Environment Section 5 has the same access to saving in the Chyron Motion File Format Note that when saving to a Chyron Motion File the disk path s frame numbers must always start with zero For example when recording to a Chyron Motion Path in the Animation Environment the In frame number timecode must be zero or the record will fail This is because the software uses frame zero to trigger the start of a Chyron Motion File Once you ve created a Chyron Motion File how ever you can record to different frames within it by altering the target disk path s frame number acco
182. to save the current picture on the Canvas you must go to the Paint Environment and press Save To save the current animation to the disk e l Press the animation Save Button The File Popup appears 2 Type in a filename for the animation to be saved under or press on an existing filename to save the current animation over the existing animation file If you try to save the animation over an existing file you ll be prompted to confirm that you want to overwrite the existing animation An animation is saved with all its data including Timeline data and data in the Playback Menu such as duration in out times skip in skip out times and hold in hold out times NOTE Save your animations frequently Since they take up almost no disk space you can save sev eral versions of an animation as you work good insurance in case you need to go back to an earlier version Revision A 5 35 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Automatic Animation Save on Exiting Liberty When you log out of Liberty the current animation is saved and restored to the Timeline the next time you log in to your User Login Account This can be especially handy in the admittedly extremely unlikely event of a crash Check Animation Button Press to make sure that all files required for the cur rent animation exist If all the files called for in the animation exist in the right place you are prompted Animation is OK If an
183. to the Cel Actor you just added This will be the image that starts the morph e Adda Cel Actor to the layer above the Morph Actor Again the Cel Actor should have the same begin and end numbers as the Morph Actor Animation Environment 5 196 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Assign a disk image file to this Cel Actor as you did with the previous one This will be the image that ends the morph Press the lower Cel Actor to select it Press the Recall Cel Button in the Cel Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline The start ing image for the morph is recalled to the Canvas so that you can refer to it while setting the begin ning of the morph On the Timeline press the Morph Actor to select it Press the Morph Between Button in the Morph Actor Popup at the right of the Time line This sets the actor to morph between two images Press the Edit Triangles Button in the Morph Actor Popup The Triangle Morph Popup appears If an existing morph appears on the Canvas press the Reset Button twice quickly to reset the morph The Prompt Window at the top of the Canvas displays the message Please specify a bounding box on Canvas For a but ton by button description of the Triangle Morph Popup see page 5 139 Define a bounding box around the area you want to morph Press down once to set the first corner of the bounding box Without dragging move the cursor to the diagonally opposite cor ner and press down a sec
184. transparent background Invert Matte records animating elements black on white Ring Bell When Ring Bell Mode is on Liberty will emit a bell like tone when an animation finishes rendering Create Log When Create Log Mode is on the progress of the animation is printed frame by frame in the shell out side of Liberty Revision A 5 257 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Animation Environment 5 258 Revision A Abekas 3 38 Accent Panel Menu text 4 411 Accent Position Button 4 412 accents 4 411 Accept Edit Button 4 425 Action Button 4 220 Action Popup 4 220 Actor Popup Menu 5 57 Actor Type Button 5 65 Begin and End Windows 5 56 5 59 Edit Keyframe Button 5 60 Edit Path Button 5 60 Name Window 5 58 Actor Popup Menus 5 104 Actor Type Popup 5 45 actors animation 5 5 5 44 adding 5 51 assigning an image to 5 105 changing types 5 105 copying 5 54 deleting 5 52 editing 5 50 looping 5 58 moving 5 53 5 59 naming 5 58 paths 5 71 5 106 stretching 5 55 5 59 turning off 5 53 Revision A Index 1 CHYRON Corporation Add Keyframe Button 5 71 Add Prefix Button 4 61 Add User Button 3 11 adding actors 5 51 Adjust Button Color Mixer Mode 4 50 Adjust Mask Button 4 372 Air Brush Mode 4 26 Align Text Button 4 405 alpha value 4 23 Alt Style Mode 3 32 animation fades 5 82 Animation Environment 5 1 Animation Peek Bar 5 227 animation playback functions 5 222 Animati
185. unchanged Raising the value of the slider decreases brightness Plus mode is good for compositing transparent ele ments such as flame smoke or ghost effects Animation Environment 5 156 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Subtract Mode top bot When this mode is enabled the pixels of the bottom layer are subtracted from the pixels of the top layer This causes brightness to decrease so a slider is pro vided to offset low brightness The bottom or zero slider setting leaves the resulting brightness unchanged Raising the value of the slider increases brightness Subtract Mode works in a similar way to the Differ ence Matte function For instance in a medical imaging application an x ray of an arm with no sen sitive fluid in the veins might be subtracted from the same image with sensitizing fluid in the veins The difference the veins only would be composited Multiply Mode top bot When this mode is enabled the pixels of the bottom layer are multiplies by the pixels of the top layer This can cause brightness to greatly increase so a slider is provided to offset excessive brightness The bottom or zero slider setting leaves the result ing brightness unchanged Raising the value of the slider decreases brightness Divide Mode top bot When this mode is enabled the pixels of the top layer are divided by the pixels of the bottom layer This causes brightness to decrease so a slider is pr
186. up infinit user name guest C INFINIT MESSAGE password temp dir usr tmp infinit 1 mi NTSC FAL 13 5 MHZ Figure 4 65 iNFiNiT Setup Menu With the INFINIT button high lighted on the Save As popup press the Setup Button to call up the INFINIT Setup Menu The INFINIT Set up menu has two sets of text fields for user input These are in columns labeled remote system and FTP set up along the top of the menu The text fields in each column are described in the following sections Revision A 4 189 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Remote system These set up transfer of the image to the infinit enode Network host name of the system that will receive the full resolution still store file e g infinit1 epathDisk directory path on the system where image file will be stored e g C INFINIT STILLS FTP set up controls This section of the set up menu contains the follow ing fields user name The name of a user account on the remote system for infinit systems this is often guest epassword The password of the user account on the remote sys tem for infinit systems this is often anonymous temp dir This is the path of a temporary directory to store files on the local system This is most often set to usr tmp FTP Button Turn the FTP button ON if you want to automati cally transfer the files over the network
187. user name used to log on to the remote sys tem such as guest This user name must corre spond to a user account on the remote system Password Enter the password used to log on to the remote sys tem This password must correspond to the pass word for the user account on the remote system Temp Directory Enter a temporary directory on the local hard drive where temporary files can be stored Normally this is set to usr tmp but you can specify a different location if space is tight on the usr drive All files browsed or recalled via FTP pass through this tem porary directory so it needs at least a few megabytes of free space FTP Settings Elevator Use the six levels of the elevator to save settings for different remote hosts directories Note on Browse Images Any ImageStor files or other browsable file formats in the remote directory display as thumbnails when the File Manager is in browse mode Images with browse thumbnails embedded in their images are not displayed because the entire image would have to be recalled in order to display the thumbnail which would be too slow Paint Environment 4 146 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To access a remote host via FTP ec I Press the main FTP Button The File Manager comes up displaying the specified directory on the specified remote host 2 Press on a filename or browse image The file is recalled to the Canvas as in normal non
188. 2 Playback Buttons Press to turn on Pressing the Run Button with this mode on renders the animation at full resolution out to the current target video recording device or hard disk Background Render You can record to a recording device in the back ground while at the same time running a second version of Liberty To render an animation in the background Save a version of the animation that is ready to render You must save the animation with the correct in time Holdin Skipin Dur etc are also saved in the animation file 7525 Set all record parameters This includes everything on the Target Setup Menu the appropriate device etc Its important to set each VTR s destination correctly or if only using one VTR to make it the current VTR Everything in the Run Popup fields vs frames etc is also saved in the database file when you exit Liberty e 3 Exit Liberty 4 In a shell type liberty32 b path filename amp For example liberty32 b usr people liberty Revision A 5 255 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation image local hdO0 anim1 an amp The animation begins to render 5 Start another version of Liberty You can start Liberty from the desktop or from another shell When using Liberty avoid initializing the record device Any changes you make in the record parameters will not affect the animation that is currently being background rendered Note If you w
189. 371 Revision A 4 371 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 18 8 Adjust Mask Button Gaussian Alur Blue Inside Contour Contour Grow Shr ink Median Figure 4 119 Adjust Mask Modes The Adjust Mask modes adjust the current active mask by a user defined number of pixels Press in the text window in the Adjust Mask Button to see all seven modes Press on one of the modes to make it active The seven Adjust Mask modes are Blur Mask Mode Blurs the active mask by the designated number of pixels on all edges This mode is useful in anti aliasing edges on a mask Gaussian Blur Mask Mode Gaussian Blur provides a smoother and cleaner curve weighted blur effect than the standard faster Blur Mode Median Mode Averages masked pixels with their neighbors Has the effect of eliminating grainy noise in a mask Paint Environment 4 372 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Grow Mode Make the active mask grow by the designated num ber of pixels on all edges Shrink Mode Make the active mask shrink by the designated num ber of pixels on all edges Contour Mask Mode Traces the outside contour of the active mask using a width of the designated number of pixels This mode has the effect of making a ring around the active mask on all edges Grows the mask when making the ring Inside Contour Mode Same as Contour Mode but traces the inside contour
190. 4 150 Show Button eee 40755 Show POopUp inten eerte ee tet Ode a 4 155 Showing Video from a Disk Array 4 156 RECALL SAVE FILE FUNCTIONS 4 158 Recall File Button eeseseessessss 4 158 Table of Contents viii Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual File Path 4 159 4 11 2 Recall Corner Button sss 42159 Recall File 4 160 Rescale and Orientation On Buttons 4 160 Rescale PopUp a rp 4 162 Recalling Using Wildcards 4 166 4 11 3 Save BUttOn eai onini tosadusenb in eue ice nada naX 4 167 File Path Elevator cesses 4 167 Save Corner Button 4 168 4 11 4 Save File As Button e ceeeeeeee nennen 4 169 Save File As Popup eee 4 170 GIF File Format sse 4 175 GIF Setup 4 175 IMAGESTOR File 4 177 IMAGESTOR Setup 4 179 FTP set up
191. 4 463 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Current Frame shows the number of the frame being viewed on the monitor The arrow buttons can be used to view the next previous frame in memory or a number can be typed in and the image with that frame number will be shown on the monitor If the image source is set to Video instead of Memory there will be no current frame and a row of asterisk will appear in Current Frame Various factors can affect the state of memory The buttons Grab 1 Clear and Clear AII affect memory and will be described shortly Changing the resolution Res or turning color grabbing on off Color In will affect the number of frames that can be stored For example in high resolution color grabbing 7 images can be stored but in low resolution color grabbing 123 images can be stored If either of these fields is reset frame memory will be cleared frames that were stored will be lost in anticipation of starting over with dif ferent image quality Various command buttons appear along the right side of the Main Menu If the Print button is pressed 1 image will print either from memory or video depending on the image source setting If the Print Seq button is pressed a sequence of images will be printed as the user has specified In order to print a sequence of images the image source must be setto Memory and there should be some frames that have been grabbed and store
192. 55 Mask Grid Buttons coire je tt pe es 4 58 4 4 2 Direction Functions eere 4 58 Direction Button ssesseee eem 4 58 Horizontal Vertical Mode Buttons X and Y 4 59 4 5 PREFIX BUTTONS 12er 4 60 Repeat Prefix Button 4 60 Under Prefix 4 61 Add Prefix 4 61 Copy Prefix Button eee 4 62 Invert Prefix Button 4 63 4 6 MAGNIFY 4 63 Canvas Button sss 4 04 Magnify Mode Button sse 4 64 Full Button iere i it tees 4 64 Set Magnify Button sese 4 65 Zooim Ir BUON s e rt m ety rette tene s 4 66 Zoom Out BUTON e 4 66 CanvDrag Button essen 4 66 Panning with the Alt Key 4 66 4 7 CALCULATOR 5 ntn iiia io So nec 4 67 4 8 BUFFERS PANEL 4 73 Mask Elevator inde ertet ed teneat 4 75 Mask Browse Popup eme 4 77 Fast Masks see EG ieee 4 80 Mask Display Buttons 4 81 MbCPOop p i cerei eee tee deett eei teen pig 492 Ternp EleVatoF certe DEDE 4 84 Global Temp Elevator sse 4 84 Save to Temp Button the lt
193. A 4 389 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Safe Title Popup Safe Action WN 90 Safe Title Show Safe Action Mask Safe A Safe Action Show Safe Title Mask Safe Title zY Aspect Ratio Aspect Ratio 1 36 1 1 36 1 Cross Hair Figure 4 127 Safe Title Popup The Safe Title Popup provides two sets of sliders that define the Safe Action and Safe Title fields You can change the size of the rectangles with the slider scales below the sliders the aspect ratio ratio of width to height of each rectangle is displayed These sliders allow the X and Y size of the rectan gle to be set in terms of percentage of the Canvas size Pressing the Reset button resets the sliders to SMPTE Safe Title and Safe Action fields based on the current canvas resolution The Safe Title Eleva tor stores six different settings Show Safe Action and Show Safe Title To turn on the Safe Action or Safe Title rectangle press the corresponding Show Button A white cen tered cross hair appears with either of the rectangles Press OK to make the Safe Title Popup disappear The Safe Title Button remains highlighted Press the Safe Title Button again to turn it off or press the corner button to bring up the popup again and turn off the Show Buttons The white rectangle is not Paint Environment 4 390 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 19 2 4 19 3 permanent nor is it really a part of th
194. Actor Rendering Modes Hame AU i Begin i End 58 Dutiine Invert Cont UCont 2 Canyas Brush Mode Edit kKeyfr Fdit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 50 Shapes Edit Popup In the Shapes Actor s Actor Edit Menu which appears at the right of the main Animation Timeline when you ve high lighted the Shape Actor a number of rendering modes Choose these by using the Canvas Mode and Mask Mode Buttons which in turn open up a number of variations When in Canvas Mode the Shapes Actor functions much like a Write on Actor Any of the paint modes are used to paint along the outline of the shape or to fill it solidly Both brush size and brush gap are key framable When in Mask Mode the Shapes Actor functions much like a mask Actor All of the effects obtainable through the Mask Actor are applied through the animating shapes onto the layer s below These include effects such as Posterize Blur Noise Brightness etc Revision A 5 191 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Canvas Mode Press to choose Canvas Mode for the Shapes Actor so that the shape paints to the Canvas using the color brush style brush mode and brush parameters set in the Actor Edit Menu and the Keyframe Popup In certain paint modes Reveal Smear it reveals from the Cel Actor below for its effects Choose the Canvas Modes from the bottom three rows of the Actor Edit Menu These include the brush colors brush mode and br
195. Air Solid and Programmed are rou7nd Revision A 4 287 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To access the Pressure Popup e Press the corner button of the Pressure But ton The Pressure Popup appears e Press the modes you want to turn on or off You can use any combination of the modes angle size alpha jitter and color e Press the OK Button The Pressure Popup dis appears The Pressure Button stays on e Proceed to paint on the Canvas Pressure Angle Button With the Pressure Angle mode on the brush rotates clockwise in Z the harder you press Zero pressure equals zero rotation 12 o clock Pressure Angle mode only works with User Defined brushes because all other brushes are round and do not vary when rotated in Z Angle Slider Press and drag the Angle Slider Scale to set the max imum rotation when Pressure Angle mode is on If the Angle Slider is set at 180 then pressing down half way will turn the brush 90 degrees and using full pressure will turn it 180 degrees Pressure Size Button When Pressure Size mode is on brush size varies dynamically with pressure The harder you press the bigger the brush gets With minimum pressure the brush size is the value defined in the Brush Size Slider With maximum pressure the brush size equals the size defined in the Brush Size Slider plus the setting of the Size Increase Slider Paint Environment 4 288 Revision A Liberty Artist s
196. Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 5 3 Copying Keyframes Use the Save Recall Keyframe functions to make copies of matchsticks on the Keyframe Timeline To copy a matchstick e Select the matchstick you want to copy either by pressing on one to highlight it or turning on the All Button under the Keyframe Elevator e Press the Save Keyframe Button to save the selected matchstick s into the current elevator level e Move the selected matchstick in the Keyframe Timeline This is so when you recall the saved matchstick it isn t recalled on top of the original e Press the Recall Keyframe Button The saved matchstick appears in the Keyframe Timeline identical to the original matchstick NOTE You can also copy keyframes by copying the entire actor containing the keyframe s to be copied Another way to copy keyframe data using the Next and Prev Buttons in the Keyframe Distort Popup is discussed on page 5 79 Copying Keyframes to Another Actor You can use the Save Recall Keyframe functions to copy keyframes to another actor This is useful when you have another actor with its own different curve path and you want to copy keyframe data only into that actor without changing its path Animation Environment 5 74 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 5 4 To copy keyframes to another actor Select the matchsticks you want to copy either by pressing on one to highlight it or turning on t
197. Button The Add Button allows you to add the contents of one Temp over another To add one layer over another e l Press the Temp to be added Its border is highlighted e 2 Press the Add Button 3 Press the Temp to be added over The image in the first Temp is added over the second Temp Swap Button The Swap Button allows you to exchange the priori ties of two layers To Swap two layers e 1 Press the first Temp browse image to be swapped Its border is highlighted 2 Press the Swap Button Paint Environment 4 96 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e 3 Press the second Temp to be swapped The images in the two Temps are exchanged Copy Button The Copy Button allows you to copy the contents of one Temp into another To copy one layer into another e lL Press the Temp to be copied Its border is highlighted 2 Press the Copy Button 3 Press the Temp to be copied into The image in the first Temp is copied into the second Temp Move Button The Move Button allows you to move the contents of one Temp into another To move one layer into another e Press the Temp to be moved Its border is highlighted 2 Press the Move Button e 3 Press the Temp to be moved into The image is moved into the target Temp The image already in the target Temp is moved up or down one level so that the effect is that the moved Temp image is inserted into the stack just below t
198. Button to perform the final paste after erasing the Canvas Press the Cancel Button to remove the popup without performing the paste Paint Environment 4 124 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Paste Extrude Elevator You can save settings of the popup in the elevator giving each setting a name with the Name Button 4 9 9 Paste Emboss Mode Paste Emboss is used to automatically emboss the pasted image Preview Palette Palette Erase cancel Final Alpha Alpha Angle of Emboss Alpha HE 1 2 Paste j name of settings Image Adjust Center Inplace Pen Position 315 Direction lt out gt Paste Modes Figure 4 45 Paste Emboss Popup Revision A 4 125 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Paste Emboss Popup The Paste Emboss tools Figure 4 45 are similar to the other paste modes with additional controls for determining the colors and sizes of two opposite directional edges Emboss Angle Button The clock like button is the Emboss Angle Button similar to the Extrusion Angle Button which con trols the angle of the embossed edges The red dot is the active angle the one displayed in the Angle win dow below and the blue dot is always 180 degrees away from it The function buttons alpha color source amp length etc at the left of the Angle Button are linked to the red dot the ones at the right are linked to the blue dot To set the emboss angle press th
199. Buttons are from left to right Transfer Paint Tools Mask Text Macro VTR and Disk 4 2 PAINT BRUSHES Painting is accomplished in Liberty by using one of the four basic types of paint brushes Solid Brush Air Brush Programmed Brush and User defined Brush You can vary the size of all brushes in real time The currently chosen palette color determines the color of the brush and the setting of the Trans parency Slider Scale determines the transparency of the brush 4 2 1 Current Brush Display Solid Air Program User Browse Undo Cursor aih Hel Undo Redo es Figure 4 11 Brush Display The Current Brush Display is a large box at the upper left corner of the Paint Environment It shows the current size color and transparency of the cur Paint Environment 4 20 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual rent brush The background of the brush display can be a single color or diagonally divided between two colors which better displays the transparency of the brush Press anywhere in the Current Brush Display background to toggle between these two modes Color of Displayed Brush Color To make the displayed brush remain a constant fixed color choose underline the palette color you want the brush to be then press the Copy Prefix But ton and press the center of the displayed brush To make the displayed brush show the currently chosen color again turn off all palette colors pres
200. Canvas Press the Move Button on the Triangle Morph Popup then press and drag the control points on the Canvas moving them to outline the image on the Canvas This sets the points defining the final keyframe of the morph For Animation Environment 5 198 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual example if morphing a dog to a snake press and drag the dog s outline points to new positions outlining the snake e Press the Erase OK Button to see the mor phed version of the starting image The Trian gle Morph Popup morphs whatever is in the Temp Earlier you put the starting image in the Temp using Swap Temp Canvas It will be mor phed into its new form This image will never actually appear on the screen but it gives a gen eral idea of what is going to happen It is usually a far exaggerated version though and you must storyboard or final record the animation to see it completely see page 5 251 When testing morph animations set a very low duration 15 to 30 frames depending on the complexity of the morph or whether additional keyframes have been inserted See Triangle Morph Add Key frame Button on page 5 140 e Press the Edit Triangles Button to exit the Triangle Morph Popup The Triangle Morph Popup disappears To morph one image instead of morphing between two you must turn on the Morph Single Button in the Morph Actor Popup In that case you need only one Cel Actor below the Morph Actor Revision
201. Canvas The effect is similar to how a newspaper photo uses a dot screen of a few colors to give the impression of a much higher color resolution The Dither tool is similar to the Posterize tool in that it reduces the number of colors on the Canvas image but Dither provides a greater variety of effects Its controls are similar to the controls provided for saving color mapped GIF and TIFF files in the Save As function see Save File As Button on page 169 To Quantize an area Mask the desired area on the Canvas If there is no mask active on the Canvas the entire Can vas will be quantized e Press the corner button of the Dither Button to call up the Dither Popup The Dither Popup appears If you press the main part of the Dither Button the quantizing is applied according to the current settings e Choose Uniform Mode e Choose both Dither and Noise Modes Be sure Greyscale Mode is turned OFF e Press OK The quantization is applied into the masked area Paint Environment 4 344 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Color Matrix Popup Bias Gain Lanre l 1 9990 Preview active 1 6688 Reset Figure 4 111 Color Matrix Popup Dither Popup levels G levels levels Uniform E 1 Lanno Dither Preview Noise active greyscale Reset Figure 4 112 Dither Popup Revision A 4 345 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The Di
202. Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Source Button SRC Use this button to configure a VTR as the source VTR One VTR can be the source VTR while another VTR can be the target VTR Or the same VTR can be defined as both source and target for grabbing from and recording to the same device You can also select a source VTR in the Paint and Animation Environments Refer to VTR Set up Popup on page 4 435 for details To configure a VTR as the source VTR 1 Press to call up the Source VTR Popup The popup appears 2 Press on one of the 6 VTRs to select it as Source 3 Press the OK button The popup disappears The Source VTR popup also contains a pre roll but ton for setting the number of seconds of pre roll for a VTR connected to a VLAN and a Dropframe but ton for turning drop frame mode on and off for timecodes In addition the Source VTR popup also contains buttons for setting up 6 Disk paths and for re scaling files grabbed recorded from to those disk paths Disk paths are normally set up in the Paint and or Animation environment but the controls are available here and work in a similar manner Refer to the section starting on page 4 428 for details Target Button Tar Use this button to configure a VTR as the target record VTR It works the same as the Source But ton Configuration Environment 3 44 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Comm Button
203. Elevator without ever leaving the File Popup Paint Environment 4 212 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To recall files into several levels of the Temp Elevator 1 2 Press the Repeat Prefix Button to turn it on Press Recall to display the File Popup Press the middle of the File Mode Button where it says Canvas to display the File Mode Popup Press on a level of the Temp Elevator on the File Mode Popup It becomes the active elevator level Press the green Temp Button to activate it The File Mode Popup disappears with the File Popup remaining Press the filename you want to recall into the Temp The file is recalled into the active of the Temp Elevator Since the Repeat Prefix is on the File Popup does not disappear Now repeat steps 3 through 6 to recall files to each additional level of the Temp Elevator that you wish to recall to In this way you can load up all the Temps without ever leaving the File Popup This also works in the Full Screen File menu When finished press Cancel to remove the File Popup Full screen Button Full Press to display the Full screen File Menu Use this button to pictorially Browse the files Refer to the File Manager Button on page 4 219 for details on the full screen File Manager menus used for browsing files Revision A 4 213 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Path Button usr people aurora beta sys 1
204. HYRON Corporation Many of the Disk Panel Functions are short cuts to performing functions that are also found on the Full Screen File Menu The Disk Panel Functions per form their operations on one file at a time while you can operate on many files at one time in the Full Screen File Menu see page 4 217 The Popup for controlling the Hewlett Packard VidJet Pro printer is also on the Disk Panel along with the button for accessing the Artstar optical disk drive 4 23 1 Delete File Button To delete a file e Press the Delete File Button The File Popup appears e Press on a file name you want to delete A confirmation popup appears e Press Yes to confirm the deletion This button may be used with the Repeat prefix to delete multiple files 4 23 2 Move File Button To move a file e Press the Move File Button The File Popup appears e Press on a file name you want to move The File Popup displays all the directories e Press on the target directory The file is moved Paint Environment 4 458 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 23 3 Copy File Button To copy a file e Press the Copy File Button The File Popup appears e Press on a file name you want to copy The File Popup displays all the directories Press on the target directory The file is cop ied 4 23 4 Browse Button This Button calls up the Temp Mask Popup which is usually accessed by pressing the Temp Buffer Window in t
205. IRIS workstation RGB 525 RGB 625 NTSC 525 PAL 625 Custom Video Framer Figure 3 11 Video Framer Panel Revision A 3 47 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 9 OPTION PANEL Hardware Options Avion Centaur Cindy SGI Galileo SGI IMPACT Octane SGI VideoFramer SGI 02 Software Options Expanded Resolution Motion Tracking Cinefusion GIF IFF LZW Compression Active Server Option Management Figure 3 12 The Option Panel The Options Panel lists the available hardware and software options for LIBERTY including different video boards and several optional software pack ages The options that are enabled for your LIB ERTY site are highlighted on the panel Press on an option to enable highlight it If you press on an Configuration Environment 3 48 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 3 9 1 option to highlight it and that option is not licensed an error message appears For licensing procedures see the LIBERTY Technical reference Manual Hardware Options This window lists the video hardware accessories that LIBERTY supports If one of these video I O boards or video accessories is installed in your sys tem select the hardware option so that it is high lighted NOTE It is important to select one installed video board in this list as the Type and Address parameters in the Video Panel will be changed to match the selected video board The available video I
206. ImageStor files whose database fields match the text in the window are listed in the directory listing For example if the field 1 window contains the word people only ImageStor files with people as database field 1 are listed You can also use wildcards in the five filter fields The wildcards have the following meanings matches any number of characters while matches exactly one character For example entering lib lists all files whose corresponding database field starts with the characters lib liberty libera tion etc Entering lib lists all files whose corresponding database field entries start with the characters lib and contain 7 characters exactly Paint Environment 4 234 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual You can use wildcards in multiple places in a text window for more exotic pattern matching For example entering test red would list all files whose corresponding database field starts with test and contains the word red followed by at least 3 more characters OK Button Press the OK Button to remove the Sort Popup Free Space Display Shows the total free space on the disk in KB The value could be 0 for some remote hosts that do not report disk capacity Total Selected Display If anumber of files are selected shows the number of selected files and the total size in KB Very use ful when you need to delete files to free up a specific amount of spac
207. Liberty Paint Liberty 32 64 Artist s Manual An Infinite Freedom Component et INBERTY Chyron Pub No 2A01906 October 1997 CHYRON Corporation Revision A 5 Hub Drive 1997 CHYRON Corporation Melville NY 11747 All Rights Reserved 516 845 1000 CINA FON THE COMPANY TH HOLE WORLD WATCHES CHYRON Corporation FCC Rules and Regulations WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FRE QUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCOR DANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS IT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A COMPUTING DEVICE PUR SUANT TO SUBPART B OF PART 15 OF FCC RULES WHICH ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH INTERFERENCE WHEN OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER AT HIS OWN EXPENSE WILL BE REQUIRED TO TAKE WHATEVER MEASURES MAY BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE Canadian Requirement WARNING THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPART MENT OF COMMUNICATIONS LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N EMET PAS DE BRUITS RADIO ELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAR EILS NUMERIQUES DE LA CLASSE A PRESCRITES DENS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE B
208. Manual Size Increase Slider Press and drag the Size Increase Slider to set the dif ference between the brush sizes at minimum and maximum pressure If the Brush Size Slider is at 10 and the Size Increase Slider is at 40 then the brush size at minimum pressure is 10 and at maxi mum pressure 50 Pressure Alpha Button When Pressure Alpha mode is on brush opacity var ies with pressure The harder you press the more opaque the brush is With minimum pressure the brush is transparent With maximum pressure the brush opacity is defined by the current setting of the Transparency Slider Pressure Jitter Button When Pressure Jitter mode is on the amount of jitter of brush placement varies with pressure At mini mum pressure there is no jitter At maximum pres sure jitter is defined by the current setting of the Jitter Slider in the Jitter Popup Pressure Jitter only works if you turn on the Jitter Button and it is set to a value greater than 0 see the Jitter Button below Pressure Color Button When Pressure Color mode is on brush color varies with pressure At minimum pressure the brush uses the first color selected in the palette when Multi color Mode is activated At maximum pressure the brush uses the last color selected in the palette At pressures between minimum and maximum the brush uses the selected colors between the first and the last selected colors with smooth interpolation between colo
209. NOTE When entering timecode in the Animation Environment this is equal to This is not true of the calculator change sign of number in display window enter arithmetic operator same as int Button on calculator square square root i inv s sin COS t tan 1 log 10 rand clear constants k recall constants K store constant R int Paint Environment 4 72 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 8 BUFFERS PANEL X 0 C v 5 Palette Buffers Figure 4 28 Buffers Panel Revision A 4 73 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Buffers Panel alternates with the Palette Panel taking up most of the left side of the Paint Environ ment It contains three Buffers one at the top dis playing a thumbnail view of the current Mask Buffer one in the middle displaying a thumbnail view of the current Temp or Temporary Buffer which is used for cutting pasting and distorting and one at the bottom of the Panel displaying a thumbnail view of the current Canvas with a wireframe handle for panning around the magnified Canvas The Mask Buffer Figure 4 29 The Mask Buffer The Mask Buffers are places where you can store Liberty s masks In Liberty you isolate an area of the picture to perform an operation on it by creating a mask of the area You can paint a mask create a mask from the luminance of the picture
210. O boards are Video Board SGI System Avion Indigo 2 w LIBERTY NTSC Cindy Centaur Indy Cindy or Indigo Centaur SGI Galileo Indigo 2 XL XZ EX SGI IMPACT Video Indigo 2 IMPACT SGI VideoFramer Personal Iris SGI Octane Video SGI Octane SGI Video SGI O The supported video accessories are HP VidJet Pro HP LaserJet InkJet printing accessory Revision A 3 49 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 9 2 Software Options This window lists the software options that are available to Liberty systems To use an option select the option in the list When selected the option will be highlighted The following software options are available Expanded Resolution e Motion Tracking e Cinefusion GIF LZW Compression Expanded Resolution While all Liberty products are capable of being reso lution independent some Liberty products are sup plied with a basic configuration that permits a maximum resolution of 1 000 pixels by 1 000 lines The Expanded Resolution option is available to extend image resolution to 8 000 pixels by 8 000 lines Expanded Resolution is a standard on Liberty 64 and available as an option on Liberty 32 and Lib erty Paint Motion Tracking This module provides three software options Motion Tracking e Motion Stabilization Corner Warping Motion Tracking is a standard feature in Lib
211. ONS AET 4 7 Undo 4 8 Redo BUlttOD sere aec ee ite a Pr be Id ca 4 8 Undo Popup ien ERE ERU 4 9 Undo Redo Buttons on The Buffers Panel 4 12 Prompt WindOW cerent eei Lene eite ee 4 13 Canvas Button me 4 13 Erase Button ices ede rr teer dv d re vi cac raa 4 14 Alli BUON 4 14 Prefix ees 4 14 Pop p Menus itte b tients 4 15 Green and Yellow Cancel Buttons 4 15 Transparency essent 4 15 Transparent Background 4 16 Filtering and Anti aliasing eee 4 16 El vatofs Nieto E ARE UNE AND 4 16 Panel Menus esssseeeee meii 4 19 Panel Call Bu ttorns tre 4 19 PAINT 4 20 Current Brush Display eee 4220 Color of Displayed Brush 4 21 Color of Brush 4 21 Brush Size Slider Scale 4 22 Transparency Slider 4 23
212. Pick Point In Place Figure 4 133 Paste Mask Modes Press to mask an area by pasting the contents of the Temp Buffer as a mask An area is masked on the Canvas determined by the silhouette of the contents of the Temp Buffer Any transparency in the image in the Temp Buffer also appears in its mask The two Paste Mask Modes are In place and Pick Point In place pastes the mask in its original position Pick Point gives it to you on the end of the pen or mouse for manual positioning In this mode a full resolution preview of the mask being pasted is updated on the canvas as the user moves the pen The current mode is displayed in the Paste button s text window Press on the window to bring up a popup selecting this Invert Prefix with Paste Mask Pressing the Invert Prefix Button then pressing Paste Mask uses the temp s Alpha data to erase from the existing mask Paint Environment 4 400 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 20 TEXT PANEL MENUS The Text Panel Menus provide Liberty s text func tions Liberty uses three Panels for the Text func tions one for the main text editing another for Accent Marks and one for International Charac ters Press the small arrow at either end of the light blue Text title bar at the top of the Text Panel to cycle the Accent Panel and the International Panel All Liberty fonts are Bitstream vector fonts Liberty comes with 50 standard fonts Contact your Liberty
213. Popup is displayed e Press the middle of the File Mode Button to display the File Mode Popup 2 Press one of the File Modes to choose it as the current mode The File Mode Popup disappears and the desired mode is displayed in the File Mode Button If the Mode Button displays CANVAS the Canvas picture will be saved or the indicated picture file will be recalled into the Canvas If TEMP is displayed the current Temp the one displayed in the Transfer Buffer will be saved or the indicated picture file will be recalled into the Revision A 4 209 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation current Temp and is displayed in the Transfer Buffer A horizontal slider is provided to change the current temp If MASK is displayed the current mask on the Canvas will be saved or the indicated file will be recalled onto the Canvas as a mask See page 4 364 for step by step instructions about saving and recall ing masks A horizontal slider is provided to change the current mask If PALETTE is displayed the current palette will be saved without the picture or the palette of the indicated file will be recalled without the picture if any into the Palette in the Paint Environment If LAYERS is displayed all currently active lay ers and the Canvas will be saved When you recall the file each individual layer is recalled into its cor responding position in the stack along with all its attributes in their saved stat
214. Press and drag the slider to adjust the leading of the selected text e Press the green OK button on the popup when the text is at the desired leading Revision A 4 405 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Align Text Button Left Right Center Justify OK Figure 4 137 Align Popup Allows left center right and full justification Affects all the current text not just the selected text To change the justification of the text e Press the Align Text Button The Align Popup appears Press one of the Align Mode Buttons to make it active The Align Popup disappears and the text display adjusts according to the chosen mode The Align Left Button justifies the text to the left The Align Right Button justifies the text to the nght The Align Center Button centers the text horizon tally The Align Justify Button justifies the text to left and right adjusting the kerning line by line Paint Environment 4 406 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Kerning Button Figure 4 138 Kerning Popup Use to adjust the kerning space between characters of the text This acts on the selected text and if no text is selected it acts on the character before the insert point If you want to change all the text you must select it To kern selected text e Press the Text Kerning Button The Text Kerning Popup appears Press and drag the slider to kern the active text The kern
215. Preview res res res res ramp sine smooth poster invert ramp sine smooth poster invert ramp sine smooth poster invert ramp sine smooth poster invert active Recall Save RGBA RGBB HS A CMYK Reset Figure 4 93 Color Correct Popup Revision A 4 301 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 15 3 HSVA Assigns Hue Saturation Value and Alpha compo nents to the four Diagrams RGBA Assigns Red Green Blue and Alpha components to the four Diagrams RGBB Assigns Red Green Blue and Brightness controls to the four Diagrams This allows the user to adjust the individual image components Red Green and Blue at the same time as adjusting the overall image brightness with the rightmost diagram or the rightmost slider labeled Br CMYK Assigns Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black compo nents to the four Diagrams Preview Active Preview Button s Press Preview to see a preview of the adjustment When the Active Button is on every change you make on the Diagram or Sliders will update the pre view OK Cancel Buttons Press OK to perform the adjustment press the Can cel Button to remove the popup with no adjustment Noise Button The Noise Button allows you to apply grain and noise effects to the masked area of the Canvas It can also be used to generate a variety of interesting tex Revision A 4 303 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation ture patterns Nois
216. ROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA Trademark Copyright Notices SGI is a Registered Trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc Liberty Lib erty Paint Liberty 32 and Liberty 64 are Registered Trademarks of Chyron Corporation Liberty uses patented LZW compression for import and export TIFF LZW and or GIF graphics files Use of each Liberty product is restricted for use on a single workstation Copying modifying or distributing Lib erty is prohibited except that the software can be transferred to a single hard disk with the original media maintained for backup or archival pur poses Purchase and or use of Liberty does not authorize or permit the use of any other product method or activity involving use of LZW unless separately licensed in writing by Unisys Inc This technology is licensed under U S Patent No 4 558 302 and foreign counterparts All other listed trademarks are the respective property of their owners ii Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 22 sch incisos urere cene 1 1 1 1 1 About this Manual eee 1 1 1 1 2 Hardware Platform esee 1 2 1 1 3 Custom Menu Colors 1 2 1 2 A NOTE ON LIBERTY ENVIRONMENTS 1 2 1 3 NAVIGATING THE ENVIRONMENTS 1 3 1 3 1 Arrangement of Functions
217. Scale setting and sets to 255 all current mask values equal to or greater than the slider setting Useful for eliminating anti alias ing Press in the Clamp Window to choose between two different modes of affecting the Diagram Snap Mode and Ramp Mode Snap amp Ramp Modes Figure 4 128 Snap and Ramp Modes Snap Mode In Snap Mode all values less than the slider setting are set to zero All values greater than the slider set ting are set to 255 With the Invert prefix on this is reversed Ramp Mode In Ramp Mode all values less than the slider setting are set to zero All values greater than the slider set ting are unchanged With the Invert Prefix on this reversed Paint Environment 4 392 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Clamp Mask Popup ramp invert em um Recall Save 4 19 4 active E mask only Reset Figure 4 129 Clamp Mask Popup Press the corner button of Clamp to call up the Clamp Mask popup The Clamp Mask Popup con sists of the Clamp Threshold Slider a preview a Mask Only Button and OK Cancel and Reset But tons along with a diagram Diagram with Clamp Mask Re maps the current mask values according to the diagram completely ignoring the Clamp Threshold Slider For information on how to modify the Dia gram Curve see page 4 290 For information on how the Diagram Curve operates with masks see page 4 371 Difference Mask Button
218. T is the current File Save As Mode first press the Save As Button then save the file to a directory filename path NOTE When entering filenames to save iNFiNiT images use a four digit numeric file name with the first number preceded by a period e g 0032 iNFiNiT images can be saved using up to 12 alphanumeric characters but can not start with a number hence the leading period in numeric filenames However for quick on air access iNFiNiT files are usually saved using a four digit number as described above because alphanumeric information requires that additional popup menus appear thus slowing the on air performance slightly Note also that you can configure the INFINIT to utilize eight digit numeric file names rather than four if more than 10 000 images will be utilized At this point Liberty saves the current Canvas to the specified local SGI directory In addition if the set up menu s FTP button is on the image is trans ferred over the network to the remote infinit system as indicated in the Setup Menu If the local button is off the image is deleted from the local hard disk once the transfer to the INFINIT is complete As stated Liberty transfers the image using FTP It uses the node name entered in the Setup Menu as the network host It generates the target path on the host using the directory path entered in the Setup Menu and the file name entered in the directory listing men
219. This should be the start point of the source sequence Use the Timecode Frame Button at the right to select which mode you want often you will use frame numbers for a disk path Press OK The Set up Popup disappears Grabbing or rotoscoping will now use the indicated disk path Source Re scale Button With a device or disk path active press on the Re scale Button to enable it it becomes highlighted causing the input images to be re scaled when grabbed or rotoscoped Paint Environment 4 442 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Re scale Button controls only the current high lighted device disk path When the Re scale Button is active you can use the X and Y windows to enter new resolutions in pixels for the images to be re scaled to Layers Auto compositing Often when rotoscoping from multiple VTRs and or disk paths to the Canvas and Temp buffers you will use Layers to view and position the images You can cause layers to be automatically composited to the Canvas prior to being recorded during rotoscoping The Auto composite Popup Auto Composite Layers OK Cancel Figure 4 149 Auto composite Popup Press the corner button in the Roto Button to bring up a pop up with an Auto composite Layers Button that you can turn on or off As an example of this in a rotoscoping project sup pose Temp Layer 1 is on and you ve set up a DDR to input images to the Canvas and a disk pat
220. Tracking Point Mode consists of two procedures building the point list in the Paint Environment and compositing the tracked element s over a background in the Animation Environment Build Point List Paint Environment 1 22 3 e 4 2 5 6 7 8 Press the Motion Tracking Button the Image Tools 2 panel to activate the Motion Tracking Popup Click in the File window and select first filmstrip file to be used to select reference point The selected image is recalled to the Canvas In the Start window enter number of base or beginning cel of filmstrip sequence Click in the End window enter number of last cel of filmstrip sequence plus 1 Click in the Output window to select a directory and type a filename that will be the recorded point list Click on the Point Corner button and make sure it is set to Point Click on the desired component buttons luminance R G B H S V to narrow or isolate the tracking of the selected pixel s Press the Point 1 Button and move the cursor over the canvas If desired zoom into Animation Environment 5 214 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 10 11 12 the selected area of the canvas for easier pixel selection Press down on the point area you want to track The X and Y windows display the X and Y coordinates of the point you picked Press the Size button Enter the size in pixels of the area you want to track Press
221. Y position X and Y blur Near and Far alpha 96 Near and Far Extrusion Angle and Extrusion Length Also depending on which windows are turned on pen position can affect image position extrusion angle offset or all three Paint Environment 4 122 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Preview 1 1 1 Paste Image Center Inplace Pen Position Length Palette 38 Blur Alpha Angle of Extrusion name of settings Adjust x near far near far near far Extrude 1 1 18 188 58 E Paste Modes Figure 4 44 Paste Extrude Popup Extrusion Angle Button The clock like button is the Extrusion Angle Button similar to the Shadow Angle Button and controls the angle of the extrusion relative to the original object to be pasted The preview of the extrusion is always a wireframe box regardless of what preview mode is on for the main part of the image to be pasted To adjust the extrusion angle manually ensure that the Angle button is on highlighted then press on the canvas near the extrusion wireframe box and drag it The Angle Button changes to reflect the changes you re making manually on screen If the Length button is also on highlighted the length of the extrusion changes as well You can also press on the Angle Button and drag the dot around the outside of the clock The angle of the wireframe box on the Canvas is updated to reflect the changes you re making on the Ang
222. a chroma key using the current settings and brings down the popup The Cancel Button just brings down the popup and the Reset Button resets most of the set tings to default values Chroma Key Preview Buttons The Chroma Key Popup provides three active pre view modes along with a Preview off setting When a preview mode is on the preview is updated on the screen each time you change settings in the popup When adjusting the Chroma Key settings you will often flip between the preview modes When previews are off the unaltered Canvas is shown on the screen and for example you can Pick samples of the blue or green screen colors see below the Picked Color Display The Preview Button The Preview Button previews the image in the Temp background composited keyed into the blue or green areas of the Canvas foreground The Preview Alpha Button The Preview Alpha Button previews the alpha matte generated by the Canvas chroma key as a gray scale image A 100 key shows as black a 100 non key shows as white Use Preview Alpha to make fine adjustments in the matte Revision A 4 353 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Preview BG Button Preview BG simply shows the contents of the Temp the image to be used as the background in the key by itself Use it to compare the original Temp with the composited result Key Adjust Buttons At the left of the OK button is a stack of buttons to a
223. a circular gradation The upper left most color in the palette starts at the center and moves outward ending with the lower right most color in the palette Circular Apply has several modes that control how color is distributed described below Paint Environment 4 310 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Radial Apply Button When the Radial Apply Button is highlighted you are in Radial Apply Mode In this mode multiple colors chosen on the palette are applied to the masked area in a radial gradation The colors are gradated as if they were swept by a rotating arm The starting angle of the gradation is set using the Direction Button page 4 59 Only the Centered and Pick Points modes below affect Radial Apply Near Edge Mode When Near Edge Mode is enabled the Circular Gra dation starts at the center of the bounding box of the masked area and ends at the nearest edge of the bounding box of the masked area Does not apply to Radial Gradation Far Edge Mode When Far Edge Mode is enabled the Circular Gra dation starts at the center of the bounding box of the masked area and ends at the farthest edge of the bounding box This makes for a more diffuse grada tion than Near Edge since it is over a longer dis tance Does not apply to Radial Gradation Corner Mode When Corner Mode is enabled the Circular Grada tion starts at the center of the bounding box of the masked area and ends at the farthest come
224. abilized as they are rendered Revision A 5 221 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE If the Cel Actor fails to render it is often due to loss of correlation between image frames If this occurs try increasing the X and Y distance values in the Actor Edit popup steps 7 and 8 If this fails try increasing the size of the reference frame s correlation mask step 2 If the Cel Actor s files fail to recall check the frame number of the reference frame step 6 Also check the In and Out frame numbers in the Cycle Filmstrip Popup of the Cel Actor Step 4 5 10 Animation Playback Functions Use the playback functions to play animations in one of three basic modes Preview Storyboard and Record These are playback mode buttons only one of which can be on ata time Preview Mode renders to the screen in various ways without saving or recording anything Storyboard Mode records the animation with a choice of various resolutions to a disk file so that it can be played back as a preview You can also drag the Preview Handle at the top of the Timeline to manually play back the different Preview modes Use Record Mode for final rendering to a recording device or to disk it is always at full resolution After choosing a playback mode by pressing it you must press the Run Button to begin the play back Animation Environment 5 222 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Animation Preview Button
225. able 4 4 File Modes Item File Mode Canvas magenta bar Save Canvas recall to Canvas image file Temp green bar Save Temp recall to Temp image file Mask yellow Bar Save recall mask image file Palette light purple bar Save recall palette image file Layers light blue bar Save recall Layers active layers and Canvas Brushes violet bar Save recall User Brush File 10 brushes Text light blue bar save recall text for Text Panel Menu Macro red bar Save recall Macro in Macro Panel Menu Shapes teal bar Save recall shape files Curves peach bar Save recall Curve spline data File Animation purple bar save recall Animation File in Animation Environ ment if Liberty animation option is enabled Morph magenta bar save recall Morph Keyframe File Movie dark purple bar Save recall animated preview storyboard mov ies Menu State It rust bar Save recall menu state with Macros Font tan bar Save recall Bit stream font Diagram red bar Save recall Diagram files Filter green bar Save recall custom Image Filter settings Point dk purple bar Save recall single point motion tracking files Corner It purple bar Save recall 4 corner point motion tracking files The Temp Elevator on the File Mode Popup You can recall pictures into all levels of the Temp
226. actor below is blurred The function works identically to the Blur function on the Image Tools 1 Panel in the Paint Environment HSV and RGB Modes Press the HSV Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on HSV Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is adjusted according to the Revision A 5 171 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation sliders on the Mask Keyframe Popup These sliders work identically to the Color Correct Popup on the Image Tools 1 Panel in the Paint Environment Press the RGB Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on the RGB Mode RGB Mode is identical to HSV Mode but the sliders adjust the Red Green and Blue of the image instead of the Hue Satura tion and Value NOTE This actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask Actor in Mask Mode directly above the Gamma layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Color Correct Mode Press the Correct Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Color Correct Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is color corrected according to settings on the Color Correct Popup The function works identically to the Color Correct function on the Image Tools Panel in the Paint Environment Adjust Mode Press the Adjust Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Adjust Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is adjusted according to set
227. acts on each selected point in the curve When moving the cursor upward bias increases the length of a selected point s out going tangent At the same time it proportionately decreases the length of the next point s tangent This Paint Environment 4 258 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual has the effect of making the curve joining the two points curvier at the beginning and straighter at the end Likewise moving the cursor down has the effect of making the curve straighter at the beginning and curvier at the end As with Tension however the angles of the tangents matter also If the tangents point at each other the curve will not get very curvy no matter how long the tangents become Tension Button To change the tension e Select some points in the curve e Press the Tens button e Press and drag up and down on the Canvas The curve changes as the tension of the points changes About Tension For each selected point Tension uniformly increases or decreases both tangents of the point This change is based on the Y movement of your cursor moving up makes the tangents longer while moving down makes the tangents shorter The idea is that making the tangents longer should have the effect of making the curve curvier while shrinking them should have the effect of making the curve straighter more Tense Whether or not Ten sion actually does this however also depends on the angles of the
228. ading line spacing 4 405 rendering 4 408 rotating and scaling 4 407 Index 26 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual saving and recalling 4 410 selecting 4 401 sizing 4 404 Text Actor 5 46 5 129 Text Edit Button 4 401 Text Panels 4 400 Text Save and Recall 4 410 The 3 32 4 431 The Adjust Colors Button 4 293 The Grid Popup 4 55 Tile Button 4 142 Tile function seamless patterns 4 342 Tile Set Button 4 142 with Copy Prefix 4 143 timecode 5 36 calculating 4 69 frames per second 3 27 Timecode Elevator 4 427 Timeline Animation 5 5 Tint Button 4 319 Tint Mode 5 167 Tint Paint Mode 4 280 Transfer 4 83 Transfer Buffer 4 83 4 210 Transfer Panel 4 106 Transform Text Button 4 407 transparency 4 15 Transparency Slider Scale 4 23 Revision A Index 27 CHYRON Corporation transparent background 4 16 4 53 Triangle Morph 4 468 4 477 animations 5 194 Step by step 4 477 step by step 4 477 triangles making 4 264 Troupe Actor 5 48 Show Troupe Button 5 56 U unbind a keyboard key 4 417 Undefine Button 4 417 Under Prefix Button 4 61 Unix Path Mode 4 214 Back Button 4 215 browse images 4 230 unmasking 4 363 Use Mask Button 4 366 User Brush Mode 4 29 User Login Accounts 3 10 User Name Text Window 3 14 User Number Password Text Window 3 14 User Number Window 3 14 User Panel Menu 3 10 Add User Button 3 11 Delete User Button 3 12 Set User Password Button 3 12 User Popup 3 14 U
229. age on the Canvas Press on the Mode window to cycle through the preview modes These are from fastest to slowest Wireframe Coarse Final full resolution transparency displays as opaque black Revision A 4 113 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Final plus alpha full resolution and full transparency The preview modes are the same for all the paste modes except Paste Distort which also has five fil ters designed for perspective rendering Note that on the newer SGI systems Final Alpha preview is very fast On such systems the Coarse and Final pre views are not required Positioning To manually position an object on the Canvas press down on the preview of the object and drag it posi tioning the object as desired You can repeat this operation as often as you want You can constrain the direction of movement horizontally or vertically by turning off and on the X and Y modes under the Pen Position Button You can constrain the direc tion of movement to any angle by turning off both the X and Y modes and turning on the Direction Button the little clock at the right of the Brush Display The Center Button Press the Center Button to center the image on the Canvas The Inplace Button Press the Inplace Button to position the image at its original position as it is in the Temp Buffer The Adjust Button Use the Adjust Button for precise pixel by pixel positioning
230. ager Button on the Transfer Panel The Full Screen File Menu appears Press the right end of the pink Canvas File Mode Button to change it to Temp The Temp Browse Menu appears across the bottom of the screen Press on the browse image you want to load into a Temp It becomes highlighted Press on the Temp browse window you want to load into The chosen browse image appears in the indicated Temp browse window Repeat for as many pictures as you want Press Cancel to remove the Full Screen File Menu Pressing OK also loads the last browse image to the current Temp Loading masks graphically works in a similar fash ion except that in Step 2 you switch the colored File Type Button to Mask Revision A 4 239 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 13 PAINT PANEL PAINT on Mask Paint Line Curve Shape Mode Fractal Normal Fold Hoise Jitter Pressure Figure 4 77 Paint Panel All Liberty s painting functions are on the Paint Panel The top line of buttons on the Paint Panel Paint Line Curve and Shape all start a painting operation The other buttons on the Paint Panel Menu are mode buttons that modify how painting line drawing curve or shape drawing is performed Painting to Temps and Masks At the top of the Paint Panel is a bar where you can chose different Paint Modes On Canvas for normal painting on the Canvas On Temp for painting to the current layer and On Mask for painting into ma
231. ain e Press below another blue keyframe marker on the Line Morph Slider The data from the first keyframe is copied into the indicated keyframe Revision A 5 147 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE Do not press directly on the blue keyframe marker itself but under it on the same line as the yellow pointer A successful copy prompts Keyframe copied successfully If you press directly on a blue keyframe marker you are prompted Cannot copy to source keyframe Line Morph Delete Keyframe Button To delete a keyframe In the slider position the yellow pointer beneath the blue keyframe marker you want to delete Press to delete the keyframe at the current position of the yellow pointer on the Line Morph Slider The blue keyframe marker dis appears from the slider Line Morph Reset Button Press twice quickly to reset the morph functions All keyframes including line segments are deleted You are prompted Restarted LMORPH Please enter line segments Line Morph Lock Button Initially the morph is unlocked meaning that you are editing the first keyframe and no other key frames exist Once the first keyframe is complete pressing Lock creates the corresponding end key frame which you then edit to define the morph After pressing Lock you can still add delete or move line segments You only have to press Lock once when you ve set the first keyframe points A
232. al type of file created with the Motion Tracking functions in the Image Tools2 Panel in the Paint Environment If the Motion Tracking option is not installed the Corners List Button will be grayed out The Tracking function will create a series of points generating a motion curve path which is saved as an animation Curve Path and can be recalled with the Point List Button Or it will generate a set of four points defining a warp rectangle that follows an area in the target sequence which is saved as a Corners List and is recalled with the Corners List Button Pressing the Corners List Button brings up the File Popup allowing you to click on the desired Corners List file Animation Environment 5 64 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Recall Cel Button Press to recall the actor s image file from the disk to the Canvas All actor types use Recall Cel except Text Write on Morph Macro Reference Troupe and Shapes These actor types have no image file associated with them Actor Type Button 5 5 Displays the type of the selected actor along with its color code Actor types can be changed without loss of information Pressing on the Actor Type Button brings up the Actor Type Popup see page 5 45 Animation Keyframes Edit Keyframe Button 5 5 1 Press the Edit Keyframe Button and the Keyframe Timeline page 5 67 appears on top of the Anima tion Timeline With this popup you can create key
233. amped to 100 and the rest of the values are clamped to 0 Press the Preview Button to see a preview of the masked areas It may help to use the Mask Only button below the Preview button This displays the mask in opaque white on black making it easy to evaluate the mask as you adjust and preview it Press the OK Button to confirm the mask The Mask Channels Popup disappears Now you perform the desired operation on the masked area for instance Erase or Apply Color etc Revision A 4 381 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Clamp Tolerance Slider Determines how much of the marked diagram curve is clamped If the slider is at minimum value all the way to the bottom only the exact marked parts of the curve are clamped to 100 If the slider is at maximum value all the way to the top all parts of the curve between the lowest and highest picked parts are clamped to 100 At values between min imum and maximum more or less of the curve is clamped The Reset Button resets the slider to mini mum Preview Button Press the Preview Button to see a preview on the Canvas of the result of the current re mapped Dia gram Curve Use the Mask Only button which shows the mask in white on black making it very clear what your mask consists of Active Button Press the Active Button to turn it on off When Active is on the preview of the result is updated continuously every time you change the Dia
234. an vas to the installed video board frame buffer Usu ally you press Show when you want to see the Canvas on the monitor output of the video board to see how it looks in NTSC or PAL Show works at any Canvas resolution and for all video boards that can be installed with Liberty It corrects aspect ratio at the time of the transfer You must press the Show Button each time you want to update the video board Show Popup Realtime Show NonRealtime Show Disk To Video Figure 4 55 Show Popup Pressing the corner button of Show calls up a small popup with two options Real time Show and Non Real time Show Revision A 4 155 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Non Real time Show Non Real time Show is the default When this mode is active a Show is performed each time you press the Show Button Real time Show Pressing the Real time Show Button turns on Real time Show Mode The time required for Real time Show slows some functions on certain platforms On some platforms Real time Show only works if the configured resolution is the same as the installed frame buffer s native resolution Showing Video from a Disk Array Press the Disk to Video Button to enable showing video frames from a disk array To output a clip bring up the Show Popup and make sure you are in Realtime Show mode Then click on the Disk To Video Button and enter the filename of the clip you want to outpu
235. an be active at a time You can size all brushes in real time with the Brush Size Slider Scale Solid Brush Button 40 Figure 4 14 Solid Brush Popup Revision A 4 25 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Press the Solid Brush Button to choose a round brush with crisp edges To vary Solid Brush edge softness e Press the corner button of the Solid Brush Button The Solid Brush Popup appears e 2 Move the slider scale up and down to the desired value The top of the slider scale produces an edge with maximum softness the bottom produces an edge with maximum sharpness at the bottom the edge has no anti aliasing at all You can press the number window under the slider to enter a value via the keyboard You can press the Reset Button to set the brush edge back to its default value 3 Press the OK button to confirm the new value and remove the Popup Menu The Solid Brush appears in the Brush Display with its new edge setting Air Brush Button Press the Air Brush Button to choose a round brush with soft edges The air brush has no popup menu you can create custom air brushes with differ ent kinds of edges using the Programmed Brush Programmed Brush Button Press the Programmed Brush Button to choose the current Programmed Brush The Programmed Brush allows you to create custom air brushes with an infinite variety of edge profiles as well as many other customized round brushe
236. and Mask When the button is off that device or disk path is not active Any of the other three modes causes the device disk path to be an active source Choosing Canvas Temp or Mask causes the input images to be routed to the corresponding buffer in the Paint Environment during grabs and rotoscoping Clicking repeatedly on the window cycles through the choices For a normal Canvas render when only one device is highlighted you need not enable the Source Selection Button By default the highlighted current device is used as the source When more than one device button has Revision A 5 19 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation been configured you can set all the devices to Off and only the current highlighted device is used as a source When using Temp or Mask as a source mode use the number window at the right to set which number Temp or Mask to use That source will then be input to Temp 1 Temp 2 etc To set up a source device e 1 On the VTR Panel press the Source Button src The button is highlighted 2 2 Press the Setup Button The Source Setup Popup appears e 3 Press on one of the source devices VTR 1 VTR 2 etc to enable it The button you press is highlighted 4 Choose Off Canvas Temp or Mask on the Source Selection Button Will default to Canvas if only one device is set up e 5 Enter the source timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the source sequ
237. and alpha values across the entire extrusion The Pen Position Buttons work the same as in all other paste modes controlling the position of the original image to be pasted The Adjust functions allow fine positioning for the main image to be pasted as in the other paste modes The Center and Inplace Buttons also work the same as in the other paste modes Revision A 4 121 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Above the Center and Inplace Position Buttons is a Color Source Button for the original image to be pasted labeled Paste Its three modes are Image Clear and Light In Image Mode the original image is first pasted prior to being extruded In Clear Mode the original image is pasted transparently so that only the extruded edge appears In Light Mode the original image is pasted as a lighter or darker silhouette on top of the extrusion As in Paste Color use the Light Slider to set the lightness or darkness of the silhou ette of the original image The Blur Sliders work the same as in other paste modes but have Near and Far settings allowing you to set one blur factor for the part of the extrusion nearest the object and a different blur factor for the part of the extrusion farthest from the object The Alpha slider also has Near and Far settings so you can vary the transparency of the extrusion between its near and far edges Depending on which number windows are turned on the Adjust Button affects X and
238. andle manipulates the image in a particular way For instance when Scale Mode is highlighted in the Distort Popup dragging on a han dle causes scaling When Rotation Mode is high lighted in the Distort Popup dragging on a handle causes rotation Revision A 5 87 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Position Button You can always re position the image regardless of what other mode is active To move the image man ually press on its axis the XYZ icon and drag it in the desired direction If another mode such as rota tion is active it becomes temporarily disabled until you are finished dragging the image Press the Position button to enter Position Mode Dragging the on screen handles on the wireframe causes it to move in X or Y Dragging the axis moves the wireframe in any direction The Position X and Y windows display the current coordinates of the image to be pasted When the toggle button above the Y window displays the label Image the coordinates indicate the center of the image to be pasted When that button displays the label Axis the coordinates indicate the XY posi tion of the rotational axis of the image It is possi ble to separate the axis from the image center using the Lock Button see below Axis Lock Button Global and Local Above the Z window is a Lock Button which when turned on locks the axis to the image This is Glo bal Mode because the locked axis and image
239. ant to stop the background render before it s finished exit liberty and in one of the shells type killall liberty32 Run Animation Button Press to run the animation The mode of playback depends on which mode button is turned on Pre view Storyboard or Record Run Popup Frames Even field first Fields Odd field first Full Color Create Log Matte Only Ring Bell Invert Matte Figure 5 63 Run Popup Animation Environment 5 256 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Pressing the corner button of the Run Button calls up the Run Popup Frame Field Modes Here you can choose Frame Mode to record by frames or choose Field Mode to record by fields if the designated recording device supports field recording Use Field Mode for the smoothest motion in an animation though it takes twice as long as frame mode Horizontal vertical or diagonal motion can be flickery when rendered in Frame Mode You can record to hard disk either in frames or fields Storyboard renderings always are in frames ignoring the field mode if it s on You also have the option of recording the even or odd field first Only change this if an animation rendered by fields is showing undue flicker Matte Modes Also on the Run Popup two record modes allow you to record high contrast mattes of your animation for creating a matte reel The Matte Only Mode records animating elements white on black black appears where there is
240. appears on the Canvas and the Keyframe Attribute Popup appears e Press on the Save Keyframe Button Sav The keyframe is saved in the current elevator level highlighted light blue Animation Environment 5 72 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press the Keyframe OK Button This removes the selection from the matchstick and makes the popup disappear Keyframe AII Button The Keyframe Button is a mode button that when on causes all the keyframe matchsticks in the Keyframe Timeline to be recalled saved into the current elevator level when you press the Keyframe Recall Save Button When off only the single selected keyframe matchstick in the Keyframe Timeline is recalled saved Keyframe Recall Button To recall a keyframe matchstick from the Keyframe Elevator press the Keyframe Recall Button The contents of the current Keyframe Elevator level is recalled into the Keyframe Timeline and becomes part of the actor If there is more than one match stick stored in the elevator level and the but ton is on all matchsticks are recalled into the timeline Keyframe Edit OK Button Press to remove the Keyframe Edit Menu and Key frame Timeline SubPixel Button When the SubPixel Button is high lighted the key frames are rendered through the warp code so that even images which are not distorted in any way are forced to be rendered with filtering Revision A 5 73
241. arameter depends upon whether the user is using the English or Metric system what printer is being used and what type of paper is being used T Code can only be set when TC Src has been set to REMOTE The timecode only applies to the next frame that is grabbed When any field can not be changed a row of asterisk will appear to signal the user The five toggle buttons Color Out Color In Time Date Page Num and TimeCode appear at the bottom of the Menu Clicking on them will turn these parameters on button is lit and off but ton is not lit Color Out if lit means that you are printing in color Color In if lit means that you are grabbing images into the Vidjet in color Time Date if lit means that the time and date will be printed on each page Page Num if lit means that pages will be numbered In order to turn on Color Out Color In must be on since it doesn t make sense to print an image in color that was input in black and white The three buttons Current Frame Frames Grabbed and Frames Free show the current state of the Vidjet s Frame Memory The Frame Memory is the storage area for images that have been grabbed into the Vidjet Frames Grabbed shows you how many frames have been stored in memory This button can t be set by the user Frames Free shows how many frames are left in memory This button also is not adjustable by the user Revision A
242. arameters for the current keyframe 7 Finish editing the chroma key and exit Edit Keyframe The Mask Actor Chroma Key Popup is similar to the Chroma Key Popup in the Paint Environment see page 4 337 The preview buttons work in a slightly different manner and the BG on button is grayed out since the actors below the key will render as the background The preview buttons work slightly dif ferently since previewing in animation really amounts to rendering the animation at the current keyframe In the Mask Actor the Preview Button in the Chroma Key Popup does that while the Preview Alpha Button previews the alpha generated by the key as in Paint The Preview BG button renders all Revision A 5 177 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation the actors below the blue screen cel actor and mask actor since these represent the background Again these are rendered at the current keyframe The Recall FG Button recalls the current frame of the blue screen cel actor so that blue screen colors can be picked using the Chroma Key Popup note that this button is labeled Preview Off in the Paint Environment since it is simply turning the preview off and showing the canvas rather than recalling a file from an actor as in the Animation Environ ment As in Paint you can turn on the Use Mask Button in the Chroma Key Popup to enable a mask to be used as a garbage matte Use the Mask Actor s File Win dow to assign a mask
243. arrowhead at the front end of the line segment helps you keep track of the orientation of the line segment While adding line segments you can use the Move Button see below to reposition line segments you have just added Unlike Triangle Morph you can add or delete line segments after you press the Lock Button Press the Add Button a second time or press another Line Morph button to terminate the Add function Line Morph Delete Button Press to delete line segments from the Canvas On the Canvas press on a line segment to delete it The line segment disappears Delete as many segments Paint Environment 4 474 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual as you want before terminating the function by pressing a second time on the Delete Button or any other Line Morph Popup button Line Morph Move Button Press to move line segments On the Canvas press in the middle of a line segment to drag it to a new position or press just beyond an endpoint to drag just the endpoint stretching or rotating the line seg ment You can move line segments in any key frame at any time even after pressing the Lock Button Press the Move Button a second time or any other Line Morph Popup button to terminate the move function Line Morph Color Button Press to switch the color of the line segments Use this when it s difficult to see the line segments on the Canvas background The default is red for the line segments
244. ars as one pixel wide masked lines e Press the Apply Color Button in the Image Tools 1 panel The current color or colors is applied into the masked grid lines Then you can edge the one pixel grid to make it thicker work on it with the various functions of the Paint Envi ronment and or save it to the disk 4 4 2 Direction Functions Direction Button Figure 4 24 Direction Button Paint Environment 4 58 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Located a bit below the Grid Button the Direction Button looks like a clock with a white dot in the cen ter to turn it on and off A circle of smaller dots rep resents the numbers of the clock where the hand of the clock moves around defining an angle or direc tion When the hand dot is at 3 o clock the direc tion is 0 degrees or 360 degrees When the hand is at 12 o clock the direction is 90 degrees With Direction Mode on many functions listed below are constrained to the current direction The setting of the Direction Button is used for the linear Apply Color Button for creating multi colored ramps regardless of whether Direction is turned on or not To set a new Direction e Press and drag the large white dot on the outer circle of dots moving it around to set the direction The large dot moves in 15 degree increments Or when the cursor is over the Direction Button you can type a number on the keyboard to set the direction to any number of de
245. as OK path full T tipple paintmode bump pops modes noise poster distort tint emboss filter extrude adjust shadow Figure 4 56 File Popup The Recall Button allows you to recall images and other types of files from the disk To recall a picture file from disk to the Canvas e Press the Recall Button The File Popup appears Press on a filename in the list of filenames or type the filename you want to recall followed by the Enter key The Canvas picture is erased and the indicated picture appears on the Canvas The File Popup disappears Recall with the Add Prefix Recalls on top of adds to the Canvas Temp Buffer or mask Paint Environment 4 158 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Recall into Masked Area If there is an active mask on the Canvas the recalled picture only appears in the masked area Recalling non Liberty File Formats Recalling a non Liberty file format is performed just like anormal recall see the previous page You don t have to specify the extension when you recall a file in a non Liberty format However if there is more than one file format for one file for example both tga and rla you should specify which format to recall by typing the proper extension with the file name For information about saving in different file formats see The File Save As Popup on page page 4 171 File Path Elevator 4 11 2 6 elevator boxes are provided each
246. as If the picture is not magnified when you press the Zoom In Button magnification centers on the center of the screen If in Full page Mode when normal magnification is reached Full page Mode is automatically turned off Zoom Out Button The Zoom Out Button is a quick way to de magnify one level Press to decrease the current magnification by 2X The center of the displayed picture remains constant unless the center is too close to the edge of the pic ture in which case the center moves so as to not dis play an area outside the Canvas CanvDrag Button Press the CanvDrag Button to turn it on and enable panning on the Canvas image When the canvas is magnified and CanvDrag is on you can press any where in the Canvas image and drag it around Panning with the Alt Key Pressing the Alt key on the keyboard has the same effect as turning CanvDrag on and can be much more convenient The CanvDrag Button highlights Paint Environment 4 66 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 7 when the Alt key is held down The user can then press anywhere in the magnified Canvas image and drag it around for as long as the Alt key is pressed Pressing on any of the Canvas borders now pans the Canvas one pixel per click in the corresponding direction CALCULATOR we ns oe tet BEAG rand 1x Figure 4 27 Calculator Liberty s calculator works like a typical pocket
247. ask for the filter When a file is assigned in the window the fil ter is applied to the actor s below only inside the file s mask If no file is assigned the filter is applied over the entire Canvas Editing Keyframes of the Plug in Actor When you edit a keyframe of a Plug in Actor press on the large Edit Button at the right of the Timeline The Plug in Popup appears identical to the Plug in Popup in the Paint Environment allowing you to choose which plug in filter will be active as well as its modifying functions Revision A 5 193 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 8 MORPHING Liberty provides two complementary morph pro grams Triangle Morph and Line Morph You can use both types of morphs in the Paint and Animation Environments Triangle Morph is more complicated to use but renders more quickly In Triangle Morph you set and move control points creating a triangu lar grid to make distortions Line Morph is quite easy to use and has a better result but takes more time to render In Line Morph you freely position and modify line segments in a gridless system to create distortions Line Morph yields extremely organic and smooth results and is usually well worth the extra rendering time Name Loops 1 Begin 0 00 00 00 End 0 00 10 00 Morph Single Morph Between Reverse Overlay Temp Recall Canvas Swap Temp Canv Edit Triangles Edit Lines Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel
248. ation Option Close Curve Button Press to turn on or off When on the first and last points in the curve are connected so that the curve is closed Break Button Each point in the curve has two tangents repre sented on the screen by straight yellow lines through the point Normally the two tangents for each point are locked together in a single line The Break But ton breaks the two tangents apart so each can be changed independently of the other This allows the curve to take a sharp angle as it goes through the point Revision A 4 253 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To break tangents e Select a point or points whose tangents you want to break e Press the Break Button The tangents change from a solid white line to one solid and one bro ken line e Clear the Select e Use the Move Button to move the tangents independently of each other Join Button After you have broken a point s tangents use Join to re join them It works the same as Break Points though it performs the opposite operation To join tangents that have been separated e Press the Select Points Button and select the point s you want to join e Press the Join Button The tangents of the selected points are joined again Recall Points Button Press the Recall button to display the File Popup and recall curves that have been saved on the disk Type in the filename of the curve you want to recall or fin
249. ational Character Panel 4 410 4 20 3 Accent Panel 4 411 Accent Position 4 412 4 21 MACRO PANEL MENU nnns 42412 4 21 1 Recording and Playing Macros 4 413 Record Macro Button sse 4 413 Play Macro Button sese 4 414 Pause Macro Button 4415 Stop Macro Button 4 415 Revision A Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation Delay Macro Button Delete Macro Button Save and Recall State Buttons 4 21 2 Defining Keyboard Keys Bind Macro Button Define Key Button 4 21 3 Editing Macros New Format Edit Macro Button 4 21 4 Editing Macros Old Format Edit Macro Popup Current Step Button First Step I lt Button Previous Step lt Next Step Button Last Step gt l Button Insert Step Button Change Step Button Delete Step Button Delete Rest Button Step Key Button Cancel Edit Button Accept Edit Button 4 22 Source Button Target Button Timecode Windows Timecode Elevator Shuttle and Jog Sliders Cue Button Increment Cue B
250. aved Saves to a special type of file for filters Filler Recall Button When you recall a filter from disk the Filter Array the divisor the Delta and the filter name are all recalled Press on a Filter Elevator level and then press Recall Filter to recall the filter into it Filter Clear Button Press the Clear Button to zero all the boxes in the Filter Array Filter Symmetry Buttons These buttons create symmetric filters if you enter values in just one quadrant of the filter For exam ple if your filter values are Press the 4 way Sym Button to copy the quadrant to the other quadrants 2 4 2 3 1 3 2 4 2 Revision A 4 331 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Horizontal and Vertical Sym Buttons work the same way but only horizontally or vertically Rotate Filter Buttons The Rotate lt and Rotate gt Buttons rotate the filter left and right respectively This is very useful for directional edge filters For example take a hori zontal line segment enhancement filter Rotating this right once gives you a diagonal line segment enhancer Rotating once more provides a vertical line enhancer The Mirror Filter Buttons The X Mirror and Y Mirror Buttons simply flip the Filter Array about its horizontal or vertical axis For example given this filter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
251. ayed is the number of the video recorder you are defining Cycles from 1 to 6 Model List The Model List is the list of models of video record ers that Liberty controls directly and currently sup ports The model list is the list of devices just below the Defining VTR as button in the Video panel Any models not on this list are controlled by a VLAN device which is one of the choices in the list For instance you could define VTR 1 as VLAN and VTR 2 as Abekas A60 VTR 3 4 5 and 6 could be defined as none Any unused VTR numbers 1 through 6 should be set to none because logging in will be faster if Liberty doesn t have to take time to configure VTRs unnecessarily Scroll through the list until you see the model you want to define then press it up scrolls the model list up v down scrolls the model list down Configuration Environment 3 38 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Model List includes the following choices VLAN e generic SMPTE Abekas A60 e Abekas A65 A66 Abekas Diskus AMT 7422 Accom RTD 4224 Accom WSD e RCI e SDL QuickFrame Diskcovery e MMS ProntoVideo e RCI Control Button Press the Control Button to set up the communica tion path for transmission of control data to the video device When pressed the Control button will highlight Use the Type window and Address win dow to configure the control path Refer to Table
252. base The test labels can be changed from the default labels See Re label IMAGESTOR on page 4 188 which is a setup function found in the Directory Panel in the Configuration Environment Select a field to enter text into and then type the new text information Press the Enter key to advance to the next field NOTE When entering filenames to save IMAGESTOR or iNFiNiT images use a four digit numeric file name with the first number preceded by a period e g 0032 IMAGESTOR and iNFiNiT images can be saved using up to 12 alphanumeric characters but can not start with a number hence the leading period in numeric filenames However for quick on air access IMAGESTOR and iNFiNiT files are usually saved using a four digit number as described above because alphanumeric information requires that additional popup menus appear thus slowing the on air performance slightly Note also that you configure the IMAGESTOR to utilize eight digit numeric file names rather than four if more than 10 000 stills will be utilized The Cancel button in the IMAGESTOR SaveAs popup exits the pop up menu and terminates the cur rent Save as operation preventing the file from being saved transferred The Esc keyboard key will Revision A 4 185 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation also cancel the pop up The OK button exits the popup and saves the image pressing the enter key in any of the text entry f
253. be fine tuned as needed Linear The user works with linear data within Liberty In other words Cineon files ARE converted to linear format when read into Liberty and back to log format when saved back out The user works in linear format and turns off Cineon log to linear conversion for display of the image on the screen since the images are already in linear format within Liberty This mode is preferable for some imaging functions in Liberty such as Chroma keying as these functions work better when using linear image data To run in this mode the user would set the Cineon and DPX set up controls in the Save As popup in the Paint environment see page 4 198 to do conversion by pressing the red Reset button in the Cineon or DPX set up menu and fine tuning the sliders if needed This turns on conversion when the files are Configuration Environment 3 20 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual saved and recalled They would also turn off log to linear conversion for screen display of the image by selecting the Off button described above for 64 bit color range display in the Canvas Configuration panel Gb1k Convert Off Reset Figure 3 6 Cineon Setup Control Messages Functions Liberty 64 When using Liberty 64 there are two Modes avail able in the Messages Buttons 0 to 65535 and 0 to 255 Press on one of them to activate it When you are in 65535 Mode all colors in Liberty are dis played
254. be the database server e g infinit1 This is where the database fields descriptive text is sent If this field is left blank the database will not be updated only the image and thumbnail will be transferred Image 2 dual record controls These controls allow the image to optionally be transferred to a second remote host The image may be stored in a different directory than on the first Revision A 4 181 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation remote host In addition its address numeric file name will contain an offset from the address on the first host for example the first remote host may have files in the range 0 500 while the second remote host may have files in the range 600 1100 the offset in this case would be 600 In the ImageStore set up menu there are fields for the second remote host labeled image 2 dual record The fields include text windows for node name path and numeric offset As in the image section of the menu enter the network host name of the target system in the node field Enter the disk directory path on the target system in the path field and the numeric offset in the offset field Note that if the node field of this section is left blank a dual record will not occur the fields in the image 2 dual record section of the menu will be ignored Note that both the first and second dual copies of the still will be added to the ImageStore database
255. ber windows associated with 1 4 SMPTE Safe Title and Safe Action Fields 4 390 Index 24 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual software license 3 52 Solid Brush Mode 4 26 Sony BVU and BYW VTRs 3 38 sorting files 4 230 Source Button SRC 3 43 Source Set up Popup 4 437 source video recorder See video recorders source and target Speed Diagram 5 97 Speed Nails 5 101 adding 5 103 boundary 5 101 deleting 5 104 moving 5 101 tangents 5 101 Square Mask Button 4 369 squares making 4 263 stars making 4 265 starting up setting directory 4 205 Startup 1 1 Step Key Button 4 425 Stop Macro Button 4 415 Storyboard Elevator 5 237 5 245 Storyboard Resolution Modes 5 235 Stretch Actor Button 5 55 sub pixel positioning 4 130 Swap Colors Button 4 38 Swap with Temp Button 4 85 Revision A Index 25 CHYRON Corporation Swing Playback Button 5 242 Switcher Actor 5 47 System Info Button 3 7 T tablet 1 3 configuring 3 54 Tablet Configuration Panel 3 54 Tablet Panel 3 54 tablet pressure 4 286 Target Selection Buttons 4 442 Target Set up Popup 4 441 target video recorder See video recorders source and target Temp Elevator 4 75 4 84 Temp Overlay 4 85 Temp Mask Popup 4 79 temps 1 3 4 83 fast 3 28 4 86 saving and recalling 4 85 tension of curves 4 259 text 4 400 accents 4 411 aligning 4 405 fonts 4 402 in animations 5 129 international characters 4 410 4 411 kerning 4 406 le
256. berty Artist s Manual first have been installed in the Configuration Envi ronment otherwise the message Vidjet not installed will print to the Prompt Window and the button will not bring up the Vidjet Menu When the menu first comes up many parameters of the Vidjet are being queried so it takes a few seconds The more frequently changing parameters are placed on the Main Menu A secondary menu the Install Menu can be brought up by clicking on the Install Button in the Main Menu Fields that are not often changed such as what printer is hooked up are placed here Most fields in the Install Menu should be set once and then left alone Another secondary menu the Color Adjust Menu can be brought up by clicking on the Color Adjust Button in the Main Menu This menu controls the image color when grabbing frames and printing them Hardware Make sure the RS 232 422 switch on the back of the Vidjet is set to RS 232 Make sure the cable from the video board to the back of the Vidjet is secure and the cable is con nected from serial port 2 of the computer to the Vidjet Also connect the cable from the video board to the monitor so you can see the video input and the cable from the Vidjet Monitor label in the back of the Vidjet to the monitor You ll have to switch to the line on the monitor that is coming from the Vidjet in order to view the frames that have been stored in the Vidjet s memory Main Menu The fields that can
257. bilization works by searching for this rectangle of pixels in each frame in the sequence Once the pixels are located the frame is pasted so that the pixels spatial position is the same as in the reference frame This corrects for unwanted positional motion in the sequence Stabilize Button 5 7 3 Press the Stabilize Button to turn Motion Stabiliza tion on or off When the Stabilize Button is turned on it activates several buttons associated with it The details of Motion Stabilization for a sequence of frames can be found on page 5 220 Cycle Actor Popup The Cycle actor is like a Multiple Cel actor except that it doesn t use filmstrips very easily They can still be added into a sequence in the Multiple Cel File Popup but there are no In and Out Buttons to control them with If a sequence of files has no film strips in it then using a Cycle Actor instead of a Cel Actor is useful because on the Timeline you can identify a Cycle Actor by its color while Single and Multiple Cel Actors look the same Like most other actor types the Cycle Actor can contain a curve path for the series of images to fol low during the animation as well as keyframes for DVE type rotation in x y and z These keyframes also control attributes such as Transparency Scale Slant Mirror and Under Revision A 5 119 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Name Begin File Num Dups Edit Keyfr Recall Cel 5 7 4
258. bits per pixel Paint Environment 4 176 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Dither Button When the Dither Button is high lighted the quan tized image is also dithered This is the technique used in newspaper photos where the appearance of higher color resolution is achieved by varying the density of colored dots Dither only works with Uni form Mode The Noise Button When the Noise Button is high lighted some noise is added to the quantized image This tends to smooth out color banding artifacts that may appear at lower levels bits per pixel Preview Button Press the Preview Button to see how the saved GIF file will look based on the current settings The pre view turns off when you press OK to confirm the settings or when you press reset IMAGESTOR File Format The IMAGESTOR functions allow you to transfer images from Liberty to the Chyron Still Store When you enable the IMAGESTOR Button on the Save As Popup you can save files in IMAGESTOR for mat and optionally transfer files over the network via FTP to the IMAGESTOR When saving an IMAGESTOR file a popup appears on which you can enter descriptive text for the file s 5 database entry fields There is a menu in the Configuration Environment that allows you to relabel the 5 text fields when saving an IMAGESTOR file Revision A 4 177 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual thumbnail thumbnail s
259. bossed edge is pasted as a lighter or darker silhouette over the Canvas How ever there must be some picture information on the Canvas for this mode to lighten or darken If the Canvas is empty this mode will do nothing and you should use Palette Mode As in Paste Color use the Light Slider to set the lightness or darkness of the shadow Since each of the two embossed edges has its own independent controls you can mix and match these Color Source Modes for a wide variety of effects The buttons controlling the pasting of the original image are the same as in Paste Extrude The Pen Position Buttons work the same as in all other paste modes controlling only the position of the original image to be pasted The Adjust functions allow fine positioning for the main image to be pasted as in the other paste modes The Center and Inplace Buttons also work in the same manner as the other paste modes Above the Center and Inplace Position Buttons is a Color Source Button for the original image to be pasted labeled Its three modes are Image Clear and Light In Image Mode the original image is pasted in the current color In Clear Mode the original image is pasted transpar ently so that only the embossed edges appear This is useful for blind embossing In Light Mode the original image is pasted as a lighter or darker silhouette on top of the extrusion Paint Environment 4 128 Revision A Liberty Art
260. by luminance or other component The file sequence must be continuously numbered somewhere in the filename Press on the window within the File But ton and the File Popup appears Press in the file list on one of the filenames in the sequence and it appears in the File Window Press on the File But ton itself to recall the current file to the Canvas Start Button This button allows you to define the beginning or base frame of the target sequence you want to track This is the file you will recall to the Canvas to set your Point values on Press in the Start Window and type the starting number of the sequence End Button Press in the End Window and type the ending num ber of the sequence you want to track Lock Frame Button The Lock Frame Button allows you to set points manually for any given frame or series of frames in the animation being tracked The start frame is always automatically locked since you specify its points manually Revision A 5 209 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To lock points on a frame using Lock Frame Choose the frame you want to lock by press ing the Current Frame Window and typing the appropriate number e the appropriate image file to help you choose the points Use the Point Buttons to input the X and Y values for the desired points e Press the Lock Frame Button The points you entered are locked to this frame When a locked frame becomes the
261. cal culator You use it to help compute values where arithmetic is involved There are two ways to bring the calculator up When you are using a function that puts numeric value in the Prompt Window press on the Prompt Window itself e Just after keying a value into a number win dow press on the Prompt Window The value you just entered into the number window appears Revision A 4 67 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation in the Calculator Perform your calculation and when you press the Off Button the value in the calculator is entered into the number window In each of these cases the calculator begins with the number from the corresponding input button You can then use the calculator to compute a new value Remove the calculator by pressing the Off Button The number in the Prompt Window takes the num ber from the numeric display window of the calcula tor updating the current function if a change has been made If you press the Off Button before changing the value the calculator disappears and puts its value back in the corresponding input button The calculator has two panels one of which is hid den by default To enable disable the second panel press on the calculator above the numeric display window Functions of the second panel are described below The main panel has a numeric display window and buttons for Off Clear Memory Clear Save Restore Numeric Entry Basic Arithmetic
262. ck and forth between the two modes The wireframe preview on the Canvas displays an XYZ axis when Perspective Transform is active and displays a cross when Warp Corners mode is active Perspective Transform Perspective Transform displays a panel in the mid dle of the Distort Popup This panel has five main modes five different ways to manipulate the image to be pasted These modes are Position Rotation Slant Mirror and Scale Each mode displays co ordinate handles to press and drag the wireframe Dragging each handle manipulates the image in a particular way For instance when Scale Mode is highlighted in the Distort Popup dragging on a han dle causes scaling When Rotation Mode is high lighted in the Distort Popup dragging on a handle causes rotation Position Button You can always re position the image or axis regardless of what other mode is active To move the image manually press on its axis the XYZ icon and drag it in the desired direction If another mode such as rotation is active it becomes temporarily disabled until you are finished dragging the image Press the Position button to enter Position mode Dragging the on screen handles on the wireframe causes it to move in X or Y Dragging the axis moves the wireframe in any direction Revision A 4 131 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Position X and Y windows display the current coordinates of the image to be pasted When
263. cle repeats 3 times Color table Edit Col Button Press to display the color palette Set the colors to be used in the color table animation Use the top most leftmost colors in the palette Color table Smooth Button Press to turn on When on the color table animation proceeds in soft dissolves rather than hard cuts 5 7 11 Mask Actor Popup The Mask actor calls up a mask file from disk to control a masked effect on another actor The term mask in the Liberty Animation Environment means to change the way another image displays Animation Environment 5 162 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To create a masked effect Add a Mask Actor to the Timeline above the actor which you want to mask Usually the Mask Actor should have the same begin and end times as the actor to be masked below it Press the File Button to assign a file to the Mask Actor which is selected on the Timeline Press on one of the Mask modes to activate it The modes are Mask Chroma Brightness Con trast Tint Hue Ripple Filter Poster Mosaic Gamma HSV RGB Diagram Correct and Blur Press the Edit Keyframe Button The Key frame Timeline appears Press on a matchstick to edit a keyframe The Keyframe Distort Popup appears along with a popup for the current Mask mode Edit the keyframes using the Distort Popup and the Mask Mode Popup Press the Edit Keyframe Button a second time to remove the popups Previe
264. cond point of the first shape in betweens to the second point of the second shape and so on for all the points Press the arrow buttons lt gt on either end of the Link Key Revision A 4 271 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation frame Button to cycle the order of the points in the current shape You can tell which way they re cycling by watching how the red start point moves You can also change the order to either clockwise or counter clock wise by pressing the labeled Link Window Button till it displays the desired direction then pressing on the main part of the Link Keyframe Button To get the best in betweening results with the least amount of folding and cross over place the start points of the two neighboring keyframes in the same relative position for example at the bottom of the shapes and make the direction of the order the same clockwise or counter clockwise and then press on the main part of Link Keyframe Button Move Keyframe Points Buttons Move Prev Kf pt Move Next Kf pt Use these buttons when the two shapes to be in betweened have a different number of points For example if the first shape has three points and the second shape has five points the second shape s two extra points have to originate somewhere in the first shape Often the second shape s extra points origi nate from the same point on the first shape You can change how these points originate in the following way
265. copy to The mask from the source level is copied to the target level To add a mask from one level to a mask in another repeat the above procedure substituting the Add Prefix for the Copy Prefix Only works with RAM masks If you use the Invert prefix with the Copy or Add prefixes the source level values will be inverted before they are copied or added Revision A 4 75 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Mask Browse Popup Browse Mode Current Fy LEES In On Disk Erase Curr Erase All Figure 4 30 The Mask Browse Popup Revision A 4 77 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Pressing directly on the Mask Buffer the mask thumbnail recalls this popup It allows you to browse all six or more masks and manipulate them Colored borders around the browse images show which mask is current which masks are in RAM and which are on disk There is a color key on the left side of the popup identifying the border col ors You can change these colors by underlining a color in the palette and then pressing on the border color box you want to change Mask Browse Slider The Mask Browse Popup displays six mask browse images at a time Each mask browse image is num bered at the upper left of the browse image Use the slider at the bottom of the popup to scroll through the available mask browse images assuming that more than six masks are configured When the slider i
266. corner button displays the popup For instance pressing the corner button in the Paint Button dis plays the Paint Gap Popup where you can set the distance of the space between pen downs when painting Green OK and Yellow Cancel Buttons You confirm an operation in a popup by pressing a green OK button all OK buttons are green at which time the operation is performed and the popup disappears Or you can cancel the operation and remove the popup by pressing the yellow Can cel Button Transparency All of Liberty s functions and pictures operate with full color and full transparency In the 32 bit ver sion of Liberty color goes on the screen at any of 256 levels of transparency In the 64 bit version of Liberty color goes on the screen in from zero to Revision A 4 15 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 65 535 levels of transparency Transparency is con trolled by the Transparency Slider Scale see page 4 23 Transparent Background The transparent background is what remains when you erase the entire picture screen This background has its own color called the Background Color which can be set to any color in the Palette Display Filtering and Anti aliasing All Liberty functions are fully anti aliased meaning that everything is filtered to create smooth but crisp edges This filtering can be turned off or modified if desired with Clamp Mask for example The Solid Brush mode
267. creen The actual contents of the canvas image is not modified Figure 3 5 Linear Contrast Slider Cineon This function when enabled performs a log to lin ear conversion when the 64 bit canvas colors are displayed on the screen This function is normally used when using images read from Cineon or DPX files which are often in log format Pressing on the Cineon button brings up a popup menu with five sliders a Convert Off button and a Reset button refer to the figure shown below The sliders repre sent black points for Red Green and Blue an over all white point and a gamma value Increasing the black points makes the dark colors darker while decreasing the white point makes the bright colors brighter The gamma slider adjusts the middle ranges in the image The Reset button sets the menu to the default log to linear conversion values for Cineon files and will almost always be used when Configuration Environment 3 18 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual this function is on The Convert Off button sets the values so that no conversion is done black points at 0 white point at 1023 and gamma at 1 0 This is equivalent to turning the function off Once the settings in the popup are complete the OK button brings down the popup and makes the set tings active Note that this function only affects the range of col ors displayed on the screen The actual contents of the canvas image is not modified This
268. ctions Storyboard Elevator and Path Window Press on one of the six Storyboard elevator levels to choose it for playing a Storyboard To change the path in the current Storyboard elevator level press in the Path Window and select the disk directory filename of a Storyboard file to play back File Data Button Press the File Data Button to call up the Storyboard File Control Popup Here you can enter title infor mation and comments that will be saved with the Storyboard when you perform a Record You can also choose recording formats and compression schemes Browse Button Pressing the Browse Button will create a browse image of the storyboard using the current frame similar to normal Liberty browse images Revision A 5 245 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation File Control Popup File Specifications Title Comment Format Packing Compression Inter lacing Or ientatior SGI REBAR Uncompressed Yiteo Hon Intec laced Bottom ta Tap Path jora image Jocal hue hayty test my LITT Figure 5 60 File Control Popup Title Window Press and type in text to title the Storyboard Comment Window Press and type in comments about the Storyboard Animation Environment 5 246 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Format Window Press to toggle between SGI 3 and Apple Quicktime formats Packing Window Automatically set based on
269. ctive and puts itin the Temp Buffer The various Paste Modes paste the contents of the Temp Buffer into the Canvas Cut Button Press the Cut Button with no mask active on the Canvas and the entire Canvas picture is cut into the Temp Buffer The previous contents of the Temp Buffer is erased and the new element appears in the selected Temp Buffer in the Buffers Panel If the Palette panel is displayed rather than the Buffers Panel the cut is still accomplished If a mask is active on the Canvas then only the masked area is cut into the Temp Buffer Using Prefix Modes Use the Add Prefix Button with Cut to add the Can vas picture to the picture in the Temp Buffer The cut element appears on top of the contents of the Temp Buffer which is not erased Use the Under Prefix and Add Prefix Buttons with Cut to cut under the Temp Buffer The cut element appears under the contents of the Temp Buffer which is not erased Revision A 4 107 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 9 2 Move Button The Move Button performs just like the Cut Button except that the Canvas or the masked area of the Canvas is erased cut into the Temp Buffer and given to you at the end of your pen for manual posi tioning and pasting back onto the Canvas in a new place To Move an element on the Canvas e Mask the element on the Canvas See the sec tion on masking page 4 363 e Press the Move Button The masked element is erased fr
270. current frame the Lock Frame Button becomes highlighted Current File Button The window in this button displays the filename of the file currently being processed after you press the OK Button and tracking is proceeding This is a dis play window only you cannot input to it Point Buttons The Point Buttons allow you to define the points on the Canvas that you want to track There are two modes of operations for the Point Buttons one called Point Mode that allows tracking of a single motion curve and the second called Corner Mode that allows tracking of a four sided polygon or warp rectangle which uses four motion paths At the lower right of the Motion Tracking Popup is a Point Corner Mode Button that toggles between Point Mode and Corner Mode Animation Environment 5 210 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Size Buttons X and Y The X and Y Size Buttons allow you to define the size of the area you want to track in pixels This is the area that the tracking function looks at to trace motion on the basis of the luminance or other com ponent of the area The X Button defines the width of the tracked area and the Y button defines the height The size box of the current point is highlighted in red Move Buttons The X and Y Move Buttons allow you to define a rectangle designating the maximum distance you expect the tracked area to move in a single frame This value helps the Tracki
271. custom header Line 2 The print quality Print Mode printer type Printer video format input RGB Composite etc Video units being used English or Metric Units video standard NTSC PAL SECAM or AUTO the machine figures it out Auto can not detect Secam it will assume 625 lines is PAL Lines paper size Paper Size Paint Environment 4 466 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The date Month Day Year time Time Time is military time Hitting the Set button will set the Vidjet s clock to whatever was typed into the three buttons after the Time label which represent hour minutes and seconds If nothing is entered the current time on the Vidjet will flash in the three buttons The three toggle buttons on the right side of the Menu are Freeze Under and Ext Sync These can be turned on and off Freeze if lit means that a freeze frame will take place when grab bing Under if lit means that print underscan is on Ext Sync if lit means that the user is using an external as opposed to internal sync The EXIT button removes the Menu Again some fields are dependent on others If a field can not be set asterisk will appear in that button and a message will print in Liberty s message area if the user clicks on the asterisk The Show button in Liberty s full screen browser Menu will
272. d Animation Environment 5 24 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual File Type Popup External Image file formats AU 288 BMP DIB Cineon INF INIT ImayeStor t Pixar Prisms Scitex SRI rgh Softim Targa vertigo Liberty Image Tile formats Liberty im Layers Clip file formats Chyron Motion File Raw set up Cancel Figure 5 6 File Type Popup Revision A 5 25 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The File Type Popup allows you to choose from Liberty file formats and External file formats for still images and Clip file formats for animations External Image File Formats The normal still image file formats from the Save As Popup such as TIFF and Targa Liberty Image File Formats Standard Liberty im and Liberty Layers file format Note that saving the Layers files is useful in the Paint environment when using the Temp Layers feature see p4 447 You would not normally ren der to Layers files in Animation Clip File Formats Raw YUV for use with disk arrays such as Ciprico MegaDrive or Eurologic see the Liberty Technical Reference manual and the Chyron Motion File For mat for realtime playback on iNFiNiT Chyron Motion File Format With this file format you can render animations to a format that contains all the frames under a single file name When the render is finished you can transfer the file to the iNFiNiT for real
273. d Record and Run buttons briefly described above refer to the Animation Playback Functions 5 10 on page 5 222 Animation Actor Menus Animation Actors in brief Animation actors are the basic elements of an ani mation Each type of actor has a specific function and is represented by a color coded bar in the Time line When you see a dark green bar you know that it represents a Cel Actor When you see a magenta bar you know it represents a Morph Actor Below is a quick introduction to the actor types Most types of actors call an image file from the disk and display it as part of the animation Each actor can have its own curve path and a series of key frames for various changes in the display of the actor s image file size rotation transparency etc Animation actors exist on layers in the Animation Timeline Any number of sequential actors and any combination of actor types can exist on a single layer Animation Environment 5 44 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Actor Type Popup Cel Switcher Cycle Colortab Filmstrip E Text Writeon Morph CineFusion Macro Shape Plug In Figure 5 10 Actor Type Popup The Actor Type Popup displays the types of actors and their color codes To call it up press the center of the colored button in the Add Actor Button in the Actor Edit Menu usually the colored button is green and says Cel but it may be other colors types of actors The Actor T
274. d in memory pre viously If Grab 1 is pressed the image that is on the canvas will be input to the Vidjet s memory via the video board If Clear is pressed all frames in memory will be removed If Clear is pressed the current frame will be cleared from memory and the remaining frames will be renum Paint Environment 4 464 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual bered The affects of Grab 1 Clear All and Clear will be seen in the Current Frame Frames Grabbed and Frames Free fields If is pressed the current frame will be tagged A tagged frame will get printed when one of the print buttons is pressed By default if no frames are tagged they will all get printed Tagging allows for editing If the user decides not to print all frames in memory he she just tags the ones that need to be printed The order that frames are tagged in deter mines the order they will print in If Untag is pressed the current frame will be untagged won t be printed If Stop is pressed printing will be cancelled If Save is pressed the current configu ration for the Vidjet will be saved and can be recalled any time later by pressing the Recall but ton If Status is pressed the current state such as READY PRINTING CANCELLED WAIT ING FOR PRINTER etc of the Vidjet will be printed to the message area of Liberty Printing does take some time and you need to wait until the state of the Vidj
275. d intensity For example doing a Luminance Channel Mask on a picture of a cloudy sky gives a mask of varied intensity e Set the direction button to indicate which direction the light source will come from Press the corner button of the Bump Map Button The Bump Map Popup appears You can press the main part of the Bump Map Button to make a bump map without changing the bump map settings e Press the Reset Button to set the slider scales to their default e Press OK to render the Bump Map NOTE A Bump Map often looks best when performed on solid color background There must be picture information on the Canvas for the Bump Map to map onto transparent background won t work Dark Range Slider Sets two markers to define the range of the darker areas of the rendered bumps Bright Range Slider Sets two markers to define the range of the lighter areas of the rendered bumps Bump Height Slider Sets the height of the rendered bumps on a scale of 1 to 100 Paint Environment 4 336 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Light Elevation Slider Sets the vertical angle of the light hitting the ren dered bumps on a scale of 0 90 degrees coming out of the screen directly at the viewer The direc tion clock determines horizontal direction of the light source in the plane of the canvas image Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the bump map When th
276. d on constrains many of Liberty s Paint functions to user definable invisi ble evenly spaced grid points The positioning of all the Paint functions including Line and Curve Paint Mask Rectangle Mask and the Paste functions are constrained by Grid Press the Grid Button to turn Grid Mode on When turned on Grid is set to the previous Grid values and the Grid Button is highlighted If no previous Grid values have been set the default is a full screen grid i e the entire screen is one big grid rectangle The grid may or may not be visible when on depending on whether or not the Show Grid but ton is on Paint Environment 4 54 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Grid Popup from Mask pixels inches Size 622 Y Size 461 X Offset 21 Y Offset 10 diy 2 div 4 Figure 4 23 Grid Popup Press the corner button of the Grid Button to call up the Grid Popup You can enter numbers for the x and y dimensions of a grid and for the x and y grid offsets The offsets of the grid define where the grid starts on the screen The offset numbers measure the distance from the lower left corner of the Canvas to the xy starting position of the grid Or you can press the From Mask Button at the top of the Grid Popup and a grid will be created using the bounding box of the current masked area on the Canvas The From Mask Button Press the From Mask Button to set a grid defined by the size of the bou
277. d the filename in the list and press on it The recalled curve replaces the current curve Paint Environment 4 254 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Save Points Button Press the Save button to display the File Popup and save the current curve to disk You are prompted to enter a filename for the curve you are saving The actual points and tangents of the curve are saved not the image that is created when you press OK Erase Points Button Press the Erase button to delete all points on the Canvas It doesn t matter if the points are selected or not Curve OK and Cancel Buttons Press the OK button to draw the current curve using the current brush color and transparency Unless the Repeat Prefix is on the Curve Popup disappears Press Cancel to remove the popup without drawing the curve Curve Palette Button Press the Palette button to call up the color palette and color slider scales without exiting the Curve Popup Press OK to return to the Curve Popup Gravity Button Press the Grav button to turn on Gravity which allows you to add a point exactly on top of another point This is useful when creating curves which cross themselves such as bows etc The Grav but ton is grayed out unless you are in the Add or Move Points mode Revision A 4 255 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To add a point exactly on top of an existing point e Press the Add Button e Pr
278. desig nated as the license server Revision A 3 51 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Installing Software Options When you install new Liberty software you must enable a license from Chyron Pressing on a soft ware option in the list or simply using the corre sponding feature in the Liberty software activates the option When this occurs Liberty verifies that the user has a license for that option Refer to the Liberty Technical Reference Manual for instructions on obtaining and installing Liberty licenses Press on the Install Option Button to license Liberty 3 10 CURSOR PANEL Standard Cursor DefaultStd Dead Cursor DefaultDead Busy Cursor DefaultBusy Pan Cursor 4Directions Cursor Configuration Figure 3 13 The Cursor Panel Configuration Environment 3 52 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Use the Cursor Panel to choose one of Liberty s cur sor styles There are four kinds of cursors standard active cursor The dead cursor that is displayed when the cursor is over a menu area that is currently unusable busy cursor that is displayed when Liberty is occupied with a computation or rendering temporarily impeding operation The pan cursor that is displayed when you pan the magnified Canvas by dragging the pen on the Canvas with the Alt keyboard key pressed Cursor Selection Buttons Press one of the arrow button
279. directly below it place a mask Actor in Mask Mode directly above the Gamma layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Chroma Key Mode Hame Loops Begin File Invert Inplace next gt Noise Bump Map Gamma Chroma Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 46 Mask Actor Popup 3 Animation Environment 5 174 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual keep colors clip colors Key Controls Dominant color 3x3 blur Foreground R 6 5 5 blur 3x3 median Key On 5x5 median cols j shrink color B8 B 3 1 BG on keep keep 5 keep Y Edge alpha smooth strength tune i l E bes 2 use mask Figure 5 47 Chroma Key Popup Revision A 5 175 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual A Mask Actor in Chroma Key Mode allows you to key one Cel Actor into another one To use the Chroma Key Mask Actor e Add a Mask Actor to the Timeline e 2 Press the Chroma Button in Mask Panel 3 to make it a Chroma Key Mask Actor 3 Below the Mask Actor add a Cel actor containing one or more blue screen images to the timeline 4 Below the blue screen Cel Actor add another Cel Actor with the image to be keyed in 5 Press the Edit Keyframe Button and edit the keyframes A large Edit Key button appears to the right of the Paste Distort Menu 6 Press the Edit Key Button This brings up the Chroma Key Popup which allows you to set the chroma key p
280. display of all numbers in the VTR Panel Paint Environment 4 438 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Source Target Set up Popup TARGET Devices 768 68 68 00 8008 808 88 88 88 686 66 86 fhdi sierratrms aBb Liberty 1 Rescale Liberty 1 7 86 86 659 Y 494 Liberty 1 Shrinkwrap Liberty i 90 90 5 Liberty 1 9 99 00 Liberty 1 9 90 99 Show Timecode Reset All Reset Time Reset Src Dst Modes Figure 4 148 Source Target Set up Popup Revision A Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Source Selection Buttons At the right of each of the twelve timecode windows on the Source Set up Popup is a Source Selection Button which you can toggle between Off Canvas Temp and Mask When the button is Off that device or disk path is not active Any of the other three modes causes the device disk path to be an active source Choosing Canvas Temp or Mask causes the input images to be routed to the corre sponding buffer in the Paint Environment during grabs and rotoscoping Clicking repeatedly on the window cycles through the choices For a normal Canvas render when only one device is highlighted you do not need to enable the Source Selection But ton By default the highlighted current device is used as the source When more than one device but ton has been configured you can set all the devices to Off and only the current highlighted device is used as a source
281. displayed If the ImageStor data mode is on the file format is listed if it is an ImageStor file that is if it has an ImageStor thumbnail file in the same directory or an entry is in the ImageStor data base Information identifying other image file for mats is not remotely accessible Listing ImageStor Database Fields in Full Screen File Manager When in mode press the Full Button to call up the Full Screen File Manager In the Full Screen File Manager the corner button of the Browse But ton brings up a popup with options for what to dis play when Browse Mode is off One of these options is ImageStor data When this mode is on it dis plays five ImageStor database fields for every ImageStor file it finds See page 4 177 for details Sorting and Filtering By ImageStor Fields The Sort Button in the Full Screen File Manager calls up a Sort Popup that has five sort modes based on ImageStor database fields The Sort Popup also has text entry windows whereby files are filtered on the basis of up to five ImageStor database fields Paint Environment 4 148 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 10 Grab and Show Functions 4 10 1 Grab Button Press the Grab Button to digitize the input to the installed video board and to display that digitized image on the Canvas The Grab Popup allows you to grab video to an optional disk array instead of the Canvas Grab Popup Yideo To Disk BERBER
282. djust the key signal matte or alpha generated by the Chroma Key tool The Blur Median and Shrink buttons are mutually exclusive Only one can be on at a time 3x3 Blur Button Press the 3x3 Blur Button to blur the key signal with a 3x3 pixel filter 5x5 Blur Button Press the 5x5 Blur Button to blur the key signal with a 5x5 pixel filter 3x3 Median Button Press the 3x3 Median Button to run a 3x3 pixel median filter on the key signal This is good for removing spots of noise from the key 5x5 Median Button Press the 5x5 Median Button to run a 5x5 median filter on the key signal This is good for removing slightly larger spots of noise from the key Shrink Button The Shrink Button shrinks the key signal at the edges by 1 pixel Paint Environment 4 354 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual BG On Button When previewing or performing an actual chroma key press the BG On Button to turn on off the com positing of the Temp image with the keyed Canvas When the BG On Button is on the Temp is compos ited with the Canvas When the BG On Button is off the background color of the Canvas is keyed in This is useful for viewing the keyed Canvas against vari ous background colors to see if the blues or greens are still visible You can change the canvas back ground color using Liberty s Color Palette at the left of the Canvas while the Chroma Key Popup is up causing the preview to update if the P
283. e Saving in Layers Mode The Layers File Format saves the images in all active layers as well as their individual layer settings including position alpha etc in one file on disk The Canvas is saved in the file as well Thus you can save the composition you are working on and come back to it later without finalizing the settings of the layers When the Layers File is recalled the Canvas and all layers and settings are restored from the disk Also when layers are recalled from disk the levels into which they are loaded are turned on even if they were off prior to the recall Note that if there are cur rently fewer RAM Temps than there are layers in the recalled file only the layers loading into current Paint Environment 4 210 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual RAM Temps are recalled This only happens if you ve reduced the number of RAM Temps since saving the Layers File Once you ve selected the Layers mode as described above using the Save Button saves the Canvas and any active layers to a Layers File Using the Recall File Button while in Layers Mode displays any Lay ers Files in the directory while you can browse Lay ers Files in the Full Screen File Manager Menu Pressing on a Layers File in the Recall Popup or Full Screen File Manager Menu recalls the Canvas and layers from the disk Revision A 4 211 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The File Modes and their color codes are T
284. e ments in the sequence filmstrips are counted as one element though they include many sequentially numbered files Animation Environment 5 114 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To create a sequence of files in Multiple using the Num Button and the File Button 11 Add a Cel Actor into the Timeline 12 Press on the word Single in the lower right corner of the Cel Actor Popup The Multi ple Actor Popup appears 13 Press in the window of the File Button The File Popup appears 4 Select a file from the File Popup by pressing on or typing its filename The File Popup disappears and the filename appears in the File Button The chosen image file is assigned to step 1 of the cycle 14 Press the Insert Button to increase by one the displayed number in the Number But ton for example 2 of 2 15 Press the File Button and select from the File Popup the next image file to be used The File Popup disappears and the filename appears in the File Button The chosen image file is assigned to step 2 of the cycle Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have entered all the desired image files Pressing the Recall Cel Button recalls from disk the image file of the step currently displayed in the Num Button Revision A 5 115 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To change the image file of one of the steps of the cycle e Repeatedly press the top bottom half of the Num label to display the s
285. e This sets the actor to morph between two images Press the Edit Lines Button in the Morph Actor Popup The Line Morph Popup appears If an existing morph appears on the Canvas press the Reset Button twice quickly to reset the morph Press the Add Button on the Line Morph Popup to add line segments on the Canvas to define the beginning of the morph Press once to start a line segment press a second time to define the end of the line segment For example if you are morphing one face into another you place line segments along each of the features Press the Lock Button on the Line Morph Popup This locks down the line segments you have added defining the first morph keyframe The yellow pointer on the Morph Slider jumps to the right end Revision A 5 201 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 13 Press the Edit Lines Button to exit the Line Morph Popup The Line Morph Popup disappears 14 Press the Swap Temp Canvas to put the starting image into the Temp Whatever was in the temp will appear on the screen 5 Press the top Cel actor to select it This contains the image you are morphing to e 16 Press the Recall Cel Button in the Cel Actor Popup The image you are morphing to is recalled to the Canvas for you to refer to while setting the ending of the morph 7 Press the Morph actor on the Timeline to edit it and press the Edit Lines Button The Line Morph Popup appears again The line segme
286. e the Mask Info Button only provides information on the mask buff ers These menus may be useful when there are too many temps and masks to fit on the Cels Info menu which is not scrollable Revision A 3 31 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Button Configuration Buttons Button button who s got the button Here you can set the visual style for all the buttons in Liberty s menus Please note that the Surface and Bevel but tons are mutually exclusive turning on one turns the other off The Surface Button Press the Surface button to turn Surface Mode on off When Surface Mode is on Liberty displays turned on buttons by highlighting the surface of the button The Bevel Button Press the Bevel button to turn Bevel Mode on off When Bevel Mode is on Liberty displays turned on menu buttons with colored bevels that push IN become debossed In Alt mode see below you can set the highlight color and the bevel colors in the menu configuration palette The Black Border Button Press the Black Border button to turn Black Border Mode on off When the Black Border Mode is on Liberty draws thin black borders around all menu buttons This makes buttons look sharper and crisper on a high res screen The Alt Style Button Press the Alt Style Button to turn Alternate Style Mode on off When the Alt Style Mode is on Lib erty sets beveling colors to be user defined in pal ette row 3
287. e Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the bump map on the masked area Elevator Presets The Bump Map popup has six presets for saving dif ferent configurations of bump map settings 4 15 16 Mosaic Button The Mosaic Button renders the masked area of the Canvas into blocks for a digitized look You can control the coarseness and fineness of the blocks with two sliders on the Mosaic Popup Revision A 4 337 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Mosaic Popup Mosaic OK 1 active random Reset Figure 4 107 Mosaic Popup Press the corner button of Mosaic to call up the popup The x slider controls the width of the mosaic blocks the y slider controls the height Moving the x Slider causes both the x and y sliders to move together To set separate x and y values move the x slider first then the y slider which operates sepa rately from the x slider The slider numbers repre sent the pixel dimensions of the mosaic blocks Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the mosaic When the Active Button is on every change you make on the sliders updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the mosaic on the masked area Random Button
288. e Button The filename must be one of a series of files with the same name and sequential numbers such as picl pic2 pic3 etc The filename may be any of the files in the sequence not necessarily the first Revision A 5 121 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation The current file displayed in the File Window of the Filmstrip Actor Popup can be recalled with the Recall Cel Button Filmstrip Source Buttons Press one of these buttons to specify a source for the files of the Filmstrip Actor Only one of these but tons can be on at a time Filmstrip Hdisk Button When turned on the images come from the hard disk using the name entered in the File button Filmstrip Src VTR Button Press to turn on If turned on images are grabbed from the VTR configured as the Src source VTR Filmstrip Tar VTR Button Press to turn on If turned on images are grabbed from the VTR configured as the Tar target VTR Extract Button De interlacing The extract functions allow you to de interface video frames as they are input to Liberty in a Film strip Actor Press the Extract Button to display the de interlacing controls on the De interfacing Popup Animation Environment 5 122 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual De interlacing Popup field use odd use even field 2 use atid use even Reset Figure 5 28 De interlacing Popup This popup has two sets of identica
289. e Erase OK Button erases the existing Canvas before the morph is rendered Triangle Morph Add Points Button Press to add control points to the Canvas You must specify a bounding box first Press down and let up quickly to set the first corner of the bounding Paint Environment 4 482 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual box then drag and press again to set the diagonally opposite corner Adding a point connects the new point to other points or to corners of the bounding box forming triangular segments creating a grid that controls the morph You can use the Move But ton while adding points to reposition points you have just added Unlike Line Morph you cannot add or delete points after you press the Lock Button Press Done or another Triangle Morph Popup But ton to terminate the Add function Triangle Morph Delete Points Button Press to delete control points from the Canvas On the Canvas press on a point to delete it The point disappears along with the lines connecting it to other points Press the Delete Button a second time or another Triangle Morph Popup button to terminate the delete function Triangle Morph Move Points Button Press to move control points on the Canvas On the Canvas press on and drag a point The point moves along with the lines connecting it to other points You are prevented from moving a point across a connecting line You can move points in any key frame of the
290. e Picked pixel near the center The larger settings operate the same way with the Picked pixel in the center of the square of averaged pixels Color Space Button HSV Displays the current color space RGB HSV CMYK HSL etc Press this button to call up the Color Space Popup for choosing which color space to use or to call up the Color Mixer Paint Environment 4 42 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 3 2 Color Modes When the green Color Space button is pressed the Color Mode Popup appears The button will be labeled HSV RGB CMYK or HSL depending on the currently selected Color Mode Color checking NTSC PAL Off Gamma 1 600000 Color Mixer HSV RGB CMYK HSL Figure 4 19 Color Space Popup Color Checking This tool when activated will provide an indication of whether the currently selected color s are within legal NTSC or PAL color space NOTE This tool will not affect the colors of the canvas pixels It only identifies illegal palette colors See The Color Clip Button description on for more information on clipping the Palette colors Revision A 4 43 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation NTSC Button Press the NTSC button to enable highlight NTSC Color Checking When active if a selected color is legal there will be a white select line under the color chip If the color is illegal e g not in legal NTSC color space the white select bar
291. e Repeat with Vertical and 4 way Wrap Motion Tracking Button When pressed the Motion Tracking popup appears For more detailed information refer to the Motion Tracking section See Motion Tracking on page 5 206 Color Matrix Button The Color Matrix Button allows you to remap the input RGBA channels to the output RGBA channels Thus for example you can remap the red channel into the green channel Press the corner button in the Color Matrix Button to call up the Color Matrix Popup Figure 4 111 It contains the 16 button Color Matrix If you press for example the button for R in G out and enter the number 1 0 the input red channel will be mapped into the output green channel Values of less than 1 0 provide fractional mapping Sliders are pro vided to adjust Bias and Gain allowing contrast brightness adjustments Elevator Presets The Color Matrix Popup has six presets for saving different configurations of the Color Matrix settings Revision A 4 343 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the color mapping When the Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the color map ping on the masked area Dither Button Dither allows you to quantize reduce or compress the colors of an image on the
292. e an active layer Thus you can apply Image Tools and their previews to various individ ual layers on the Canvas by selecting a layer as the current layer then applying the function as desired Note that several Image Tools are not implemented for Temp Mode This is generally because such tools require both the current Temp and the Canvas The following Image Tools are not implemented in Temp Mode Reveal both Morph functions Motion Tracking Dither and Chroma Keying These but tons are grayed out when Temp Mode is active Layers as Source for Mask Tools The Mask Panel also has a Canvas Temp Mode bar at the top Mask Tools that in Canvas Mode use the Canvas as their source such as Alpha Channel Fill and Match use the current Temp as their source when Temp Mode is active For example if you tog gle to Temp Mode you can use Channels Lumi nance Mask to generate a mask from the luminance of the current Temp Revision A 4 95 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation When the current Temp is not enabled as a layer the mask is generated from the in place position of the current Temp When the current Temp is an active layer the layer offset is used to generate the mask This is true for Alpha Channel Match Diff and Paste Mask Fill Mask requires that the layer be active Layers Function Buttons Composite Button Press to paste all active layers onto the Canvas in their currently previewed form Add
293. e can be used not just images with gray scale only The Color table actor uses the luminance range it finds in the image file and applies the selected colors from the palette Color table Duplicate Button Dups To set the number of fields it takes to cycle the color table one step e Press the Dups window Type in a new number of fields press Enter You can also increment the Dups number by press ing the top half of the Dups label the word itself and decrement by pressing the bottom half of the Dups label Color table Cycle Button Press to turn on off When on this mode causes the selected colors to cycle through the gray scale from light to dark Revision A 5 161 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Color table Reveal Button Press to turn on off When on initially all colors are transparent and thus invisible Then one by one each color is revealed starting with the one assigned to the darkest values Color table Ncols Button Press to set the number of palette colors to be used The maximum is 256 in which case the Color table Actor would use all 8 palettes of 32 colors each in the Color Palette Elevator The number of colors set in Ncols is the length of a single cycle For example with 30 colors set in Ncols and the Dups Button at 2 fields one cycle lasts 30 frames 1 second 60 fields In this case if the Color table actor has a duration of 3 seconds the cy
294. e effects can also be animated using the Mask Actor in the Animation Environ ment To apply noise into an area Mask the desired area on the Canvas If there is no mask active on the Canvas the entire Can vas will have noise applied Press the corner button of the Noise Button to call up the Noise Popup The Noise Popup appears If you press the main part of the Noise Button noise is applied according to the current settings Press some of the Color Controls to high light them This designates the channels on the Can vas where the noise will appear Choose one of the Noise Modes Uniform Gauss etc Press OK The noise is applied into the masked area Paint Environment 4 304 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Noise Popup Noise Controls Color Controls Modes Uniform Fibers Gauss Marble Clouds Fabric Palette preview active Green Blue 25 Figure 4 94 Noise Popup Revision A 4 305 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The Noise Popup contains a host of tools for con trolling the application of different kinds of noise to the Canvas Palette Button When the Palette Button is high lighted noise is applied using the Palette colors that are currently selected in the Palette instead of the image on the Canvas There must be at least two colors selected in the Palette s Multiple Colors Mode Pressing on the Color Chip Button above the Palette Button dis
295. e ettet tete ea ceo ite 4 455 Artstar Button 4 456 4 24 H P Vidjet Pro seen 4 456 Hardware Jte t te ead ee 4 457 Color Adjust Menu seee m 4 461 4 25 MORPH FEATURES herir erint 4 467 4 25 1 General Procedure for Line Morph amp Triangle Morph 4 468 4 25 2 Line Morph eere 4 468 Line Morph Add Button 4 470 Line Morph Delete Button 4 470 Line Morph Move Button seee 4 471 Line Morph Color Button 4 471 Line Morph Tune Button esee 4 472 Line Morph Select Button eee 4 473 Line Morph Keyframe Timeline Slider 4 473 Line Morph Add Keyframe 4 474 Line Morph Copy Keyframe 4 474 Line Morph Delete Keyframe 4 475 Line Morph Reset 4 475 Line Morph Lock Button eeeeeee 4 475 Line Morph Test 4 476 Line Morph Recall and Save buttons 4 476 Line Morph Cancel Button 4 476 Line Morph OK Button see 4 476
296. e first keyframe to edit it Revision A 5 165 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press the color swatch the Chroma Key Mode Popup the default is black The Color Palette is called up Select a palette box and create the color you want to key off of A good way to do this is to recall the full color image from the actor below and use the color pick button to pick the color you wish to key on into the palette e Press on the color swatch again It changes to the new color Repeat steps 2 through 5 with all the remaining key frames If you want to you can have the color change from keyframe to keyframe Also on the Chroma Key Mode Popup are the Greed and Smoothness slider scales which work identi cally to the Greed and Smoothness slider scales on the Match Mask Popup in the Paint environment If there is a file assigned to the Mask Actor it is used as a garbage matte and masks the file below exactly the same as Mask Mode Brightness Mode Press the Brightness Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Brightness Mode When turned on the brightness of the masked area in the actor below is changed according to the Brightness Slider on the Mask Mode Popup The slider works identi cally to the Brightness Slider on the Adjust Popup in the Paint Environment The default is 100 black Animation Environment 5 166 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE The Brightness Ac
297. e full range of colors in the 64 bit canvas To display the canvas image Liberty normally does a linear conversion to display the 64 bit colors on the screen The 64 bit Color Range Display functions allow this conversion to be altered The following options exist Off When this button is on Liberty does a linear conver sion to display the 64 bit canvas colors on the screen In other words the software does not per form any contrast adjustments or other color correc tions when displaying the canvas on the screen The lower bits of each pixel are merely discarded to con vert the pixel from 64 bit to 32 bit for screen dis play This is the default mode Linear This allows the user to turn on a linear contrast cor rection so that canvas pixels are contrast corrected before being displayed on the screen Pressing on the Linear button brings up a slider with two mark ers shown below The upper marker represents the white point Lowering this marker brightens the bright colors of the canvas when displayed on the screen The lower marker represents a black point Increasing this marker darkens the dark colors of the canvas when displayed on the screen The Reset but ton resets the markers to the bottom and top of the slider which essentially turns the contrast correction off Revision A 3 17 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Note that this function only affects the range of col ors displayed on the s
298. e how Warp interacts with Marble Mode try Marble Mode with the Warp set ting at one 1 then again with Warp set at a higher number Time Slider Primarily used for controlling noise applied over time in the Mask Actor in the Animation Environ ment Changing the setting of the Time Slider alters the distribution of the noise Making small incre mental changes in the Time settings makes small incremental variations in the distribution of the noise Elevator Presets The popup has twelve presets for saving different configurations of the settings for Noise Paint Environment 4 308 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the noise When the Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the noise on the masked area 4 15 4 Apply Button The Apply Button applies a color or colors to the masked area When a single palette color is chosen that color is applied uniformly to the masked area If multiple palette colors are chosen a gradated wash is applied from the palette Apply Popup DH Linear Apply sine AK Circular Apply smooth Cancel poster r Radial Apply inyert Recall Pick Point Centered Save reset Figure 4 95 Apply Popup Press the corner button of Apply to call up the Apply Popup
299. e lowest Temp in the stack having the lowest priority bottom layer Canvas Position Relative to Layers Stack At the left of the Temp browse images is a vertical bar that controls the position of the Canvas relative to the layers A white marker on the bar denotes the position of the Canvas relative to the stack Pressing on the bar moves the Canvas up or down the stack For example pressing on the bar between the first and second layers displays the Canvas under the first top layer but above all the other layers Layers Browse Slider When more than six layers are configured use the vertical slider at the right of the browse images to scroll through the available layers When the slider is all way at the top the first six layers are displayed Moving the slider down scrolls through the rest of the layers When the slider is all way at the bottom the last six layers are displayed Revision A 4 89 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Top Button Press to display the first six layers Scroll Up Button Press to scroll the layers up by six levels Jump Up Button Press to jump the layers up by one level Jump Down Button Press to jump the layers down by one level Scroll Down Button Press to scroll the layers down by six levels Bottom Button b Press to display the last six layers As with all Liberty elevators you can copy the lay ers in this popup from one level to anothe
300. e of the fast temps overwrites the saved temps Info Buttons These buttons provide information about Liberty s various buffers Cels Info Press the Cels Info Button for a text list containing data about the various image buffers in Liberty including the Canvas each RAM temp and each RAM mask For each image buffer the following information is provided Configuration Environment 3 30 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Name of the image buffer for example Temp 4 For temps and masks a small arrow gt next to the name indicates that this is the current temp or mask x y For layers this shows the current x and y position of the layer xs ys The total x and y size in pixels of the buffer for layers this is the size of the image the layer contains for the canvas and masks it is the canvas resolution Size The size in bytes of the image buffer Bound For the Canvas and masks this shows lower left x y position and size in pix els xs ys of the image in the buffer This is useful since the Canvas and masks are NOT sized to the image they contain and this tells where the image is in the buffer assuming the image is a cutout For layers you can ignore this section since layers are always sized to the cutout they contain Temp Info and Mask Info The Temp Info Button is similar to the Cels Info Button except that it only provides information on the temp buffers layers Likewis
301. e of the image that is in the Temp Thus in RAM Temps small images consume less RAM than large images If you use your layers pri marily for small cutouts you may be able to config ure many more Temps in RAM Temp Buffers can also be larger than the Canvas Thus you can load an image that is larger than the Canvas into a Temp then modify it with for exam ple Paste Distort without having to go into a larger Canvas resolution Revision A 4 87 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Layers Popup Function Temp Layers Composite Current Add All Off Reset 11 In RAM E Swap lt Erase Curr On Disk Copy o Erase A11 Move Erase Canvas Figure 4 34 The Layers Popup Press directly on the Transfer Buffer thumbnail in the Buffers Panel to display the Layers Popup Paint Environment Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Layers Popup displays the Temp layers as small browse images and provides many controls to mod ify the layers including positioning transparency Paste Distort and the relative position of layers in the stack The Layers Popup displays six browse images at a time and if more than six layers are configured allows you to scroll up and down the stack of layers At the upper left of each browse image is its number starting with 1 as the top layer Layer Priority Prioritization of the layers is from top to bottom with Temp 1 having the highest priority top layer and th
302. e on the disk Prefix Buttons The following standard prefix buttons are included in the Full screen File Menu Rep Und Add and Inv These work the same here as on the standard Paint Environment menu OK Button Press the green OK button to start the current action on the selected files If there is no selection do not press OK just hit the Enter key after typing in the filename or press directly on a filename in the list If there is a selection OK must be used Also OK must be used when choosing a directory while in Path mode for example when choosing a directory to copy a file to Revision A 4 235 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Cancel Button Press the yellow Cancel button to remove the Full screen File Menu without performing any action Paint Environment 4 236 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Loading Layers Graphically Recall 188844 18 free Host local Disk hd8 Dir awards File Make Browse path full rept und i Select Comp Page Cancel logosL 109051 htgradr btgrad1 bt lyr bnaut tnautl fisht Figure 4 76 Full Screen File Manager with Temp Loader Revision A Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The most convenient way to load up a number of Temp Buffers with images from the disk is to graph ically load them from the Full Screen File Menu To load layers graphically e 1 2 3 e 4 e 5 6 Press the File Man
303. e pen down on the Angle Button and drag the dot around the outside of the clock The embossed image has no preview since the emboss distance is too small to preview The Angle Window at the bot tom of the Angle Button shows the emboss angle in degrees The Length Windows at either side of the Angle Window display the length of the two emboss edges in pixels You can change any one of these numeric values by pressing directly on its window and typing in a new number followed by the Enter key You can set the Direction Button below the Emboss Angle Button to Out for an outward embossed edge or In for an inward embossed edge In is useful if you want to emboss some thing yet retain its original shape Out grows the edges outward so that the original image is not affected Use the dual controls for alpha and color source as well as length to define independently the two opposite embossed edges As mentioned above the left buttons are linked to the red dot on the clock the right buttons are linked to the blue dot Paint Environment 4 126 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Source Colors for the Emboss At the top of the Angle Button are two Color Source Buttons controlling the source s of the color for the emboss These buttons cycle among the same three labels as most of the other paste modes Palette Image and Light In Palette Mode the embossed edge is created using colors from t
304. e picture You can leave it up while you work on the Canvas when you save pictures the overlay is not saved Mask Safe Action and Mask Safe Title You can create a rectangle mask corresponding to Safe Action or Safe Title by turning on Mask Safe Action or Mask Safe Title If either or both of the Mask Buttons is on when you press OK the solid rectangle masks are maintained on the Canvas for the next function Cross Hair Button The Cross Hair Button changes the size of the crosshair in the center of the screen when either Show Safe Action or Show Safe Title is on Mask Grid Button Press the Mask Grid Button to display the current grid as a mask in one pixel lines thus making it vis ible You can then Apply color into the grid lines to make them a permanent part of the picture The Mask Grid Button displays the current Grid whether the Grid Button is actually turned on or not For more details about Mask Grid see page 4 58 Clamp Mask Button The Clamp Button allows you to compress the values in a mask Press the corner button of the Clamp Button to call up the Clamp Popup The Clamp Popup has the standard Diagram tools along with an extra slider the Clamp Threshold Slider Basically clamping a mask reduces some of the mask values to either 0 or 100 255 Clamp sets to 0 all current mask values that are lower than the Revision A 4 391 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Clamp Threshold Slider
305. e preview will not refresh while the layer s position and or 3D attributes are being changed In this case the preview will refresh as soon as the user releases the pen mouse Using Paint Image Tools and Mask Tools with Layers You can paint and apply Image Tools to individual layers when the layer is in 2D Mode only Also you can use individual layers as source images for a number of Mask Tools such as Channel Lumi nance Painting to Layers At the top of the Paint Panel is a bar where you can chose different Paint Modes On Canvas for normal painting on the Canvas On Temp for painting to the current layer and On Mask for painting into masks Paint Environment 4 94 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual When Paint On Temp Mode is active all paint func tions apply to the current Temp layer and only works if the current Temp is an active layer that is if itis displayed as a layer on the Canvas Paint functions that need the current Temp as a source image such as Reveal Paint are disabled When Paint is off pressing on a layer on the Canvas makes that layer the current layer This is a quick way to Select a layer for Painting or for applying Image Tools Applying Image Tools to Layers The Image Tools Panels have a Canvas Temp Mode bar on the top similar to the Paint Panel In Canvas Mode the Image Tools apply to the Canvas In Temp Mode they apply to the current Temp the Temp must b
306. e recalled followed by the key board s Enter key The file is recalled to the Canvas as an active mask NOTE It doesn t matter whether the file you recall was saved as a Mask file or not A normal picture file when recalled in Mask mode displays as a Mask rather than as an RGB picture When the Invert Prefix is on the Mask function will remove mask from the areas it would normally add mask to Mask Panels Description There are two Mask Panel menus Mask Tools 1 and Mask Tools 2 Press the small arrows at either end of the yellow title bar at the top of the panel to bring up the other panel Normally the Mask Panel appears in the rightmost of the four Panel menu positions under the Canvas The top row of four buttons Use mask Mask All Invert Mask and Erase Mask stay visible when both the Mask and the Mask2 Panels are displayed Temp Layers as Source for Mask Tools The Mask Panel has a Canvas Temp Mode bar at the top Mask Tools that in Canvas Mode use the Can vas as their source such as Alpha Channel Fill and Match use the current Temp as their source when Temp Mode is active For example if you toggle to Temp Mode you can use Channels Luminance Mask to generate a mask from the luminance of the current Temp Revision A 4 365 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation When the current Temp is not enabled as a layer the mask is generated from the in place position of the current Temp When t
307. e the timeline The new key frame matchstick has no data when you add it to the timeline You will edit it to change its attributes see details of editing keyframes see page 5 70 Delete Keyframe Button To delete a keyframe from the Keyframe Time line Press the Delete Keyframe Button Press on a keyframe matchstick in the Key frame Timeline The matchstick you press on disappears from the timeline its attributes are deleted as well Revision A 5 71 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE It is impossible to delete or move the beginning or ending matchstick Move Keyframe Button To move a keyframe on the Keyframe Timeline e Press on the Move Keyframe Button The Move Keyframe Button lights blue Press and drag the keyframe matchstick to move it to its new position The Move Button turns off Keyframe Elevator The five level Keyframe Elevator is just above the keyframe OK Button It does not work like any of the other elevators in Liberty Use the Save Key frame Button to save keyframe matchsticks into the Keyframe Elevator Use the Recall Keyframe But ton to recall keyframe matchsticks from the Key frame Elevator Keyframe Save Button To save a keyframe matchstick into the Key frame Elevator Press on the matchstick to be saved It becomes highlighted This is also the way you select a matchstick for editing the wireframe of the keyframe
308. e used Paint Environment 4 408 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Use the functions of the Transform Popup to position rotate scale slant and mirror the displayed text The Text Transform Popup works similar to Paste Distort When the Trans form Popup is up to change the active character press the right and left arrow keys To change the active line press the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard To change what mode Transform is in press on the text window in the Transform Text Button e Press the OK Button The Transform Popup disappears Render Text Button Mask MY pu Filled Outline Figure 4 140 Render Popup Press at any time to render text to the Canvas in the current color at the current transparency It works on selected text or if no text is selected it works on all the text The corner Erase button of the OK but ton erases the Canvas Temp or Mask before ren dering Render Text has a popup that allows you to render into the Mask Temp Buffer or Canvas You can render the text as solid color as an outline or as a mask Revision A 4 409 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To choose how to render the text e Press the corner button of the Text Render Button The Render Popup appears e Press a Render Mode Button to choose how to render the text The Button changes between Canvas Temp and Mask Modes indicating whether Liberty will render the text to the
309. ecall Alpha Button Press one of the three alpha recall modes to enable it The default is the Use Alpha Button which recalls the file along with its alpha channel The Ignore Alpha Button causes the file to recalled with out any alpha transparency itis opaque The Invert Alpha Button causes the file to be recalled with its alpha inverted the file is opaque every where except where it has alpha A solid object on a transparent background would be recalled as a trans parent hole in the shape of the object on an opaque background Revision A 4 165 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Recall Brightness Slider This slider is used when you are recalling images without the full brightness range available 32 bits for Liberty 32 and 64 bits for Liberty 64 This slider s setting denotes the maximum brightness of the recalled file Setting the slider at the top or 255 indicates that the recalled file has 100 or normal brightness If the recalled file has a low brightness you set the slider correspondingly lower The file is recalled with increased brightness At 0 the file is recalled at maximum brightness To use the Recall Brightness Scale in Liberty 64 you should set the messages button in the Canvas Panel of the Con figuration Environment to 0 65535 This allows the slider to be moved throughout the full 64 bit bright ness range OK Button Press to confirm changes and to remove the popup
310. ecomes visible and you can add to it or erase from it with the brush If the mask is not active and you turn on Paint while in Paint on Mask mode the mask is erased before it becomes visible painting can begin Revision A 4 241 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 13 1 Painting Functions Paint Button Press the Paint Button to paint using the current brush color transparency and paint mode The brush appears on the Canvas controlled by the mouse or the pen Press down to paint Pressure sensitive painting is supported if you are using a pressure sensitive tablet see Pressure sensitive Mode below Press the Paint Button again to turn it off Line Button Press the Line Button to draw straight lines using the current brush color transparency and paint mode Press down once to start the line and press a second time to complete the line To break the line press the button on the barrel of the pen or use the middle or right mouse button Press the Line Draw Button again to turn it off Curve Button Press the Curve Button to call up the Curve Popup It allows you to draw curves using the current brush color transparency and paint mode For a detailed description of the Curve Popup functions see Curve Popup on page 4 248 Shape Button Press the Shape Button to call up the Shape Popup It allows you to create shapes and render them or outline them using the current brush
311. eeeennnn nnn 5 63 Corners List 5 64 Revision xix Table of Contents CHYRON Corporation Recall Cel Button nenk 5 65 Actor Type Button esee me 5 65 5 5 Animation Keyframes 5 65 Edit Keyframe Button sene 5 65 5 5 1 Keyframe Timeline eere 5 65 Keyframe Edit Menu e 5 66 5 5 2 Adding and Editing Keyframes 5 70 Add Keyframe Bultton sese 5771 Delete Keyframe 5 71 Move Keyframe Button sseseeee 5 72 Keyframe Elevator 5 72 Keyframe Save Button 5 72 Keyframe All 5 73 Keyframe Recall Button 5 73 Keyframe Edit OK Button sseeeeeeeees 5 73 SubPixel Button 5 73 5 5 3 Copying Keyframes RB 5 74 Copying to Another 5 74 5 5 4 Keyframe Positioning eere 5 75 Keyframes without Curve 5 78 5 5 5 Keyframe Distort P
312. een These are the movable Panel Menus From left to right the default Panel Menus are the Transfer Panel the Paint Panel the Image Tools Panel and the Mask Tools Panel These are the most frequently used Panel Menus The Panel Menus are interchangeable that is any Panel Menu can be in any of the four positions Use the row of colored Panel Call Buttons below the panels to put any Panel Menu into one of the four positions Generally it s good to keep the Transfer Panel in the leftmost position and the Mask Tools Panel in the rightmost position because these two panels are constantly in use Using Liberty is easier and more efficient when these panels are kept in familiar positions Use the middle two positions to call up other panels as desired Several of the panel menus have multiple layers indicated by small right and left arrows in the panel s title bar These include the Image Tools Mask Tools and Text Pan els Press on either end of the title bar to display another layer of panel functions Panel Call Buttons Paint Tools 5 Mask Text Macro VIR Disk Figure 4 10 Panel Call Buttons The row of colored buttons across the bottom of the screen above the Prompt Window are the Panel Call Buttons Press one of the Panel Call Buttons then press in one of the four panel positions and a Revision A 4 19 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Panel Menu will appear in that position The Panel Call
313. eep their durations while cutting off empty time at the end Timeline Frame Increment Markers The Animation Timeline displays vertical lines marking frame increments Liberty displays the lines at convenient intervals changing the intervals with the duration of the animation For example for a duration of 30 frames there are 15 lines at 2 frame intervals Change the duration to 60 frames and Animation Environment 5 38 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual there are still 15 lines but at 4 frame intervals A duration of 300 frames displays 10 lines at 30 frame intervals Placing the cursor inside the Timeline without pressing down automatically displays the animation frame number at the current cursor position The frame number appears in the Prompt Window at the bottom of the screen Note also that a period is displayed after the frame number if the cursor is on the second field of the given frame Loops Button Press to enter the number of times for the animation to repeat This function repeats the entire Time line Each animation actor has its own individual loop button as well In Button Press to set the in time on the current device This is the start time for the animation to be recorded If the device s target destination in the VTR menu is set it overrides the setting of the In Button In Timecode Mode type the in time separating hours minutes seconds and frames by spaces for
314. eg ments simultaneously Press the Delete Button to delete all the selected segments simultaneously Line Morph Keyframe Timeline Slider This slider displays a timeline of the morph from beginning to end You can have many different key frames on the timeline though when the morph is rendered only the information in the two neighbor ing keyframes to the pointer will be considered Keyframes in a morph are mostly used in Liberty s animation option they are not used often when mor phing a still image One good way to use keyfram ing in a still image is when the final morph is a bit too extreme A quick way to render the morph in a less extreme version is to add a keyframe near the end of the keyframe timeline and to render the morph at that point You can move any keyframe in the slider by press ing on the keyframe marker and dragging it to anew position No keyframes appear in the slider until Revision A 4 477 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation you press the Lock Button When you press on the slider the percent completion of the morph at that point is displayed in the Prompt Window Line Morph Add Keyframe Button Press to add a keyframe into the keyframe slider A keyframe marker appears in the Morph Slider wher ever the pointer is when you press Add Keyframe Use the Move Button to move line segments on the Canvas to define the new keyframe You can move line segments in any keyframe of the mor
315. elete Points Button Press to delete control points from the Canvas Then on the Canvas press on a point to delete it The point disappears along with the lines connecting it to other points You cannot delete points after Lock is pressed Press the Lock Button again or another Tri angle Morph Popup button to terminate the delete function Triangle Morph Move Points Button Press to move control points on the Canvas On the Canvas press on and drag a point The point moves along with the lines connecting it to other points You are prevented from moving a point across a connecting line You can move points in any key frame of the morph at any time even after pressing the Lock Button Press the Lock Button again or another Triangle Morph Popup button to terminate the Move function Triangle Morph Color Button corner of Move Press to switch the color of the line segments Use this when it s difficult to see the line segments on the Canvas background The default is red for the line segments which become yellow when they are selected Press the Color Button to reverse this Triangle Morph Add Keyframe Button To add a keyframe to the Morph Slider Move the yellow pointer to the place on the slider where you want to add a keyframe Animation Environment 5 140 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press the Add Keyframe Button A blue key frame marker appears in the Morph Slider above the yell
316. eme Palette This palette Figure 3 2 is the same as the standard palette in the Paint Environment except that when you press on a color to choose it the name of its menu parameter appears in the Prompt Window rather than its Red Green Blue and Transparency values The menu color controlled by each box is shown on page 3 7 Menu Color Scheme Palette Elevator You can store eight different palettes in the Menu Colors Palette Elevator at the left of the main pal ette There are several default color schemes stored in the levels of the elevator Use the Default scheme button described in section 3 1 4 to change the menus to the default color scheme for the current elevator level Use the Get scheme button also in section 3 1 4 to put the default scheme s colors into the current palette elevator level Revision A 3 5 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 1 4 Pressing on an elevator box displays its palette This elevator works identically to the Color Palette Ele vator in the Paint Environment You can copy the top elevator level into other levels and save seven alternate color schemes in one login account Changing the Colors of the Menu To change a menu color press on the corresponding palette box It is underlined and the name of the menu parameter appears in the Prompt Window Change the color with the slider scales at the right Repeat for as many menu parameters as you like then pres
317. ence 6 Press OK The popup disappears The indicated device s will be used as source Note that when the Source VTR set up button is accessed a popup labeled VTR s have not been configured Do it now may appear This indicates that a physical device has been previously assigned to the current VTR using the Video Configuration Panel section 3 6 Press yes or no depending on whether you want to initialize the interface to that device Animation Environment 5 20 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To set up a source hard disk path e On the VTR Panel press the Source Button src The button is highlighted 2 Press the Setup Button The Source Setup Popup appears e 3 Press on one of the Disk Buttons Disk 1 Disk 2 etc not the windows to set it up as asource The Disk Button you press becomes highlighted 4 Press on the window in the highlighted Disk Button The File Popup appears 5 Type in a filename to begin the source path There must be a number in the filename Usually it would be the starting number 0 or 1 6 Enter the source timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the source sequence Use the Show Timecode Show Frames Button at the right to select which mode you want often you will use frame numbers for a disk path ez o Press OK The Setup Popup disappears The indicated disk path s will be used as source Source Rescale Button Wi
318. ence or Troupe Actor whose actors are hidden they will be shown again Whether the actors of a Reference or Troupe Actor are hidden or shown they remain a part of the ani mation unless turned off by the Off Button see page 5 123 Revision A 5 183 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 7 13 Shapes Actor Popup Shapes Inbetweerning Link KT b Replace Kf clockwis Move Prev Kf ptiMove Next Kf pt Hove Center Transform Erase Poly Draw Recall Save Figure 5 48 Shapes Actor Popup The Shape Actor allows you to animate from one shape to another using the same tools as in the Shapes Popup in the Paint Environment You can add a different shape at each keyframe and it will be smoothly morphed to the next keyframe shape These can function either like a Write on Actor Animation Environment 5 184 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual painting around or filling the shape with color or like a Mask Actor masking and applying effects to the layer s below When animating from one keyframe shape to another the two shapes do NOT have the same num ber of vector points In such cases you can specify where the missing points come from as the shapes animate Note however that circles and ellipses must animate to or from circles and ellipses To create a Shape Actor In the Animation Environment clear the Time line if necessary Add a Shape Actor to the Timeline and press on
319. enter Animation Environment 5 220 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 10 the first filename of the image sequence into the File window of the Actor Edit popup Then press on the Single button to bring up the Cycle Filmstrip Popup In this popup enter the number of the first file in the sequence into the In window Enter one beyond the number of the last file in the sequence into the Out window Once this is complete the Single window s label will change to Multiple Press on this window to exit the Cycle Filmstrip Popup Press on the Stabilize button to enable highlight Stabilization in the Actor Edit Popup Once activated the Ref X Y and Mask buttons will also become activated Set the Ref window to the file number of the reference frame Click in the X window and enter a number This is the distance that will be searched horizontally for each frame Higher values will correctly handle sequences with greater movement but will also take more processing time A value between 10 and 30 will work for most sequences 10 is the default value Click in the Y window and enter a number This is the same as the X window in Step 7 except for the vertical direction Click in the Mask window and select the filename saved in Step 2 You can now preview the animation or render it to a storyboard disk VTR or DDR If the Stabilize button is on the frames in the Cel Actor will be st
320. er than having to save them on disk They are represented by a series of small boxes grouped in a horizontal or vertical line 6 8 or 10 boxes Menu Buttons and the Tablet All menu buttons are activated by pressing the pen down on the tablet you can configure Liberty for the mouse if no tablet is installed see the Liberty Technical Reference Manual No button requires the use of the Shift Control or Alt keys to modify its behavior If a button is disabled then the text on the button fades slightly In this way you can see at Revision A 1 3 Introduction CHYRON Corporation 1 3 3 a glance which buttons are or are not enabled for use You can assign menu buttons to keys on the keyboard as well as entire macros Refer to Pre Defined Macro Functions on page 4 419 for a list ing of pre defined keys Slider Scales Many functions in Liberty are controlled by slider scales Pressing down on the scale and dragging the slider changes the value of the slider scale and thus changes the function controlled by that slider scale Pressing the arrow button at either end of a slider scale causes the slider scale to increment or decre ment one unit Whenever you change a slider scale value its name is displayed in the Prompt Window at the bottom of the screen Directly underneath or above each slider scale is a number window that dis plays the value of that slider Pressing on the num ber window enables you to type
321. erence document and is not covered in this manual Custom Menu Colors Liberty allows you to customize the colors of your menus In this manual all references to the color of menu buttons refer to the standard default menu col ors 1 2 A NOTE ON LIBERTY ENVIRONMENTS The full Liberty software package consists of four Environments in which you do your work The Login Environment The Paint Environment The Animation Environment and the Configure Envi ronment If you have Liberty Paint software the Animation Environment is not activated Introduction 1 2 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 NAVIGATING THE ENVIRONMENTS Arrangement of Functions In the Paint and Animation Environments Liberty provides a Canvas or picture screen for the cre ation and display of pictures In the Paint Environ ment areas of the Canvas can be masked for operations These areas are Masks Temps are additional frame buffers or picture stor age areas where you store pictures for quick recall during active work on a project Menus are all the buttons slider scales and displays which you will use to operate on the Canvas The Prompt Window is a wide narrow window at the bottom of the screen that displays help informa tion about functions you are using Elevators are a series of storage registers found in various menus that allow you to quick store a num ber of temps masks and other elements rath
322. ers of your own from scratch in an infinite variety The Filter Popup is extraordinar ily powerful but requires experimentation to explore the possibilities The main part of the Filter Popup is a 5 x 5 array of boxes the Filter Array Filler Array The Filter Function changes each pixel in a masked area or the entire Canvas based on its neighboring pixels The Filter Array determines how each neigh bor contributes to the result The Filter Array is a 5 x 5 array of boxes each representing one pixel The center pixel is surrounded by two ranks of neighbor ing pixels You assign numerical values to each box thereby controlling how each pixel affects its neighbor For example if the center value is 1 and all its neighbors adjacent pixels are 0 the filter leaves all pixels unchanged Setting all values to 1 makes all neighbors contribute equally blurring the image Negative values subtract Values are in the range of minus 9999 to plus 9999 NOTE Zero values in this array are displayed as blank boxes on the menu This helps make the menu easier to read Paint Environment 4 326 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Divisor 1 68 Delta Recall save hatch lines Figure 4 104 Filter Popup horiz sym OK vert sum im bance 4 way sym rotate lt Preview rotate gt x mirror mirror J 5 5 9 29 3 93 13 33 1 3 Revision A 4 327 Paint Environment Libert
323. erty 64 available optionally on Liberty 32 and not applica ble to Liberty Paint Configuration Environment 3 50 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Cinefusion This software option provides an interface in Lib erty s Animation Environment to the Ultimatte Cinefusion blue screen processing software The Cinefusion Interface is a standard feature of Liberty 64 available optionally on Liberty 32 and not appli cable to Liberty Paint License options for GIF TIFF LZW Compression 3 9 3 Two new licensing options were added for Liberty version 6 0 for the TIFF LZW and GIF file formats These options are necessary since both these file for mats utilize LZW compression on which Unisys holds a patent and now requires royalties to be paid TIFF LZW files are rarely used also note that Lib erty always writes uncompressed TIFF files GIF files however are common in World Wide Web graphics and always use LZW compression These two options will automatically be licensed with all copies of Liberty in other words the user will automatically receive these options as Cus tomer Service will include these options with all Liberty licenses Active Server This window lists the name of the workstation that serves as the licensing server In a node locked installation this will be the name of the workstation where Liberty is installed In an installation with floating licenses this will be the workstation
324. erty Artist s Manual Invert Prefix Button The Invert Prefix Button inverts an operation The following is a list of the functions it modifies with descriptions of how it affects them Invert Prefix plus Paint paints under Invert Prefix plus any masks de masks instead of masking Invert Prefix plus Line Curve Draw with multi ple colors inverts the order of the colors used Invert Prefix plus Reveal Color Luminance or Hue Image Tools 1 Panel Reveals from Canvas into Temp instead of the other way around 4 6 MAGNIFY FUNCTIONS Layers CanyDrag Canvas Magnify Full Set In Out Figure 4 26 Magnify Buttons The Magnify functions allow you to zoom into the Canvas for close up work You can pan around the screen with the cursor or use the Canvas Buffer in the Buffers Panel to pan more quickly The Full Button does the opposite of Magnify it shows the entire Canvas no matter what the resolution is The six Magnify Buttons are at the bottom right of the Paint Environment Menu below the Panel Menus They are from left to right Canvas Magnify Full Set In Out Revision A 4 63 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Canvas Button Press the Canvas Button to cause the Canvas to fill the entire screen replacing the menus Press the Menus button to restore the Canvas and the menus to their normal display If the Canvas is magnified when you press the Canvas Button
325. erver node path node path node image infinit C INFINIT STILLS infinit C INFINIT STILLS infinit image 2 dual record FTP set up node infinit user name guest path C INFINIT BACKUP password offset 1888 temp dir usr tmp infinit i Imagestor Tile Save As Setup NE Figure 4 62 IMAGESTOR Setup Menu Revision A 4 179 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual With the IMAGESTOR button high lighted on the Save As popup press the Setup Button to call up the IMAGESTOR Setup Menu The IMAGESTOR Set up menu has three sets of text fields for user input These are in columns labeled image image 2 dual record and FTP set up along the top of the menu The text fields in each column are described in the following sections Image controls These set up transfer of the image the thumbnail and the update to the still store database node Network host name of the system that will receive the full resolution still store file e g infinit1 e path Disk directory path on the system where the full resolution still store file will be stored e g C INFINIT STILLS Thumbnail node network host name of the system that will receive the thumbnail file e g infinit1 e Thumbnail path disk directory path on the system where the thumbnail file will be stored e g C INFINIT TN Servernode Network host name of the sys tem that will
326. ery odd field line in the masked area Reduces vertical resolution by half Odd Field Button Copies odd field lines to every even field line in the masked area Reduces vertical resolution by half Revision A 4 341 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 16 7 Wrap Button When you press the Wrap Button the full screen Canvas image is divided into halves or fourths and is mirrored in X and Y so that the outside edges of the Canvas meet in the center of the screen This allows you to create continuous backgrounds by painting across the edges and then un Wrapping the Canvas so that the Canvas creates seamless patterns when tiled Another way to do this is with Fold paint in the Paint Panel e Press the main Wrap Button to perform the cur rent Wrap Mode Wrap Mode Popup Hor iz Vert Both 4 way Figure 4 110 Wrap Mode Popup Pressing in the inset window in the Wrap Button dis plays the Wrap Modes Popup which provides hori zontal vertical and 4 way wrapping of the Canvas To Wrap and then un Wrap the Canvas e Press on the inset window in the Wrap But ton The Wrap Modes Popup appears e Press on the Horizontal Wrap Button to high light it That mode becomes active The Canvas wraps horizontally Paint Environment 4 342 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 16 8 4 16 9 e Press on the Horizontal Wrap Button sec ond time The Canvas returns to its un wrapped form
327. escale Liberty 1 786 86 4 659 Y 494 Liberty i 7 88 88 Shrinkwrap Liberty 1 7 66 88 5 Liberty 1 Liberty 1 9 90 00 Show Timecode Reset All Reset Time Reset Src Dst Modes Figure 4 147 VTR Set up Popup Revision A Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Timecode Frame Number Controls Each device and disk path has separate controls for setting timecode You can set up for either timecode or frame mode by toggling the Show Timecode Show Frames button in the lower right corner of the VTR Set Up popup Each of the six devices has these timecode controls A Timecode Window for entering time code Timecode Bump Buttons that allow you to bump the timecode in the window up or down one increment A Timecode Input Button gt that takes the current timecode from the device The six disk paths have the same timecode controls except for the Timecode Input Button Reset All Button Resets the entire Set up Popup including clearing the disk path windows Reset Time Button Resets all timecode windows in the popup to zero Reset Src Tar Button Resets all of the Source Target Selection Buttons the buttons to toggle between Canvas Matte and Off to Off Re scale Button When active automatically re scales the source or target images see below for details in the Source Set up Popup and the Target Set up Popup Shrinkwrap When the Shrinkwrap button is on files be
328. escribed above The paste will be performed using the current settings of the Paste Popup though the Paste Popup is not displayed in manual mode The second way is to press in the corner popup button of Paste which brings up the Paste Popup which allows you to adjust settings for pasting the image into the Canvas Using the Paste Popup the paste is performed by pressing the OK Button when the image is in the desired position which can be far more precise than manual positioning The mode displayed in the Paste window Normal Shadow etc determines what popup appears Paste with Prefix Buttons Use the Under Prefix Button with Paste to paste the image under the picture on the Canvas showing through where the Canvas picture is transparent Press the Repeat Prefix Button then the Paste But ton to paste the image repeatedly until pressing the Paste Button again to turn it off Press the Copy Prefix Button then the Paste Button to paste the image exactly in its original position as itis in the Temp Buffer Press the Copy and the Repeat Prefix Buttons then the Paste Button to paste the image in its last pasted position Revision A 4 111 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 9 4 Paste Modes Popup Each Paste Mode has its own Popup Menu with extensive tools for controlling the settings of that mode To call up the popup for a paste mode press the cor ner button of the Paste Button with the desired pas
329. ess Change again to turn it off To replace steps in a Macro with new steps e Use the Step Buttons to get to the step where you want to start replacing Paint Environment 4 426 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press the Change Step Button to turn Change Mode on Press the menu buttons you want to record in place of the existing steps of the Macro The buttons you press are recorded e Press the Change Step Button to turn off Change Mode The button presses that you recorded replace the steps in the Macro follow ing the current step number displayed when you pressed the Change Button When you play back the Macro the new button presses will be exe cuted along with the rest of the Macro Delete Step Button Press to delete the current step Delete Rest Button Press to delete the current step and all steps follow ing it except for the terminating Stop which can t be deleted or changed Step Key Button Normally the button pressed in a step is highlighted in red but some buttons like the Canvas and key board keys can t be highlighted In those cases the step is printed in the Step Key Button Cancel Edit Button Press to discard all changes and terminate editing The edited Macro is preserved in its original form Accept Edit Button Press to confirm the edited Macro and terminate editing The edited Macro is saved with its changes Revision A 4 427 Paint Env
330. ess and drag the small markers above the slider to manually change the Start and End frames of the Storyboard play back Playback Modes The Playback Once Button When activated the Storyboard plays once then stops Revision A 5 241 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Loop Playback Button When activated the Storyboard plays repeatedly until you press the Stop Button Plays the number of times set in the Num Loops Button Loop Direction depends on which play buttons you press to start playback forward or reverse Swing Playback Button When activated the Storyboard plays repeatedly forward to the end and then in reverse back to the beginning repeating until the you press Stop Plays the number of times set in the Num Loops Button Num Loops Button Press to set the number of loops to play the Story board when you are in Loop or Swing Mode If set to 0 zero the Storyboard loops indefinitely until you press the Stop Button Loops Counter Button Loop Ctr Show how many loops have been played no display if Num Loops is infinite Speed Slider Use this slider to manually vary playback speed while the Storyboard is playing Set the playback mode to Loop or Swing then press and drag the slider between the left end 2 reverse and the right end 2 forward A speed of 1 plays at the requested rate where a speed of 2 plays back at twice the requested rate A negative speed p
331. ess the Gravity Button to turn it on Move the cursor near a point on the Canvas Itlights up The lighted point is the one over which the added point will go e Press down Gravity causes the added point to go exactly on top of the lighted nearest point The Move Gravity Function Move Gravity combines the Gravity Button and the Move Points Button When the Gravity Button is on the Move Button will snap the point being moved to any point it gets close to This allows you to lock curve points together after the points have been added Thus two existing points can be made into duplicates Transform Points Functions The upper part of the Curve Popup Menu contains buttons for 3D rotation scaling and other transfor mations of curve points Transform Axis Button xform This button works in conjunction with the Move Points button Turn on the Transform button then turn on Move The center of rotation is displayed as a small cross Press on the Canvas to move the cross subsequent rotations will use this point as their center Paint Environment 4 256 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Scale Points Button To scale curve points e Select some points in the curve e Press the Scale button e Press and drag the pen up and down the Can vas This causes the selected points to be scaled up or down The curve changes as the points are scaled Center Points Button Press the Cent
332. et is PRINT COM PLETED before trying to continue The EXIT button at the bottom of the Main Menu simply pops down the Menu The current configura tion is remembered Color Adjust Menu The secondary Menus are less frequently used that the Main Menu Pressing Color Adjust brings up a Menu with seven sliders one each for adjusting image brightness contrast hue saturation red gain green gain and blue gain The defaults are 0 degrees for hue rotation 100 for contrast bright ness and saturation and 0 for the rgb gains Revision A 4 465 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Hue saturation brightness and contrast apply more to an image that is coming in Composite form The gains apply more to an image that is coming in RGB form The color adjustments apply only to images before they are grabbed No adjustments can be made after grabbing The OK button sets the color adjustments the user has made The EXIT button removes the Menu Install Menu Pressing the Install button in the Main Menu brings up another secondary Menu The fields in this Menu include the type of paper to use this affects how much ink will be put down Paper Type header type that will print on each page This can be turned off or the Standard two lines can be printed or the user can custom ize the header The first line of the custom header Line 1 second line of the
333. ette the Color Palette Functions include Multiple Clear Swap Pick Global Inverse Shift Blend The Multiple Colors Button multi When Multiple Colors Mode is on more than one color can be chosen underlined simultaneously Multiple Colors Mode is used mainly to blend colors and to create color ramps gradations with the Apply Color Button in the Image Tools 1 Panel When Multiple Colors Mode is on pressing on a palette box underlines it and pressing on an under lined palette box removes the underline becomes unselected You can underline palette boxes in sev eral palettes at the same time on the Palette Elevator when Global Mode is on see below Revision A 4 35 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation When Multiple Color Mode is on the topmost left most underlined palette box is displayed in the Cur rent Color Box and is used for functions that use a single color like Paint When you turn off the Multiple Color Mode Liberty remembers the underlined colors so that when you turn Multiple Colors back on the same color boxes are underlined as before For information on how to manipulate multiple col ors using the Color Slider Scales see page 4 42 The Global Palette Button When The Global Button is turned on all 8 palettes in the Palette Elevator are active If the Multiple Color Button is also turned on any number of colors up to 256 can be chosen underlined simulta neously Pressing t
334. ette disappears The beginning write on color is now set Repeat steps 1 through 3 using the right Color Box in the Write on Color Button The ending write on color is now set Animation Environment 5 132 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Brush Mode Button Figure 5 33 Brush Modes Popup Allows you to use one of the four Brush Modes to make the write on animation The Brush Mode But ton has a text window showing the current Brush mode Press on the text window to bring up a popup with the four Brush modes to choose from Only one can be chosen at a time When one of the modes is chosen the write on animation uses the current brush in that mode If you want to change one of the diagrammed Programmed Brushes or a user defined Custom Brush you must go to the Paint Environment You cannot have two different user defined or programmed brushes in the same anima tion Write on Paint Mode Button Normal Sharpen Saturate Hue Tint Noise col Smear Emboss De Sat Paste Warp Burn Reveal Pick Blur Dodge Tint Hoise lum Figure 5 34 Paint Modes Popup The Paint Mode Button has a text window showing the current paint mode Press on the text window to bring up a popup with all the available modes to choose from Only one can be selected at a time Revision A 5 133 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation modes except Normal Smear Warp Blur Sharpen Emboss Burn Dodge Satura
335. evice to the current timecode Increment Cue Button Right Arrow Press to increment the timecode by one and cue the current device to that timecode Decrement Cue Button Left Arrow Press to decrement the timecode by one and cue the current device to that timecode Stop VTR Button Press to stop the current device Puts the device in standby mode Play VTR Button Press to play the current recording device Paint Environment 4 430 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Grab Button Press to fetch the currently numbered frame on the source device Cues the source recording device and grabs the frame actually one field doubled and sends it to the buffer Canvas Temp or Mask that s set on the Source Set up Popup If set to a disk path it recalls a series of incrementally numbered files The Grab Popup allows you to choose different modes of grabbing Grab Popup Still Grab Grab on the Fly Grab Frame Grab Even Field Grab Odd Field Figure 4 146 Grab Popup Illustration Press the corner button of the Grab Button to call up the Grab Popup The Grab Popup has two primary modes Still Grab and Grab on the Fly In addition you can choose whether to grab a full frame or only the even or odd field Still Grab Turn on Still Grab when using recording devices without dynamic tracking Revision A 4 431 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Grab on the Fly G
336. existing morph appears on the Canvas press the Reset Button to reset the morph The Prompt Window at the bottom of Revision A 4 481 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 13 4 5 6 17 the Canvas displays the message Press twice on canvas to specify 2 bounding box corners Define a bounding box around the area you want to morph Press down and let up quickly to set the first corner of the bounding box then drag and press again to set the diagonally opposite corner The bounding box should cover the area you want to distort Press the Add Button on the Triangle Morph Popup to add control points on the Canvas to define the beginning of the morph Generally add points at the places that you want to distort Press the Lock Button on the Triangle Morph Popup when you ve finished adding points This locks down the points defining the morph source The pointer jumps to the right end of the Triangle Morph Slider Press the Move Button on the Triangle Morph Popup and press and drag the control points on the Canvas moving them to define the final distortion This sets the points defining the target of the morph The morph distortion happens between the source position of the points and the target position of the points Press the OK Button to start the morph After a pause for rendering the final distortion of the image in the Temp Buffer is displayed on top of the existing Canvas image Th
337. eyboard controls On slower platforms Final alpha previews are done in software with the previews only being updated when the controls are released for example when the pen is released from the Canvas controls In some cases even on platforms capable of realtime performance in cases of large images or when mul tiple images are being distorted warped in Layers some previews will be done in software with the same interactivity as on slower hardware platforms Animation Environment 5 96 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 6 Colored Dots on Matchsticks When you change an attribute in a keyframe a col ored dot appears on its matchstick in the Keyframe Timeline Ata glance you can get a rough idea of what kinds of transformations a series of keyframes is going through The color codes for the colored dots are as follows starting at the top of the match stick and moving down Light green transparency Red rotation Yellow size scaling Purple slant Light blue under Speed Curve The Speed Curves in the bottom half of the Key frame Timeline allow you to vary the speed and acceleration of keyframe attributes as well as progress of the actor s image file along the curve path Each Speed Curve is a graphic interface for varying speed and acceleration Each keyframe attribute such as rotation or transparency or a com bination of attributes can be controlled by a separate Speed Curve
338. f you ve read a Motion Tracking corners list into an actor using the Corner List Button the corners list might define a window on the side of a house You might want to move the corners list away from the window to define a sign somewhere else on the wall You access this feature through the Paste Distort Popup in Warp Corners mode see page Press on the window labeled Image at the top of the Popup This toggles the window to Texture mode and dis plays a green wireframe representing the image You can then detach the green wireframe along with the image from the red corner points by mov ing its center point You can also adjust its corners to rescale the image relative to the original red corner points During these operations the image stays in the same perspective as the corner points The Texture Button The Paste Distort Popup in Edit Keyframe Mode has a Texture Button just below the prev Button The Texture Button is highlighted when the image for Warp Corners has been detached from the corner points for the current keyframe The Texture Button is off when the image has not been detached from Revision A 5 213 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation the corner points for the current keyframe or the image may have been detached before or after the current keyframe in which case the offset values will be interpolated Motion Tracking Procedure Point Mode The procedure for Motion
339. f fast temps When you go back to the Paint or Animation Envi ronment you ll be prompted for a re start of Liberty before the new fast Temps are configured Mask Number Button Liberty s Paint Environment provides by default six mask buffers You can configure as many masks as you want by pressing in the Mask Number Button and entering the number of masks you want When you go back to the Paint Environment you ll be prompted for a re start of Liberty before the new masks are configured Revision A 3 29 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Fast Masks Button Depending on the amount of RAM on your system you can assign some or all of the masks to RAM for fast access The minimum number of fast masks is 1 the maximum depends on how much RAM you have how many fast temps you ve configured etc Press inside the Fast Masks Button to type the num ber of fast masks When you go back to the Paint or Animation Envi ronment you ll be prompted for a re start of Liberty before the new fast masks are configured Fast Exit Button Press this button to turn on Fast Exit Mode When on Fast Exit Mode causes fast temps RAM Temps and fast masks NOT to be saved when you exit Lib erty This speeds up the process when you exit Lib erty The Fast Exit button is off by default so fast temps and fast masks are saved when you exit Liberty Note however that this is not permanent storage the next us
340. f the file e 7 Type the following line in the shell window seten JALEO WORK usr people jaleo WORK e 8 Press the Enter key on the keyboard 9 Save the file e 10 Close the jot file window Paint Environment 4 488 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Reading Jaleo Clip Files Once Liberty has been configured to recognize the Jaleo file location the artist uses the VTR setup panel to define the disk path to the Jaleo clips and then import them to apply a rotoscoping treatment To read the Jaleo clips 1 2 Press the Source comer popup button If the message VTR s have not been configured Do it now appears press the Yes button Press the Source corner popup button again Press in the desired Disk file Window The Recall File popup appears Select the Directory path to the Jaleo nclp e g usr people jaleo WORK Choose the Jaleo nclp to be recalled Press the OK button Continue with normal rotoscoping procedures Revision A 4 489 Paint Environment 5 Animation Environment 5 1 Animation Environment Introduction Liberty s Animation Environment Figure 5 1 is a separate full screen menu that you enter by pressing the A Button in the Environment Buttons PACL in the lower left corner of the Paint Environment and the Configure Environment You can also press the Animation Button in the Login Environment of Liberty s animation is created in the Anima
341. f your SGI system has an O2 Octane or Impact video board you can play the clip in real time through the video board See the section on Showing Video from a Disk Array see Show Button on page 4 155 for details on how to do this Note also that for the above real time playback through the video board to work the video clip has to be rendered in 601 PAL 720 x 576 or NTSC 720 x 486 resolution If the canvas resolution does not match one of these you can use the Target Rescale Button described in the section below to re scale the clip to the proper resolution as it is ren dered Animation Environment 5 32 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Target Rescale Button With a device or disk path active press on the Rescale Button to enable it it becomes highlighted causing the rendered images to be re scaled before being recorded The X and Y windows specify the resolution of the re scaled image The Rescale Button controls only the current high lighted device disk path When the Rescale Button is active you can use the X and Y windows to enter new resolutions in pixels for the images to be re scaled to Dropframe Button Press the Dropframe Button to turn it on off When on recording takes place in Dropframe Mode Preroll Button The default preroll is 5 seconds On some VTRs you may want to set up a shorter preroll but be care ful that you don t create locking problems by givin
342. fferent remote hosts directories Revision A 5 29 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation FTP Local If the FIP Button is on the file is transferred via FTP to the specified remote host and directory If the Local Button is also on the file is saved to the local hard drive as well If only the Button is on the file will be deleted from the local hard disk after the FTP As described above the Chyron Motion File Type must be enabled on the Target VTR Setup Popup and the Animation rendering must be complete or when rotoscoping the Last Button must have been pressed When the FTP transfer is about to occur the software checks to see if the file already exists in the remote directory If it does you are prompted to confirm that you want to over write the file If you answer Yes the FIP transfer will commence When the transfer finished the message FIP Transfer Complete is displayed in the Prompt Win dow If the FTP transfer fails a red error message appears in the Prompt Window for example if the user name or password for the remote system is incorrect Re scaling for Realtime Playback To achieve realtime playback on the iNFiNiT Chy ron Motion Files must normally be limited in size for example 224 x 200 pixels You can do this most easily using the Rescale Button in the Target VTR Setup Popup page 5 22 where you can enter the target X and Y resolution for each disk path For exam
343. file management action to perform Press on either end of the Action Button to cycle through the available actions Recall Save Delete Rename Move Copy and Save As The Action Popup When you press in the middle of the Action Button right on the name of the current operation the Action Popup appears displaying buttons for all the action options as well as the Save As functions Pressing on an action button chooses that action and removes the Action Popup Details on the Save As functions are below and on page 4 169 Recall When the Action Button displays RECALL press on a Browse picture or filename in the file list or type in a file name The Full screen File Menu dis appears and the indicated file is recalled As in the smaller File Popup how the file is recalled depends on the colored File Mode Button to the Canvas to the Temp Buffer as a mask etc Paint Environment 4 220 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Save When the Action Button displays SAVE press on a Browse picture or filename in the list or type in a new file name The Full screen Popup disappears and the indicated file is saved If saving over an existing file you are prompted to confirm the over write The colored File Mode Button determines how the file is saved as a picture as a mask etc Delete When the Action Button displays DELETE press on a Browse picture or filename in the list popup appears asking you to co
344. format choice Compression Window Press to cycle through 5 compression choices for the SGI 3 format For Apple Quicktime choose between Uncompressed or JPEG See table below for a comparison of compression types Interlacing Window Currently always non interlaced Orientation Window Currently always Bottom to Top Compression Schemes These are some notes on the 5 compression schemes supported by Liberty for SGI 3 movies They include comparisons between file size and playback rate of movies recorded with each scheme at vari ous resolutions The basic compression schemes are summarized here in order of highest to lowest disk storage required Uncompressed Achieves 30 FPS at lower image resolutions but requires the most disk space Revision A 5 247 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation SGI proprietary algorithm designed for rapid decompression of motion video Pretty good playback rate obtained with some loss of image quality RLE A lossless compression algorithm for stor ing images but introduces patterns in solid colors when played back from the movie library Not the best choice when high playback rates are desired 2 An improved version of since data compression and playback rates are higher JPEG Best compression in terms of saving disk space but image degradation is ugly and achieving a reason able playback rate is impossible The foll
345. frames which determine DVE type moves and other attributes of the selected actor You can vary the speed and acceleration of the actor s attributes including its motion along its curve path Keyframe Timeline The Keyframe Timeline has two parts the Key frame Timeline on the right and the Keyframe Edit Menu on the left The Keyframe Timeline shows at the top the actor s timeline with triangular curve path points and key frame matchsticks The rectangle across the bottom contains the Speed Curve which you can use to vary the speed and acceleration of the actor s attributes Revision A 5 65 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation The Keyframe Edit Menu at the left of the Key frame Timeline contains buttons for interacting with the Keyframe Timeline adding and editing keyframes as well as editing the Speed Curve Frame Numbers in Keyframe Timeline When the cursor is moved over the Keyframe Time line without pressing both the relative and absolute frame numbers of the cursor s position on the time line are displayed in the Prompt window at the bot tom of the screen Peek Peek shows a wireframe preview for the correspond ing frame on the timeline To Peek press the cursor down on the green bar on the Keyframe Timeline to show the corresponding wireframe preview Keyframe Edit Menu The upper part of the Keyframe Edit Menu above the green OK button contains buttons to add delete and
346. from disk to be used as a gar bage matte Use the Single Multiple controls to specify multiple files If the Use Mask Button is off no file needs to be assigned to the Mask Actor You can set individual chroma key parameters for each keyframe in the Mask Actor or just set param eters for the first and last keyframe in which case the keyframes in between are interpolated Ultimatte Plug in Note that Liberty supports an Ultimatte Cinefusion plug in This plug in provides a far more advanced set of controls for blue and green screening than the Chroma Keying tool described here Thus you may prefer to purchase and use the plug in for the more difficult or intensive chroma keying jobs Mask File Button Press to call up the File Popup and choose a file from the disk This file performs a different service for the different mask modes In the modes that Animation Environment 5 178 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual mimic functions on the Image Tools Panels the file works like a Paint Environment Mask With both Chroma Key and Mask Mode the file is used as a way of only showing part of the image The Mask Actor only uses the alpha transparency information in a file regardless of the RGB color information Because of this it is often easier to use a mask saved on the disk instead of an image because a mask is essentially an image made up of only alpha information Mask Invert Button Pre
347. from the Liberty workstation to the infinit after saving the files to the local hard disk Paint Environment 4 190 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Save Local Button When you turn this button OFF the saved image is not saved on the local hard disk after the FTP pro cess is finished The image is saved only in the selected directory on the selected infinit system NTSC and PAL Buttons Press one of these buttons to select either NTSC or TV standards 13 5 MHZ button This button will be on in most cases Turn it off if you are transferring files to an old non 13 5 MHZ infinit system After filling in the fields and highlighting the appro priate buttons confirm the INFINIT Setup menu by pressing the OK button Elevator of Pre sets To allow the user to configure set ups for multiple Infinits the Infinit set up menu has a 6 level eleva tor This allows the user to set up and save up to 6 different configurations for network transfer A name is provided for each elevator level as well immediately above the elevator itself When the user exits Liberty the settings are saved and will be restored next time Liberty is started up If the copy prefix is on when switching elevator lev els the contents of the current elevator are copied to the new one before switching Revision A 4 191 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Saving INFINIT Files When INFINI
348. ft and press a second time to place the end of the line segment Add as many line segments as you want The arrowhead at the front end of the line segment is a reminder later as to whether the direc tion of the line segment has been changed Animation Environment 5 144 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual While adding line segments you can use the Move Button see below to reposition line segments you have just added Unlike Triangle Morph you can add or delete line segments after you press the Lock Button Press the Lock Button again or press another Line Morph button to terminate the Add function Line Morph Delete Button Press to delete line segments from the Canvas On the Canvas press on a line segment to delete it The line segment disappears Delete as many segments as you want before terminating the function by pressing the Delete Button again or any other Line Morph Popup button You can select more than one line segment and press the Delete Button to delete them all at once How ever it s no faster than deleting them one by one Line Morph Move Button Press to move line segments On the Canvas press in the middle of a line segment to drag it to a new position or press just beyond an endpoint to drag just the endpoint stretching or rotating the line seg ment You can move line segments in any key frame at any time even after pressing the Lock Button Press the Move Button again or an
349. function is utilized in conjunction with the Cin eon and DPX set up controls in the Save As popup in the Paint environment see page 4 198 There are two modes of working with log Cineon or DPX files Log The user works with log data within Liberty In other words Cineon files are NOT converted to linear format when read into Liberty likewise images are NOT converted back to log format when saved from Liberty since they already are in log format The user works in log format but turns on Cineon log to linear conversion for display of the image on the screen This way the canvas looks good when displayed on the screen but the pixels are kept in log format internally preventing any conversion artifacts from being introduced To run in this mode the user would set the Cineon and DPX set up controls in the Save As popup in the Paint environment see page 4 198 to Convert Off turning off conversion when the files are saved and recalled They would also turn on log to linear conversion for screen display of the image by using the Cineon function described above They would Revision A 3 19 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation enable this function by pressing on the Cineon button in the 64 bit Color Range Display section of the Canvas Configuration panel to bring up the Cineon popup and pressing the reset button in the popup to activate the default conversion values The sliders in the popup could also
350. g it too shorta setting If you are experiencing locking problems you may want to set the preroll at longer than 5 seconds The range is 1 to 15 seconds OK Button Pressing the OK Button confirms all settings and removes the Setup Popup Revision A 5 33 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Recall Animation Button Recall Save Canvas Check Tmcode Figure 5 8 Animation File Management Buttons The Recall Button recalls only animations from the disk It only displays animation filenames To recall a picture from the disk use the Canvas Button just below the Save Button To recall an animation from the disk 1 Press the Recall Animation Button The File Popup appears showing the existing animation disk files e 2 Press on an animation filename or type in a new filename The current animation in the Timeline is replaced by the recalled animation An animation is recalled with all its data including Timeline data and data in the Playback Menu such as duration in out times skip in skip out times and hold in hold out times Animation Environment 5 34 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual CAUTION Recalling an animation from disk completely replaces the animation currently in the Timeline Be sure you have saved your current animation to disk before recalling another one Animation Save Button The Save Button saves only animations If you want
351. g rotating and scaling them to define the final target distortion To move the line segment press directly on a line segment and drag it To rotate and scale the line segment press just beyond either end and drag This sets the line segments defining the final keyframe of the morph In general slight movements of the line segments between keyframes cause subtle effects while larger modifications of the line segments cause wildly warped and twisted Revision A 4 473 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation distortions In particular if any line segments flip over or intersect in the interim or final keyframes the distorted picture will fold over on itself and may even contain multiple distorted copies of the source image Start with small conservative adjustments and work your way up to more flamboyant effects 6 Press the main part of the OK Button to start the morph After a pause the final distortion of the Temp Buffer image is rendered on top of the existing Canvas image The corner button performs a faster lower resolution render The Erase Button erases the Canvas before the morph is rendered The corner of the Erase button performs a faster lower resolution erase render Line Morph Add Button Press to add line segments Press on the Canvas once to place the beginning of a line segment then lift and press a second time to place the end of the line segment Add as many line segments as you want The
352. ge 4 162 allowing non Liberty files to be rescaled on output Once the re scale but ton has been set up with the desired re scale values use the On button to enable disable re scaling Save As Orientation Button Press one of the four orientation modes to enable it The 90 Button causes the saved file to appear rotated 90 degrees on the Canvas The 180 Button causes Revision A 4 199 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation the saved file to appear rotated 180 degrees on the Canvas The 270 Button causes the saved file to appear rotated 270 degrees on the Canvas The default is 0 or no rotation This feature is very use ful for saving Cineon image files which have rotated images Save As Mirror Button Press one or both of the two mirror modes to enable it The X Button causes the saved file to be reflected horizontally The Y Button causes the saved file to be reflected vertically When both the X and Y Buttons are enabled the saved file is flipped both horizontally and vertically The default is both buttons off FTP Save As Button When the FTP Button is enabled in the Save As Popup the saved file is transferred to a remote direc tory in the current file format For example you could FTP Targa files to a networked PC or Mac All file formats in the Save As Popup except for iNFiNiT and ImageStor use the same FTP set tings If the file is a type other than iNFiNiT or ImageStor press
353. ge Mode the drop shadow is pasted using the original colors of the original image to be shad owed but blurred according to the Blur Sliders This is useful if you want an effect that resembles a blurred reflection of the object rather than a shadow In Light Mode the shadow is pasted as a lighter or darker silhouette over the Canvas However there must be some picture information on the Canvas for this mode to lighten or darken If the Canvas is Paint Environment 4 120 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual empty this mode will do nothing and you should use Palette Mode As in Paste Color use the Light Slider to set the lightness or darkness of the shadow OK Erase and Cancel Buttons Perform the final paste by pressing the OK Button Press the Erase Button to perform the final paste after erasing the Canvas Press the Cancel Button to remove the popup without performing the paste Paste Shadow Elevator You can save settings of the popup in the elevator giving each setting a name with the Name Button 4 9 8 Paste Extrude Mode Paste Extrude creates a 3D extrusion of the image to be pasted Essentially this looks like a solid 3D edge of variable thickness and color gradated over the depth of the extrusion Paste Extrude Popup The commands on the Paste Extrude popup Figure 4 44 are the same as for Paste Shadow but more control is given for defining a range of colors blur factors
354. ge will be lost To remove the Default Resolution Popup without choosing a new resolution press OK Revision A 3 23 Configuration Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Rescale with Interpolation On Rescale with Interpolation Off Canvas Filtering AVIUN Centaur Centaur 525 525 625 DDR DDR Impact Galileo 525 625 525 Impact Galilea Impact Galilea Impact Galileo Ana 625 Digi 525 Digi 625 1 1 Pixel Aspect 4 3 Pixel Aspect Common Yideo Resolutions Super 35 Academy Aperture Full Aperture 1 32 1 CinemaScape VYistaVision Halt Quarter Common Film Resolutions Figure 3 7 Defaults Resolution Popup World Wide Web Pages Paint amp Animation Tutorials Other Resolutions Revision A 3 25 Configuration Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Dots Per Inch Button DPI Press to reset the Dots Per Inch setting Liberty uses this setting for Paint functions such as Grid and Pick Color to measure distances on the screen for pre press applications 100 is the default for SGI monitors Dropframe Button Press to turn on and enable video recording in Drop frame Mode Frame rate Buttons Press on one of the three Frame rate Buttons to set the frame rate to 30 frames per second NTSC 25 frames per second PAL or 24 frames per second film When on the chosen button is high lighted blue Revision A 3 27 Config
355. gram Curve OK Button Press the OK button to bring down the popup and make the change to the current mask Cancel Button Press the Cancel button to close the popup and not make any change to the current mask Paint Environment 4 382 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 18 9 Fill Mask Button ta Alpha Figure 4 123 Fill Mask Modes The Fill Mask Button allows you to create a mask by mask filling an area of the Canvas based on trans parency color or an existing mask You can trans parency fill an object on the screen if it is surrounded by transparent background The differ ent fill modes use slider scales to set the thresholds at which the fill will stop Press in the text window in the Fill Mask Button to display a list of all three modes Press on one of the modes to make it active Press the corner button in the Fill Mask Button to call up the Fill Mask Popup Revision A 4 383 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Fill Mask Popup Preview gt gt b 1 10 10 255 mask only to Alpha Color Mask Reset Figure 4 124 Fill Mask Popup The Fill Mask Popup has four slider scales one for filling to alpha two for filling to color and one for filling to mask Fill to Alpha To fill mask to transparency press on the Fill to Alpha Slider and set it then press the OK Button Press on the Canvas If the place that you pressed has a lowe
356. grees from 0 to 360 The Direction Button does not have to be on to change its direction When the Direction Button is on you can turn it off by pressing the center dot again Horizontal Vertical Mode Buttons X and Y The two buttons above the Direction Button are the Horizontal and Vertical Mode Buttons Turning on one of these restricts the functions listed below to horizontal or vertical operation Functions that are constrained by the Grid Direc tion Horizontal and Vertical Modes Paint Line Revision A 4 59 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Paint Mask Rectangle Mask Square Mask Gradated Rectangle Mask Gradated Square Mask Add Move Curve Points Paste Paste Mask Tile Text positioning functions 4 5 PREFIX BUTTONS Prope under aaa copy in Figure 4 25 Prefix Buttons The Prefix Buttons are located under the Palette Buffers Panels halfway down the Paint Environ ment A Prefix Button modifies functions pressed immediately after it The Prefix Buttons include Repeat Under Add Copy and Invert The Prefix Buttons turn off automatically when the function is completed You can turn them off manu ally by pressing them a second time Depending on the prefix it is possible to have multi ple prefix buttons activated simultaneously Repeat Prefix Button Most Liberty functions automatically terminate after single use The Repeat Prefix keeps a function active
357. h Select 5 146 Line Morph Add Keyframe Button 5 147 Line Morph Copy Keyframe 5 147 Line Morph Delete Keyframe Bultton 5 148 Line Morph Reset 5 148 Line Morph Lock Button eee 5 148 Line Morph Test D149 Line Morph OK Button 5 149 Line Morph Keyframe Slider 5 149 5 7 8 Macro Actor Popup eere Macro Actor Keyframe First amp Last Line Numbers 5 152 5 7 9 Switcher Actor Popup 9 154 File controlled Reveal 5 155 Switcher Composite 5 156 Switcher Dissolve Button 5 158 Switcher Fade 5 158 Switcher Reverse Button 5 158 Switcher Fairing Button essen 5 158 Switcher Softness 5 5 159 5 7 10 Color Table Actor Popup 9 159 Color table File Button
358. h to input images to Layer 1 You ve configured the out put to record on a VTR With Auto composite enabled you press the First Button to recall the first images to the Canvas and Layer respectively The two images appear on the Canvas and you can posi tion Layer 1 using the Layers controls Pressing on the Roto Button then composites Layer 1 onto the Canvas image records the result to the VTR inputs Revision A 4 443 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation the next frames to the Canvas and Layer 1 and turns Layers back on Thus you can composite layered sequences with one press of the Roto Button per frame Target Set up Popup NOTE Refer to Figure 4 149 on page page 4 437 for an illustration of this popup The Source and Target Set up Popups are identical in appearance except that the Source Popup has a large blue button at the top labeled Source and the Target Set up Popup has a large pink button at the top labeled Target Each popup provides for the configuration of six possible devices VTRs DDRs etc and six possible disk paths Liberty s rotoscoping controls allows you to record to more than one target device at a time at different resolutions if desired You can record either a full color image or a matte image a black and white rendering of the image s alpha channel The only difference between setting up source devices as outlined above and setting up target dev
359. he output image will be to the original file Normally you use the lowest setting for the smallest file that will decompress into an image that looks the same as the original Try settings between 50 and 95 If you see defects at a setting say 75 go up 5 or 10 at a time until the result is satisfactory The optimal setting varies from image to image Settings below 50 produce very small files of low image quality For example you could use settings of about 5 or 10 to make an index of a large image library A setting of 2 gives Cubist effects Revision A 4 197 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE Values below about 25 generate 2 byte quantization tables which are considered optional in the JPEG standard Some commercial JPEG programs may not read the resulting file Cineon and DPX Set up The Cineon and DPX Set up Popups allow you to enable disable saving of Matte alpha information They also provide sliders for adjustment of the RGB and M black points of the image the white point of the image and the gamma Increasing the sliders for the black points increases the contrast of the dark areas in the image for red green blue and matte respectively while decreasing the white point slider value increases the contrast of the bright areas of the image The gamma slider adjusts the mid ranges of the image You can adjust them depending on your particular film application There is also a reset but ton to
360. he All Button under the Keyframe Elevator Press the Save Keyframe Button to save the selected matchstick s into the current Keyframe Elevator level Press OK to exit the Keyframe Timeline Edit the actor to which you want to copy the matchsticks Press the Edit Keyframe Button to call up the Keyframe Timeline Press the Recall Keyframe Button at the same elevator level that you saved the keyframes to The saved keyframe s are recalled and appear in the actor s Keyframe Timeline Keyframe Positioning When creating keyframe positions for a new actor the best technique is to add the desired number of Keyframe Matchsticks to the Keyframe Timeline then on the Canvas drag the keyframes to their desired positions As you drag each keyframe a smooth predictable curve appears between it and the previous keyframe You can move keyframes this way at any time NOTE Keyframes can also be positioned by moving the corresponding path points in the Edit Path menu see page 5 60 If a jagged non smooth curve is desired the Edit Path menu should be used Revision A 5 75 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Holds Basically in a new actor whose keyframes havent yet been moved when you drag a keyframe on the Canvas the other keyframes will automatically have the same position thus creating a hold To make an actor move then stop and hold to the end of the actor s duration e Add anew actor to the Time
361. he Buffers Panel The Temp Mask Popup displays browse images of all six Temps and all six mask buffers Vidjet Button This button is used in conjunction with the Hewlett Packard Vidjet Pro Printer The Vidjet Pro interface permits printing of the canvas image to a H P InkJet or LaserJet printer For more infor mation about the H P VidJet Pro see page 4 456 Revision A 4 459 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Artstar Button Popup Optical Disk device deviscsi sc dsi Figure 4 153 Artstar Button The Artstar Button is a recall button used to recall files from an Artstar graphics system optical disk The corner button allows you to designate the SCSI port that the optical disk is connected to With the main part of the Artstar Button you call up a file recall popup to list files and you can go into the Full Screen Popup to browse files and recall them How ever no other functions are available other than browse and recall 4 24 H P Vidjet Pro The Vidjet Pro is installed in the Configuration Environment of Liberty One of the video boards must first be installed If the video board is de installed so is the Vidjet NOTE YOU SHOULD RESTART LIBERTY AFTER INSTALLING THE VIDJET The Vidjet print manager interface includes three menus The Main Menu appears when the Vidjet Button in the Disk Panel is pressed The Vidjet must Paint Environment 4 460 Revision A Li
362. he Canvas is blurred wherever you paint Sharpen Paint In Sharpen Paint Mode the image has a sharpen fil ter applied to it wherever you paint Emboss Paint In Emboss Paint Mode the image is embossed in the direction you paint For best results use a low opac ity setting and a light touch on the stylus Burn Paint In Burn Paint Mode the image on the Canvas is darkened as you paint over it Revision A 4 277 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Dodge Paint In Dodge Paint Mode the image on the Canvas is lightened as you paint over it Saturate Paint In Saturate Paint Mode the image on the Canvas becomes more saturated as you paint over it De saturate Paint In De saturate Paint Mode the image on the Canvas becomes less saturated as you paint over it Clone Paint Clone Paint picks up one part of the screen and paints it over another part To use Clone Paint Mode e Press the Clone Paint Button in the Paint Mode Popup to turn it on e Position the cursor where you want to paint from and press down Holding the pen down drag to where you want to paint to A white line stretches out from the place where you pressed down which is marked by a white crosshair e Release the pen The offset is set to be the dis tance and angle from the point of first press down to the point of release The white line is now attached to your cursor e Paint on the Canvas Liberty
363. he Clear Color Button while Global Pal ette Mode is turned on un chooses removes the underlines from all underlined palette boxes in all palette levels If you turn off Global while Multiple Color Mode is still on Liberty re underlines the palette boxes that were last underlined before you turned Global on Generally you should keep Global Mode turned off unless you are using it for a specific purpose lest you forget it and think you re operating in the dis played palette only Paint Environment 4 36 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Clear Color Button Press the Clear button to turn off remove underlines from all palette colors in the current palette If Glo bal is turned on and more than one palette is active all underlined colors in all palettes are turned off The Blend Colors Button The Blend Colors Button requires Multiple Colors Mode to be on and three or more colors to be under lined When you press Blend all underlined colors are ramped or blended between the first and last underlined colors starting with the topmost left most palette box Blended colors need not be adja cent on the palette You can underline several colors skipping colors between and only the under lined colors will be blended When Global Mode is on you can make a ramp with up to 256 colors To make a blended color ramp between two colors in the Palette e Turn on Multiple Colors Mode e Underline t
364. he FIP Enable Button The FTP Enable Button is highlighted Press OK The FIP Popup disappears Press OK on the Save As Popup The Save As Popup disappears To save via FTP with Save As 1 When the file is ready to be saved press the main Save As Button The Save File Popup appears Enter the file name to be saved and press lt Enter gt Liberty checks to see if the file already exists in the remote directory If it does you are prompted to overwrite it When the transfer is complete you are prompted FTP Transfer Complete If the transfer fails a red error message appears in the Prompt Window for example if the user name or password is incorrect Revision A 4 203 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Paint Environment 4 204 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 12 File Popup Dir newui File ripple Canvas OK path full T ripple paintmode bump pop3 modes noise poster distort tint emboss filter extrude adjust shadow Figure 4 69 File Popup When you press Save or Recall this popup appears At the top it lists the current host disk directory and the last file that was saved or recalled Below that is a list of the files in the current direc tory To initially set up the host disk and directory Press Save File or Recall File The File Popup appears The word Host at the top is high lighted and the available hosts are displayed The host
365. he Palette If both Color Source But tons are set to Palette the maximum number of col ors that can be used is four If both Color Source buttons are set to Palette and two colors are used the first chosen color in the Palette goes to the edge rep resented by the red dot on the Angle Button the sec ond color goes to the edge represented by the blue dot Each edge is one color If three colors are cho sen on the Palette the edge represented by the red dot is gradated from the first color chosen on the Palette to the middle color and the edge represented by the blue dot is gradated from the middle color to the last color chosen on the Palette If both Color Source Buttons are set to Palette and four colors are chosen on the Palette the edge represented by the red dot is gradated from the first to the second color and the edge represented by the blue dot is gradated from the third color to the fourth color Note that when selecting source colors for the Emboss there can be more than four colors selected in the color palette In this case the first two colors selected in the color palette apply to the edge repre sented by the Red dot and the last two colors selected in the color palette apply to the edge repre sented by the Blue dot In Image Mode each embossed edge uses the origi nal colors of the original image similar to Paste Extrude Revision A 4 127 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation In Light Mode the em
366. he current Temp is an active layer the layer offset is used to generate the mask This is true for Alpha Channel Match Diff and Paste Mask Fill Mask requires that the layer be active 4 18 Mask Tools 1 Panel 4 18 1 MASK TOOLS E Canvas Use Erase Invert Mask Mask Rectangle Circle Alpha rectangle F Adjust Channel Grow Luminance Fill Match Mask RGB Figure 4 116 Mask Tools 1 Panel Use Mask Button The Use Mask Button lights up when a Mask is active to show the presence of an active Mask Always check the Use Mask Button if you want to see if a mask is active When the Use Mask Button is high lighted a mask is active you can de acti vate the current mask by pressing the Use Mask But ton to turn it off The current mask will be remembered until replaced by a new mask When no Mask is active you can press the Use Mask But ton to turn on the last or previous mask Paint Environment 4 366 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 18 2 4 18 3 4 18 4 4 18 5 Mask All Button Press this button to mask the entire Canvas with a 100 mask Invert Mask Button Press the Invert Mask Button to invert the mask cur rently displayed on the Canvas Areas that are 100 masked become 0 masked and vice versa If nothing is masked it then masks all areas Erase Mask Button Clears or erases the active Mask Rectangle Mask Button Use the Rectangle Mask Button to create a recta
367. he morph You can use morph keyframes to create interim distortions between the source and the final distortion Morphs render from the Temp Buffer to the Canvas Always cut your source image into the Temp Buffer before starting the morph 4 25 2 Line Morph Add Del Hove recall Color Select save add kf copy kf del kf tune test Reset OK erase cancel Figure 4 154 Line Morph Popup Paint Environment 4 472 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual After this step by step Line Morph procedure is a button by button description of the Line Morph Popup Figure 4 155 To create a morph distortion of an image with Line Morph 11 2 3 4 15 Cut the image you want to morph into the Temp Buffer Press the Line Morph Button in the Image Tools 2 Panel The Line Morph Popup appears If an existing morph appears on the Canvas click the Reset Button to reset the morph Press the Add Button on the Line Morph Popup to add line segments on the Canvas to define the beginning of the morph Press once to start a line segment press a second time to define the end of the line segment Press the Lock Button on the Line Morph Popup This locks down the line segments you have added defining the first morph keyframe The pointer on the Morph Slider jumps to the right end of the slider Press the Move Button on the Line Morph Popup and press and drag the line segments on the Canvas movin
368. he prompt might say Speed Curve with 2 Nails You can use the Copy Prefix to copy one level of the Speed Curve Elevator to another Add Speed Nail Button To add a Speed Nail to the Speed Curve e Press the Add Speed Nail Button Revision A 5 103 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Press on the Speed Curve where you want the new Speed Nail to go The new Speed Nail appears where you press down and the shape of the Speed Curve changes accordingly Delete Speed Nail Button To delete a Speed Nail from the Speed Curve Press on the Delete Speed Nail Button e Press on the Speed Nail you want to delete in the Speed Curve The Speed Nail you press on disappears and the Speed Curve changes accord ingly Speed Curve Zoom Buttons In and Out To magnify and unmagnify the Speed Curve press the In and Out buttons at the bottom of the Key frame Edit Menu This gives you more precise con trol of the Speed Curve when moving the Speed Nails 8 levels of magnification are permitted 5 7 THE ACTOR POPUPS This section details the functions of the Actor Pop ups appearing at the right of the Timeline The type of Actor Popup depends on the actor type selected in the Timeline The Actor Popups contain the tools for animating the different types of actors in the Timeline To display an Actor Popup press on an actor in the Timeline to select it The Actor Popup appears at the right of
369. he target Temp The previewed layers Canvas updated appropriately All Off Button Press to turn all layers off This changes nothing other than making all layers non active Revision A 4 97 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Reset All Button Press to reset the attributes of all layers to default settings All Temps are set to 100 opacity and their original XY positions Erase Current Temp Button Erase Curr Press to delete the contents of the current Temp layer only you are first prompted Erase All Button Press to delete the contents of all layers you are first prompted Erase Canvas Button Press to delete the contents of the Canvas you are first prompted Temp Layers Color Codes Each Temp browse image has a colored border denoting what state it s in Current RAM or Disk Three windows display the color codes for these states and allow you to change the assigned colors The Current window default yellow shows the border color used to denote the current Temp layer The In RAM window default light blue shows the border color used to denote which Temps are stored in RAM active layers The On Disk window default dark blue shows the border color used to denote which Temps are stored on Disk inactive layers Paint Environment 4 98 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To change the coded colors Press the
370. her to morph a single image or between two images and to access the Triangle Morph and Line Morph Popups Once you ve edited a Morph Actor as Triangle Morph you can t change it later to Line Morph and vice versa You must add a new Morph Actor to the Timeline Morph Single Button Press to turn on When this mode is on the morph is performed only on the image file of the actor below the Morph Actor Itis distorted instead of being morphed into something else Revision A 5 137 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Morph Between Button Press to turn on When this mode is on the morph is performed between two images starting with the actor below the Morph Actor on the Timeline and morphing to the actor above the Morph Actor Morph Reverse Button Press to turn on off When on the morph is per formed in reverse If Morph Between is on the morph starts with the actor above the Morph Actor and morphs to the actor below the Morph Actor If Morph Single is on the distortion starts with the last keyframe and ends with the first one Morph Recall Canvas Button Press to recall a file to the Canvas The File Popup appears and you press on or type a filename The image file is recalled to the Canvas Allows you to quickly to recall and look at files from the disk for possible inclusion in a morph Morph Swap Temp Canv Button Press to swap the Canvas and the Temp The image on the Ca
371. hese set ups are not part of the Macro and can get mistakenly re set before you play the Macro A press on Save State saves all the set ups Then you press on the Recall State Button as the first step of your Macro which will automatically restore the proper settings before playing the Macro When you press Save State the usual File Popup appears Choose a directory and a filename Then when creating the Macro recall the Save State file as the first step of the Macro Save State is also useful when working with Macro Actor in the Animation Environment page 5 151 Paint Environment 4 416 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 21 2 Defining Keyboard Keys Bind Macro Button Binds a keyboard key to a Macro The keyboard keys are already bound to many of Liberty s Menu Buttons see the list below When you bind a Macro to a key the previous binding will be replaced by the new binding To bind a Macro to a key Press the Bind Button You are prompted to press a keyboard key for the Macro to be bound to Press a keyboard key The File Popup appears displaying recorded Macro filenames Press on the file name of the Macro you want to bind The File Popup disappears When you press the keyboard key the Macro plays back Define Key Button Defines binds a keyboard key as a Liberty menu button The keys are already defined as many of Liberty s menu buttons see the list below The pre vious definitio
372. highlighted on the menu First Step Ix Button Press to jump back to the first step of the Macro you are editing Previous Step Button Press to go backwards one step the Macro you are editing Next Step gt Button Press to go to the next step of the Macro you are editing Revision A 4 425 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Last Step gt I Button Press to jump to the last step Stop Button of the Macro you are editing Insert Step Button While Insert Mode is on all button pushes are inserted in sequence before the current step until you press Insert again to turn it off or press the Accept Button to end the insertion To insert steps into the Macro you are editing e Use the Step Buttons to get to the step before which you want to insert e Press the Insert Step Button to turn Insert Mode on e Perform the operation press the menu but tons you want to insert into the Macro The buttons you press are recorded Press the Insert Button again to turn off Insert Mode The button presses that you recorded are inserted into the Macro before the current step When you play back the Macro the new button presses will be executed along with the rest of the Macro Change Step Button The Change Step Button turns on off Change Mode While Change Mode is on buttons and keys pressed replace existing steps starting at the current step number until you pr
373. how this color space reduction will look as applied to the current canvas image The preview turns off when the TIFF set up menu is exited The uniform optimal dither and noise buttons are fur ther described below Uniform Optimal Quantization greyscale and color mapped files only Uniform quantization splits the color space into equal partitions while optimal quantization com putes the best color table for the specific image you are saving Optimal quantization performs very well on most images even with very few bits per pixel Dither Button greyscale and color mapped files only When the Dither Button is high lighted the quan tized image is also dithered This is the technique used in newspaper photos where the appearance of higher color resolution is achieved by varying the density of colored dots Dither only works with Uni form Mode Noise Button greyscale amp color mapped files only When the Noise Button is high lighted some noise is added to the quantized image This tends to smooth out color banding artifacts that may appear at lower levels bits per pixel Revision A 4 195 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Flip Y When activated saves the file from top to bottom rather than the default bottom to top Some applica tions only read TIFF files stored from top to bottom Try this button if another application reads your TIFF files upside down Other Modes You can
374. hree or more colors in the palette e Press the Blend Button A ramp is created in the palette from the first to the last underlined color in equal steps of Hue Saturation and Brightness The Inverse Colors Button With Multiple Colors Mode on press Inverse to turn on all colors except those currently underlined In Global Mode Inverse works with all palettes simul taneously To quickly turn on all colors in the pal ette press the Clear Button then the Inverse Button Revision A 4 37 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Swap Colors Button lt gt With Multiple Colors Mode on press Swap to reverse the order of the chosen colors With Global Mode on Swap affects all palettes simultaneously The Shift Colors Button lt gt With Multiple Colors Mode on press the right half of the Shift Button to cycle the underlined colors one to the right or press the left half of the Shift Button to cycle the underlined colors one to the left With Global Mode on Shift affects underlined col ors in all palettes simultaneously The Pick Color Button Other than the Color Slider Scales Pick Color is the main way to set colors in the palette You can use Pick any time to pick a color from the picture in the Canvas The Pick Popup gives you more options for control over the Pick Functions You also can use Pick functions in conjunction with Channel Mask for modifying masks To Pick colors from the
375. ice you can press on one of the environment but tons at the bottom of the screen To exit Liberty press the Exit button User Login Accounts When you logout of a Login Account many of the settings in Liberty are remembered and will be re set for you when you log back into the same account at alater time To create a User Login Account refer to the Configure Environment description A Note for Beginners In this manual the Configuration Environment is discussed next You ll use the Configuration Envi ronment to customize your menus set your resolu tion set up your VTRs and do many other functions However the default settings are usually adequate and you can proceed directly to the Paint or Animation Environment If you re just beginning to learn the Liberty software start by going to the Paint Environment Revision A 2 1 Login Environment CHYRON Corporation Login Environment 2 2 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual P PAINT ANIMATION CONFIGURE Chyromn Figure 2 1 The Login Environment Revision A 2 3 Login Environment 3 Configuration Environment 3 1 3 1 1 Configuration Environment Use the Configuration Environment Figure 3 1 to configure Liberty s variable settings Many of the configurations are stored when you exit Liberty and are automatically reset when you login again to the same User Login Account Configuration Environment Functions The functions
376. ices is that when setting up a target device whether it is a VTR or DDR or a disk path you have only two ways to record 1 a full color picture Canvas Mode or 2 the matte of the picture Matte Mode Paint Environment 4 444 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Target Selection Buttons At the right of each of the twelve timecode windows on the Target Set up Popup is a Target Selection Button which you can toggle between Off Canvas and Matte When the button is Off the device or disk path is not active Either of the other two modes Canvas or Matte causes the device disk path to be an active target The number windows at the right of the Target Selection Buttons are disabled since they are used only for source devices For a normal Canvas render when only one device is highlighted you do not need to enable the Target Selection Button By default the highlighted cur rent device is used as the target and Canvas Mode is used When more than one device button has been configured you can set all the devices to Off and only the current highlighted device is used as a tar get To set up a target device e l On the VTR Panel press the corner button of the Target Button The Target Set up Popup appears 2 Press of the target devices 1 VTR 2 etc to enable it The button you press is highlighted 3 Choose Off Canvas or Matte on the Target Selection Button Will defa
377. ides the grid by a fac tor of two the Div4 Button by a factor of four All functions constrained by Grid will now operate on the sub grid intersections Press the button again to turn it off The Grid Elevator A four level elevator is at the right side of the Grid Popup for storage of grid set ups To create a grid from the current masked area on the Canvas e Mask rectangle on the Canvas the size and shape of a single grid rectangle Use the Rect angle Mask Button on the Mask Panel Menu see page 4 57 for details e Press the corner button of the Grid Button The Grid Popup appears e Press the From Mask Button A grid is created based on the masked area By default the grid is invisible but with the Show Grid Button you can make it visible Revision A 4 57 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation When Grid is on press the Grid Button again to turn Grid off The next time you press the Grid Button to turn it on the previous values are remembered and reset Mask Grid Button On the Mask Tools 2 Panel is a button labeled Grid that when pressed creates a mask of one 1 pixel line width using the grid The Mask Grid Button works using the current Grid whether the Grid Button is actually turned on or not To make the current grid a permanent part of the picture e Set the desired grid using the Grid functions e Press the Mask Grid Button in the Mask Tools 2 Panel The current grid appe
378. ied there Animation Environment 5 54 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To copy an entire layer to another layer on the Timeline e Press the Copy Actor Button e Press on the Layer Number Button of the layer you want to copy e Press on the top or bottom half of the Layer Number Button of the layer where you want to put the new copy of the layer A copy of the layer appears in the new position Pressing on the top half of a Layer Number Button puts the new copy of the layer above that layer pressing on the bottom half of a Layer Number Button puts the new copy of the layer below it To copy only an actor s curve path to another actor see the Edit Path Button To copy only an actor s keyframes to another actor see Copying Keyframes to Another Actor Stretch Actor Button Use the Stretch Actor Button to make an actor longer or shorter To change the begin time of an actor Press the Stretch Actor Button Press on the first half of the actor to be modi fied e Press on the new begin point The actor stretches or shrinks to the point you press on To change the end time of an actor e Press the Stretch Actor button e Press on the last half of the actor to be modi fied Revision A 5 55 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press on the new end point The actor stretches or shrinks to the point you press on To stretch all actors in a layer to the maximum available space
379. ields without typing new text does the same At this point Liberty saves the cur rent Canvas to the specified directory on the local hard disk A thumbnail file with the same name as the still store file but with the added extension TN will be saved to the same directory In addition if the set up menu s FTP button is on the still store image thumbnail image and database information files are transferred over the network to the selected remote system s on the network as indicated in the Setup Menu at this time If the local button is off the image and thumbnail files are deleted from the local hard disk once the transfer to the IMAG ESTOR is complete As stated Liberty transfers the still store image thumbnail and database information using FTP For each file type it uses the appropriate node name entered in the Setup Menu as the network host It generates the target path on the host using the direc tory path entered in the Setup Menu and the file name entered in the directory listing menu when the file was saved The database server i e any infinit Max or Maxine connected to the network or file server automatically and regularly polls for new database files and when the database file is sent via FTP from Liberty to the database server it automati cally updates the still store database with the new information For the above procedure to work both the local SGI system and the still store host system
380. ieu reinen Noise Popup erret fet E eee od Jitter Button Jitter Popup rnnt tt E Piet Pressure Button eene Pressure mene IMAGE TOOLS PANELS 4 291 Preview Buttons esses 4 291 Image Tools Popup OK and Cancel Buttons 4 292 Image Tools 1 Panel 4 293 Image Tools 1 Adjust Button 4 203 Adjust POPUP id et RE meg 4 293 Color Correct Button 4 299 Table of Contents Xii Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Color Correct Popup seeeeeem 4 15 3 Noise Button Noise Popup 4 15 4 Apply Button eene Apply Circular Apply Button Radial Apply Button 4 15 5 Color Clip Button een 4 15 6 Posterize Button 4 15 7 Map Button eunte nenne nn nennen nnen nenna Map Popup shat e A n OA 4 316 4 15 8 Reveal Button 415 9 Tint Button iiie Tint 4 15 10 MultiTint Button 4 15 11 Sharpen Button
381. ighted on the Save As Popup press the Setup Button to bring up the GIF Setup Menu Number of Bits Pixel amp Greyscale On Off When the greyscale button is on the GIF file saves as a black and white image actually in shades of gray In this case the user can choose between 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 bits of resolution using the corre sponding buttons in the set up menu When the greyscale button is off the GIF file saves as a color mapped image a color image that uses a color table In this case the user can choose between 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 bits of resolution Interlacing On Off When on the GIF is stored with the scan lines in an order such that a World Wide Web browser can incrementally refresh the image starting with a lower resolution version of the image and progress ing to the full resolution display Transparency On Off and the Transparency Slider When on any pixels with an alpha of less than a cer tain value are flagged as transparent in the GIF file You set the cutoff value with the Transparency Slider on the GIF Setup Menu The higher the slider setting the higher the opacity of the area that will appear transparent Uniform and Optimal Quantization Uniform quantization splits the color space into equal partitions while optimal quantization com putes the best color table for the specific image you are saving Optimal quantization performs very well on most images even with very few
382. ile File Data Button Press the File Data Button to call up the Storyboard File Control Popup Here you can enter title infor mation and comments that will be saved with the Storyboard when you perform a Record You can Revision A 5 237 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation also choose recording formats and compression schemes For details about these functions see page 5 246 Browse Button Pressing the Browse Button will create a browse image of the storyboard using the current frame similar to normal Liberty browse images Animation Environment 5 238 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 10 2 Playback Control Popup Playback Control Mode Once Loop Rate Requested 15 88 Actual ESTEE En Normal 1 FPS Play Every Frame Quarter Hali Double Resolution Recorded Display 4 658 y 484 Path jora imayge local hde hayty test my File Data Browse 5 li la Figure 5 59 Playback Popup Revision A 5 239 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation The Playback Control Popup allows you to play back Storyboard files at various speeds loop modes rates and resolutions Press the R corner button of the Storyboard But ton to call up the Storyboard Popup Play Once Button Play 1 Press the Play Once Button to play the current Sto ryboard from its beginning to its end then stop Play Button Press the Play Button to play the current Storyboa
383. ill be dependent on the record macros s file format To edit new macros follow the procedures below To edit macros recorded using the old format following the editing interface described on See Editing Mac ros New Format on page 4 421 Edit Macro Button Press the Edit Button to edit a recorded Macro The File Popup appears displaying the list of filenames of recorded Macros Press on or type the filename of a Macro to edit it The entire Canvas area is replaced by a text file of the Macro putting you into a text editor called Jot The Jot Program Jot is resident on the SGI platform and is called up by Liberty Jotis a very simple text editor for the purposes of editing line by line the text file of the Macro It works like most text editors with standard commands for cutting pasting saving files etc Jot has an on line help feature to answer questions about its operation Liberty Help Codes When the text file of the Macro appears on the Can vas for editing each line begins at the left with the name in capitals of the Liberty menu button invoked at each step of the Macro These button names are not always easy to interpret However Revision A 4 421 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation you can use the Liberty Help function to determine the names of buttons When you press the green Help button then press on a button you want help on the help message displayed in the prompt win dow
384. imation Environment Many windows in the Animation Environment dis play numbers You can input to them directly by pressing on the window and typing a number fol lowed by the Enter key You can add to a number by typing p followed by the amount you want to add You can subtract from a number by typing m followed by the amount you want to subtract Pressing in the upper half of the label of a button adds one to the number pressing in the lower half subtracts one Windows indicating duration or times can use either timecode or frame numbers Animation Environment 5 2 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Help Recall Canvas Check Holdin Tmcode Holdout Droptr Skipin copy Skipout add 4 R Preview Story Record inten RUN rept gt Name bright ring Loops Begin 8 End Add File local hd liberty mat im Del Off Invert Inplace lt next gt Move Copy Mask Key Hue Bright Contrast Tint Hes BN Ripple Filter Edit Keyfr Edit Path Stretch SK NN wl sh ain Show Troupe Compress Recall Cel P A C L 1 second raster Canvas Magnify Full Set Figure 5 1 Animation Environment Revision A 5 3 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 5 1 2 5 2 Creating Curve Paths and Keyframes In addition to the menus displayed when you first come into the Animation Environment there are several popups that you often use to provide anima
385. in Liberty or when it was entered on the ImageStor itself The display of the ImageStor fields works for files on local and NFS mounted file systems accessed through the File Manager Button It also works for files in directories remotely displayed through the new FTP Button in the Transfer Panel page WA4 144 assuming that the thumbnail files are in the same directory as the ImageStor files or if the name of the database server has been entered into the Popup Alpha Button The Alpha Button is a mode button similar to Browse When on it displays the files as small pic tures except that it displays their masks their alpha values as white silhouettes on black backgrounds For example a background filling up the entire screen would appear as a solid white rectangle while an element on a transparent background would display as white on black Revision A 4 229 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Make Browse Button The Make Browse Button is a mode button that cre ates browse images for foreign file formats that have been imported into Liberty When this mode is on Browse images for foreign files are created every time one is encountered Creating these Browse images for large directories of foreign files can be slow each file must be decoded and rescaled but once the Browse image has been created it will be saved to disk and need not be recreated A foreign file will stay with its Browse i
386. in a new value from the keyboard and change the slider in that way Typ ing p plus before a number adds the number to the value typing m minus before a number sub tracts that number from the value For example if the value is 7 and you type m2 the new value will be 5 NOTE You must press Enter after any Keyboard input When you press on a menu button that takes numeri cal input such as the Direction Button it shows its name and current numerical value in the Prompt Window Typing a number on the keyboard fol lowed by Enter changes the current value Typing p plus before a number adds the number to the Introduction 1 4 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 3 6 value typing m minus before a number subtracts that number from the value just the same as with number windows Calculator Pressing in the input area on the right end of the Prompt Window calls up the calculator with the input value showing in the calculator display The calculator is used for more complicated calculations Pressing the OFF button on the calculator causes it to disappear Number Windows Text Windows There are other number windows in Liberty besides the ones underneath the slider scales especially in the Animation Environment Pressing on a number window enables you to type in a new value and you can use and the same way you would with a slider scale Text windo
387. in the Time line Revision A 5 253 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Set the Skipin and Skipout windows so that the part of the animation you want to tape over with is the only part that records It will record over the corresponding frames of the Storyboard e Press the Storyboard Button The Story board Popup appears e Press on the elevator level of the Storyboard you want to record over part of e sure Append is not on and press OK e Press Run The Storyboard Confirmation Popup appears Your choices are Yes No and Cancel e Press No The Storyboard is recorded over When using this procedure make sure that the duration of the Storyboard and the duration of the animation match or you will tape over the wrong parts When you play back the Storyboard by pressing the Once Loop or Swing Buttons only the newly recorded frames play back To play back the entire Storyboard reset Skipin and Skipout to zero In other words the settings of Skipin and Skipout con trol which frames of the Storyboard play back You can play back the entire animation without setting Skipin Skipout to zero by resetting Story board play back to the beginning the Begin Button and press ing the Forward Play Button and holding it down Animation Environment 5 254 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Record Animation Button Final Render Mode HI F Preview story Record RUH Figure 5 6
388. includes the name of the button this appears at the end of the message This can assist in interpret ing which button names in the macro pertain to which buttons When you have edited the Macro save it and close the Jot program which returns you to normal opera tion of Liberty You can then run the macro again to test it in its edited form Paint Environment 4 422 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Figure 4 144 Jot Macro Editing Utility Revision A 4 423 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 21 4 Editing Macros Old Format Edit Macro Popup Use the editing functions to correct small mistakes you make in recording your Macros The most com mon mistake is to leave out a step when you record the Macro The Edit Popup makes it easy to insert steps where you want them The easiest Macros to edit are those consisting mainly of button presses and keystrokes Macros with painting tend to get very large and complex and hard to edit The easiest inserts to make are at the beginning of the Macro first step and at the end of the Macro last step because you can use the First Step Button or the Last Step Button to get to the insert point Current Step Button This button displays a window that shows the num ber of the current step of the Macro that you are edit ing Press on the window to type in the number of a step to jump to Whatever button is being pressed in the current step is
389. ing Write on Actors 5 136 Next Step gt Button 4 422 Index 18 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Noise Paint Mode 4 284 4 303 normalizing pictures 4 294 NormalPasteMode 4 112 numbered files 4 207 O Odd Field Button 4 341 Off Button 5 53 OK Erase OK and Cancel Buttons Paste Emboss Mode 4 129 Option Panel 3 48 Other Resolution Popup 3 22 paint brush modes 4 25 Air Brush 4 26 Programmed Brush 4 26 Solid Brush 4 26 User Brush 4 29 paint brushes 4 20 Paint Button 4 242 Paint Environment 4 1 Paint Gap Popup 4 243 4 281 with Write on Actor 5 135 Paint Modes 4 274 Paint Panel 4 240 painting with small or very transparent brushes 4 25 palette 4 34 Revision A Index 19 CHYRON Corporation panel call buttons 4 19 Config Environment 3 2 panning in a magnified picture 4 65 passwords 3 12 3 14 Paste Button 4 109 Paste Distort Mode 4 129 Paste Emboss Mode 4 125 Paste Extrude Mode 4 121 Paste Mask Button 4 399 paste modes 4 109 Paste Normal Mode 4 112 Paste Paint Button 4 280 pasting Move Button 4 108 with prefix buttons 4 111 pastinginplace 4 62 Pause Macro Button 4 415 Permanent Storyboard Buttons 5 253 Perspective Transform 4 130 Pick Color Button 4 38 Pick Colors Popup 4 40 Pick Multiple Colors 4 39 Pick Paint Mode 4 280 Play Button 5 13 Play VTR Button 4 428 Playback Once Button 5 241 Plus Button 4 207 Index 20 Revision A Liberty Artist s Man
390. ing changes on the displayed text The text can be kerned negatively or positively To change the kerning back to zero press Reset Press the green OK button on the popup when the text is at the desired kerning You can select different text with the pen or arrow keys while the Kerning Popup is still up Erase Text Button Deletes the selected text or if there is no selected text deletes the character just before the insertion point Revision A 4 407 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Erase All Button Deletes the entire buffer of text Transform Text Button Position 201 430 0 Rotation OK Scale Slant 1 00 1 00 X mirror Y mirror reset Figure 4 139 Transform Popup Transform Text provides a popup similar to Paste Distort with functions for positioning rotating scal ing slanting and mirroring the text outline prior to rendering Transform works on the entire buffer the current line or a single character You can change modes and the active character or line while the Transform Popup is up To change modes press on the text window inside the Transform button until it displays the correct mode Buffer Line or Charac ter To transform text e Press the Transform Text Button The Trans form Popup comes up and a wireframe bounding box appears around the displayed text on the Canvas NOTE You must type in some text before the Transform Button can b
391. ing saved are shrink wrapped to the size of the correspond ing image When shrinkwrap is off files are always Revision A 4 437 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation saved the same size as the canvas regardless of the size of the image being saved which may be smaller than the canvas The Shrinkwrap button only applies to the Target VTR Set up menu when a Disk path is selected as the current output device Pre roll Button For source and target VLAN controlled VTRs The default pre roll is 5 seconds On some VTRs you may want to set up a shorter pre roll but be careful that you don t create locking problems if you set it too short If you are experiencing locking problems you may want to set the pre roll at longer than 5 sec onds The range is 1 to 10 seconds To change the pre roll e Press on one of the source devices VTR 1 VTR 2 etc to enable it The button you press is highlighted e 2 Press the number window in the Pre roll Button to enter a new pre roll duration in seconds Only the active recording device is changed it must be a VLAN controlled VTR Dropframe Button Press the Dropframe Button to turn it on off When on recording grabbing takes place in Dropframe Mode The Dropframe Mode affects both the source and target recording device unlike Pre roll Show Timecode Show Frames Button Press this button to change between Timecode Mode and Frame Mode This affects the
392. ing the FTP Button in the Save As Popup brings up the common FIP Popup Paint Environment 4 200 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual FTP Save As Popup Save as FIP transfer parameters remote system FIP set up user name guest password temp dir usr tmp Save browse Figure 4 68 The FTP Save As Popup The FTP Save As Popup allows you to enter set up information to log on to a remote system If you enable FTP in the popup the FTP Button on Save As Popup is highlighted Thus you can tell if FTP is on for the current file type just by looking at the Save As Popup Node Enter the node name of the remote system Path Enter the path of the directory on the remote system you wish to access User Name Enter the user name used to log on to the remote sys tem This user name must correspond to a user account on the remote system Password Enter the password used to log on to the remote sys tem This password must correspond to the pass word for the user account on the remote system Revision A 4 201 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Temp Directory Enter a temporary directory on the local hard drive where temporary files can be stored Normally this is set to usr tmp but you can specify a different location if space is tight on the usr drive All files browsed or recalled via FTP pass through this tem porary directory so it needs at least a fe
393. ion Triangle Morph Lock Button Initially the morph is unlocked meaning that you are editing the first keyframe and no other key frames exist Once the first keyframe is complete pressing lock creates the corresponding end key frame which you then edit to define the distortion Press to lock control points after the first keyframe is set The beginning and ending keyframe markers appear on the Keyframe Slider with the pointer at the last keyframe Now you can use the Move But ton to modify the points on the Canvas to define the final keyframe You can also add more keyframes After pressing Lock you can t add or delete points only move them You only have to press Lock once after you ve finished setting the first keyframe points Triangle Morph Recall and Save buttons The Triangle Morph Recall button recalls a previ ously saved Triangle Morph from disk Pressing on it brings up the file recall menu allowing the user to browse directories and select a file to recall The Triangle Morph Save button saves the currently defined morph in a morph file Pressing on it brings up the file save menu allowing the user to browse directories and select a file name to save to The Save button is grayed out when there is no morph defined yet before morph lines have been added or before the Lock button has been pressed Triangle Morph Cancel Button The Cancel button exits the popup without perform ing a morph
394. ion or reconstruction stage and the second is an anti aliasing stage If you want to understand fil ters better the following will give you a quick explanation of how filters work This will also help you understand the User defined filters Interpolation There are two methods used to interpolate or recon struct the image from two dimensional space into the specified three dimensional space The two methods are 1 nearest neighbor and 2 linear Nearest neighbor chooses pixels based on the near est sample pixel This maintains sharpness when the image is enlarged and reduced However when you scale an element up from small to very large this method produces blocky results Revision A 4 137 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Linear interpolation chooses pixels based on the nearest four neighboring pixels This offers better quality than nearest neighbor with slightly greater cost in rendering time However smoothing is introduced into the image meaning that the image gets a bit soft Anti aliasing Any interpolation method introduces artifacts which must be countered with anti aliasing tech niques Liberty has two methods point sampling and adaptive supersampling Point sampling is the simplest and quickest of the two It takes the pixels straight from the interpola tion stage with no extra calculations For objects that are smoothly varying that is continuous tone like a photo image this may
395. ion A Liberty Artist s Manual Permanent Storyboard Buttons Figure 5 61 Permanent Storyboard Buttons Revision A 5 251 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual At the bottom of the Timeline is a permanent row of buttons that duplicate the Storyboard Playback But tons Use them to run storyboards at any time for example while editing keyframes in the Keyframe Timeline Otherwise too many popups up at one time can cause problems These buttons are identi cal to the Storyboard Playback Buttons described above Press the On Button to enable disable the Permanent Storyboard Buttons Magnifying the Storyboard Playback Liberty allows zoom in zoom out autopan and full screen the Canvas Button display for the Sto ryboard These functions work with either the Story board Popup or the Permanent Storyboard Functions When the Permanent Storyboard is on you can run a Storyboard by pressing and dragging on the preview strip above the timeline just like wireframe pre view Note that this function will work with any Storyboard not necessarily the one that corresponds with the animation currently on the Timeline Recording Over Part of an Existing Storyboard When you have recorded a Storyboard and play it back and find you want to change only a part of it you can use the following procedure To record over part of an already recorded Storyboard e the changes in the animation
396. ironment CHYRON Corporation 4 22 VTR PANEL MENU YTR gt Source Target lt 16 34 49 2 16 34 49 2 Wm First Shuttle Roto Jog Last Stop Play Cue Grab Record Figure 4 145 VTR Panel The VTR Panel is used to control recording devices as both source and target including VTRs DDRs and hard drives Source Button Press to enable the Source or Play VTR When this button is highlighted all the VTR control buttons apply to the source machine The corner button of Source calls up the Set up Popup for the source device Refer to Figure 4 148 VTR Set up Popup on page 4 432 and the subsequent sections for more information about the Source and Target VTRs Target Button Press to enable the Target or Record VTR When this button is highlighted all the VTR control but tons apply to the record device The corner button of the Target Button calls up the Target Set up Popup Paint Environment 4 428 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Timecode Windows These two windows display the current timecode settings for the source and target devices The time code windows do not update continuously from the devices because VTRs have different pre roll peri ods which can cause continuous timecode reference to get lost Each of these global timecode win dows refer only to the single current highlighted device on the Source and Target Set up Popups accessed by pressi
397. irst then the y slider Paint Environment 4 324 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual which operates separately from the x slider The slider settings represent the pixel width of the blur The sliders range on a scale from 0 to 30 Blur Mode Buttons These select between the six blur modes Fast Gaussian Min Max Median and Despeckle Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the blur When the Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the blur on the masked area NOTE Blur previews skip the areas around the edge of the canvas to preview faster The higher the Blur X and Y sliders the more pixels around the edge are skipped These pixels will be processed however during the actual Blur Operation started with OK or the main Blur button 4 15 13 Filter Button Press the Filter Button to apply the current filter to the masked area of the Canvas using the settings of the Filter Popup Revision A 4 325 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Filter Popup Press the corner of the Filter Button to call up the Filter Popup page 4 327 In other Image Tools Liberty uses standard filters to perform operations like blurring sharpening edge enhancement etc The Filter Popup allows you to customize existing filters and create filt
398. isplays a thumbnail of the full Canvas with a wireframe box representing the magnified area in relation to the whole picture The wireframe rectan gle follows the position of the magnified screen in Paint Environment 4 104 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual real time When the Canvas is magnified see page 4 64 press in the wireframe and drag it to pan the image in the Canvas The Canvas Buffer has its own blue Undo U and Redo R Buttons Mag Window The Mag Button next to the Canvas Button displays the current level of magnification of the Canvas 1 no magnification 2 two times magnification etc X and Y Windows The X and Y windows display the x y location of the lower left corner of the magnified wireframe You can re position the wireframe pan the Canvas by pressing in one of the X Y Windows and entering a new number The wireframe and magnified Canvas display jumps to the new position Alpha A Slider This is the same alpha slider that appears in the color palette It is used to set the opacity alpha of many of Liberty s imaging functions such as Painting Revision A 4 105 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 9 TRANSFER PANEL TRANSFER Recall File Save File Save File Ac Tiff tif Paste Normal File Manager Cut Move Tile FTP Grab Figure 4 39 Transfer Panel The Transfer Panel is where you do all saving and recalling of files as well as c
399. ist s Manual 4 9 10 Paste OK Erase and Cancel Buttons Perform the final paste by pressing the OK Button Press the Erase Button to perform the final paste after erasing the Canvas Press the Cancel Button to remove the popup without performing the paste Paste Emboss Elevator You can save settings of the popup in the elevator giving each of the settings a name with the Name Button Paste Distort Mode You perform all sizing and perspective transforma tions in Paste Distort as well as slanting mirroring and corner warping Paste Distort supports sub pixel positioning Distort Popup Preview Final Alph Filter Bilinear Transform Center Inpl Position Image Lock Erase a x Y 2 cance 630 58 132 58 B 88 lt UABE Rotation 4 z name of settings 4 68 8 88 6 08 Adjust Slant Reset 1 666 ace Eye Pen Position Lock 4 Distort 636 58 132 Mirror amp 58 Mirror Y Paste Modes Figure 4 46 Paste Distort Popup Revision A 4 129 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Distort Popup has the same look and feel as the other paste modes The only difference is that it has tools for manipulating the image in a three dimen sional world In addition to the standard paste func tions the Paste Distort Popup has tools for rotation in X Y and Z scaling in X and Y mirroring in X and Y and slanting in X and Y Sub pixel Positioning
400. ith no changes in the way it is displayed By editing the start and end keyframes and adding new keyframes to the Keyframe Time line you can change attributes of the display of the actor s image file The following attributes are con trolled by keyframes e X YZ rotation of the image Same as Paste Distort in Paint Environment X Y size of the image Same as Paste Distort in Paint Environment X Y mirroring of the image Same as Paste Distort in Paint Environment Slanting of the image Same as Paste Distort in Paint Environment Position of the Reference Point of the image Same as Paste Distort in Paint Environment Transparency of the image Whether the image is displayed under other actors e of the individual attributes of the actor types Filter Type point bilinear adaptive or user defined Revision A 5 69 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Colored Dots on Matchsticks On the Keyframe Timeline keyframe matchsticks display little colored dots depending on which attributes have been changed for that keyframe The following colors are used to denote attribute dots starting at the top of the keyframe matchstick and working down Light green transparency Red rotation Yellow scaling and mirroring Purple slant Light blue under The lack of a colored dot on a matchstick means that at this keyframe the display of this attribute is inter
401. ject or to paste a silhouette of the object in a sin gle color Revision A 4 115 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Paste Color Popup Preview Erase OK Final Alpha Palette cancel Center piur name of settings Adjust Inplace Pen Position Color Paste Modes Figure 4 42 Paste Color Popup The Paste Color Popup is the same as the Paste Nor mal Popup with the addition of the Blur functions and a mode button for choosing the source of the color in the pasted image The source for the color of the pasted image can be one of three modes 1 Pal ette the current color box 2 Image the object itself or 3 Light the image on the Canvas plus the setting of the Light Slider The Paste Color Blur Functions The Blur Sliders work the same as the Blur Popup in the Image Tools Panel Menu see page 4 324 They range from 0 to 15 where anything less than 1 is no blur and 15 is maximum blur When Blur is greater than 0 the object grows by the number used Paint Environment 4 116 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Source Color for the Paste At the top of the Blur Sliders is a Color Source But ton controlling the source of the color for the paste Pressing this button cycles among three modes Pal ette Image and Light In Palette Mode the object is pasted in the current color In Image Mode the object is pasted using the origi nal colors
402. k wise by pressing the labeled Link Window Button till it displays the desired direction then pressing on the main part of the Link Keyframe But ton To get the best in betweening results with the least amount of folding and cross over place the start points of the two neighboring keyframes in the same relative position for example at the bottom of the shapes and make the direction of the order the same clockwise or counter clockwise and then press on the main part of Link Keyframe Button Move Keyframe Points Buttons Move Prev Next Kf pt Use these buttons when the two shapes to be ani mated have a different number of points For exam ple if the first shape has three points and the second shape has five points the second shape s two extra points have to originate somewhere in the first shape Maybe the second shape s extra points origi Animation Environment 5 188 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual nate from the same point on the first shape You can change how these points originate in the following way To change the origin position of extra points from a triangle to a star Add a new Shapes Actor to the Timeline Press Edit Keyframe Button Press on the second last keyframe on the Key frame Timeline Press the Edit Shape Button Use the Star Button to create a star shape Press the Replace Kf button Choose the first keyframe using the Inbetween ing slider or left arrow b
403. keyframe marker is dis played in the Prompt Window Revision A 5 149 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Tracking Features in Line Morph You can place line segments on features you want to track through a morph For instance if you are mor phing one face to another face and want the eyes nose and mouth to track through to the second face Place a line segment on each feature in your starting keyframe then when you set your final keyframe move the line segments to follow the corresponding features in the second face NOTE The Morph Actor need not be the same length as the actors to be morphed The Morph Actor acts on whatever is above or below it at the current time However it must have something to act on 5 7 8 Macro Actor Popup First Line Last Line 255 alpha warp under Keytr Time 39 Auto Smooth Figure 5 39 Macro Actor Popup next prey rotate scale slant Animation Environment 5 150 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Macro Actor allows a Macro history file to be played back as a layer in an animation Thus you can integrate many powerful Paint Environment func tions into any animation A Macro can play back in its entirety for each frame of the animation useful for rotoscope type processes including Mask Panel and Tools Panel functions Or a Macro can play back incrementally i e more and more of it renders each frame useful for wri
404. l Save but you can use the Save As functions to choose what format the file will be saved as and what other Save As functions will be used such as Shrink wrap and Compress File Path Elevator 6 elevator boxes are provided each of which can hold a file path The current elevator box keeps the current path until you change it With the Copy Pre fix you can copy a path into a different elevator box saving it for later quick access Revision A 4 225 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Select Button The Select functions allow you to select multiple files in the file list Press the Select Button to turn it on then press on a filename to select it The file name is highlighted until you perform an action on it or cancel the selection You can select as many files as you wish then press OK to perform the action currently displayed in the Action Button on all selected files Press on a selected file to de select it Select All Button Press the All Button to select all the files in the cur rent directory Clear Button Press the Clear Button to de select all the files in the current directory Complement Select Button Press the Compl Button to select all files not cur rently selected and to de select all files currently selected Page Select Button Press the Page Button to turn it on off When on the select functions work only on files on the currently displayed page Br
405. l controls one for field 1 and one for field 2 The field 1 buttons con trol the render of the first field the field 2 buttons control the render of the second field in the same Use Even When high lighted extracts and uses only the even field from the input source s current frame Use Odd When high lighted extracts and uses only the odd field from the input source s current frame Off When high lighted uses the entire current frame as is from the input source Reset Resets both fields to Off Thus you can set the Filmstrip Actor to alternately grab even and odd fields from the input stream This is useful when you are using the Filmstrip Actor to re position or rotate the incoming video because interlaced images often create unwanted artifacts in such cases It is also useful when the incoming Revision A 5 123 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation images are of a different resolution than the Canvas because the re scaling that takes place often creates unwanted artifacts Hints About Field Order Different devices have different field orderings Most Digital Disk Recorders are odd field first meaning than the even field was rendered roughly 1 60th of a second for NTSC after the odd field in time The even field is contained in the even num bered scanlines while the odd field is in the odd numbered ones in otherwords the image is inter laced not quite in the same meaning as GIF
406. layed as one step in the sequence even though it may contain many files The current file number designates the current step file or filmstrip which is displayed in the Actor Popup Browse Window which will be recalled when you press Recall Cel and whose file name is displayed in the File Button The current step number can be incremented by pressing on the top half of the label or decremented by pressing in the bottom half of the label Multiple Cel Insert Button Press to insert a step into the sequence increasing the total number of steps by one Inserts after the current number Multiple Cel Delete Button Press to delete the current step The total number of steps decreases by one Multiple Cel Duplicate Button Dup This button displays the number of fields to repeat each step of the sequence This means that each image in the cycle is recorded for that number of consecutive fields not frames before going to the next image in the sequence The default is 2 fields 1 frame per step You can use odd or even numbers of fields To change the number of fields recorded for each step of the sequence press directly on the Dups Window and type in a new number Revision A 5 117 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Multiple Cel Swing Button Press to turn on off If turned on the sequence plays to the end and then plays in reverse to the begin ning If the Swing Button is on
407. lays back in reverse Animation Environment 5 242 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Rate Selection Modes Requested Rate Window This window shows the rate that the Playback Con trol is attempting to achieve depending on hardware platform size of frames etc Press in the window to type a number or use one of the six Rate Buttons just below Normal 1 FPS etc If playback fails to achieve the requested rate a message appears in red in the Prompt window at the bottom of the screen Actual Rate Window This window shows the rate of the actual playback When the Actual Button is high lighted the rate is displayed for each frame When it is not high lighted an average rate is displayed averaged over the last full second of playback Normal Button Press to high light and set the requested rate at the default rate recorded when the Storyboard file was created 1 Frame Per Second Button Press to high light and set the requested rate at one frame per second Play Every Frame Button Press to high light and play back every frame of the Story board regardless of the requested or recorded rate Every frame is displayed Quarter Button Press to high light and set the requested rate at one quarter of the recorded Normal rate Revision A 5 243 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Half Button Press to high light and set the requested rate at one half of
408. lays a Speed Slider for each key frame Press and drag the slider to set a different Revision A 5 127 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation playback speed at each keyframe Dynamic speed changes between keyframes are interpolated frac tionally frame by frame Motion Blur and Trail Off As above when the Speed Slider Keyframe Button is high lighted each keyframe s popup displays Motion Blur and Trail Off controls The default set ting is zero or no motion blur Blur Before Press and drag the Blur Before slider to set how many frames are to be blurred or blended with the current keyframe before the current keyframe Blur After Press and drag the Blur After slider to set how many frames are to be blurred or blended with the current keyframe after the current keyframe Trail Off Press either Trail Off Button to high light it causing the blended frames further away from the current keyframe to be progressively more transparent giv ing a gradual trailing off quality to the before or after motion blur Animation Environment 5 128 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 7 5 Text Actor Popup Name Loops nan Begin End 480 Text color B Edit Edit Keyfr Edit Path E Recall Cel Figure 5 31 Text Actor Popup The Text Actor is similar to the Cel Actor except that it animates a vector text file instead of an image file from the disk Its main ad
409. le But ton Revision A 4 123 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The window at the bottom of the Angle Button shows the angle in degrees The window at the top right of the Angle Button shows the length of the extrusion in pixels You can change either of these values by pressing directly on the window and typ ing in anew number followed by the Enter key Source Color for the Extrusion At the top of the Blur Sliders is a Color Source But ton controlling the source of the color s for the extrusion Press this button to cycle between two modes Palette and Image In Palette Mode the extrusion is created in the cur rent color or if Multiple Colors are on in the Pal ette itis extruded along a gradation of the chosen colors Palette is the most common mode In Image Mode the extrusion is made using the original image so that the extruded edge looks like it has grown out of the image itself Extrude Preview Above the Color Source Button is an Extrude Pre view box that displays the colors and length of the extrusion When the source color is in Palette mode the horizontal width of the box is determined by the current length of the extrusion If you make changes in the Palette colors to be used in the extru sion press on the Extrude Preview Box to update its display of the new colors OK Erase and Cancel Buttons Perform the final paste by pressing the OK Button Press the Erase
410. le of the window in the Rectangle Mask Button to call up a popup of the four Rectan gle Mask Modes Press on the mode you want to use Rectangle Mask Press to mask a rectangle Square Mask Press to mask a square Otherwise the same as Rect angle Mask Gradated Rectangle Mask Creates a rectangular mask with gradated alpha transparency The masked rectangle gradates from the current value of the Transparency Slider to 0 alpha with the direction of the gradation depending on the Direction Button see page 4 59 NOTE Rectangular and square masks can also be created in the Shape Popup see page 4 262 Gradated Square Mask Creates a square mask with gradated alpha trans parency The masked square gradates from the cur rent value of Transparency Slider to 0 Alpha with the direction of the gradation depending on the Direction button see page 4 59 Circle Mask Button The Circle Mask Button replaces the current mask with an ellipse mask that is determined by the cur rent mask s bounding box Creates an exact circle if Revision A 4 369 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation the current mask is a square see Square Mask above If there is no mask currently active Liberty uses the edges of the screen as boundaries NOTE Circular masks can also be created in the Shape Popup see page 4 262 4 18 7 Alpha Mask Button The Alpha Mask Tool creates a mask from the Can vas s alpha i
411. left at their default settings the entire macro plays at each frame the first example above Changing these numbers allows you to render a key framable portion of the Macro at each frame The most common use of this is to change the Last Line of the first keyframe to 1 This incrementally renders more and more of the Macro each frame This capa bility is very powerful but is also easy to misuse NOTE The two examples given above one playing the Macro in its entirety at each frame and two incrementally increasing the Macro with each frame are the two primary way to use the Macro Actor However other variations are possible Experiment with different settings for the First and Last Line numbers they behave very differently depending on the Macro being used Use the two Animation Environment 5 152 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual examples given above and introduce variations in the numbers to see how they behave The First Line Window The First Line Window specifies which line in the Macro file is the first line to be executed at the key frame In between keyframes the First Line number is interpolated The First Line and the Last Line numbers are interpolated independently of each other Last Line Window The Last Line Window specifies which line in the Macro file is the last line to be executed at the key frame In between keyframes the Last Line number is interpolated The First Line a
412. lider scale without dragging The pointer jumps to the new posi tion and the current color changes accordingly With Multi color mode on you can change the Hue Saturation or Brightness of all the underlined colors simultaneously Individual colors are indicated by pointers at the right of each slider and can be moved individually Revision A 4 51 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation You can change all the colors simultaneously by dragging one of the blue end pointers up or down the scale This stretches or squeezes the entire range of chosen colors and they all change accordingly in the Palette Or you can change all the underlined colors simultaneously by pressing and dragging the yellow mid point pointer All the pointers move up and down together without stretching or squeezing If you drag one of the blue end pointers till it touches the other one collapsing the range of val ues and then pull it away again stretching the range of values all the pointers between become equally spaced Thus you can reset whole ranges of colors manually creating blends Copying Colors in the Palette To copy a color from one position on the pal ette to another In single color mode press on the palette box you want to copy e Press the Copy Prefix Button e Press the palette box you want to copy the color to The source color is copied into the tar get palette box The source palette box remains underlined
413. line e Press the Edit Keyframe Button The Key frame Timeline appears with a beginning and ending Keyframe Matchstick e Adda Keyframe Matchstick in the middle of the Keyframe Timeline e Select the first matchstick and on the Canvas drag the wireframe to the desired starting position e Select the second matchstick and on the Can vas drag the wireframe to the desired end hold position The third and last keyframe will be in exactly the same position as the second keyframe thus automat ically creating a hold Other kinds of holds use the Duplicate Curve Points Button described above page 5 62 To add a hold at the beginning and end of an actor e Add a new actor to the Timeline e Press the Edit Keyframe Button The Key frame Timeline appears with a beginning and ending Keyframe Matchstick Animation Environment 5 76 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Add two Keyframe Matchsticks in the middle of the Keyframe Timeline This gives a total of four matchsticks Select the second matchstick and on the Can vas drag the wireframe to the desired starting position Select the third matchstick and on the Canvas drag the wireframe to the desired end hold position e Run a storyboard to look at the animation The animation begins with a hold and ends with ahold NOTES The above procedure also applies to a hold at the beginning of an actor In that case you would move the last keyframe into
414. ling which eliminates aliasing artifacts but also blurs the image slightly When this button is off the image is not smoothed during re scaling In this case the image will not blur but may have aliasing artifacts Reset Button Press to set all numeric settings to defaults The OK Button Press to confirm changes in settings The popup dis appears Note that when you turn on a rescaling mode it stays on after you leave the popup and remains on until you go back into the Rescale Popup and press the No Scaling Button or the Reset But ton Paint Environment 4 164 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Recall Orientation Button Press one of the four orientation modes to enable it The 90 Button causes the recalled file to appear rotated 90 degrees on the Canvas The 180 Button causes the recalled file to appear rotated 180 degrees on the Canvas The 270 Button causes the recalled file to appear rotated 270 degrees on the Canvas The default is 0 or no rotation This feature is very useful for recalling Cineon image files which have rotated images Recall Mirror Button Press one or both of the two mirror modes to enable it The X Button causes the recalled file to be reflected horizontally The Y Button causes the recalled file to be reflected vertically When both the X and Y Buttons are enabled the recalled file is flipped both horizontally and vertically The default is both buttons off R
415. lling the Full Screen File Menu e Press Save File or Recall File then press the Full button or Press the File Manager button Pressing Save File or Recall File brings up the stan dard panel sized File Popup In this popup you can call up the Full screen File Menu which has much more detail and options including the ability to pic torially Browse the files on disk On the File Popup press the Full Screen Button labeled Full to call up the Full Screen File Menu Files may be displayed as text like the smaller file menus along with the size of the file in KB and the date time the file was stored Or if the browse But ton is active files may be displayed as small thumb nail or Browse pictures The Full Screen File Menu has buttons for sorting multiple file selections as well as all of Liberty s file manage ment functions Scroll to Top Button T Jumps the file list to the beginning of the filename list Revision A 4 219 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Scroll Up Button Scrolls the filename list up one page Scroll Down Button V Scrolls the filename list down one page Scroll to Bottom Button B Jumps the filename list to the end of the list Action Button At the top left of the Full Screen File Menu is the Action Button which displays the current operation you re performing Recall Save Delete etc It allows you to choose what
416. ltiple Color Mode on palette F1 Magnify in one step Press Pick Color Button F2 Magnify out one step Enter Press Yes Confirmation Button F3 Turn Magnify on off previous level of magnification lt Press Recall Button F4 Turn on Full Page Mode gt Press Save Button F5 Turn on off current grid Temp to Canvas F6 Undefined Canvas to Temp F7 Undefined Temp Canvas Swap F8 The CANVAS Button go to full screen canvas or back Turn on off Autopan h Turn on off Horizontal Button Brings up Calculator Turn on off Vertical Button i Turn on off Invert Prefix Button Turn on off Copy Prefix Button a Turn on off Add Prefix Button Turn on off Under Prefix Button r Turn on off Repeat Prefix Button Turn on off Paint Button Turn on off Jitter Paint Button Turn on off Pressure Paint Button A Turn on off Mask in Use Button Press Mask All Button Turn on Paint Mask Button Turn on off Rectangle Mask Button t Press Matte Mask Button Press Help Button Revision A 4 419 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 21 3 Editing Macros New Format With the release of Liberty v5 0 software the macro file structure and macro editing interface was changed significantly While Liberty will only record macros using the new format it can play macros under the new or old format Due to this capability the macro editing interface enabled w
417. ltiple Mode Paint Environment 4 246 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 13 2 Curve Popup Curve Paint gives you a popup that allows you to create and edit curves splines by adding curve points to the Canvas When you press OK a curve is drawn through the points using the current brush color and transparency setting To create a simple curve drawing e Press the Curve Button The Curve Popup appears If a curve appears on the Canvas press the Erase button on the Curve Popup to clear it e Press the Add Points Button on the Curve Popup e Press on various places in the Canvas to add curve points Liberty displays a spline curve through the points as you put them down e Press the green OK Button on the Curve Popup The current brush in the current color and transparency is dragged along your curve to create a curve drawing Revision A 4 247 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation S5cale Cent Poly rnt S8 rnt i rot 2 Rias Tens Resol Rey Point List Corner List Aid Hove Del Insrt Break Join 1 Recall Save Erase prey Lanti shift Figure 4 81 Curve Popup The Curve Popup contains a large array of functions for creating and editing curves The Curve func tions are also used in Liberty s optional animation software to create and edit motion paths Press the Curve Button to call up the Curve Popup Curve Points You create a curve by putting
418. m Paint Environment 4 452 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Temp Directory Enter a temporary directory on the local hard drive where temporary files can be stored Normally this is set to usr tmp but you can specify a different location if space is tight on the usr drive All files browsed or recalled via FTP pass through this tem porary directory so it needs at least a few megabytes of free space X Y Offset Position The Chyron Motion File Set up Popup contains text windows for X and Y offset position Since Chyron Motion Files are usually small cutouts you can use these windows to specify the position of the cutout The cutout then will be displayed at this position on the iNFiNiT FTP Settings Elevator Use the six levels of the elevator to save settings for different remote hosts directories FTP Local If the FTP Button is on the file is transferred via FTP to the specified remote host and directory If the Local Button is also on the file is saved to the local hard drive as well If only the FTP Button is on the file will be deleted from the local hard disk after the FTP As described above the Chyron Motion File Type must be enabled on the Target VTR Set up Popup and the Animation rendering must be complete or when rotoscoping the Last Button must have been pressed When the FTP transfer is about to occur the software checks to see if the file already exists in the remo
419. m ple the user could create a directory on an external hard drive to store images then change the path for the Image directory in the liberty_paths file to match this new location This would tell Liberty to always look for images on the external hard drive However instead of using a text editor Liberty pro vides a menu pop up for editing the paths to the directories By selecting the User Setup button a pop up menu appears with file windows for Cels Image Plug ins Projects and Undo plus the OK and Cancel buttons Clicking in one of the five win dows brings up the File Recall Popup allowing the Revision A 3 35 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation user to select a new directory path Liberty then automatically updates the liberty_paths file with the new path information Re label ImageStor Button This button allows you to re label fields in the Imag eStor Pop up 3 6 VIDEO PANEL Defining VTR none VLAN generic SMPTE Abekas 60 Abekas A65 A66 Diskus Coutrol Video Type none Address Sre Comm Adj Contig Tar Video Configuration Figure 3 10 The Video Panel Configuration Environment 3 36 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Use the Video Configuration Panel to define as many as six physical video recorders or digital disk recorders depending on how many ports your hard ware supports When you are in the Paint or Anima tion Environment
420. m from the green component only Create Diagram from the blue component only Create Diagram from the hue only Create Diagram from the saturation only lt 9 WD Create Diagram from the value brightness only The current channel selected is displayed in the mask channels text window on the Mask Channel button Pressing on this window brings up a pop up allowing the user to switch channels Press the Mask Channels Button to create a mask from the selected channel of the Canvas printed in the Mask Channels window If a mask is already Revision A 4 375 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation active when the channel mask is created the channel mask is affected by the active mask the channel mask is attenuated by the active mask s transpar ency Mask Channels can also be used in conjunction with the Add and Invert Prefix Buttons When the Add Prefix button 1s on and a mask 1s active when the channel mask is created the channel mask will be added to the existing mask rather than be attenuated by it Pressing the Invert Prefix first masks the opposite pixels of the current Channel Mask Channels Popup Press the corner button of Mask Channels to call up the Mask Channels Popup Figure 4 122 The Mask Channels Popup contains the Diagram functions and buttons for choosing among the different channel options When a channel is highlighted the Dia gram Curve is displayed in the appropriate col
421. mage and they will be moved deleted copied and renamed together unless you are copying from the UNIX shell in which case both files must be dealt with explicitly In fact the UNIX command Is will not list Browse files unless the extension is used because the Browse filenames begin with a Sort Button The Sort Button allows you to list files in the current directory in a variety of ways Press the Sort Button to display a popup with a choice of sort modes Press on one of the modes to choose it Paint Environment 4 230 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Sort Popup Sort By Filter Imagestor Filmstrip amp 11 files Imagestor Tiles description Name description Type field 1 Date field 1 Reverse field 2 Size field 2 Hide Tiles Tield 3 field 3 field 4 1210 4 Figure 4 75 Sort Popup Revision A 4 231 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The Sort Popup provides the following options for sorting the file list All Files By Date List files in the order that they were cre ated with the newest file first By Name List files alphabetically Numbers are listed correctly X2Y comes before XIIY By Size List files in order of size with the small est file first ImageStor Files In addition to being able to display ImageStor data base fields you can sort directory listings based on them Five ImageStor sort modes labeled descrip tion
422. make a left to right wipe you make a white to black gradation with Apply Then you use Mask Channels to mask its Lumi nance and use the File Mode Popup to save the mask Switcher actors in File controlled Reveal mode can perform transitions with multiple files This allows the mask for the file controlled reveal effect Revision A 5 155 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation to change over time The controls for a multi file Switcher Actor work like controls for other multi file actors such as Cel and Mask Pressing on the Single Button in the Actor Edit Menu brings up a Multiple File Popup Or when selecting the file name assigned to the Switcher Actor press the film button in the Recall Popup and enter into the Full Screen Animation Filmstrip Browse Popup You can select multiple files there Switcher Composite Button top bot top bot top bot top bot top bot top bot Figure 5 41 Switcher Composite Popup The Switcher Composite Button calls up a popup with six special compositing modes Each mode provides a special compositing effect along with a slider scale to control the brightness of the resulting effect Plus Mode top bot When this mode is enabled the pixels of the top and bottom layers are added together This causes brightness to increase so a slider is provided to off set excessive brightness The bottom or zero slider setting leaves the resulting brightness
423. make rect angle masks there are many many ways to make masks The panel menu at the far right of the screen below the Canvas is the Mask Panel where all the masking tools are found These tools are described in detail in the chapter on the Mask Tools panel page 4 363 The Mask Buffer has its own blue Undo U and Redo R Buttons Paint Environment 4 74 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mask Elevator The Mask Elevator is the vertical slider scale at the right of the Mask Buffer marked by a stack of tick marks that show how many Masks are configured the default is six Each tick represents a buffer that stores a mask without needing a filename assigned to it as it would if it was being stored on disk You can configure as many masks as you want in the ele vator Press on an elevator tick to display its con tents in the Mask Buffer making it the current elevator level Up to 24 tick marks can appear in the slider If more than 24 masks are configured no tick marks appear in the slider The ticks are color coded to indicate which are disk masks which are RAM masks see below and which is the current mask the one displayed in the Mask Buffer To copy a mask from one level to another e Press on the level of the Mask Elevator you want to copy from The mask in that level becomes active on the Canvas 2 Press the Copy Prefix Button e 3 Press the level of the Mask Elevator you want to
424. mask is made Match RGB and Hue Buttons Press one of these mode buttons to turn it on RGB is the default Hue works the same as RGB except that the match is based on hue only saturation and brightness are disregarded This tends to leave high lights and shadows unmasked If a mask is already active when Match Mask is invoked the result will be limited to the opaque areas of the active mask With the Add Prefix on Match adds the new Mask to any existing active mask With the Invert Prefix on Match inverts the mask Paint Environment 4 388 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 19 Mask Tools 2 Panel MASK TOOLS 2 Use All 1 a Erase n er Mask pi Mask Safe Grid Title Clamp Difference Ramp Luminance _ Field Paste odd in place Figure 4 126 Mask Tools 2 Panel 4 19 1 The Mask Tools 2 Panel has the same top row of buttons as the Mask Tools 1 Panel Use Mask Mask All Invert Complement Mask and Erase Mask Safe Title Button Safe Title is a way to display a white rectangular overlay on the picture to indicate the area outside of which it is not safe to put essential visual informa tion in the picture The white rectangle is not really part of the picture and will not appear when Cut recorded or saved to disk Press the Safe Title But ton to turn on off the white rectangle Press the cor ner button of the Safe Title Button to call up the Safe Title Popup Revision
425. mation in your Time line which can be moved stretched and keyframed like any other actor It s an easy way to combine several animations The difference between the Ref erence Actor and the Troupe Actor is that the Troupe Actor allows you to edit its actors without changing them in the original file on disk and the Reference Actor does not To add an animation into the Timeline add a Refer ence or Troupe Actor to the Timeline Press the File Window in the actor s Popup Menu and choose an animation file from the disk for the actor to refer to If there is a Holdin or Holdout in the source anima tion it is ignored when a Reference or Troupe Actor referring to it is rendered If you need the hold ren der the first or last frame of the source animation save it and then use it as a file for a Cel Actor Show Troupe Button This button is at the bottom of Actor Edit Menu to the left of the Animation Timeline It is used for both Reference and Troupe Actors Animation Environment 5 182 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual When you first assign an animation to a Troupe or Reference Actor all the actors in the animation appear on the Timeline If you press on the Show Troupe Button and then press on the Reference or Troupe Actor all the actors of the referenced anima tion are hidden and only the Reference or Troupe Actor itself is shown If you press the Show Troupe Button and then press on a Refer
426. ment to select it The selected line segments change color Pressing a selected segment un selects it Press the Move Button to move all the segments simultaneously Animation Environment 5 146 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual You can also select more than one line segment and press the delete Button to delete them all at once However it s really no faster than deleting them one by one Line Morph Add Keyframe Button Press to add a keyframe into the keyframe slider A blue keyframe marker appears in the Morph Slider wherever the yellow pointer is when you press Add Keyframe Use the Move Button to move line seg ments on the Canvas to define the new keyframe You can move line segments in any keyframe of the morph at any time The number of keyframes you can have is limited by the space along the slider If you try to add a key frame too close to an existing keyframe you are prompted Cannot be too close to another key frame Line Morph Copy Keyframe Button To copy the line segment data from one key frame to another Position the yellow pointer in the Line Morph Slider beneath the keyframe you want to copy from e Press the Copy Button You are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy to If the yel low pointer is not beneath a keyframe you are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy from Move the yellow pointer under an exist ing blue keyframe marker and press the Copy Button ag
427. more colors on the palette It s a combination of Tint and Apply allowing you to create tinted gradations Only linear gradations are supported not radial gra dations Press to tint the masked area on the Canvas using the current palette colors There are two modes in the text window Hue which tints only into Canvas areas with some chroma ignoring areas with no color but only gray scale and H amp S which tints into both hue and saturation so that gray scale areas are tinted as well as areas with chroma As with Apply the Direction button See Direction Button on page 4 58 determines the direction of the gradation To Multitint an area e Mask an area on the Canvas e Choose two or more colors the palette by underlining them Pressin the text window of Multitint to choose Hue or H amp S Mode Press the main part of the Multitint Button The masked area is tinted with a gradation 4 15 11 Sharpen Button Applies a sharpening filter to the masked area Press the corner button to display the Sharpen Popup Paint Environment 4 320 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Sharpen Popup Sharpen Cancel preview active Figure 4 102 Sharpen Popup The Sharpen Popup has three slider scales that con trol how the sharpen filter is applied to the Canvas The slider controls the amount of sharpen The X slider controls the horizontal range of the sharpen 0 to 30 The Y slider co
428. morph at any time even after pressing the Lock Button Press the Move Button a second time or another Triangle Morph Popup button to ter minate the Move function Triangle Morph Add Keyframe Button You use morph keyframes mostly in animations but they can be useful in still morphs as well to create interim distortions between the source and the final distortion Revision A 4 483 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To add a keyframe to the Keyframe Slider e Move the pointer to the place on the slider where you want to add a keyframe e Press the Add Keyframe Button A keyframe marker appears in the Keyframe Slider above the pointer After adding a keyframe use the Move Button to move points on the Canvas to define it You can move points in any keyframe of the morph at any time The number of keyframes you can have is limited by the space along the slider If you try to add a key frame too close to an existing keyframe you are prompted Cannot be too close to another key frame Move the pointer and try again Triangle Morph Copy Keyframe Button To copy the control points from one keyframe to another In the slider position the pointer beneath the keyframe marker you want to copy from e Press the Copy Button You are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy to If the pointer is not beneath a keyframe marker you are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy from In this case mo
429. move around inside a world defined by the Canvas When the Lock Button is turned off the axis is free of the image and can be moved completely away from it This is Local Mode because the axis now defines local coordinates that the image refers to If you turn on the Lock Button again the image can for instance rotate around the new local position of the axis Itis generally better to perform Global moves first then Local ones Animation Environment 5 88 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Image Axis Button Above the Y window is an Image Axis button When the Lock button is off and the Image Axis button is in Image mode dragging the on screen handles moves the axis independent of the axis When the Image Axis button is in Axis mode dragging the on screen handles moves the axis inde pendent of the image When the Lock button is on dragging the on screen handles positions both the image and axis together Rotation Button Press on the word Rotation to enable Rotation Mode Press and drag on the wireframe s handles to rotate the image in X Y or Z Slant Button Press on the word Slant to enable Slant Mode Press and drag on the wireframe s handles to slant the image in X or Y Scale Button Press on the word Scale to enable Scale Mode Press and drag on the wireframe s handles to scale the image in X and or Y Dragging on a corner han dle scales the
430. mponent e g H S V A The diagrams although not labeled appear in this same order left to nght Color Correct Diagrams The Diagrams used with Color Correct change the distribution of the components in the masked area of the Canvas A straight diagonal ramp gives a one to one correlation for no correction If you alter the Diagram Curves the masked areas of the Canvas are corrected accordingly You can adjust the Diagram in three ways 1 Drag the Diagram Sliders the Revision A 4 299 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation arrow buttons adjacent to the Diagram or 2 Press and drag directly on the curve to modify it graphi cally or 3 Use the Curve Functions to smooth the curve posterize the curve or invert the curve You can use any or all of these methods at the same time When you have created a useful set of curves you can save it on disk for later recall back into the Dia grams Press the Red Reset Button to restore all the Diagrams to the diagonal straight default ramp Press the small gray Reset Buttons to reset only each set of sliders The best way to learn to use the Dia gram Curves with Color Correct is to experiment Simple Adding or Subtracting of a Component By dragging the left vertical slider down you reduce the amount of any given component By dragging it up you increase the amount of that component Paint Environment 4 300 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Cancel
431. mportant that it is set where you want it Make it a habit to check frequently to see that its setting is where you expect it If the setting is nearly at the top but not quite you ll get images that are not quite opaque which though perhaps unnoticeable now may cause problems later when you re use the element in different ways Cursor Button Press the Cursor Button to display the Cursor Popup which gives you a choice of what to display while you are painting The Cursor Popup Paint Cursor brush only cursor only both Figure 4 13 Cursor Popup Paint Environment 4 24 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Cursor Popup allows you to choose from three modes Brush Only Cursor Only and Both the default is Both When Brush Only is on as you paint only the brush is displayed When Cursor Only is on as you paint only the cursor is displayed in place of the brush When Both is on you see both the brush and the cursor displayed while you paint A displayed cursor is useful for painting with hard to see brushes such as very small or very transpar ent brushes or when painting in a color that is hard to see Cursor display works in all brush functions 4 2 2 Brush Mode Buttons The four brush modes are Solid Brush Air Brush Programmed Brush and User Brush They are accessed by the four buttons below the Current Brush Display Press any one of these buttons to activate it only one c
432. n Often it s good to use a short duration for a Storyboard unless you need to see a very detailed Storyboard For one thing a long Storyboard can use up a lot of disk space However extremely short durations say 5 to 10 frames can leave out large parts of the animation e Press the Storyboard Button to activate Story board mode e Press the corner button of the Storyboard Button The Record Control Popup appears Press the Fine Button to set the resolution Fine is normally the preferred resolution If you are prompted whether to change the resolution answer Yes e Press the Path Window to set a path and file name for the Storyboard to be recorded under The current elevator level is used e Press the Overwrite Button if it s not already high lighted This is the default mode for recording a new Storyboard or over writing an existing one Animation Environment 5 232 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press the OK Button to remove the Record Popup The popup disappears e Press the Run Button The Story Button must be high lighted The animation renders You can press the End key on the keyboard to abort Story board render To play back a Storyboard preview of an anima tion Press the corner button of the Storyboard Button to bring up the Storyboard Popup The popup appears e Press the Play 1 Button The Storyboard cues to the beginning and plays back once 5 10 1
433. n the masked area in the actor below is posterized accord ing to the Posterize Slider on the Mask Mode Popup The slider works identically to the Posterize Func tion on the Tools1 Panel in the Paint Environment NOTE This actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the Posterize layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Animation Environment 5 170 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mosaic Mode Press the Mosaic Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Mosaic Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is given a mosaic pattern according to the Mosaic Sliders on the Mask Mode Popup The sliders works identically to the Mosaic function on the Image Tools Panel in the Paint Environment NOTE This actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the Mosaic layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Sharpen Mode Press the Sharpen Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Sharpen Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is sharpened The function works identically to the Sharpen function on the Image Tools 1 Panel in the Paint Environ ment Blur Mode Press the Blur Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Blur Mode When turned on the masked area in the
434. n Environment CHYRON Corporation Nesting Write on Actors After creating a Write on actor make copies of it and change the size and mode of the brushes putting the smallest brush in the top most Write on actor Thus all the curve paths of the actors are identical but the different brushes can create stacked effects more complex than a single Write on actor You can create a Write on shadow by slightly offsetting the curve of a copied Write on actor and resetting its color and transparency appropriately Burning in a Write on Animation Make a copy of a Write on actor and change it to a Cycle actor page 5 46 Go into the Paint Environ ment and create a series of image files with say four or five steps representing a sparkling or glow ing effect After saving these to disk go back into Animation and assign them to the Cycle actor The resulting animation will move the sparkle or glow cycle along the same curve path as the Write on giving the effect that the Write on is burning itself in Animation Environment 5 136 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 7 7 Morph Actor Popup Name Loops 1 Begin 0 00 00 00 End 0 00 10 00 Morph Single Morph Between Reverse Overlay Temp Recall Canvas Swap Temp Canv Edit Triangles Edit Lines Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 36 Morph Actor Popup Use the Morph Actor Popup at the right of the Time line to choose whet
435. n Off button Thus the number of levels of Undo and whether undo is on or off is separately controllable for Canvas Temp Mask and Layers Revision A 3 57 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Configuration Environment 3 58 Revision A 4 Paint Environment 4 1 PAINT ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION The Paint Environment is one of Liberty s two main working environments Image creation is performed in the Paint Environment Paint includes several Panel Menus that appear in the four Panel Menu positions below the main picture display Canvas Revision A 4 1 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Liberty Paint Environment The initial display of the Liberty Paint Environment appears as shown in Figure 4 1 Paint Environment 4 2 Revision A Solid Air Program User browse undo Undo Redo BEEEEEEE TEREE a Cursor Y 8 255 255 255 Palette Buffers rept under add copy inv TRANSFER Recall File Save File Save File As Tiff tif File Manager Paste Normal Grab Transter Paint L Revision A PAINT on Canvas IMAGE TOOLS 1 Color Line Curve Noise Clouds Shape Adjust Correct Color Clip Map Poster Color MultTint H amp S Tint Sharp Filter Ripple Bump Tools Mask Macro YTR Disk Figure 4 1 Paint Environment Canvas Apply Use All Color Mask Reveal Rectangle Color rectangle Blur Fast Adjust Grow Fill Mask M
436. n a layer with the added actor double click in the layer Actor Type Popup The type of actor that is added is determined by the color coded Actor Type Button in the Add Actor Button To change the actor type displayed in the Actor Mode Button press on the Actor Type to call up the Actor Type Popup see the illustration Actor Revision A 5 51 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Type Popup on page 5 45 You can also cycle through the actor types by pressing repeatedly on either end of the color coded Actor Type Button The Add Actor Button can also be used to insert lay ers in the Timeline Instead of pressing inside the Timeline press on one of the Layer Number But tons Pressing on the top half of the Layer Number Button adds the new layer above the layer you pressed on Pressing on the lower half of the Layer Number Button adds the new layer below the layer you pressed on Delete Actor Button To delete an actor from the Timeline press the Delete Actor Button labeled Del and then press on the actor you want to delete in the Timeline If you want to delete several actors press the Repeat Prefix Button before pressing the Delete Actor Button Don t forget to turn Repeat off when you re finished or press the Main Actor Edit Button To delete an entire layer from the Timeline press the Delete Actor Button and then press on the layer number button of the layer you want to delete All the act
437. n image Uniform uses the same 8 colors for any image You can t use Dither while using Optimal however Chroma Key Button The Chroma Key tool provides quick blue screen or green screen chroma keys It uses the Canvas as a foreground image from which areas of blue or green screen are keyed out It uses the image in the current Temp as a background image which is composited under the keyed out areas of the canvas thus replac ing the keyed out blue or green screen areas of the Canvas Using the Chroma Key Popup you can do previews pick colors from the blue green screen and adjust a variety of controls Also you can choose a mask as a garbage matte to exclude selected areas from the key Pressing the main Chroma Key Button performs a chroma key on the Canvas image foreground based on the current settings in the Chroma Key Popup Revision A 4 349 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Chroma Key Popup keep colors clip colors Key Controls 2 4 Dominant color 323 blur Foreground R G 5 5 blur Key Dn 3x3 median 5x5 median cols gt shrink 8 color 8 3 1 Bh on keep H keep 5 keep V Edge alpha smooth strength tune be he use mask Figure 4 113 The Chroma Key Popup Revision A 4 351 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Press the corner button of the main Chroma Key Button to call up the Chroma Key Popup Pressing the OK Button performs
438. n is replaced by the new definition To define a key as a Liberty Menu Button Press the Define Button You are prompted to press a keyboard key for a menu button to be defined as Press a keyboard key You are prompted to press a menu button Press the menu button you want to define to the key Now when you press the keyboard key the defined menu button is activated Revision A 4 417 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The ESC is permanently defined as CANCEL The END key terminates the current operation in progress e g an animation render Many keyboard keys are predefined to function but tons You can undefine them with the Undefine Key or define another function over the function cur rently defined Undefine Button Press the Undef button to undefine or unbind a keyboard key A keyboard key can be redefined as a new function without being undefined This button is used if for some reason you do not want a particu lar key to perform any function For example if you press the spacebar often by accident you wouldn t want that defined as anything The pre defined keys are shown in the table on the following page Paint Environment 4 418 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Table 4 5 Pre Defined Macro Functions Table 4 5 Pre Defined Macro Functions Key Predefined Function Key Predefined Function Turn on off Mu
439. n names in thelist If the File Name Button is not high lighted press somewhere in the file list area and it will be highlighted Then type the desired filename The name you type appears in the File Name Button When you press the Enter key the file is recalled or saved The Back Button Press the Back Button to go back up the path one directory level This is the equivalent of a cd ee in Unix When you exit the File Popup the path that was last used is remembered When you bring up the File Popup again the same path is displayed If the maximum path length of 80 characters is ever exceeded an error message appears and you can choose another directory Revision A 4 215 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Full screen File Menu Recall 248303 248303 K 26 free Host local Disk hdd Dir Manual File Browse Alpha Sem Make Browse All Clear Canvas path full rep und add inv Select Comp Page EP s temp5 Figure 4 72 Full screen File Menu Revision A 4 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 12 1 File Manager Button Press the File Manager for a short cut to the Full screen File Menu where you can see the files as browsed images This is the same as pressing the Recall Button then the Full Button Comes up in Recall Mode by default For more details on the Full screen File Menu see page 4 213 There are two methods for reca
440. n selects the current mode to browse Browsers for each Undo image are displayed six images at a time Each image is numbered the number is at the upper left of the browse image A slider at the bottom of the Undo Popup is used to scroll through the available Undo images assuming there are more than six levels configured When the slider is all the way to the left the first six images are displayed When it is all the way to the right the last six images are displayed Moving the slider from left to right scrolls through the images In addi tion to the slider there are these six control buttons Top Displays the first six levels lt lt Scroll left by one level lt Scroll left by six levels gt Scroll right by six levels gt gt Scroll right by one level Bot Displays the last six levels Erase All erases all levels of undo for the current mode Canvas Temp Mask or Roto Layers Revision A 4 11 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Undo Redo Buttons on The Buffers Panel R u t a n v a S 8 255 a Palette Buffers Figure 4 6 Canvas and Mask Buffers On the Buffers Panel just to the left of the Canvas Temp and Mask browse images are small Undo and Redo Buttons labeled U and R respec tively Press the U and R Buttons next to the Canvas browse image to undo or redo respectively only the last Canvas operation or series of operations The Temp and Mask U and R b
441. n that they refer to animation files stored on disk but the con tents of Troupe Actors can be edited while the con tents of Reference Actors cannot be edited The Show Troupe Button affects Troupe Actors the same way as Reference Actors Animation Environment 5 48 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE For more information on Reference and Troupe actors refer to page 5 182 Cinefusion Actor Optional The Cinefusion Actor works with Ultimatte s Cine fusion software to allow you to create animated mattes Shapes Actor The Shapes Actor allows you to animate polygons as part of an animation Rotation and Scaling of Actors Larger Than the Screen You can pan rotate scale and slant actors created at a higher resolution than the display screen This means that they are larger than the screen in which you are rendering animation These larger actors can be Cel Actors Mask Actors or Switcher Actors A Temp or Mask Buffer large enough to hold the larger file is temporarily allocated to do this You ll need sufficient RAM to support this Revision A 5 49 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 4 2 Actor Edit Functions Show Troupe Compress Figure 5 11 Actor Edit Buttons To create an animation from scratch you start with the Actor Edit Functions You use the Actor Edit Menu at the left of the Timeline to put different types of actors into the Timeline to move or cop
442. n the palette colors picked repeatedly in the picture are copied into the next palette box in the palette and the next and the next until you press the Pick But ton again to turn it off Don t forget to turn off the Repeat prefix as well This is a fast way to create a multicolored palette from the picture If Multiple Color Mode is on the colors you pick on the Canvas are copied into the underlined colors until all underlined colors have been changed Revision A 4 39 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Pick Colors Popup Strip BG Real time Distance pixels inches mim Display Page 0 255 Average Figure 4 18 Pick Colors Popup The Pick Colors Popup Figure 4 18 has more options for Pick Color functions Press the corner button in the Pick Button to call up the Pick Popup The Strip Background Color Button Press the StripBG Button to turn it on off When on Pick Color ignores the transparent Background Color in the picture so that the pixel being Picked is treated as if itis 100 opaque regardless of the background color or opacity level Paint Environment 4 40 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Real time Mode Button Press the Real time Mode Button to turn it on off When on Pick operates continuously in real time while the pen is pressed down Each pixel crossed by the pen is Picked so that the currently underlined color changes in real time The Color
443. n use the keypad at the nght of the keyboard to manipulate the paste functions whether in manual or popup mode Refer to Table 5 1 Animation Environment 5 94 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE The Num Lock must be off for Keypad Control to function A HE HOHE Num Lock p 7 Home Pg Up Pg Dn EE ll Figure 5 20 Numeric Keypad Table 5 1 Numeric Keypad Keys Functions Key Function Turns off final preview of image Turns on final preview of image 7 Home Decreases Z position increases Z rotation decreases X Y scale 8 4N Increases Y position increases X rotation increases Y slant increases Y scale 9 page up Increases Z position decreases Y rotation increases X Y scale 4 lt Decreases X position increases Y rotation decreases X slant decreases X scale 5 Reset 65 gt Increases X position decreases Y rotation increases X slant increases X scale 1 END In place DIN Decreases Y position decreases X rotation decreases Y slant decreases Y scale 3 page dn Center Revision A 5 95 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Realtime Paste Distort Preview on Some Platforms On platforms that support realtime performance previews of Paste Distort Warp update smoothly and continuously as the Paste bounding box is changed using the Paste Popup the pen mouse con trols on the Canvas or k
444. nd numbers as the Switcher Actor between them This is not neces sary but simplifies the result The bottom Cel Actor contains the image dissolved from the top Cel Actor contains the image dissolved to e Select and edit the Cel Actors and assign image files to them with the File Button on the Actor Popup Animation Environment 5 154 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Press the Switcher Actor to select it Turn on the Switcher mode you want to use If you use File controlled Reveal assign it a file NOTE If there are multiple layers in an animation a Switcher actor dissolves from all layers below it to all layers above it To dissolve between two actors only use keyframes to control the transparency of the two actors see page 5 104 Switcher Modes Only one Switcher Mode can be active at a time The four Switcher Modes are File controlled Reveal Dissolve Fade and Composite File controlled Reveal Button Press to turn on When this Switcher Mode is on the dissolve between the two images is controlled by an image file from the disk The alpha of the image file determines the progressive steps of the dissolve For instance if the image file is a luminance mask of a face then the image would start dissolving in at the shadows and the lightest spots would be the last to disappear Because Liberty uses the alpha of the image masks are often used for their files For example if you want to
445. nd the Last Line numbers are interpolated independently of each other Save Recall Menu State Use the Save Recall State function in the Macro panel in the Paint Environment page 4 394 when you record or use a Macro for animation Before actually recording the Macro when you ve set the menus for the Macro press the Save State Button Then immediately after pressing Record Macro press the Recall State Button and choose the file name that you ve saved the menu state to This will ensure that each time you run the Macro it will automatically reset the menu states for the Macro NOTE You can see the text file of the Macro with numbered lines by pressing the Edit Macro Button in the Macro Panel in the Paint Environment See page 4 402 Revision A 5 153 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 7 9 Switcher Actor Popup Name Loops 1 Begin 0 00 00 00 End 0 00 10 00 File File controlled Reveal Composite Dissolve Reverse top bot Fade Fairing d Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Swit Figure 5 40 Switcher Actor Popup The Switcher actor accomplishes fades and dis solves between layers of the animation It can con tain an image file to use as a pattern for wipes or reveal effects To create a Switcher effect e Adda Switcher Actor to the Timeline Add one Cel Actor above and one Cel Actor below the Switcher Actor The Cel Actors should have the same begin e
446. ndicated directory is deleted if itis empty If the directory has any files in it a message appears Sorry no permission In this case go back into the Paint Environment and delete all the files in the directory before trying to delete the directory Rename Directory Button Press to rename a directory The file popup appears with the directory line high lighted Type in the name of the directory to be renamed and press Enter or press on the directory name in the file list Type the new name for the directory and press Enter The directory is re named Configuration Environment 3 34 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual User Setup Button Liberty has a file in its home directory for example usr people liberty that maintains the path to certain directories constantly being accessed by the pro gram These directories are Cels The disk copies of the canvas temp buff ers and mask buffers are located here Image Images animations and other files cre ated by the user are located here Plug ins Plug in filters are stored here Project Liberty saves the state of its menus and elevators here Undo Files for Undo are saved here The file liberty_paths is a text file that tells Liberty the location of these files This file is a text file that can be edited by a number of text editors to make changes e g JOT By editing this file the user can change the locations of these directories For exa
447. nding box of the current masked area on the Canvas Revision A 4 55 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Pixels Button When highlighted the values in the four grid size and offset windows represent numbers of pixels The Inches Button When highlighted the numeric windows represent size and offset values in inches The Millimeter Button When highlighted the numeric windows represent size and offset values in millimeters mm X Size Window The value in this window is the horizontal distance between grid lines Y Size Window The value in this window is the vertical distance between grid lines X Offset Window This value represents the horizontal offset or posi tioning of the first vertical line from the left edge of the canvas Y Offset Window This value represents the vertical offset or position of the first horizontal line from the bottom edge of the canvas Paint Environment 4 56 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Show Grid Button Press the Show Grid Button on the Grid Popup to display grid intersection as white dots These dots are not part of the picture and will not be saved to disk with the picture nor sent out to a video board for recording Press the Show Grid Button again to turn it off to make the grid invisible The Grid Division Buttons div2 and div4 Press one of these buttons to subdivide the current grid The Div2 Button subdiv
448. ners popup Press the OK button to close the Keyframe Timeline popup Revision A 5 219 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e 18 You can now preview the tracked animation or render it to a storyboard disk VTR or DDR 5 9 2 Motion Stabilization Motion Stabilization is a tool to stabilize a digitized sequence of images that have undesired movement such as film weave The procedure involves defining the reference area in a selected frame the Refer ence Frame of the sequence saving the reference area as a mask which is then called up by the multi ple cel actor The following steps illustrate the Motion Stabilization procedure Refer to Motion Stabilization on page 5 118 for more information Motion Stabilization Procedure e 1 Go to the Paint Environment and recall the Reference Frame from the sequence to the Canvas 2 Within the reference frame choose a rectangle of pixels which you want to remain stable throughout the sequence of frames Select the pixels using the Rectangle Mask function in the Mask Tools 1 panel and save the result to a Mask file NOTE A larger rectangle will achieve better results but will also take more processing time per frame This is because more pixels being corrected 3 Go to the Animation Environment and start with an empty animation timeline 4 Create a Cel actor for the sequence you want to stabilize As with any Cel actor
449. nfirm the deletion Press yes to confirm the deletion The Full screen Popup disappears and the indicated file is deleted Revision A 4 221 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Recall Delete Rename Copy Save As ImayeStor lt RLA Vertigo X shrinkurap AU sim N AU 288 lt BMP DIB INFINIT TX JPEG PDI Scitex SGE rgb Softim 4 ulli Figure 4 73 Action Popup Set up Cineon PICT Targa Prisms TIFF Revision A 4 223 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Rename When the Action Button displays RENAME press on a Browse picture or a filename in the list The indicated filename appears in the Prompt Window Type in the new name for the file and press the OK Button to confirm The old filename is replaced by the new one and the Full screen Popup disappears Move When the Action Button displays MOVE press on a Browse picture or filename in the list You are prompted Now select a target directory Type a directory name or designate a path to another host disk directory for the file to be moved to Copy When the Action Button displays COPY press on a filename in the list You are prompted Now select a target directory Type in a directory name you can also designate a path to another host disk direc tory for the file to be copied to Save As When the Action Button displays SAVE AS the file is saved like a norma
450. nformation how opaque the areas are If a pixel is 100 opaque it is 100 masked Ifa pixel is 50 opaque it is 50 masked NOTE When a pixel that is 50 opaque is alpha masked it is masked 50 Thus if that pixel is Cut into a Temp the pixel that goes into the Temp is 25 opaque Alpha Mask is a good way to eliminate low opacity noise that may appear in the background of an image masked from a video captured picture Press the Alpha Mask Button to create a mask from the alpha transparency of the image on the Canvas Background color is not masked If no mask is on then all elements on screen are alpha masked If there is a mask on screen only elements within the mask are Alpha masked Press the Invert Prefix Button then the Alpha Mask Button to invert the alpha data before making the mask though background color is still not masked Paint Environment 4 370 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Alpha Mask Popup Preview mask only Recall eT reset Reset Figure 4 118 Alpha Mask Popup Press the corner button of the Alpha Mask Button to call up the Alpha Mask Popup The Alpha Mask Popup contains the Diagram Curve The Diagram Curve re maps the current mask values according to its shape For example increasing the slope of the curve makes the mask more opaque For information on how to modify the Diagram Curve or on how the Diagram Curve operates with masks see page 4
451. ng function eliminate other areas outside the expected motion path The X Button defines the width of the expected area of motion and the Y button defines the height Also the procedure for recalling a corner list gener ated during 4 Point Motion Tracking into an anima tion actor has changed This is now done using the Corner List Button in the Edit Path Menu NOTE The larger the Size and or Move values are the longer the processing time for each frame in the sequence Point Corners Button When pressed this button alternates between the Point Mode and the Corner Mode When in Point mode only one row of Point editing windows X Y Size Move is available When in Corners mode all four rows of Point windows are enabled Revision A 5 211 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Output Button The Output Button defines the name of the file con taining the Point List or the Corner List These are unique file types with unique suffixes when saved on the disk A point file is listed as filename pt and a corner file is listed as filename co Press in the Output Window and the File Popup appears Type a filename for the Point List to be saved under if you are in Point Mode or for the Corner List to be saved under if you are in Corner Mode The files are ASCII files containing the coordinates of the tracked points and their Size and Move values A point file is recalled into the Curve Popup for
452. ng the Source or Target corner buttons To update the timecode of the current device press the gt source button or the lt target button The current timecode appears in the corresponding timecode window Each timecode window has a set of Bump buttons up and down arrows Press on these to bump the timecode setting by one frame up or down Press directly in a timecode window to enter a new number Separate the hours minutes seconds and frames with spaces 1 09 21 15 would be typed 1 9 2 15 Typing just 5 appears as 0 00 00 05 Timecode Elevator You can store four timecode positions in the four levels of the elevator To set the timecodes in the timecode elevator e Press on the elevator level you want to store a timecode setting in e 2 Press in a timecode window and enter a new timecode Revision A 4 429 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 Press different elevator level When you again press the previous level the timecode setting will still be there You can copy a timecode setting from one elevator level to another with the Copy Prefix Button to do this press the copy prefix button then select a new elevator level in the VTR panel This copies the timecodes in the current level to the new level Shuttle and Jog Sliders Press and drag these sliders to shuttle or jog the enabled highlighted source or target device Cue Button Cues the enabled d
453. nge the length of the edge Default is a one pixel edge The scale goes from 1 to 50 Style Button Press the Style Button to turn on off Style Mode Normally the center Edge Direction Button edges out in four directions When Style Mode is enabled diagonal edging occurs This results in a more rounded edge Edge Reset Button Press to reset the length of the edge to 1 pixel NOTE The Edge button increases the size of the mask The mask gets larger by the width of the edge each time the Edge button is used Paint Environment 4 340 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 16 2 4 16 3 4 16 4 4 16 5 4 16 6 Edge Detection Button Press to Run Edge Detection on the masked area The result is rendered to look somewhat like an architectural blueprint by applying white lines to the high contrast edges it finds in the picture You can use Luminance Mask to mask the lines cre ated by the Edge Detection function and put other colors into them or produce varying effects Once you have used Luminance Mask use Clamp Mask or Adjust Mask to get rid of noise in the resulting mask Tri Morph Button Press to display the Triangle Morph Menu to the left of the Canvas For more information see Line Morph on page 4 473 Line Morph Button When pressed the Line Morph Menu appears to the left of the canvas For information see page 4 473 Even Field Button Press to copy every even field line to ev
454. ngle Move the pen outwards without losing con tact with the tablet You are dragging the oppo site corner of the rectangle Lift the pen when the rectangle is the right size and shape e Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape Triangle Button To create an equilateral triangle Press the Triangle button e Press on the Canvas The place you press becomes the center of the triangle Move the pen outwards without losing con tact with the tablet The triangle grows as you pull away from the center Lift the pen when the triangle is the right size e Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape Paint Environment 4 264 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Star Button To create a star Press the Star button Press on the Canvas The place you press becomes the center of the star Move the pen outwards without losing con tact with the tablet The star grows as you pull away from the center Lift the pen when the star is the right size Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape Polygon Button To create an irregular polygon Press the Poly Button It lights up Press the Polygon Window until it displays Add Press repeatedly on the Canvas to add points Each point is connected to the previous point by a straight line forming a closed poly gon By pressing repeatedly on the Poly Button
455. ngu lar masked area on the Canvas This is often the quickest way to mask part of the picture Rectangle Mask has four modes that you access through the text window in the Rectangle Button Rectangle Square Gradated Rectangle and Gradated Square To mask a rectangle e Press the Rectangle Mask Button e Press down once on the Canvas to set the first corner of the rectangle Move the pen and press down again to set the opposite diagonal corner of the masked rect angle The rectangle is masked and high lighted As you drag the pen the rectangle is displayed by a moving elastic wireframe rectangle Press ing the button on the pen s barrel if present or Revision A 4 367 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation pressing the middle mouse button breaks contact with the wireframe rectangle and lets you start a new rectangle Mask as many rectangles as you like When there is an active mask on the Canvas turning on Rectangle Mask allows you to add rectangles to the existing mask NOTE When the mask is not active turning on rectangles erases the mask before allowing you to add rectangles Use the Invert Prefix with Rectangle Mask to un mask rectangles in the current mask Rectangle Mask Modes Rectangle Square Gradated Rectangle Gradated Square Figure 4 117 Rectangle Mask Popup Paint Environment 4 368 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 18 6 Press the midd
456. nimate a glass or water effect It works identically to the Ripple Button in the Image Tools1 Panel in the Paint Environment Depends on varia tions in alpha transparency in the Mask Actor s file NOTE The Ripple Actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the Ripple layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Filter Mode Press the Filter Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Filter Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is filtered through a user defined filter Pressing the Select Filter Button on the Mask Keyframe Popup calls up the Filter Popup to allow you to choose a filter Pressing OK on the Filter Popup assigns the current filter to the selected keyframe NOTE The Filter Actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the Filter layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Revision A 5 169 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation loops STIR End File lecal hd update r ipplepop Invert Inplace next Poster Sharpen Blur HSY Corr RGB Corr Correct Adjust Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 44 Mask Actor Popup 2 Posterize Mode Press the Poster Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Posterize Mode When turned o
457. nimation Environment 5 148 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Line Morph Test Button Press the Test button to go into Test Mode The line segments appear on the screen their position deter mined by the yellow pointer in the slider When you press on the Canvas the pixel you press jumps to its original source position and shows as a dot in the alternate color The distance of the displayed dot from the pressed pixel shows you the magnitude and direction of the distortion of that pixel Press the Test Button again or another Line Morph button to terminate Test Mode Line Morph OK Button Press to render the morphed distortion as deter mined by the position of the pointer in the Line Morph Slider Renders on top of the existing picture on the Canvas or under it if the Under Prefix is on The corner button renders at one fourth resolution Press the Erase OK Button to erase the Canvas before rendering The corner button renders at one fourth resolution Line Morph Keyframe Slider This slider is a timeline of the morph from begin ning toend You can move any keyframe in the slider by pressing on the blue keyframe marker and dragging it to a new position No keyframes appear in the slider until you press the Lock Button When you press on the slider the percent completion of the morph at that point is displayed in the Prompt Win dow When you press on one of the blue keyframe markers the number of that
458. nly one device is set up 5 Enter the target timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the record sequence 6 Press OK The popup disappears Recording will now use the indicated device s as target Revision A 5 23 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To set up a target hard disk path eL 2 3 4 5 6 EL On the VTR Panel press the Target Button tar The button is highlighted Press the Setup Button The Target Setup Popup appears Press on one of the Disk Buttons Disk 1 Disk 2 etc not the windows to set it up as a target The Disk Button you press becomes highlighted Press on the window in the highlighted Disk Button The File Popup appears Type in a filename to begin the target path There must be a number in the filename Usually it would be the starting number or 1 Enter the target timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the record sequence Use the Timecode Frame Button at the right to select which mode you want often you will use frame numbers for a disk path Press OK The Setup Popup disappears Recording will now use the indicated disk path The Disk Path File Type Buttons Every target disk path has a File Type Button at the right of its File Window Press this button to bring up a File Type Popup that allows you to choose from Liberty s wide range of file formats for the images to be save
459. nly used to remove noise from images It is especially good at removing random spots or specks of noise in an image for example freckles on a person s skin Of course the higher the value of the X and Y sliders the more noise is removed The Median filter can also be utilized as a special effect as it tends to give images a very smooth watery look Despeckle Filter The Despeckle Filter is similar to the Median filter in that it removes noise especially random spots or specks of noise from images It has the additional benefit of preserving detail and edges Revision A 4 323 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation in the image however While the median filter tends to blur out such details the despeckle filter pre serves them while at the same time removing noise This filter is noticeably slower than the Median fil ter since it does more computation for each pixel NOTE The six Blur modes can also be set within the Blur popup accessed through the corner button Blur Popup Fast Gaussian Min Cancel Median preview Despeckle active Figure 4 103 Blur Popup Press the corner button of Blur to call up the Blur Popup Blur Sliders There are two slider scales one for the amount of horizontal blur the other for the amount of vertical blur Moving the x slider causes both the x and y sliders to move together To set separate x and y values move the x slider f
460. not functions such as Copy Delete nor any of the Select functions such as Clear etc The File Path elevator is also disabled during FTP operation To specify the remote host name directory and other settings press the corner button of the FTP Button which calls up the FTP Popup Paint Environment 4 144 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual FTP Popup node path Imagestor database server remote system FIP set up user name guest password temp dir usr tmp Figure 4 52 The FTP Popup The FTP Popup has windows for entering set up information to log on to a remote system Node Enter the node name of the remote system such as infinit Path Enter the path of the directory on the remote system you wish to access such as C logos message NOTE For iNFiNiT and Imagestor systems the path name should be in all upper case characters ImageStor Database Server Node Optional If ImageStor thumbnails are stored in a directory other than the ImageStor files themselves entering the host node here will cause Liberty to query the database to find the thumbnails so they can be browsed You don t need to set this field if Imag eStor files and their thumbnails are al ways stored in the same directory or if the files you wish to browse recall are not Imagestor files Revision A 4 145 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation User Name Enter the
461. nother Imag eStore In this case the old copy will be deleted from that location The over write feature also works for dual record transfer of the still to a second location If dual record is enabled and the dual still already exists on the ImageStore the user will be prompted to over write or cancel Revision A 4 187 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Re label IMAGESTOR Create Directory Delete Directory Rename Directory User Setup Re label ImageStor pop up Directory Management Figure 4 64 Config Directory Management Illustration In the Configuration Environment on the Directory Panel you ll find the Re label IMAGESTOR But ton Press it to call up the Re label IMAGESTOR Popup Press in the 5 field labels on the popup to change the labels on the IMAGESTOR Save As popup to more meaningful names Paint Environment 4 188 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 11 5 iNFiNiT Setup Functions The INFINIT functions allow you to transfer images from Liberty to the Chyron iNFiNiT Max and Maxine character generator systems We will refer to all these systems as infinit in the following sections When you enable the INFINIT Button on the Save As Popup you can save files in the INFINIT s RGBA message format and optionally transfer files over the network via FTP to the INFINIT INFINIT Setup Menu INFINIT file Save As Setup remote system FIP set
462. nsfer Buffer The Transfer Buffer is a temporary storage buffer Temp used for holding images that are to be pasted back into the Canvas in various ways or just as a convenient place to store an image temporarily without saving it more permanently to disk There are six default levels of Temps in the Temp Elevator at the right of the Transfer Buffer and you can con figure as many Temps as you want You can cut the Canvas into a Temp or recall a picture directly from the disk into a Temp Cut and Paste func tions happen to and from a Temp The Transfer Buffer shows a thumbnail image of the contents of the currently active Temp The Transfer Buffer has its own blue Undo U and Redo R Buttons Revision A 4 83 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Temp Elevator The Temp Elevator is the vertical slider scale at the right of the Transfer Buffer marked by a stack of tick marks that show how many Temps are config ured the default is six Each tick represents a Temp that can store or recall a picture without needing a filename assigned to it as it would if it was being stored on disk Press on an elevator tick to display its contents in the Transfer Buffer making it the active elevator level Up to 24 tick marks can appear in the slider If more than 24 Temps are configured no tick marks appear in the slider but the slider func tions the same as if the tick marks were visible The ticks are color c
463. nt 4 262 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Move the pen outwards without losing con tact with the tablet The circle grows as you drag away from the center Lift the pen when the circle is the right size Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape Ellipse Button To create an ellipse Press the Ellipse Button Press on the Canvas The place you press becomes the center of the ellipse Move the pen outwards without losing con tact with the tablet The ellipse grows as you drag away from the center The more you move the pen horizontally the more the ellipse grows horizontally the more you move the pen verti cally the more the ellipse grows vertically Lift the pen when the ellipse is the right size and shape Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape Square Button To create a square Press the Square Button Press on the Canvas The place you press becomes the corner of the square Move the pen outwards without losing con tact with the tablet The square grows as you drag away from the corner Revision A 4 263 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Lift the pen when the square is the right size e Press the Fill Button or the Outline Button to render the shape Rectangle Button To create a rectangle e Press the Rectangle Button e Press on the Canvas The place you press becomes the corner of the recta
464. nt mask values according to the diagram completely ignor ing the Difference Ramp Clamp functions For information on how the Diagram Curve operates with masks see page 4 371 The popup also contains the Difference Mask Modes Revision A 4 395 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual nim sine E gne ar EN poster invert active Recall lt SSS M di Save clamp Reset mask only Figure 4 131 Difference Mask Popup Revision A 4 397 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Difference Ramp and Clamp Functions These functions allow you to apply ramping and clamping to the Difference Mask as defined by the Diagram Curve They consist of a slider scale and two mode buttons Ramp and Clamp When Clamp Mode is on all values above the slider are clamped to 255 and all other are clamped to 0 When Ramp Mode is on all the values above the slider are ramped and all others are clamped to 0 4 19 5 Field Mask Button Figure 4 132 Field Mask Modes Press the Field Mask Button to mask every other one pixel line on the Canvas In Odd Mode it masks the odd field in Even Mode it masks the even field The text window displays the current mode even or odd Press on the text window to bring up a popup for selecting even or odd mode Revision A 4 399 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 19 6 Paste Mask Button
465. nto the Font Elevator starting at the top level If the Recall Path for the font directory has changed the stored fonts will not be found and they will be replaced by the current fonts in the Font Elevator 4 20 2 International Character Panel Figure 4 141 International Character Panel While editing text press the left end of the light blue Text title bar at the top of the Text Panel to call up the International Character Panel To use an international character in your text press on the desired character in the International Panel just as if you were pressing a key on the keyboard The indicated character appears in the wireframe text display after the triangular cursor Press on the right end of the light blue title bar to return to the main Text Panel Revision A 4 411 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 20 3 Accent Panel Figure 4 142 Accent Panel While editing text press the right end of the light blue Text title bar at the top of the Text Panel to call up the Accent Panel To use an accent mark in your text press on one of the accent marks in the Accent Panel The indicated accent mark appears in the wireframe text display above the current character the one followed by the triangular cursor Press on the left end of the light blue title bar to return to the main Text Panel Accent Position Button Remarkably enough you use the Accent Position Button to position accents The
466. ntrast picture will look as if a gray film has been lifted from it when it is Normalized NOTE Contrast High Contrast and Normalize are mutually exclusive Paint Environment 4 294 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Adjust Diagram The Diagram used with Adjust changes the distribu tion of contrast brightness and gamma correction A straight diagonal ramp gives a one to one for no adjustment If you alter the curve the masked areas of the Canvas are adjusted according to the curve You can drag the sliders to see how they affect the curve then you can further adjust the curve in three ways 1 Drag the Diagram Sliders the arrow but tons adjacent to the Diagram or 2 Press and drag directly on the curve to modify it graphically or 3 Use the Curve Functions to smooth the curve pos terize the curve or invert the curve You can use any or all of these methods at the same time When you have created a useful curve you can save it on disk for later recall back into the Diagram Press the Red Reset Button to restore the diagonal straight default Diagram Press the small gray Reset Button to reset only the sliders The best way to learn to use the Diagram Curve with Adjust is to experiment Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the adjustment When the Active Button is on every change you make on the Diagram or Sliders will update the pre view OK Button and the Cancel
467. ntrols the vertical range of the sharpen 0 to 30 Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the sharpen When the Active Button is on every change you make on the Sliders updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the sharpen on the masked area Revision A 4 321 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE Sharpen previews skip the areas around the edge of the canvas to preview faster The higher the sharpen X and Y sliders the more pixels around the edge are skipped These pixels will be processed however during the actual sharpen operation started with OK or the main sharpen button 4 15 12 Blur Button The Blur Tool blurs the masked area of the canvas or the entire canvas if no mask is active There are six different Blur modes to choose from including Fast Gaussian Min Max Median and Despeckle In addition the amount of blur in the X and Y direc tions can be controlled using slider settings The main Blur button contains an inset window to view and set the Blur mode and a corner button to bring up a Blur popup which allows the user to set the sliders choose the blur mode preview the effect and apply the effect to the canvas Pressing the main blur button applies the blur effect to the canvas with the current settings Blur Mode Inset Button Press in the inset window in the Blur B
468. nts Revision Liberty Artist s Manual Add Speed Nail 5 103 Delete Speed Nail 5 104 Speed Curve Zoom Buttons In and Out 5 104 5 7 THE ACTOR POPUPS 52104 Actor Type Button 5 105 File Button tn en 5 105 Recall Cel Button eene 5 105 Edit Path BUttori rms 5 106 Edit Keyframe 5 106 Actor Browse Window see 5 106 5 7 1 Cel Actor Popup eee 20 106 Single Cel Actor 5 107 Multiple Cel Actor 5 108 Inserting a Sequence into the Multiple Cel Actor 5 108 Multiple Cel File Button A Unius Multiple Cel In and Out Number Windows deinde 5 116 Multiple Cel Num Button etes Oo dd Multiple Cel Insert Button ioi 5 117 Multiple Cel Delete Button S E Multiple Cel Duplicate Button Venue e aston 5 117 Multiple Cel Swing Button sese 5 118 Multiple Cel Once 5 118 5 7 2 Motion Stabilization 5 118 Stabilize
469. nts defining the beginning of the morph are again displayed on the Canvas e 18 Press the Move Button on the Line Morph Popup and press and drag the line segments on the Canvas moving rotating and scaling them to define the ending keyframe relative to the image on the Canvas Press on a line segment and drag it to move the line segment Press just beyond either end and drag to rotate and scale the line segment This sets the line segments defining the final keyframe of the morph For example if you were morphing one face into another you would move each segment to match the corresponding features on the second face In general slight movements of the line segments between keyframes cause subtle effects while larger modifications of the line segments cause wildly warped and twisted distortions In particular if any segments flip over or intersect in the interim or final keyframes the distorted picture will fold over on itself and may even Animation Environment 5 202 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 19 20 contain multiple distorted copies of the source image Press the Erase OK Button to see the distorted version of the starting image The Line Morph Popup distorts whatever is in the Temp Earlier you put the starting image in the Temp using Swap Temp Canvas It will be distorted into its new form This image will never actually appear on the screen but it gives a general idea of what is going to happen It
470. nts the luminance of the contents of the Temp Buffer into the Canvas while preserving the color of the Canvas image Only paints into image areas of the canvas Reveal Paint with Tint In Reveal Paint with Tint Mode the contents of the Temp Buffer is reveal painted into the Canvas while tinting it with the current color Is not constrained to painting into image areas of the Canvas Reveal Paint with Hue Tint Reveal Paint with Hue has the same effect as Reveal Paint with Tint but preserves white high lights which Tint would have filled with color Is not con strained to painting into image areas of the Canvas Pick Paint When Pick Paint Mode is on Liberty picks the color in the Temp Buffer at the current brush coordi nates and then paints with that color on the Canvas in the same place It is similar to Reveal Paint but it creates a blurred or painterly effect You can geta very large range of effects with Pick Paint using Programmed and User Brushes By making a Pick Paint Macro you can automate the process and per form it automatically on a number of pictures or frames of captured video see Macros page 4 413 Paste Paint Paste Paint uses the contents of the Temp Buffer as a brush Paste Paint allows you to use a brush element that is not limited in size or color like a normal paint brush It does not use the palette color but the col ors from the image in the Temp Buffer Paint Envir
471. nvas for a final composited image In the Layers Popup you can change the transpar ency of the layers change their relative priority in the stack perform Paint and Tools operations on them and distort them using Paste Distort all while the layers are being temporarily displayed on the Canvas These modifications become permanent only when you give the Composite command at which time the layers are composited onto the Can vas Fast Temps Depending on how much memory is on your hard ware platform you can configure some of your Temps as Fast Temps to be stored in RAM The default is one Fast Temp Only Fast Temps RAM Temps can be accessed as active layers as described above There must always be at least one Fast Temp To change the number of Fast Temps see page 3 29 in the Configuration Environment section Paint Environment 4 86 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The current Temp is always stored in RAM Thus when you click on a disk Temp one not in RAM making it the current Temp it becomes a RAM Temp and the previous current Temp becomes a disk Temp preserving the same number of Temps in RAM Unlimited Number of Layers The default number of Temps is six but you can configure as many Temps as you want depending on available space and any number of them can be Fast Temps depending on available RAM Temp Layers Resolution Liberty s Temp Buffers have variable resolution based on the siz
472. nvas goes to the Temp and the image from the Temp is recalled to the Canvas You can use the Morph Recall Canvas Button see above to recall an image file to Canvas swap it to the Temp and then recall another image file to Canvas This is a way to load two image files for a morph and quickly swap back and forth between them to compare them Animation Environment 5 138 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Morph Edit Triangles Button Figure 5 37 Triangle Morph Press to call up the Triangle Morph Popup The popup is the same as the Triangle Morph Popup in the Paint Environment A button by button descrip tion of the Triangle Morph Popup follows below Triangle Morph Add Points Button Press to add control points to the Canvas You must specify a bounding box first Press down once to set the first corner and then without dragging move the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner and press again Adding a point connects the new point to other points or to corners of the bounding box forming triangular sections creating a grid that controls the morph You can use the Move But ton while adding points to reposition points you have just added Unlike Line Morph you cannot Revision A 5 139 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation add or delete points after you press the Lock Button Press the Lock Button again or another Triangle Morph Popup button to terminate the add function Triangle Morph D
473. nvironment e 1 Go to the Animation Environment 2 Press the red corner box of the Delete Button to delete all layers currently in the animation timeline 3 Press in the Actor Type popup of the Add Actor button 4 Select the Filmstrip actor type Animation Environment 5 218 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Press the Add Actor button and click twice quickly on Layer 1 of the timeline to add the Filmstrip actor to the timeline Click on the File window and select the same file sequence filmstrip as selected in step 2 above Click on the In window and select the starting cel This should match the same number as in Step 3 above Click on the Out window This number should match the number entered in Step 4 above Add a second actor to the timeline on Layer 2 This can be a cel or filmstrip actor type Click on the File window and select the filename of the image s to be tracked and composited over the base actor Click on the Edit Path button to call up the Curve Popup The Curve Popup appears Click on the Corner List button to bring up a file popup Click on the desired Corners List file saved in Step 5 above Click in the Ref window and enter the file number of the first image tracked as entered in Step 3 above Press the Enabled button to highlight it thereby activating the Corners mode Press the OK button to close the Cor
474. o vided to offset low brightness The bottom or zero slider setting leaves the resulting brightness unchanged Raising the value of the slider increases brightness Revision A 5 157 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Greater Than Mode top gt bot When this mode is enabled the composite uses a pixel of the top layer if it is brighter than the corre sponding pixel in the bottom layer Otherwise the pixel from the bottom layer is used The slider does not affect brightness Less Than Mode top lt bot When this mode is enabled the composite uses a pixel of the top layer if it is less bright than the cor responding pixel in the bottom layer Otherwise the pixel from the bottom layer is used The slider does not affect brightness Switcher Dissolve Button Press to turn on When this mode is on layers above the Switcher Actor replace the layers below the Switcher Actor as rendering proceeds Switcher Fade Button Press to turn on When this mode is on the layers above the Switcher actor fade onto the layers below it the bottom layers are not replaced but can be seen through transparency in the image fading in Fade is used when the incoming image has transpar ency in it so you can see the image it is fading onto Switcher Reverse Button Press to turn on off Performs the current Switcher effect backwards Switcher Fairing Button Press to turn on off When this mode
475. o ani mate shapes in betweening Revision A 4 273 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 13 4 Paint Mode Button PAINT on Mask Paint Line Curve Shape Mode Fractal Normal Fold Hoise Jitter Pressure Figure 4 85 Paint Panel The Paint Mode Button allows you to choose the Paint Modes which work in conjunction with the three buttons in the top row Paint Line Draw Curve Draw and Shape Draw The paint Modes are Normal Paint Blur Paint Clone Paint Paste Paint Pick Paint Smear Paint Reveal Paint Reveal Paint with Color Reveal Paint with Hue Reveal Paint with Luminance Reveal Paint with Tint Reveal Paint with Hue Tint Warp Sharpen Emboss Burn Dodge Saturate De saturate and Duplicate Some of the Paint Modes can be used in conjunction with each other Paint Environment 4 274 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Paint Modes Window amp Popup Normal Smear Warp Blur Sharpen Emboss OK Burn Reveal Pick Dodge Rev Color Paste Saturate Rev Hue Clone Temp De Saturate Rey Lum Dup Temp Clone Rey Tint Duplicate Rev HueTint Temp Position Inplace Offset Figure 4 86 Paint Modes Popup The Paint Modes popup Figure 4 86 contains but tons to choose the current Paint Mode These modes are described in the paragraphs below If Paint is on when you bring the popup up you can select and try the various paint modes while the popup is up You can then
476. o delete a keyframe marker Position the yellow pointer beneath the blue key frame marker you want to delete e Press the Delete Keyframe Button The blue keyframe marker disappears from the slider Triangle Morph Reset Button Press twice quickly to reset the morph functions All keyframes including points connecting lines and the bounding box are deleted You are prompted Restarted MORPH Please specify bounding box To set the bounding box press once to set the first corner Then press again setting the diagonally opposite corner the same as Rectangle Mask If the bounding box is set incorrectly drag the corner points to new positions Triangle Morph Lock Button Initially the morph is unlocked meaning that you are editing the first keyframe and no other key frames exist Once the first keyframe is complete pressing lock creates the corresponding end key frame which you then edit to define the morph Press the Lock Button to lock control points after the first keyframe is set The beginning and ending blue keyframe markers appear on the Triangle Morph Slider with the yellow pointer at the last keyframe Now you can use the Move Button to modify the Animation Environment 5 142 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual points on the Canvas to define the final keyframe You can also add more keyframes After pressing Lock you can t add or delete points only move them You only have to press
477. o keep bright colors from keying Ultimatte Plug in Note that Liberty supports an Ultimatte Cinefusion plug in as part of the Animation Environment This plug in provides a far more advanced set of controls for blue and green screening than the Chroma Key ing tool described here Thus the user may prefer to purchase and use the plug in for the more difficult or intensive chroma keying jobs Plug in Button Liberty s Plug in function allows you to use filters created by third party software developers These filters may need to be licensed separately by con tacting your Chyron Liberty sales representative Pressing either end of the Plug in Window toggles through the list of available plug ins Pressing the corner button brings up the Plug in Popup Revision A 4 359 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation At the right end of the Plug in Popup is a toggle but ton lt gt that allows you to go through a list of available filters The name of the current filter appears in the bottom window of the stack just at the left The upper windows in that stack display avail able options if any for that specific filter Some of the sliders at the left of the popup may be activated for a filter allowing you to modify the filter s out put A slider that is active for any given filter dis plays a label for the function you can change Press the OK Button to render the filter on the Can vas or masked area
478. o set levels of quantization independently for each of the color channels When the Greyscale Button is on the RGB sliders are disabled Elevator Presets The popup has six presets for saving different con figurations of the settings for quantization Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the quantization When the Active Button is on every change you make on the popup updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the quantization on the masked area Hints About Dithering As an example make a multi colored gradation on the Canvas Bring up the Dither Popup and set the RGB sliders to 2 If Uniform is on but Dither and Noise are off the gradation looks banded since it s being represented with only 8 colors 2 levels of R 2 levels of G and 2 levels of B If you turn Noise on however it breaks up some of the banding since the values get randomized a bit If you turn Dither on the image looks good with no magnification If you zoom in you ll see that the image s original colors are being simulated by proper distribution of the 8 colors around the image You can use Dither and Noise at the same time If you use the Optimal Button in this same case Lib erty does a better job of choosing the specific 8 col Paint Environment 4 348 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual ors to use based on the give
479. o use a recording device as a source for the files of a Filmstrip actor Turn on the Timecode Button in the Playback Menu at the upper left of the Animation Envi ronment You can optionally use Frame Mode Timecode Button off if using a disk recorder as the source device e Press the Src VTR or Tar VTR Button to choose a configured device as the source device e Press in the window of the Filmstrip In Button and type the timecode number of the first file to be used You can separate numbers with spaces rather than colons For example typing 4 2 28 15 yields a timecode of 04 02 28 15 The number in the window of the Out Button is set automatically adding the Filmstrip Actor s duration to the In number Entering a new number in the window of the Out Button automatically resets the number in the In Button Out minus duration Revision A 5 125 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation You can increment the In Out numbers by pressing repeatedly on the top half of the In Out labels You can decrement the In Out numbers by pressing on the lower half of the In Out labels Filmstrip Speed Slider Mane Loops Begin End 38 HDisk SRC VTR TAR VTR Extract Files Iv 3H Speed 1 keufr Reset Edit Keufr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 29 Filmstrip Actor Popup Press and drag the Filmstrip Speed Slider to give a fixed playback speed to the input stream It allows you to specify a fractional number be
480. ode bar on the top similar to the Paint Panel In Canvas Mode the Image Tools apply to the Canvas In Temp Mode they apply to the current Temp the Temp must be an active layer Thus you can apply Image Tools and their previews to various individ ual layers on the Canvas by selecting a layer as the current layer then applying the function as desired Note that several Image Tools are not implemented for Temp Mode This is generally because such tools require both the current Temp and the Canvas The following Image Tools are not implemented in Temp Mode Reveal both Morph functions Motion Tracking and Dither These buttons are grayed out when Temp Mode is active In Mask Mode Image Tools are applied to the cur rent mask Paint Environment 4 292 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 15 Color Clip 4 15 1 Adjust Tint Filter Image Tools 1 Panel IMAGE TOOLS 1 Canvas Color Noise Apply Correct Clouds Color Map Reveal Poster Color Color Blur Fast HultTint Sharp H amp S Mosaic Ripple Bump Figure 4 91 Image Tools 1 Panel Image Tools 1 Adjust Button Press the Adjust Button to adjust contrast bright ness and gamma in the masked area of the Canvas according to the settings of the Adjust Popup Press the corner button of Adjust to call up the Adjust Popup Adjust Popup This popup allows you to adjust brightness contrast and gamma all at once using
481. oded to indicate which are disk Temps which are RAM Temps see below which is the current Temp the one displayed in the Trans fer Buffer window and which Temps are active as layers turned on in the Layers Popup see below Note that the current Temp plus any active layers are always in RAM Global Temp Elevator Figure 4 33 The Global Temp Elevator There is also a Global Temp Elevator in the lower right part of the Paint Environment just above the Magnification Buttons It is horizontal rather than vertical and the ticks are not color coded Pressing on a tick in the Global Temp Elevator turns that Temp on or off It s useful when the Buffers Panel is not visible because the Palette has replaced it Paint Environment 4 84 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Global Temp Elevator has two modes Press on the word Layers to toggle between them One shows only RAM Temps the other shows all con figured Temps Save to Temp Button the lt button Press to save the contents of the Canvas into the cur rent Temp Saves the entire Canvas whether or not a mask is active To save only the masked area to a Temp use the Cut Button in the Transfer Panel Menu below Swap with Temp Button the lt gt button Press to swap the contents of the Canvas with the contents of the current Temp The Canvas picture appears in the Temp Window and the contents of the Temp appear in the Canvas Swaps
482. of its size NOTE To be able to display the whole image file the canvas resolution must be configured to be the same as or larger than the image resolution An image file recalled into a smaller canvas size will be displayed in the available canvas resolution starting at the lower left corner See page 3 21 for more information on canvas resolutions Solid ir Program User browse undo Cursor Undo Redo Figure 4 3 Brush Panel Illustration Paint Environment 4 6 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Undo Functions browse undo Undo Redo Figure 4 4 Undo Redo Buttons Liberty provides a user configurable number of lev els of Undo for Canvas Temp Roto Layers and Mask controlled through the Undo Panel in the Configuration Environment The default number of Undo is 7 each for Canvas Temp Roto Layers and Mask The number of levels is limited only by disk space Once the number of levels has been set a level is saved each time the Canvas or Mask is changed Pressing the main Undo Button near the Brush Display one or more times undoes the last one or more operations to either the Canvas temp or the Mask depending on which was changed last Redo functions in a similar manner Roto Layers Undo is off by default and is used only while rotoscoping with layers There are individual Canvas Temp and Mask Undo Buttons in the Buffers Panel allowing you to specif ically undo the last Can
483. of the Canvas Paint Environment 4 360 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Plug in Popup Intensity Blend Figure 4 114 Plug in Popup Output Normal OK Edges Soft Cancel Preview active Canvas KPT_Edges Revision A 4 361 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 17 MASK TOOL FUNCTIONS The current mask tells the system what part of the Canvas you want to work on The mask tool func tions allow you to create and adjust masks You can mask the entire Canvas or an area as small as one pixel You can create masks of variable transpar ency You can combine different Mask functions at once With the Invert Prefix Button and a Mask function you can un mask areas The transparency of masks are controlled by the setting of the Trans parency Slider when the mask is created After a mask is created using a mask tool the mask becomes active on All currently masked areas are acted on by the next Canvas operation painting or pasting an image to canvas for example When the Canvas operation is complete the mask becomes inactive off Mask Buffer in the Buffers Panel Palette Buffers Figure 4 115 Mask Buffer in the Buffers Panel At any time there can be one mask on the Canvas which includes all the masked areas The current mask is displayed in a small thumb nail black and white picture in the Mask Buffer in the Buffers Revision A 4 363 Paint Environment
484. of the mask using the designated number of pixel Shrinks the mask when making the ring To adjust the current mask Press the corner button of the Adjust Mask Button to bring up the popup e Press on one of the mode buttons to make it active and set the number of pixels with the slider e Press the Preview button to preview the effect of the Adjust before it becomes permanent e Press the OK Button The adjustment to the mask is completed Revision A 4 373 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Adjust Mask Popup Gaussian Blu Contout In Cont Grow Shrink Preview Me than Reset Figure 4 120 Adjust Mask Popup The Adjust Mask Popup has seven mode buttons and a vertical slider that controls the number of pix els used for the adjustment The Preview Button allows you to see the mask adjustment before it is made permanent The Active button leaves the pre view mode activated continuously The Mask Only Button displays the mask as an opaque white on black silhouette The Reset button resets the slider to a default value of 4 Paint Environment 4 374 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mask Channels Button Figure 4 121 Mask Channel Modes The Mask Channels Button uses the Diagram Curve to crease a mask from one of the following channels of the Canvas Lum Create Diagram from luma component only Create Diagram from the red component only Create Diagra
485. of which can hold a file path The current elevator box keeps the current path until you change it With the Copy Pre fix you can copy a path into a different elevator box saving it for later quick access Recall Corner Button Press the corner button of Recall when you want to use special settings to modify how pictures are recalled The Recall File Popup appears When you change a recall setting to other than nor mal default the Recall Corner Button is high lighted purple to indicate that a special recall setting is active When you change a recall setting it stays changed until you go back and reset it or change it again Revision A 4 159 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Recall File Popup Orientation 186 278 Ignore Palette Brightness 255 ES Alpha Lancet Use Ignore Invert File Recall Settings Reset Figure 4 57 Recall File Popup The Ignore Palette Button Press the Ignore Palette Button to turn it on off When on the default it causes pictures to be recalled to the Canvas without changing the current palette colors When off it causes pictures to be recalled along with the colors with which they were saved Rescale and Orientation On Buttons Press one of these On Buttons to activate either Res caling or Orientation includes Mirror during the recall operation Only one function can be on ata time Pressing the Rescale On Bu
486. om its original position cut to the Temp Buffer and its preview appears at the end of your pen or mouse for positioning on the Canvas The type of preview displayed wireframe coarse final final alpha etc is determined by the current setting in the Paste Popup e Press down to paste the element into its new position on the Canvas Move with the Repeat Prefix Stays in Paste Mode so you can repeatedly paste the image until you press Move again to turn it off Move with the Add Prefix When the image is cut from the canvas it is added on top of the contents of the Temp Buffer Then you can manually position and paste the composited contents of the Temp Buffer into the Canvas Paint Environment 4 108 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Move with the Add and Copy Prefixes Same as Move with Add but without manual posi tioning Erases the masked area adds it on top of the Temp Buffer then pastes the composited con tents of the Temp Buffer onto the Canvas with all elements in their original positions This has the effect of pasting the masked element back down into its original position with the contents of the Temp Buffer under it 4 9 3 Paste Button Paste takes the contents of the selected Temp Buffer and pastes it onto the Canvas This function is the counterpart to Cut Figure 4 40 Paste Modes Liberty has six paste modes These are Normal e Color Shadow Extrude
487. on 5 56 Contig OK Button 3 45 Config Environment 3 1 customizing menu colors 3 5 functions list of 3 1 Menu Color Configuration Palette elevator 3 5 Read Button 3 7 Reset Button 3 6 Set Button 3 7 panel menus list of 3 2 CONFIGURATION ENVIRONMENT 3 1 Configuring VTRs 3 37 Copy Actor Button 5 54 Copy Prefix Button 4 62 copying colors 4 52 copying files 4 225 multiple files 4 226 Index 6 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual copying keyframes 5 74 5 81 Create Directory Button 3 33 Cue Button 4 427 Current Step Button 4 422 Cursor Mode Buttons 4 24 cursor styles 3 53 Cursor Panel Menu 3 53 Curve Draw Button 4 242 Curve elevator 4 249 Curve Gap Popup 4 245 Curve Popup 4 247 closing curve 4 253 color of curve 4 255 editing points 4 251 rotating curves 4 257 center axis 4 256 saving curves 4 255 scaling curves 4 257 selecting points 4 249 curve resolution 4 260 customizing menu colors 1 2 3 5 Cut Button 4 107 Cycle Actor 5 46 5 119 D dating files 4 219 4 233 Default 3 6 default menu colors 3 6 Revision A Index 7 CHYRON Corporation Default Scheme s Button 3 6 Define Key Button 4 416 Delay Macro Button 4 415 Delete Actor Button 5 52 Delete Directory Button 3 33 Delete Keyframe Button 5 71 Delete Macro Button 4 415 Delete Rest Button 4 425 Delete Step Button 4 423 Delete User Button 3 12 deleting files 4 221 multiple files 4 226 desktop publishing 4 47 Diag
488. on Playback Menu 5 11 Animation Storyboard Button 5 231 Animation Timeline 5 5 5 38 animation layers 5 5 5 6 compressing 5 56 deleting all 5 52 layers copying 5 55 inserting 5 52 moving 5 54 turning off 5 53 navigating 5 9 animations actors 5 44 adding on to 5 38 checking 5 36 Index 2 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual deleting 5 52 length of 5 37 loops 5 39 recalling and saving 5 34 recording 5 43 in and out times 5 39 one frame of 5 41 partially 5 41 anti aliasing 4 16 4 138 varying anti aliasing of paint brushes 4 26 Apply Button 4 309 Apply Color Button to a grid 4 58 Artstar Button Popup 4 456 aspect ratio automatic change 4 161 Auto composite Popup 4 439 Axis Lock Button 4 132 B Back Button 4 215 background color 4 34 Background Color Button 4 53 Bevel Mode 3 31 Bias Button Curve Popup 4 258 Bind Macro Button 4 416 Bind Macro File Button 4 416 Blend Colors Button 4 37 blending colors 4 35 Blur Button 4 324 blurring masks 4 372 Revision A Index 3 CHYRON Corporation Brightness Slider 4 294 browsing files 4 227 filmstrips 4 234 foreign file formats 4 230 Brush Display 4 20 Brush Size Slider 4 22 Buffers Panel 4 74 Bump Map Button 4 335 burning in a Write on Actor 5 136 C Calculator 4 67 buttons list of 4 71 second hidden panel 4 68 calculator 1 5 turning off 1 5 Cancel Edit Button 4 425 Canvas 4 5 4 104 Canvas Buffer 4 104 Canvas But
489. ond time The bounding box should cover the area you want to distort If you make a mistake you can drag the corners into better positions but you must do it before you add any points Revision A 5 197 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press the Add Button on the Triangle Morph Popup to add control points on the Canvas to define the beginning of the morph For exam ple if morphing a dog into a snake add points to define the outline of the dog e Press the Lock Button on the Triangle Morph Popup when you ve finished adding points This locks down the points defining the first morph keyframe The yellow pointer jumps to the right end of the horizontal Triangle Morph Slider automatically adding an ending keyframe to the morph e Press the Edit Triangles Button to exit the Triangle Morph Popup The Triangle Morph Popup disappears e Press the Swap Temp Canvas to put the start ing image into the Temp Whatever was in the Temp will appear on the screen Press the top Cel Actor to select it This con tains the image you are morphing to e Press the Recall Cel Button in the Cel Actor Popup The image you are morphing to is recalled to the Canvas for you to refer to while setting the ending of the morph e Press the Morph Actor on the Timeline to select it and press the Edit Triangles Button The Triangle Morph Popup appears again The points defining the beginning of the morph are again displayed on the
490. one Diagram Curve You can adjust these values in two ways 1 With the Diagram and 2 With the Sliders Altering the Sliders also alters the Diagram Sliders There are three sliders each with a mode button beneath If the mode button is on then the slider s setting is reflected on the Diagram Curve If the mode button is off the slider has no effect Revision A 4 293 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Contrast Slider Press and drag the Contrast Slider to increase and decrease contrast The Contrast Slider ranges from 63 at the bottom to 63 at the top Brightness Slider Press and drag the Brightness Slider to increase and decrease brightness The Brightness Slider ranges from 100 at the bottom to 200 at the top Gamma Slider The Gamma Slider ranges from 50 to 50 A positive percentage darkens the dark values a nega tive percentage brightens the light values Experiment with the Adjust Popup to understand what its effects are High Contrast Mode High Contrast Mode has the same effect as Contrast Mode with the slider at the top Normalize Mode Adjusts the contrast of the image so that the full range of brightness values are utilized When this mode is selected a momentary pause may occur while the software scans the image to determine its brightness range Normalize mode stretches the lightest and darkest values in the selected area to true white and true black a low co
491. onment 4 280 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE The Paint Gap Popup see page 4 257 uses the size of the current brush to calculate where to put down brush images not the size of the element in the Temp Buffer It is recommended if you are not using NoFill Mode to make the current brush about the same size as whatever element you are Paste Painting with Experiment with different brush sizes and Paint Gap Modes Clone Temp Paint Clone Temp Mode works just like Clone Paint except that it uses the image in the current Temp rather than the Canvas as a source for painting Duplicate Temp Paint 4 13 5 Duplicate Temp Mode works just like Duplicate Paint except that it uses the image in the current Temp rather than the Canvas as a source for paint ing Paint On Button The Paint On Button allows you to choose between Paint On Canvas Mode which is the default for painting color onto the Canvas or Paint On Mask Mode which uses the current brush and transpar ency to paint on the mask layer of the other mask functions are located on the Mask Panel the rightmost of the four Panel Menu positions by default For more detail about masks and masking see page 4 363 the Mask Panels Revision A 4 281 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Fractal Paint Button Fractal painting moves the brush along a jagged path for painting rough natural looking strokes Fractal painting
492. opup 5779 Keyframe Attribute 5 80 Keyframe Time Window ee 5 81 Auto Smooth 5 81 Warp Attribute Button eese 5 83 Texture Attribute Button sese 5 83 Keyframe Distort 5 85 Sub Pixel Positioning eene 5 86 Perspective 5 87 Position 5 88 Axis Lock Button Global and Local 5 88 Rotation Button ineo te eed 5 89 Slant Button ee nea niles 5 89 Scale Button irit riti eee P heme edet Res 5 89 Scale Lock Button sees 5 90 Eye repe ree ee eere egets 5 90 Reset Button 5 91 ente dede 5 91 Distort 0 91 ABOUT eee 5 92 Realtime Paste Distort Preview on Some Platforms 5 96 5 6 Speed Curve 6 097 Speed Nails sese 5 101 Speed Curve 5 103 Table of Conte
493. or instance if Canvas Temp or Mask Mode is displayed in the colored Revision A 4 207 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation bar filenames of pictures are displayed in the file list If Font Mode is displayed in the colored bar only filenames of fonts are displayed in the file list The File Mode Button controls how a file is saved recalled or what kind of file is saved recalled Pressing repeatedly on either end of the File Mode Button steps through the modes Kinds of files that you can save recall include Canvas Temp Mask Palette Layers Brushes Text Macro Shapes Curves Animation if the Animation option for Lib erty is enabled Morph Movie Menu State Dia gram Filter Point Font and Corner Pressing directly on the mode name itself calls up a the File Mode Popup that lists all the modes in their color coded buttons Note that some file modes can only be accessed from certain menus For example Text files can only be recalled and saved from the Text Panel sec tion 4 20 When not recalling and saving from the Text panel the Text mode button will normally be disabled grayed out Paint Environment 4 208 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual File Mode Popup Canvas Temp gt Mask gt Palette Layers Movie Menu State Diagram Filter Point Curves Corner Animation Font Figure 4 70 File Mode Popup To change the File Mode when the File
494. ors for instance Luminance shows a Diagram Curve ramped from black to white and Hue shows a Dia gram Curve ramped through the primary colors S Limits amp V Limits Sliders The S limits and V limits sliders are utilized when the Mask Channels tool is in Hue mode creating a mask based on the Hue of the source image The sliders are disabled when the Mask Channels tool is not in Hue mode The V slider allows the user to further tune the mask by prevent ing pixels with very light or very dark colors from being masked Increasing the lower marker on the V slider which defaults to 0 prevents all pixels with brightness lower than the marker from being masked This is especially useful since dark pixels don t have a well defined hue and are often masked Paint Environment 4 376 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual when you don t want them to be Raising the lower marker of the V slider prevents this Lowering the upper V slider which defaults to 255 prevents all pixels with brightness higher than the marker from being masked Thus the upper and lower markers on the V slider work independently The S slider works in a similar manner to the V slider but using Saturation rather than Brightness Channels Clamp Button Clamping allows you to precisely control what val ues of the channel you apply mask to For instance if you want to separate a camera grabbed black logo from its white background y
495. ors in the layer are deleted and it is removed from the Timeline Delete Timeline Button Corner of Del Button To delete all the actors in the Timeline press the cor ner button in the Delete Actor Button popup appears asking you to confirm the deletion of the entire animation Press YES to confirm the deletion Press NO to make no modification to the animation Press CANCEL to abort the deletion NO and CANCEL have the same effect Animation Environment 5 52 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Off Button The Off Button allows you to turn an actor off with out deleting it so it doesn t appear when anima tion is played back This is useful when you want to preview only certain actors in an animation Press the Off Button and then press on the actor in the Timeline that you want to turn off A red line appears along the actor to show that it is turned off The procedure to turn the actor back on again is exactly the same To turn off an entire layer turn off all the actors in a layer at once press the Off button and then press on the layer number button the actors are turned off Or if the actors in the layer are already off they are turned on again Off Timeline Button Corner of Off Button Turns off all actors on the timeline When used with the invert prefix turns on all actors on the timeline Move Actor Button To move an actor to another place on the Time line
496. osaic Layers 1 Canvas Magnify Full MASK TOOLS 1 Liberty Artist s Manual Canvas Erase Mask Invert Circle Alpha Channel Luminance Match RGB CanvDrag Out Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Here are some of the main features of the Paint Environment Environment Buttons Figure 4 2 Environment Buttons These four buttons are in the lower left corner of the screen They are from left to right The Paint Environment Button The Animation Environment Button The Configure Environment Button gt Uv The Login Environment Button Pressing any Environment Button calls up that envi ronment These environment buttons appear in every environment except Login which has similar but larger buttons for choosing environments The Animation Environment is not available to Liberty Paint users Canvas The Canvas is the primary working image area Pic tures can also be held and manipulated in Tempo rary Buffers Temps but you do most of your work on the Canvas When you recall a picture from the disk normally it appears on the Canvas When you recall a picture larger than the maximum displayable area on the Canvas it is partially displayed and you Revision A 4 5 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation can scroll around on it Pressing the Full Button at the bottom right of the screen displays the entire pic ture on the Canvas regardless
497. ose on the Paste Distort Popup Position 360 Rotation 0 0 Scale 1 00 1 00 X mirror mirror reset Figure 4 83 Transform Shape Popup Shape Gradation Button Fills the current shape with a gradated mask similar to Gradated Rectangle Mask see page 4 367 The Direction Button controls the direction of the Grada tion see page 4 59 The corner button calls up the Diagram which you can use to distribute the grada tion in non linear ways Note that the Gradation but ton only works when using shapes to create masks i e when the Paint panel is set to paint on Mask Shape Fill Button Renders the current shape as a solid in the current color transparency and size Revision A 4 267 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Shape Outline Button Draws an outline of the current shape using the cur rent brush in the current color and transparency Shapes Popup Cancel Button Closes the Shapes Popup Menu Shape Palette Button Brings up the Color Palette and enables you to change the palette colors underlining the one you want the current shape to render in Press the OK Button to return to the Shapes Popup Recall Shape and Save Shape Buttons Used to recall and save shape files This does not save or recall the rendered picture of the shape but the wireframe only as well as any settings that have been changed from the defaults Shape Elevator Creating a
498. other Line Morph Popup button to terminate the Move function Line Morph Color Button Press to switch the color of the line segments Use this when it s difficult to see the line segments on the Canvas background The default is red for the line segments which become yellow when they are selected Press the Color Button to reverse this Revision A 5 145 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Line Morph Tune Button Press to call up the Tune Popup In general the fur ther away a line segment is from a pixel the less effect it has on that pixel Tune allows you to adjust three settings with sliders Blend Distance and Length The best way to understand these settings is to experiment It s sometimes difficult to predict what the exact effect will be for a certain combina tion of settings The Blend Slider The Blend Slider controls the smoothness of the morph or the amount of blending between line seg ments The Distance Slider The Distance Slider controls how the effect of a line segment diminishes with distance The Length Slider The Length Slider if non zero makes longer line segments have a greater effect on the morph Press the Cancel Button on the Tune Popup to can cel any changes you ve made to the Tune settings Press the Reset Button to reset the Tune settings to their defaults Line Morph Select Button Press to select line segments Press near a line seg
499. ou to control how a shape s points animate between keyframes For example when animating between two shapes with the same number of points Liberty makes its best guess as to how the points should correspond The Link Keyframe Button allows you to adjust which points in the first shape correspond to which points in the second shape Internally each shape s points have a certain order and each shape has a start point When you choose a keyframe using the slider or the lt gt Buttons on the Inbetween Timeline the start point is red The rest of the points in the shape are ordered in either a clockwise or counter clockwise direction The sec Revision A 5 187 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation ond point one point either clockwise or counter clockwise from the start point is yellow which helps you visualize how the points are ordered When a shape animates to another shape the points are interpolated based on their order The start point of the first shape animates to the start point of the second shape while the second point of the first shape animates to the second point of the second shape and so on for all the points Press the arrow buttons lt gt on either end of the Link Keyframe Button to cycle the order of the points in the current shape You can tell which way they re cycling by watching how the red start point moves You can also change the order to either clockwise or counter cloc
500. ou use the luminance channel and clamp all the white and light gray val ues found in the background to 100 and create the mask only from those values Once the mask is cre ated Erase will remove all of these lighter areas leaving only the darker grays and black See page 4 14 for more information about the Erase button Revision A 4 377 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual ramp sine smooth Cancel poster invert ei Previeu active L 8 mask only c lamp 5 limits limits Reset Figure 4 122 Mask Channels Popup Revision A 4 379 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The Clamp Button is used to clamp the chosen val ues in the Diagram Curve to 100 or zero leaving nothing in between Press on values in the Canvas to choose them the Pick Colors Button is automati cally activated by the Mask Channels Popup then clamp them to 0 or 100 on the Diagram Curve To clamp chosen values from the Canvas 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press the corner button of the Mask Channels Button The Mask Channels Popup appears Press on the channel button you want to use Luminance Red Green etc Press the Ramp Button on the Diagram Curve to reset the curve if necessary Press on the areas of the Canvas that you want to mask The corresponding areas of the Diagram Curve are marked Press the Clamp Button The marked areas on the Diagram Curve are cl
501. ow pointer After adding a keyframe use the Move Button to move points on the Canvas to define it You can move points in any key frame of the morph at any time The number of keyframes you can have is limited by the space along the slider If you try to add a key frame too close to an existing keyframe you are prompted Cannot be too close to another key frame Move the yellow pointer and try again Triangle Morph Copy Keyframe Button To copy the control points from one keyframe to another In the slider position the yellow pointer beneath the blue keyframe marker you want to copy from e Press the Copy Button You are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy to If the yellow pointer is not beneath a keyframe you are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy from Move the yellow pointer under an existing blue keyframe marker and press the Copy Button again e Press below another blue keyframe marker on the Triangle Morph Slider The data from the first keyframe is copied into the indicated key frame NOTE Do not press directly on the blue keyframe marker itself but under it on the same line as the yellow pointer A successful copy prompts Keyframe copied successfully If you try to Revision A 5 141 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation press directly on a blue keyframe marker you are prompted Cannot copy to source keyframe Triangle Morph Delete Keyframe Button T
502. owing comparisons were done by rendering and playing back the same animation in all of the configurations listed below The animation consists of 13 frames of numbers from 0 to 12 The frames have a high number of repeating pixels Image resolution 720 x 540 FULL Format Size K Playback Rate FPS Uncompressed 20218192 13 5 MVC1 1997648 11 8 RLE 904530 6 9 MVC2 508867 10 6 JPEG 247936 1 5 Animation Environment 5 248 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Image resolution 360 x 270 FINE 1 2 resolution format size k playback rate FPS at Full Res at Native Res Uncompressed 5054992 11 0 39 0 MVC1 528884 11 0 35 0 RLE 233420 10 0 24 0 MVC2 151027 11 0 38 0 JPEG 95484 4 0 5 0 Image resolution 240 x 180 NORMAL 1 3 resolution format size k playback rate FPS at Full Res at Native Res Uncompressed 2246992 24 0 60 0 MVC1 239908 23 0 58 0 RLE 107075 20 0 43 0 MVC2 68681 24 0 63 0 JPEG 58680 9 0 12 0 Revision A 5 249 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Image resolution 180 x 135 COARSE 1 4 resolution format size k playback rate FPS at Full Res at Native Res Uncompressed 1264192 31 0 84 0 MVC1 138904 37 0 78 0 RLE 60949 33 0 61 0 MVC2 45823 38 0 82 0 JPEG 42688 15 0 19 0 Animation Environment 5 250 Revis
503. ows all combinations of all kinds of Mask Actors to always work correctly For example two stacked Mask Actors both set at 50 transparency will yield a result of 25 50 times 50 You can use Liberty and non Liberty RGB and RGBA files in Mask Actors When you use a non Liberty file as a Mask the alpha channel is used When you use an RGB file as a Mask the luminance is used Rotation and Scaling of Actors Larger Than the Screen You can pan rotate scale and slant actors created at a higher resolution than the display screen This means that they are larger than the screen you are rendering animation in These larger actors include Cel Actors Mask Actors and Switcher Actors A Temp or Mask Buffer large enough to hold the larger file is temporarily allocated to do this You ll need sufficient RAM to support this Masking of panning backgrounds will work even if In place is on Revision A 5 181 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 7 12 Reference amp Troupe Actor Popups The Actor Popups for these two Actor Types are identical consisting of only a File Button The Edit Path and Edit Keyframe Buttons work the same as with any other actor but the Recall Cel Button and the Browse Window do not work with these actors as they have no image file assigned to them Both types perform the same function By assigning either type an animation file that has been stored on disk you include that entire ani
504. owse Mode In Browse Mode picture files are displayed as small pictures The small thumb nail pictures are auto matically created when pictures are saved If pic tures are imported from outside Liberty they will usually not have Browse files associated with them and thus cannot be Browsed until the browse images Paint Environment 4 226 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual are created The Make Browse Button is used for this The Alpha Button activates a Browse Mode in which only the Alpha or transparency of each pic ture is displayed in white on black Browse Button Press the Browse Button to turn it on off When on Liberty displays thumb nail pictures of the files along with their color bullets and filenames Press ing on a Browse picture causes its file to be selected recalled saved etc just like pressing on its file name Often the reason for displaying the Full Screen File Menu is to Browse pictures If you leave the Browse Button on it will be on the next time you call up the Full Screen File Menu Browse Off Listings When the Browse Button is turned off Liberty dis plays the contents of the current directory as text descriptions of the files There are four modes of text display which you can access by pressing the comer button of the Browse Button bringing up the Browse Off Popup Revision A 4 227 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Browse Off Popup
505. p act on selected points The Select Points functions are in the vertical row of buttons at the right of the Curve Elevator They provide tools to select multiple points so you can edit points as a group Revision A 4 249 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Select Points Button To select curve points e Press the Select button labeled Selct to turn Select Points Mode on e Press on or near each curve point on the Can vas you want to select Each selected point turns red Pressing on an already selected point de selects it Clear Select Points Button Press the Clear button to deselect all points Complement Select Points Button Press the Compl button to select all unselected points and deselect all selected points When no points are selected press it to select all points Previous Select Points Button When a selection of points has been turned off press the Prev button to re select the last selection Shift Select Points Button This button shifts the selected points Press the left side of the button to shift backwards or press the right side of the button to shift forwards NOTE The Xform Button below the Shift Select Points Button is used to move the rotational axis of the points and is discussed below Paint Environment 4 250 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Add Points Button To add curve points on the Canvas e Press the Add Button The c
506. paces you can use to modify colors in The default is Hue Satura tion and Value HSV Paint Environment 4 46 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Color Sliders Space Control To change the Color Slider Scales to operate in Hue Saturation and Value HSV Red Green Blue RGB Cyan Magenta Yellow Black CMYK or Hue Saturation Luminance HSL Color Space press on the green Color Space Button at the bottom of the Current Color Button When the Color Space Popup appears press on the Color Space you want to work in HSV Color Space The Hue slider scale at the left controls the hue of the current color s The Saturation slider scale the middle of the three controls the saturation or intensity of the current color s The top of the scale is 100 saturation and the bottom is 0 saturation The closer to the bot tom the more pastel the color is The Saturation scale overrides Hue and is overridden by Value The Value scale the rightmost of the three controls the brightness of the current color s The top of the scale is 100 brightness and the bottom is 0 bright ness or black Value overrides both Hue and Satura tion RGB Color Space Control RGB represents color in terms of the three additive primaries of color television Black is created by setting all three sliders to the bottom and white is created by setting them all to the top CMYK Color Space Control CMYK is the Color Space
507. pecialized computer or computer graphics experience The basic functions are simple and straightforward This manual is intended to pro vide first information for the basic use of the Lib erty software and second the explanation of the more complicated variations on the basic functions Some functions such as certain uses of the Diagram Popup to modify Masks or the use of the scientific calculator can become complicated but the user must seek out such complexity About this Manual Use this manual to learn the operation of the Liberty software by starting at the beginning and going through it step by step After you have some expe rience with Liberty use the manual as a reference book to get more details about functions For your convenience this manual is divided into sections as follows Table of Contents List of Figures e This Introduction e Section 2 Login Environment Section 3 Configuration Environment e Section 4 Paint Environment Section 5 Animation Environment Index Revision A 1 1 Introduction CHYRON Corporation 1 1 2 1 1 3 Hardware Platform Liberty software runs on a number of SGI hardware platforms For hardware startup and shutdown rou tines please consult the documentation for the par ticular hardware platform that your copy of Liberty is running on NOTE Installation of Liberty software and a digitizing tablet is covered in the appropriate Liberty Technical Ref
508. peed Nail Boundary Speed Nails have only one tangent Pressing and dragging a tangent changes the way the Speed Curve approaches or leaves its Speed Nail just like tangents in the Curve Points functions Revision A 5 101 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Speed Curve Color Codes Some of the Speed Curve Buttons have colored bars along the bottom of the button These correspond to the colored tick marks on the blue Keyframe Match sticks A colored mark on a matchstick indicates that a parameter has been set for that matchstick at other than its default value For example a red tick mark on a matchstick indicates that the keyframe has a non default manually set rotation If the red tick mark is not present then the rotation values for that keyframe are interpolated between the two clos est keyframes with set rotations White dot Path attribute Light green dot Alpha attribute Red dots Rotation amp Translation attributes Yellow dot Scale attribute Purple dot Slant attribute Light blue dot Under attribute NOTE The Under Button has no Speed Curve since Under is either on or off at each keyframe but has a button to show the color of its representative tick mark turquoise The Warp Speed Curve controls the interpolation of the warped corners when in Warped Corners Mode in the 3D Distort panel The Effects Speed Curve controls the interpolation of various actor s effects
509. ph at any time The number of keyframes you can have is limited by the space along the slider If you try to add a key frame too close to an existing keyframe you are prompted Cannot be too close to another key frame Line Morph Copy Keyframe Button To copy the line segment data from one key frame to another e Position the pointer in the Keyframe Slider beneath the keyframe you want to copy from e Press the Copy Button You are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy to If the pointer is not beneath a keyframe you are prompted Please specify keyframe to copy from Move the pointer under an exist ing keyframe marker and press the Copy But ton again e Press below another keyframe marker on the Keyframe Slider The data from the first key frame is copied into the indicated keyframe Paint Environment 4 478 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE Do not press directly on the keyframe marker itself but under it on the same line as the pointer A successful copy prompts Keyframe copied successfully If you press directly on a keyframe marker you are prompted Cannot copy to source keyframe Line Morph Delete Keyframe Button To delete a keyframe e In the slider position the pointer beneath the keyframe marker you want to delete Press to delete the keyframe at the current position of the pointer on the Keyframe Slider The keyframe marker disappears from the
510. pha attribute to perform dissolves between individual actors unlike a Switcher actor dissolve which dissolves between all layers above it and all layers below it Set the alpha of the dissolv ing actors so that one actor starts with 100 opacity in its beginning keyframe and animates to 0 opac ity The other actor simultaneously animates its alpha in reverse Warp Attribute Button When you modify the keyframe using Warp Corners Mode this button is highlighted If this button is off the keyframe is interpolated from the previous key frame to the next keyframe The Warp Button is highlighted by default for the first and last keyframes in a new actor because there are no other keyframes to interpolate from or to For keyframes that you add later the Warp Button is off but is high lighted if you change the warp parame ters Under Attribute Button When the Under Button is on the keyframe is dis played under all other actors in the animation When the Under Button is off the keyframe is dis played in its normal layer in the animation If two actors have the under prefix on the one in the higher layer will appear below the other Texture Attribute Button When you modify the keyframe using Warp Corners Mode this button is high lighted Texture points are used to separate the image corners from the warped comers and are really only used in Motion Track ing Revision A 5 83 Animation Environmen
511. place as much of the browser full screen as will fit starting at the lower left corner into the canvas and on the monitor via the video board This image can then be printed In order to print the full screen browser the canvas size must be set to the full screen size in the configuration environment of Liberty Example Printing In order to print the image in the canvas Set the Size as you like Revision A 4 467 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Set the Format to 1 per page e Set Justify as desired center upper right etc Set the image source to Video Press the Print 1 button In order to save an image in the canvas into the Vidjets memory Press the Grab 1 button In order to print a sequence of images Grab the images from the canvas into mem ory using the Grab 1 button View the images using the Current Frame button make sure the monitor is set to the line that is coming from the Vidjet and not the video board Tag Untag frames if you don t want to print them all If a frame has been tagged the Current Frame label will light up when that frame is viewed Current Frame should be lit if there are no frames current frame 0 e Set the image source to Memory Press the Print Seq button Problems If the custom header is not being set sure the Header field is set to Cus tom Paint Environment 4 468 Re
512. ple for copying to other actors Animation Environment 5 60 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Curve Functions in Animation Scale Cent Poly rnt Rirot Y rut z REE Tens Resol Rey Point List Corner List ny Hove Paint Insrt Close Break Join camp i Recall Save Erase prev iis 1 shift xTorn Figure 5 13 Curve Popup Some functions on the Curve Popup have special applications to animation keyframes They are listed here Insert Point Button This button labeled Insrt allows you to insert points along the curve Revision A 5 61 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To insert points in an existing curve e Press the Edit Path Button The Curve Popup appears with the existing curve displayed e Press the Insert Button e Press on the curve where you want the new point to appear The point is added and the curve is modified A corresponding Keyframe Matchstick is added to the Keyframe Timeline Duplicate Points Button This button labeled Dup allows you to exactly duplicate a point on the curve You can use this to make a hold in the middle of an actor since dupli cating a point adds a Keyframe Matchstick with exactly the same x y position as the existing one You can then adjust the matchsticks on the Key frame Timeline to set the length of the hold To make a hold using the Duplicate Button e Press the Edit Path Button The Curve Popup a
513. ple turning on Rescale and setting the X and Y rescale controls to 224 and 200 would cause each rendered frame to be re scaled to 224 x 200 before being written to the Chyron Motion File Animation Environment 5 30 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Recalling Chyron Motion Files You can recall Chyron Motion Files using the Recall and File Manager Tools just like any other image file format This only recalls the first frame in the clip however To recall multiple frames in the clip you must select the file as a disk path in the Source VTR Setup Popup page 5 19 The Grab Button in Paint will then grab individual frames from the Chyron Motion File based on the disk path s source timecode frame number Or the Filmstrip Actor in Animation can be used to input frames from the file to do this put the Filmstrip Actor in Source VTR mode and assign the file as the disk path for Source VTR see page 5 120 for more details Note also that Chyron Motion Files do not currently have browse images nor are they browsable as film strips in the Full Screen File Manager RAW YUV Files for Disk Arrays This format is utilized for rendering animations or rotoscoping in Paint to a format that contains all the frames under a single file name a clip file This format is normally used to render or rotoscope to a Disk Array such as the Ciprico MegaDrive or EuroLogic Disk Array Note that when first saving toa RAW YUV
514. ple Filter Edit Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 43 Mask Actor Popup 1 Animation Environment 5 164 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mask Only one of the Mask modes can be on ata time Mask Mode Press to turn on When turned on the actor below the Mask Actor is revealed only through the mask For instance to give the effect of a keyhole through which you can see the action you would put a key hole shaped Mask Actor over a Filmstrip Actor The more opaque the mask the more the mask reveals An area of 100 transparent background color in the mask file allows nothing to be revealed through the mask For example a fully opaque piece of text on a fully transparent background used as a file for a Mask displays only inside the text Chroma Key Mode Press the Key Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Chroma Key Mode When on the actor below is masked according to the similarities of the its image to the color set in the Chroma Key Mode Popup This works exactly the same as the Mask Channels Button in the Paint Environment but instead of masking all of a particular color it masks all but that color By using the Invert Button see page 5 179 you can mask out the color instead of masking out every thing except the color To set the color used by the Mask Actor in Chroma Key Mode e Press the Edit Keyframe Button to call up the Keyframe Edit Popup e Press on th
515. position first then the middle keyframe The first keyframe then takes on the position values of the middle keyframe When a pair of keyframes constitute a hold at the end of an actor and you drag the first keyframe of the pair the last keyframe moves as a unit with it When a pair of keyframes constitute a hold at the beginning of an actor and you drag the second keyframe of the pair the first keyframe moves as a unit with it The hold characteristics of keyframes apply to the Reference Points of keyframes as well as to their positions Revision A 5 77 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Keyframes without Curve Points If a keyframe has not been manually moved on the Canvas and no curve path has been added to the actor the keyframes have no curve point and no curve path This is the default state of a keyframe If a keyframe has no curve point then its position is interpolated along the curve path from the two near est keyframes that do have curve points If a keyframe has no curve point and there are no keyframes after it with curve points then the key frame will assume the position of the nearest previ ous keyframe with curve points When you add a curve path to the actor or manually move a keyframe on the Canvas by dragging its wireframe the keyframes are automatically assigned positions on the curve path as described in the fol lowing section For Each Path Point a Keyframe
516. ppears with the existing curve displayed e Press the Dup Button in the Curve Popup It becomes highlighted the Canvas press on a point in the middle of the path Another point is added exactly on top of the point you pressed Though the Key frame Timeline is not displayed a corresponding matchstick is added just after the original match stick e Press the Edit Keyframe Button The Curve Popup disappears and the Keyframe Timeline appears displaying the new matchstick next to its original Animation Environment 5 62 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual e Use the Move Matchstick Button to move the duplicate matchstick thus setting the dura tion of the hold On the curve duplicated curve points are colored the same color as the tangents default is yellow to dis tinguish them from single points When the Duplicate Points Button is enabled and you move the cursor near a point the point you are nearest to will flash as a preview of which point will be duplicated when you press down To separate two duplicate keyframe positions go into Edit Path and use the Move function to manu ally drag one point away from its duplicate When editing keyframes in the Keyframe Timeline dupli cated points always move as a unit thus you must go into curve editing in order to separate them The Move Gravity Function This function on the Curve Popup combines the Gravity Button and the Move Points Button When
517. produces blocky results Linear interpolation chooses pixels based on the nearest four pixels This offers better quality than nearest neighbor with slightly greater cost in ren dering time However smoothing is introduced into the image so the image gets a bit soft Anti aliasing Any interpolation method introduces artifacts which must be countered with anti aliasing tech niques Liberty has two methods point sampling and adaptive supersampling Animation Environment 5 92 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Point sampling is the simplest and quickest of the two It takes the pixels straight from the interpola tion stage with no extra calculations For objects that are smoothly varying that is continuous tone like a photographic image this may be acceptable For high contrast images this may not do the job Adaptive supersampling is more complex It always produces the highest quality render This method looks at the image and finds all areas where there are high contrast changes When it finds them it drops a subpixel grid on the image and approximates the pixel based on an average The point filter is the only filter that doesn t do sub pixel positioning The adaptive supersampling fil ter is very sophisticated Both user definable filters are adaptive supersampling filters User defined Distort Filters Press the corner button of the Filter Button to bring up the Adaptive Filter Popup which allow
518. ption of using Define to create a new User defined Brush Paint Environment 4 32 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 3 COLOR PALETTE 4 3 1 Palette and Buffers Panels BEER EERE 3 Multi Pick A 255 Palette Buffers Figure 4 17 Palette Panel The Color Palette Panel alternates with the Buffers Panel using the same menu space at the left of the screen below the Brush Display If the Buffers Panel is displayed you ll see a stack of three small Revision A 4 33 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation representations of the Canvas Temp Buffer and Mask Buffer you press the button labeled Palette to call up the Palette Panel in its place Likewise if the Palette is displayed press the button below labeled Buffers and the palette will be replaced by the Buff ers Panel While working in the Paint Environment you will frequently change back and forth between these two panels About the Palette Liberty s Color Palette offers a choice of over 16 million colors 32 bit mode displayed in 8 sets of palette boxes in the Color Palette Elevator You can modify each color box individually by adjusting the color slider scales below the palette or by picking a color from the Canvas You can modify colors sin gly orin groups Each time you save a picture on disk all the current palette colors are saved at the same time When you recall a picture all its palette colors are recalled with it
519. r for working with time code The Button shifts the timecode in the dis play window left 2 digits The Time Button turns Timecode Mode on and off In Timecode Mode numbers are displayed in hours minutes seconds and frames thirtieths of seconds If you make an illegal operation like taking the square root of a negative number Error appears in the display window Clear by pressing the Clear Button or entering another number The second calculator panel contains a number of more complex functions including Revision A 4 69 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation inv modifies the next sin cos tan log or In opera tion to invert it resulting in arc sin arc cos arc tan power of 10 or power of e respectively It high lights until the operation is performed then turns off rad mode button interpret the number as radians when on otherwise interpret it as degrees used by sin cos and tan The button is highlighted when in Radians Mode pi enters the trigonometric constant pi 3 1415962 sin takes the trigonometric sine of the number in the display window cos takes the trigonometric cosine of the number in the display window tan takes the trigonometric tangent of the number in the display window KS KR KC store recall clear one of the 10 numeric constants These are similar to MS MR MC in the first panel but allows you to save and recall multiple values
520. r Opaque Mask Mode Opaq Press the Opaque Mask Button to display the masked area opaquely in the current display color Revision A 4 81 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Mixed Transparency Mask Mode Mix Press the main part of the Mix Button not the win dow to transparently display the masked area in the current display color Mix Popup Cancel Figure 4 31 Mix Popup Press the color window of the Mix Button to call up the Mix Popup There must be an active mask on the Canvas the Use Mask Button must be high lighted The color window also shows the current color used to display masks The Mix Popup con tains a slider scale for setting the level of transpar ency of the mask display 0 255 about 128 equivalent to about 50 transparency is a good setting You can set the mask color by pressing the color box in the Mix Popup To change the mask color e Press color window in the Mix Button The Mix Popup and the Palette appear Paint Environment 4 82 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 62 2 Underline the palette box of the color you want to use for displaying masks 3 Press the color window in the Mix Popup The color widow changes color and all the masks will be displayed in the new color 4 Press the OK Button The popup disappears The color window in the Mix Button now displays the new mask display color Transfer Buffer Figure 4 32 The Tra
521. r and Pressure buttons can be active simultaneously or in any combination along with the current Paint Mode When Fold Paint Mode is on painting wraps around that is when you paint off one edge of the Canvas it spills over on the opposite edge Painting off the right edge spills over onto the left edge and vice versa Top bottom painting works the same This results in a Canvas whose edges can be joined together seamlessly when for instance it is texture mapped in a 3D program To paint a seamless rectangle for tiling e Use Rectangle Mask see page 4 368 to mask a rectangle on the Canvas e Press Fold Paint to turn it on e Paint into the rectangle painting across edges Revision A 4 283 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Cut the painted rectangle into the Temp Buffer and use Copy Tile to tile it without gaps See page 4 143 for details about Copy Tile 4 13 7 Noise Button When noise is enabled colors on the brush are ran domized as they are painted introducing textures and grains to the painted strokes This feature can be used to achieve more natural looking paint effects or to re introduce grain into a touched up area of film video Noise can be used with all Canvas paint modes nor mal reveal clone etc except for Paste Noise can also be used with erase paint and painting to mask To use Noise Paint Mode 11 Set the Transparency Slider Scale near the bottom This allow
522. r alpha value than the slider the mask fills outward from the pixel stopping at pixels with an alpha equal to or greater than the slider setting If the place that you pressed has a higher alpha value than the slider mask fills outward from the pixel stop ping at pixels with an alpha equal to or less than the slider setting To fill to empty background color zero alpha set the Fill to Alpha Slider to the bot tom or 1 one The default slider setting for Fill to Alpha is 1 one Paint Environment 4 384 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Fillto Color To fill mask to a color press on one of the Fill to Color Sliders and set it then press the OK Button Press on a Pixel on the Canvas Mask fills outward from the pixel stopping at pixels whose color differs from the start pixel The left Color Slider is the Greed Slider which determines how much of a color difference the fill stops at The higher the setting of the Greed Slider the greater the difference of colors that are included in the fill The right Color Slider is the Smoothness Slider which determines the softness of the edges of the fill If the Smoothness setting is 0 the edges are hard without anti aliasing all filled values are 255 If the Smoothness setting is at the maximum same as Greed setting the fill has a smooth edge Fillto Mask To fill mask to a mask value use Paint On Mask or other mask tool to make a closed mask on the Can vas
523. r by press ing a thumbnail then the Copy Prefix Button and then the thumbnail you want to copy to Paint Environment 4 90 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Note that when browsing temps in the Layers popup some of the browse images may appear as all red This represents a Temp buffer on disk which is cur rently empty Individual Layer Controls You can modify each layer individually using but tons near each layer s browse image including On Off X and Y position 2D and 3D Paste tools a Lock Button and an alpha slider The layer must be active in RAM for these tools to be used On Button Press a layer s On Button to make that layer actively overlaid on the Canvas The On Button becomes highlighted and the contents of the layer appears overlaid on the Canvas Transparency Slider Controls the individual layer s transparency As you move the slider the preview of the layer s transpar ency changes on the Canvas You can press in the numeric window to type in a transparency value X and Y Position Windows These windows display the numeric X and Y values for each layer You can press in the numeric win dows to type in a new X or Y value Also when the layer is active you can click above or below the X or Y labels to move the image one pixel at a time for incremental adjustments Revision A 4 91 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Lock Button Press to turn it on it
524. r of the bounding box This makes for the most diffuse gra dation of all since the farthest corner is a greater distance than the farthest edge Does not apply to Radial Gradation Revision A 4 311 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Pick Point Mode Pick Point allows you to choose where the Circular or Radial Gradation starts within the bounding box of the masked area To select a new origin for either the Circular or Radial Gradation click on the Pick Point Button at which time all the menu buttons will be grayed out then click on the Canvas to set the new origin Centered Mode Centered Mode is the default it starts the Circular or Radial Gradation at the center of the bounding box of the masked area Apply Diagram The Diagram used with Apply changes the distribu tion of colors in a multiple color apply The vertical axis represents the colors of the apply while the hor izontal axis represents the space the apply fills A straight diagonal ramp gives a one to one correla tion between colors and space for a normal linear default apply If you alter the curve the colors are given a different distribution You can alter the curve in three ways 1 Drag the sliders or 2 Press and drag directly on the curve to modify it graphi cally or 3 Use the Curve Functions to smooth the curve posterize the curve or invert the curve You can use any or all of these methods at the same time When yo
525. r the font elevator are six elevator boxes Each box in the Text Elevator can hold a page of unren dered text outline You edit the contents of the active elevator box Press on a different elevator box to edit a different level Revision A 4 403 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation When the Copy prefix is on pressing on an elevator level copies the text in the current level to the new one Text Size Button Figure 4 135 Text Size Popup Use to adjust the size of the text This button acts on the selected characters of the text and if no text is selected it acts on all the characters To change text size e Press the Text Size Button The Text Size Popup appears e Press and drag the slider to resize the active text The displayed text changes size e Press the green OK button on the popup when the text is at the desired size You can select different text with the pen while the Text Size Popup is still up Paint Environment 4 404 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Center Text Button The Center Button centers the bounding box of the text It centers all the displayed text regardless of selects Leading Button Figure 4 136 Leading Button Use to adjust the leading space between lines of the text It works on selected text or if no text is selected it works on all the text To change the leading e Press the Lead Button The Text Leading Popup appears e
526. rab on the Fly requires a recording device with dynamic tracking Grab on the Fly is only supported on video boards with built in VLAN master Cen taur Video Framer When Grab on the Fly is enabled the grab is performed on the currently num bered frame both fields while the recording device with dynamic tracking is in motion Grab Frame When on grabs a full frame with both fields Grab Even Field When on grabs the even field and doubles it This and Grab Odd Field is useful if you don t want an interlaced image which may contain undesirable inter field jitter or movement It is also useful when the Canvas resolution is different from that of the video source In such a case spatial re scaling is done which can cause undesirable artifacts in an interlaced 2 field image Grab Odd Field When on grabs the odd field and doubles it Record Button Press the red Record Button to record to the cur rently numbered frame to the target device Rotoscoping Liberty s rotoscoping tools allow you to grab frames from one or a number of simultaneous source devices to modify the frames with Liberty s Paint and Image Tools and then to record the frames to one or a number of target devices The possible devices include VTRs DDRs disk arrays and inter Paint Environment 4 432 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual nal hard drives You can rout input frames into the Canvas the current mask and one
527. ram Popup with Programmed Brush 4 27 Diagram Prefix with Clamp Mask 4 371 4 393 4 395 Difference Mask Button 4 393 Direction Button 4 59 direction functions functions constrained by direction buttons list of 4 59 painting with 4 241 directories 3 33 creating 3 33 deleting 3 33 renaming 3 34 setting 4 205 Directory Button dir 4 206 Directory Panel Menu 3 33 Create Directory Button 3 33 Index 8 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Delete Directory Button 3 33 Rename Directory Button 3 34 Disk Button 4 206 Disk Panel menu 4 453 disk space 4 235 Display Button Mask Buffer 4 81 Distort Paste Mode 4 129 Dots Per Inch Button DPI 3 25 drawing 4 247 drawing curves 4 247 Dropframe Button VTR Menu 4 453 5 33 dropframe mode 4 435 4 453 5 18 5 33 5 36 Duration Button 5 37 Edge Button 4 339 Edge Detection Button 4 341 Edit Button Color Mixer Mode 4 50 Edit Keyframe Button 5 60 5 65 Edit Macro Button 4 419 Edit Macro File Popup 4 419 Edit Macro Popup 4 422 Edit Path Button 5 60 5 106 elevator 3 5 elevators 1 3 4 16 adding 4 62 copying 4 62 Revision A Index 9 CHYRON Corporation ellipses making 4 263 Emboss Paste Mode 4 125 enabling Liberty software 3 52 Environment Buttons 4 5 environments 1 2 Login Environment 2 1 Erase All Button 4 407 Erase Button 4 14 Erase Text Button 4 407 Erase Paint 4 34 erasing the screen 4 14 Even Field Button 4 341 Extrude
528. ration Environment 3 10 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Use these functions to add or delete User Login Accounts from the Login Environment User Login Accounts You create a User Login Account to remember vari ous Liberty settings If several artists use the same Liberty installation each artist might have a User Login Account Different projects might each have its own User Login Account You might create a User Login Account for each different screen reso lution you commonly use The User Login Accounts are displayed in a list in the Login Envi ronment Liberty can have up to 99 different User Login Accounts Add User Button The Add User Button allows you to create a new User Login Account A new User Login Account will contain Liberty s current settings Once you have created a new User Login Account you can login to the new account and customize the settings such as resolution menu colors etc that you want to be part of the new User Login Account To add a new User Login Account 1 2 3 Press the Add User Button The User Popup appears It should show the lowest numbered unused login entry Press in the User Name Text Window and type in the User Login Account Name It must be less than 20 characters Avoid spaces and punctuation marks Press Enter The cursor moves down into the User Password Text Window Revision A 3 11 Configuration Environment
529. rd ingly for example for a fix you could re render frames 10 20 over the original frames 1 20 When rendering to a Chyron Motion File is finished you can transfer the file via FTP to a remote direc tory on an iNFiNiT or other system The File Type Popup contains a Set up Button which is active only when the Chyron Motion File Type is selected This button brings up the Chyron Motion File Set up Popup which allows you to enter the host and direc tory path names of the remote system where you want to store the Chyron Motion File Revision A 4 451 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Chyron Motion File Set up Popup remote system FTP set up user name guest passuord temp dir usr tmp offset position T p Figure 4 151 Chyron Motion File Set up Popup The Chyron Motion File Set up Popup in the File Type Popup allows you to enter set up information to log on to a remote system Node Enter the node name of the remote system such as NFINIT Path Enter the path of the directory on the remote system you wish to access such as C logos message User Name Enter the user name used to log on to the remote sys tem such as This user name must corre spond to a user account on the remote system Password Enter the password used to log on to the remote sys tem This password must correspond to the pass word for the user account on the remote syste
530. rd forward from the current frame Fast Forward Button FF Press the FF Button to play the current Storyboard at double speed forward from the current frame Reverse Button Rev Press the Reverse Button to play the current Story board backward from the current frame Fast Reverse Button FR Press the FR Button to play the current Storyboard at double speed backward from the current frame Stop Button Press to stop playback Animation Environment 5 240 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Frame Window The Frame Window displays the current frame of the Storyboard on the Canvas You can press on the Frame Window itself and type in a frame number to go to that frame Start and End Windows The Start and End Windows display the start and end frames of the current Storyboard file Press in either one to change the start end time of the play back For example if you have a 30 frame Story board file you can set the Start Window to 10 and the End Window to 20 Pressing Play plays frames 10 through 20 Pressing above the Start or End Windows right on the word displays the start or end frame on the Can vas Playback Frame Slider This slider allows you to manually control playback of a Storyboard by pressing and dragging the slider The buttons on either end of the slider allow you to move one frame at a time through the Storyboard backwards lt or forward gt Pr
531. re 4 100 Reveal Modes Popup The Reveal Button allows you to bring color or luminance information from the current Temp Buffer onto the Canvas in preset ways Includes Reveal Color Reveal Luminance and Reveal Hue Press the Reveal Button to apply the Temp Buffer to the Canvas using whatever mode is displayed in the text window Press on the word in the window to call up the modes popup Reveal Color Reveal Color reveals the color of the image in the current Temp Buffer into the masked area of the Canvas with the luminance of the Canvas image pre served It is an interesting and dynamic way to com bine pictures One use is to apply a texture e g wood marble from the Temp Buffer to the image in the Canvas while preserving the shadows and high lights in the Canvas making it look as if it were made of wood or marble Revision A 4 317 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Reveal Luminance Reveal Luminance reveals the luminance of the image in the Temp Buffer into the masked area of the Canvas with the hue and saturation of the Can vas preserved Reveal Luminance is the reverse of Reveal Color in this way Reveal Color reveals the color hue and saturation from the image in the Temp Buffer into the Canvas with only the luminance of the Canvas preserved Reveal Luminance reveals only the lumi nance from the image in the Temp Buffer into the Canvas with the color hue and saturation of the Canvas preser
532. re is not necessarily better here but more is definitely slower The Paste Distort Preview Modes Paste Distort has three Preview Modes Wireframe Final and Final Plus Alpha Paste Distort always displays a wireframe bounding box whatever the preview mode In Final mode a full resolution pre view of the image is displayed on the bounding box In Final Alpha mode preview takes alpha trans parency of the image into account You manipulate the wireframe box in real time on the Canvas Note Revision A 4 139 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation that on the newer SGI systems Final Alpha pre view is very fast On such systems the Coarse and Final previews are not required Keypad Controls for Paste Functions You can use the keypad at the right of the keyboard to manipulation the paste functions The functions of the keypad keys are dependent on which mode the menu is in position rotation scale or slant NOTE The Num Lock must be off for Keypad Control to work Num Lock Home Pg Up Pg Dn HEHE EE E EE ELE Figure 4 50 Numeric Keypad Table 4 1 Numeric Keypad Keys Functions Key Function Turns off final preview of image Turns on final preview of image 7 Home Decreases Z position increases Z rotation decreases X Y scale 8 Increases Y position increases X rotation increases Y slant increases Y scale
533. rent paste operation The Paste Mode but ton cycles between Normal Color Shadow Extrude Emboss or Distort TRANSFER Recall File Save File Save File As Tiff tif Paste Normal File Manager Cut Move Tile FTP Grab Figure 4 51 Transfer Panel Tile Button This button tiles the Canvas by repeatedly pasting the contents of the selected Temp Buffer according to the pattern created by the Tile Set function the corner popup of the Tile button Use the Tile Set popup to set the horizontal and vertical offsets of the tile pattern then press the Tile Button to render a full screen tiled pattern Tile Set Popup Corner Button In the upper right corner of the Tile Button This button sets the horizontal and vertical offset of the tile pattern You paste the image three times on the Canvas the first time to begin the pattern the sec ond time to set the horizontal offset and the third time to set the vertical offset Paint Environment 4 142 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To create a tiled pattern 1 Cut the element to be tiled into the Temp Buffer Press the Tile Set Popup Button The element to be tiled appears on the Canvas attached to the cursor Press down once to set the first tile position The element is pasted where you press Press down a second time to set the horizontal tile offset The element is again pasted where you press Press down a third time to set the vertical
534. review Button is on with a different background color displayed in place of the keyed blue or green colors Use Mask Button Sometimes you will want to key out certain parts of the Canvas image other than the blue or green screen areas for example booms or rigging This can be done by masking those areas using Liberty s Mask tools for example Rectangle Mask Then press the button on the popup labeled Use Mask to turn it on which causes any mask currently active on the Canvas to be keyed out The mask functions as a garbage matte in this case The mask can have transparent areas also for example areas with 50 transparency will key out by 50 Dominant Color Buttons Dominant Foreground Color This selects the color component on the Canvas that you are NOT using for the key For a blue screen key you would choose red or green Revision A 4 355 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Thus you would set the Dominant Foreground Color to red for a blue screen of a person since the reds in the person s skin tones will contrast with the blue being keyed out Key On Button This selects the color component on the Canvas to be used for the key For example for a blue screen key you would choose B blue Picked Color Display The Picked Color Display is always active when the Chroma Key Popup is up at any time you can pick a key color by pressing in the blue
535. ribute Buttons Animation Environment 5 80 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual At the right of the Keyframe Timeline are a group of functions controlling the keyframe s attributes The Keyframe Time Window and the Auto Smooth But ton are here This area also contains the Next and Prev Buttons used to move from keyframe to key frame while you are editing Also here are several mode buttons which are either on highlighted or off including Alpha Warp Under Rotate Scale and Slant A Preview Button is provided to preview the current keyframe as well as an Alpha Slider to set the transparency level of the keyframe Keyframe Time Window The Keyframe Time Window displays the current keyframe s time code or frame number You can press in the window to type in a new number and the keyframe will move to the new time setting Auto Smooth Button The Auto Smooth Button is on by default meaning that Liberty automatically smooths out or averages animation curve points while you are editing the keyframes In some cases this is not desirable you want to manually move curve points without auto matic smoothing being applied In such a case press the Auto Smooth Button to turn it off Next Button In the Keyframe Distort Popup you can press the Next Button to move to the next keyframe in the actor Press the Copy Prefix first then the Next But ton to copy all the attributes excluding X Y Z position of
536. rlace on off transparency JPEG Select compression rate PICT Select RGB or RGBA Paint Environment 4 174 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual As stated in the table above a number of the file for mats have Set up menus which are accessed by pressing the Setup button in the Save File As Popup The Set up menus for PICT RLA SGI rgb and TDI are fairly simple as they merely allow the user to enable disable the saving of alpha matte informa tion and or select the number of bits per component 8 10 12 or 16 The set up menus for the other formats are more complicated These are described in the following sections GIF File Format You can save and transfer GIF images to HTML editors for inclusion on Web Pages at various levels of compression You can set the GIF file back ground to transparent so that it appears as a cut out when displayed by a Web browser that supports transparent GIFs NOTE You may need a separate license for the GIF functions to work in Liberty Contact your Chy ron Liberty sales representative or customer service representative GIF Setup Menu Transparency 4 Bit GIF Uniform Interlaced 5 Bit GIF Optinal j Bit GIF Bit GIF Noise Preview 2 GIF format copyright AE ULT 3 Bit GIF Bit GIF greyscale Reset Lompuserve INe 3 Figure 4 61 Setup Menu Revision A 4 175 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation With the GIF Button high l
537. rm the wireframe Dragging a cor ner of the wireframe allows you to position one corner at a time to distort or warp the wireframe Dragging on the center cross allows you to move the entire wireframe The Image Texture Button This button is your access to Texture Mode which lets you detach the corner points from the image being warped This has application for Motion Tracking in the Animation Environment see page 5 207 Press the Image Button to toggle it to Texture mode This displays a green wireframe representing the image You can then detach the green wireframe along with the image from the yellow corner Paint Environment 4 136 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual points by moving its center point You can also adjust its corners to rescale the image relative to the original yellow corner points During these opera tions the image stays in the same perspective as the comer points Distort Filters Distort Paste has its own rendering filters three pre set and two user definable You should experiment to determine which ones are best for your applica tions The Point Filter corresponds roughly to Coarse filtering the Bilinear Filter to Medium filter ing and the Adaptive Filter to Fine filtering Point Filter is the default filter fast but a bit coarse About Filters Two stages are required to properly reconstruct an image in 3 D perspective The first stage is an inter polat
538. rmed Erase Button The red buttons at the top of the screen next to the Brush Display are the Erase Buttons Pressing the main Erase button once erases the masked area in the picture see the section on Masks NOTE When erasing a masked area on some hardware platforms after you press Erase once there is a pause before the masked area is erased All Button The smaller red button below the Erase button is the Erase All button Pressing the All Button twice quickly erases the entire Canvas regardless of any masked areas Prefix Buttons Fret under at copy Figure 4 8 Prefix Buttons Paint Environment 4 14 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Prefix buttons are used to modify functions After they are pressed the next function pressed will per form differently than normal depending on the pre fix Prefix Buttons are Repeat Under Add Copy and Invert For example pressing the Under Prefix Button then the Paint Button causes painting to happen under instead of over what s on the Canvas The Prefix Buttons are located about two thirds of the way down the left side of the Paint Environment See Repeat Prefix Button on page 4 60 for more information Popup Menus Many functions can call up their own popup menus for more options or detailed control of the function Any button with a small square corner button in the button s upper right corner has a popup Pressing the
539. rrent temp then turns the temp on as a layer and moves the layer to the upper right corner of the canvas When the Offset button is on Reveal paint will reveal from the temp at its layer position in the upper right corner of the canvas When the Inplace button is on Reveal paint will reveal the image at its original position The Paint Modes are further described in the follow ing paragraphs Normal Paint Normal Paint Mode is the default You paint with the current brush in the current palette color at the current transparency level If no color is selected in the Palette painting erases the current image on the Canvas Paint Environment 4 276 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Smear Paint In Smear Paint Mode the existing color on the Can vas is smeared or pushed around as you paint A solid brush drags a piece of the Canvas an airbrush smears randomized custom brushes can simulate smoke or dithering Good for removing or smooth ing details in captured frames of video or for giving painterly effects to captured video Normally you would use Smear Paint with a fairly low transpar ency level alow Brush Gap and Exact Mode Warp Paint In Warp Paint Mode the image on the Canvas is warped in the direction that you paint With a solid brush the image is offset and slightly blurred An airbrush offsets and greatly blurs the image Blur Paint In Blur Paint Mode the image on t
540. rrow buttons on the left to scroll left If instead of pressing on an empty space in the popup you press on a browse image already in the popup the new image is inserted in front of the image you press on Now you may edit the sequence you have cre ated To Replace files in the sequence press the Replace Mode Button to turn it on When Replace Mode is on you must press on a browse image already in the sequence and it is replaced by the new image To remove files from the sequence press on the Delete Mode Button to turn it on When Delete Mode is on pressing on a file in the sequence removes it from the Film strip File Menu Revision A 5 113 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation When you are finished press the OK Button at the top of the Full Screen File Menu The Full Screen File Popup disappears The Filmstrip File Menu is also discussed on page 5 124 File j local Canned Demo image tracking m 000 im In 0 Out 23 Insert Delete Swing Once Figure 5 25 Cel Actor Popup Multiple As mentioned previously a multiple cel actor con tains one or more elements steps each of which is an image file or numbered sequence of image files filmstrip In the Multiple popup at the right of the Timeline the File Window displays the filename of one of the elements in the sequence The Num Button displays the number of this element The second number in the Num Button window is the number of total el
541. rs This works in normal paint mode and also with Reveal Tint and Reveal Tint Hue modes Revision A 4 289 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To paint varying brush color with pressure 1 Turn on Multi color Mode in the palette 2 Choose a range of colors by underlining them 3 Press the corner button of the Pressure Paint Button The Pressure Popup appears 4 Press the Pressure Color Button to turn it on 5 Press the OK Button 6 Paint with varying pressure Pressure OK Button Press to confirm the settings in the Pressure Popup and remove the popup If all the Pressure Mode Buttons are off the Pressure Paint Button will be off when the popup disappears If any of the Pressure Mode Buttons are on the Pressure Paint Button will be on when the popup disappears Pressure Diagram Allows you to re map pressure values coming from the tablet thereby modifying how pressures affect painting For instance you could invert the Diagram Curve causing pressure values to be inverted Pressing harder would have the opposite of the usual effect In Size Mode pressing harder would result in a smaller brush size Pressure Cancel Button Press to cancel changes you ve made in the popup and remove the popup Paint Environment 4 290 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Pressure Save Button Press to save the current Pressure Diagram Pressure Recall Button
542. s Paint Environment 4 26 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The Programmed Brush Diagram Popup Figure 4 15 Programmed Brush Popup The Programmed Brush Diagram Popup is basically the same Diagram Popup that is used to modify other Liberty functions such as the distribution of ramped colors in an Apply or the clipping of a Mask Here the Diagram represents the profile of the cur rent Programmed Brush Modifying the Diagram Curve modifies the shape of the current Pro grammed Brush see page 4 371 The Diagram Curve allows you to graphically and interactively modify the Programmed Brush starting with a basic air brush The Diagram Curve shows one half of the current brush The top of the curve is maximum opacity the bottom of the curve is maxi mum transparency The left of the curve is the brush edge the right of the curve is the center of the brush To create a programmed brush l Press the corner of the Programmed Brush Button to display the Diagram Popup Menu Revision A 4 27 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 2 Modify the Diagram Curve Each time you lift the pen after modifying the curve the changes are displayed in the Current Brush Display The Sine button creates Liberty s standard Air Brush e 3 Press the green OK Button The brush defined by the new diagram curve is confirmed in the Brush Display and can be scaled Use the Programmed Brush like any other brush One
543. s Press in the number window to enter the brush size via keyboard Press on the arrow buttons at the top and bottom of the slider scale to change the value by one unit at a time The scale goes from 1 at the bot tom to 127 at the top Paint Environment 4 22 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Transparency Slider Scale Figure 4 12 Transparency Slider in the Palette Panel The setting of the Transparency Slider Scale deter mines the transparency of the brush The Transpar ency Slider is the rightmost of the four sliders in the Palette Display To see the Transparency Slider the Palette Display must be showing if it is not press the Palette Button Press on the slider and drag it up and down to change the current transparency value 100 opaque is at the top 100 transparent at the bottom This slider scale controls the transparency of paint ing as well as most functions that put color or image into the picture such as Paste Text Render Apply Color etc Revision A 4 23 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Press on the arrow buttons at the top and bottom of the slider scale to change the value by one unit ata time In the 32 bit version of Liberty the scale goes from 0 at the bottom to 255 at the top See page 4 33 the Color Palette NOTE The Transparency Slider stays at its current setting until you change it Since it controls most ways of putting color on the Canvas it s i
544. s the Copy Prefix Button and press in the center of the displayed brush This is the default of Brush Background To change the colors in the Current Brush Display if necessary see page 4 33 for more detail on the use of the palette When the Brush Display background is two colors press the Copy Prefix Button e Press in the top left of the Brush Display back ground The top left part of the Brush back ground becomes the currently chosen under lined palette color If no color is chosen in the palette the top left part of the Brush background becomes the background color of the Canvas This works the same for the bottom right part of the Brush background Or When the Current Brush Display background is a solid color press the Copy Prefix Button Revision A 4 21 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press anywhere in the Brush background The entire Brush background becomes the cur rently chosen palette color If no color is chosen in the palette the entire Brush background becomes the background color of the Canvas Brush Size Slider Scale Change the brush size using the vertical slider scale at the right of the Current Brush Display Press and drag to move the slider up and down to change the size of the current brush in real time AII four brush modes are sizable in real time The number window below the Brush Size Slider Scale displays the current size of the brush in pixel
545. s you can use the VTR Menu there to set up any defined recording device as Source or Target or both simultaneously You can then con trol the recording device s directly from the Liberty menu for playback cueing shuttle etc Video Recording and Video Boards To record video from Liberty you must have a video board installed or have a digital disk recorder DDR to convert the RGB output of Liberty to a video format Liberty includes software for use of various video boards and DDRs that are available for different models of SGI platforms Consult your Chyron or SGI salesperson if you need information about video board DDR options for your Liberty workstation 3 7 CONFIGURING VTRS To be able to control a recording device other than a DDR from Liberty install the option for the video board you are using Centaur Video Framer etc See page 3 47 for more information You must have only one video board option installed at any time or VTR control will not work Configure your video board option See the config uration instruction document of the video board you have installed Revision A 3 37 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation The buttons on the VTR configuration panel config ure Liberty to match your recording device Define VTR Button Defining VTR As Pressing on the number window at the top of the Video panel labeled Defining VTR as cycles through the video recorders The number displ
546. s all way to the left the first six masks are dis played Moving the slider to the right scrolls through the rest of the masks Top Button Press to display the first six masks Scroll Left Button lt lt Press to scroll the masks left by six levels Jump Left Button lt Press to jump the masks left by one level Jump Right Button gt Press to jump the masks right by one level Scroll Right Button gt gt Press to scroll the masks right by six levels Revision A 4 79 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Bottom Button Bot Press to display the last six masks As with all Liberty elevators you can copy the Masks in this popup from one browse image to another by pressing one browse image then the Copy Prefix Button and then the browse image you want to copy to Note that when browsing masks in the Mask Browse popup some of the browse images may appear as all red This represents a Mask buffer on disk which is currently empty Fast Masks Depending on how much memory you have on your hardware platform you can configure some of the levels of the Mask Elevator as Fast Masks to be stored in RAM for almost instantaneous save recall There must always be at least one Fast Temp To change the number of Fast Masks see page 3 30 in the Configuration Environment section To Compute How Much RAM You Need for Fast Masks The number of bytes of RAM required for each Fa
547. s and drag the cursor to paint the desired curve on the Canvas Points are laid down following the curve you draw manually Then use the Add Move and Delete buttons to refine the curve if necessary Insert Point Button The Insert Points Insrt button allows you to insert points along the curve To insert points in an existing curve e Press the Ins button e Press the curve where you want the new point to appear The point is added and the curve is modified Duplicate Points Button The Dup button allows you to exactly duplicate a point at a particular position on the curve This is most useful when creating paths in the Animation Environment see below Paint Environment 4 252 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To duplicate a point using the Duplicate Points Button e Press the Dup button in the Curve Popup It becomes highlighted On the Canvas press on a point in the curve Another point is added exactly on top of the point you pressed You can now move the new point to a new location on the curve Duplicated points are colored the same color as the tangent lines default is yellow to distinguish them from single points When the Duplicate Points Button is enabled and you move the cursor near a point the point you are nearest to will flash as a preview of which point will be duplicated when you press down Duplicate points can be used to make animation holds in Lib erty s Anim
548. s on either end of the Cursor Selection Buttons to cycle through the list of cursor styles As you cycle through the standard cursor is dis played as the current cursor The current four cur sors are operative throughout all of Liberty s functions Revision A 3 53 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 11 TABLET PANEL Pressure Margins Top Bottom Right Cancel Tablet Configuration Figure 3 14 The Tablet Panel Use the Tablet Configuration Panel to change the pen pressure settings and the margins of the active tablet area You can use the margin sliders to set the active area of the tablet to be any size or aspect ratio operation is automatically adapted to Liberty s menu and Canvas areas Configuration Environment 3 54 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Tablet Click Pressure This sets the required pressure for a positive click on the tablet Its scale extends from 0 on the left to 255 on the right with a default of 50 Generally you want the Click setting to be as low as possible with out causing mistaken unintentional clicks on the tablet Tablet Top Margin This sets the top margin of the active tablet area Its numbers refer to inches on the tablet After chang ing the setting press the OK Button to accept the change Tablet Bottom Margin This sets the bottom margin of the active tablet area Its numbers refer to inches on the tablet After
549. s on one of the brushes to choose it The chosen brush is underlined and the chosen brush appears in the Current Brush Display Press the OK Button The popup disappears To create a User Brush 11 Create a small image on the Canvas for your User Brush You can use Paint or Curve Draw or any other function to create the source image for the User Brush If desired first make it large then scale it down with Paste Distort see index to fit into a 120 pixel square Mask the image on the Canvas The image for the User brush must be the only thing masked on the Canvas If the brush is the only thing on the Canvas you don t have to mask it Press the corner button of the User Brush Button The User Brush Popup Menu appears Press one of the boxes in the User Brush Elevator The box becomes underlined Paint Environment 4 30 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 Press the Define Def Button The masked image on the Canvas appears in the chosen box in the User Brush Elevator 6 Press the green OK Button The User Brush Popup disappears and the new User Brush appears in the Current Brush Display The User Brush Popup The User Brush Popup Menu displays the on line User defined Brushes created in Liberty as well as tools for the creation and modification of User defined Brushes You can have as many as 80 User defined Brushes on line in the User Brush Elevator The User Brush Elevator
550. s the Set Scheme Button The menu changes to the new colors The menus of other envi ronments will also be changed when you go to them Default Scheme s Button Press to restore the default standard menu colors This does not change the Menu Configuration Pal ette only the menu colors There is several default color schemes that you can choose between stored in the palette elevator see below Configuration Environment 3 6 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Table 3 1 Palette Customizing Buttons Top Row Desk Back Button Surface Inset Button Popup Menu Text Activated But Mode Button Active Ele P ground Surface Surface ton vator Box Second Inactive Eleva Up Down Slider Pointer Top Bottom Marker Bars in Moving Slider Underlined Pal Keyboard tor Box Slider Arrows Slider Pointers Sliders ette Pot Input High Row light Third Row Edited Dia Final Diagram Light Button Dark Button Animation Underlined Pal Wireframes Handles on gram Curve Curve Bevel alt Bevel alt Timeline Raster ette Hot Color Wirefames Fourth Grids Shapes Bad or broken Multi points Extra wire Extra wire Canvas scratch Dimmed Text Unassigned amp Field Guides Wireframes on corner frame color frame color space Color Row inbetweening Default Scheme s Save Scheme Set Scheme EX under add copy invert Color Scheme Configuration
551. s the grain or noise to build up slowly Press the corner button of the Noise Paint Button The Noise Paint Popup appears Use the sliders to choose the amount of noise for Hue Saturation and Value and for each color component Gauss mode with the Red Green and Blue sliders at the top is usually appropriate for most uses but you will want to experiment with each individually to choose your favorite Press OK Paint on the Canvas As you paint graininess or noise is introduced as the brush is moved along Paint Environment 4 284 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Noise Popup ps ja fs sls Ls 4 13 8 Figure 4 88 Noise Popup The Noise Popup contains sliders scales to control how much noise is painted into the six channels Hue Saturation Value Red Green and Blue It also has two noise modes Uniform and Gauss which give slightly different effects You can simul taneously paint and adjust the sliders while the popup is up to test out different combinations of effects NOTE The red slider is also used for Mask Paint and Erase Paint Jitter Button Jitter Paint adds a random positional jitter to paint ing The paint brush bounces around randomly to give a scatter paint effect You can control the amount of jitter with a slider on the Jitter Popup Revision A 4 285 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Jitter Popup Figure 4 89 Jitter Popup To vary the amoun
552. s you to define thresholds for the different channels RGBA in the image as well as the resolution for each sub pixel grid to be used The thresholds use defaults that take into account the human eye s sensitivity to the green color channel as well as stair stepping artifacts that appear along the edges of the image Press the Level button to specify the number of sub pixels to be used in the render A level of six means thirty six subpixels will be used for each pixel in the original image More is not necessarily better here but more is definitely slower Revision A 5 93 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation User Def 1 User Def 2 R 40 30 Advanced Settings Figure 5 19 User Defined Distort Filter Popup Keyframe Distort Preview Modes Keyframe Distort has three Preview Modes Wire frame Final and Final Plus Alpha Keyframe Dis tort always displays a wireframe bounding box whatever the preview mode In Final mode a full resolution preview of the image is displayed in the bounding box In Final plus Alpha mode the pre view takes the alpha transparency of the image into account as well You manipulate the wireframe box in real time on the Canvas Change Mode Button The Change Mode Button toggles through the modes of the current paste operation The arrow keys increment and decrement the co ordinates of the current paste operation Keypad Controls for Paste Functions You ca
553. salesperson to order additional fonts from the library of over 1 500 fonts 4 20 1 Text Panel TEXT squarex Set Edit Set swissrom swissxc Set Move Set Refresh Center Lead Erase Size D Align Save gt Trans Buffer Render Recall Figure 4 134 Text Panel Text Edit Button Press the Edit button to begin entering text from the keyboard or to edit existing text As you type the text appears on the Canvas in vector outline form A Revision A 4 401 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation small triangle appears at the base of the characters that represents the insertion point Press the Edit Button a second time to terminate Text Editing THE TEXT EDIT BUTTON MUST BE ON IN ORDER TO USE ANY OF THE TEXT EDITING FUNCTIONS Selecting Text When the Text Edit Button is on you can select dis played text by pressing and dragging the pen over the text outline on the Canvas The selected text turns red Most text functions use selected text these turn off the selection when complete To unselect the selected text press on the Canvas away from the displayed text Font Elevator In the upper left of the Main Text Panel Menu is the Font Elevator It has four levels each of which can hold a different font To bring a font into a level or to change the font in a level e Press on the in arrow at the left of the elevator le
554. scription of this actor type Revision A 5 47 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Mask Actor The Mask Actor calls an image from disk and uses its alpha or transparency data to mask the actor below it The Mask Actor has a large variety of modes for masking including most of the effects on the Image Tools in the Paint Environment For example it can make a mask on the basis of bright ness to animate spotlights or shadows Or it can make a mask on the basis of the Ripple function to animate liquid or glass refractions The Mask Actor can contain a curve path for the mask to follow during the animation as well as key frames for DVE type rotation in X Y and Z These keyframes also control attributes such as Transpar ency Scale Slant Mirror and Under See page 5 162 for a full description of this actor type Reference Actor labeled Refer Reference Actors allow an existing animation saved on disk to be included in other animations You can use the Show Troupe button to expand or compress Reference or Troupe Actors An expanded actor shows all the actors contained in it A compressed actor hides all its actors and displays only on one layer Reference Actors can have paths and key frames allowing the member actors possibly hav ing their own relative paths and keyframes to move as a group Reference Actors cannot be edited Troupe Actor Troupe Actors are like Reference Actors i
555. separate controls for setting timecode You can set up for either timecode or frame mode by toggling the Show Timecode Show Frame Number Button at the lower right cor ner of the Popup Each of the six devices has the following timecode controls A Timecode Window for entering time code Timecode Bump Buttons that allow you to bump the timecode up or down one incre ment A Timecode Input Button gt that takes the current timecode from the device six disk paths have the same timecode controls except for the Timecode Input But ton Reset All Button Resets the entire Setup Popup including clearing the disk path windows Revision A 5 17 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Reset Time Button Resets all timecode windows in the Setup Popup to Zero Reset Src Tar Button Resets all of the Source Target Selection Buttons to Off Rescale Button When active automatically re scales the source or target images see below for details in the Source Setup Popup and the Target Setup Popup Preroll Button For source and target VLAN controlled VTRs The default pre roll is 5 seconds On some VTRs you may want to set up a shorter pre roll but be careful that you don t create locking problems if you set it too short If you are experiencing locking problems you may want to set the pre roll at longer than 5 sec onds The range is 1 to 15 seconds To change the pre roll
556. ser Name Text Window 3 14 User Number Window 3 14 Index 28 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual User Password Text Window 3 14 User Popup 3 14 User Name Text Window 3 14 User Number Window 3 14 User Password Text Window 3 14 V V Adj Button 3 45 video boards 3 37 4 155 video noise 4 284 4 303 video recorders configuring 3 36 4 426 address of 3 43 communications parameters 3 44 multiple VTRs 3 37 ports 3 41 source and target 3 43 4 157 video boards 3 37 adjusting 3 45 controlled by Liberty list of 3 38 controlling 4 426 5 13 grabbing from 4 428 5 122 rotoscoping 4 453 source and target 4 426 5 12 Vidjet Button 4 455 VTR Configuration Panel Grab and Show Buttons configuring for 4 157 VTR Configuration Panel Menu 3 36 VTR Panel Menu 4 425 4 426 configuring video recorders 4 426 controlling video recorders 4 426 VTR Set up Popup 4 432 VTR Set up Popups 5 15 Revision A Index 29 CHYRON Corporation Warp Corners 4 130 4 135 Wrap Button 4 342 Write on Actor 5 46 5 131 5 151 burning in 5 136 Paint Gap Popup 5 135 Write on Actors nesting 5 136 X X Resolution Button 3 22 Y Y Resolution Button 3 22 Z zooming in and out 4 66 Index 30 Revision A
557. signal at the upper and lower ends Low ering the upper marker increases the opacity of the most opaque areas of the key matte This will make semi transparent areas of the Canvas more opaque less keyed This is useful when you want to keep those areas in the picture Conversely increas ing the lower marker of the slider makes the most transparent parts of the key totally transparent Use this to clip out undesired parts of the Canvas which are still visible but have high transparency Smooth Slider The Smooth Slider next to the Alpha Slider makes the Alpha clipping effect smoother In other words increasing its value makes the edges of the matte softer when you re using the Alpha Slider actually it only applies to the lower marker of the Alpha Slider Revision A 4 357 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Color Slider Use the Color Slider to neutralize or adjust out the keyed color blue or green if it still appears in the composited picture For example if blue still appears on the composited result of a blue screen increasing the Color Slider reduces the blue color component in those areas Edge Button The Edge Button below the Color Slider limits the Color Slider s effect to transparent areas of the key Thus when the Edge Button is on the Color Slider has no effect on opaque areas of the key In practice this removes blue or green at the edges of the key Keep Colors Sliders Use
558. sks When Paint On Temp Mode is active all paint func tions apply to the current Temp layer and only works if the current Temp is an active layer that is if itis displayed as a layer on the Canvas Paint functions that need the current Temp as a source image such as Reveal Paint are disabled Paint Environment 4 240 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual When Paint is off pressing on a layer on the Canvas makes that layer the current layer This is a quick way to select a layer for Painting or for applying Image Tools You can change brush color transparency and paint mode during painting The Grid and Direction functions the Direction Button the Horizontal But ton and the Vertical Button constrain painting and line curve drawing If a mask is active on the Can vas painting or line curve drawing only affects the masked area When painting to the Canvas the under prefix but ton when used with Paint Line Curve and Shape causes these functions to paint under the picture on the Canvas While painting or line curve shape drawing the Under Prefix can be turned on or off at any time When painting to Canvas you can erase from the Canvas by painting with no palette color selected When painting to Mask the Invert Prefix button causes the paint functions to erase from the current mask rather than adding to it NOTE If the Mask is active and you turn on Paint while in Paint on Mask mode the mask b
559. sn t have one or to change an existing password To change a User Login Account Password 11 12 4 15 Press the Set User Password Button The User Popup appears Press on the Next and Previous Buttons to cycle through the existing Login Accounts Find the one for which you want to create a password or whose password you want to change Press on the User Password Text Window Type in the new password and press Enter If you want to change another password go back to step 2 Press OK to confirm the new password s The User Login Popup disappears To exit the popup without making any changes press the Cancel Button Revision A 3 13 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation Set Administration Password Button Figure 3 1 Administration Password Popup The Set Administration Password Button allows you to create a password for access to the Configuration Environment To change an Administration Password e Press the Set Administration Password But ton The Administration Password Popup appears a password into the Password Field The characters when typed appear as asterisks for security reasons Press OK After exiting the Configuration Environment any attempt to re enter Configuration from another envi ronment requires the password Configuration Environment 3 14 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Delete Button The Dele
560. solution are clipped when recalled The Automatic Button When this mode is on Liberty automatically res cales the file being recalled from whatever size aspect ratio it has on the disk to the current resolu tion The Scaling by xy Panel When this mode is on images are rescaled when recalled or saved You can set xy resolution of the source file to be recalled resolution and the target Canvas resolution using the four windows in the Scaling by XY Panel For example if you are recalling files from the disk that are 720 x 486 to the Canvas that is 720 x 540 you enter the following e File X 720 File Y 486 Canvas X 720 e Canvas Y 540 As long as the Scaling by XY Button is active Lib erty uses these settings to rescale the recalled file correcting for the difference in pixel aspect ratio These four settings default to the current Canvas res olution Revision A 4 163 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The Scaling by Percent Panel When this mode is on images are rescaled when recalled or saved You can set the percentage of rescaling using the two windows in the Scaling by Percentage Panel For example if you want to automatically rescale images to half their size you would enter the follow ing e X 50 e Y 50 Interpolation On Button The Interpolation On button enables filtering of the image during re scale When this button is on the image is filtered during re sca
561. ss to turn on off When on inverts the mask before it is used This means that the mask is inverted or that the complement of the mask is used For instance if the Mask Actor has a solid circle as its reference file like a spotlight inverting it would cause the mask to appear everywhere except inside the circle This is true of all Mask Actor Modes except Ripple There is a difference between a nor mal Ripple and an inverted Ripple but it s slight not very predictable and generally not useful Using Invert Mode can be especially useful with the Chroma Key Mode With Invert Mode on the Chroma Key Mode masks out a color and whatever file is assigned to the actor can be used to filter out any garbage that slips by the Chroma Key Mask Inplace Button Press to turn on off If Inplace is turned on the mask effect is applied to the actor below before the actor is transformed rotated scaled etc and pasted onto the Canvas Then the masked result is pasted onto the Canvas transformed by the keyframe of the actor below For example a perspective view of a Revision A 5 179 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation spotlight shining on a background texture would appear with both the spotlight and the texture in per spective If Inplace is turned off the mask effect is applied to the actor below after the actor is pasted onto the Canvas A perspective view of the background tex ture would appear in the non perspecti
562. st Mask is easily computed using the following for mula divide by 1024 to convert to KB divide by 1024 again to convert to MB bytes 4 times Canvas x resolution times Canvas y resolution for Liberty 32 bytes 8 times Canvas x resolution times Canvas y resolution for Liberty 64 Paint Environment 4 80 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mask Display Buttons Use Mask Button The top button next to the mask thumbnail labeled Mask is highlighted when a mask is active on the Canvas When it s not highlighted press it to make the current mask active A masked area is normally displayed on the Canvas by a transparent color superimposed over the Can vas the default mask color is transparent red The buttons at the right of the Mask Elevator provide choices about the masks are displayed The top but ton labeled Mask is highlighted when a mask is active on the Canvas Mask Only Mode Only Press the Mask Only Button to display the mask as white on black White indicates the presence of mask black indicates no mask No other picture elements are displayed so you see the mask alone This mode is useful for previewing luminance or chrominance masks while adjusting them Transparent Mask Mode Tran Press the Transparent Mask Button to display the background color through the masked area of the Canvas Thus the masked area is displayed as trans parency not as a separate colo
563. ste Normal Mode eese d 2112 Paste Normal 4 113 Paste Color Mode eee 42715 Paste Color 4 116 Paste Shadow Mode esee 4 118 Paste Shadow Popup 4 118 Paste Extrude Mode 4 121 Paste Extrude 4 121 Paste Emboss Mode 4 125 Paste Emboss Popup 4 126 Paste Distort Mode esses 42129 Paste Distort 4 129 Perspective Transform 4 131 About Filters rer rte grands 4 137 Realtime Paste Distort Preview on Some Platforms 4 141 Tile Button ieee ect is ote nce iiec d 2142 Tile Set Popup Corner 4 142 PAPA Buttons re e Ctr tet ense ede 4 144 ere eres 4 145 Grab and Show Functions 4 149 Grab Bultori eerte 4 149 Grab POPUP eis ite te eR ERR 4 149 Grabbing Video to a Disk Array
564. such as shadow emboss Cinefusion Shapes Plug ins keying brightness ripple and other Mask Actor effects Animation Environment 5 102 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The lower portion of the Keyframe Edit Menu below the green OK button contains buttons related to the Speed curve including buttons to Add and Delete Speed Nails and a 5 level elevator and controls for recalling and saving speed nails It also contains in out buttons for zooming the speed curve display in and out These buttons are described in the following sections Speed Curve Elevator The Speed Curve Elevator has 5 levels each of which can store a Speed Curve Beneath the eleva tor are three buttons Save Swap and Recall With one of the elevator levels highlighted pressing Save then pressing a speed curve on the timeline causes the selected Speed Curve to be saved in that elevator level Pressing Swap then pressing a speed curve on the timeline exchanges the selected Speed Curve with the Speed Curve in the current elevator level if any Pressing Recall then pressing a speed curve on the timeline recalls a Speed Curve from the high lighted elevator level replacing the current Speed Curve in the Keyframe Timeline When you press on a Speed Curve Elevator level a prompt appears in the Prompt Window If the pressed level is empty the prompts says for exam ple Level 2 is empty If there is a Speed Curve in that level t
565. t CHYRON Corporation If this button is off the texture corner points of the keyframe are interpolated from the previous key frame to the next keyframe according to the relative time of the keyframe Rotate Attribute Button When you change the rotation of the keyframe the Rotate Attribute Button turns on When the Rotate Attribute Button is on the keyframe s X Y Z rota tion is controlled by the rotation functions of the Keyframe Distort Popup When it is off the key frame s rotation is interpolated from the nearest neighboring keyframes having the Rotate button on Scale Attribute Button When you change the size of the keyframe the Scale Attribute Button turns on When the Scale Attribute Button is on the keyframe s X Y size is controlled by the scaling functions of the Keyframe Distort Popup When it is off the keyframe s scale is inter polated from the nearest neighboring keyframes having the Scale button on Slant Attribute Button When you change the slant of the keyframe the Slant Attribute Button turns on When the Slant Attribute Button is on the keyframe s slant is con trolled by the slant functions of the Keyframe Dis tort Popup When it is off the keyframe s slant is interpolated from the nearest neighboring keyframes having the Slant button on Animation Environment 5 84 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Keyframe Distort Popup Preview Image Lock Erase Position
566. t 3 2 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual System Information Default Scheme s License Information Set Scheme under add copy Color Scheme Configuration Defining VTR VLAN generic SMPTE Abekas 0 Abekas 5 66 Canvas Resolution Fast exit 720 540 Control Temp infa Cels Info Horizontal Mask Info TE Defaults Address DPI 100 Dropfr Src Comm V Adj Config NTSC PAL FILM Black Border Alt Style 30 fris 25 fris 24 fris Video Configuration Canvas Configuration Menu Configuration Canvas Menu 1 Dir Video Framer Option Cursor C L print function of a button or key B CALL HELPC Figure 3 1 Configuration Environment Revision A 3 3 Hardware Options Avion Centaur Cindy SGI Galileo SGI Impact Octane SGI 02 SGI VideoFramer Software Options Expanded Resolution Motion Tracking Cinefusion GIF TIFF LZW Compression Active Server amber Option Management Configuration Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 3 1 2 3 1 3 Customizing Menus In the Configuration Environment you can change the colors of the menu to fit your personal prefer ences Liberty remembers these settings in your login account and they will be the same the next time you login to the same account The default menu settings are optimized for general use Get acquainted with the use of the Liberty soft ware before deciding on your personal menu color configurations Color Sch
567. t of jitter in Jitter Paint e Press the corner button of Jitter Paint The Jitter Popup appears e Press and drag the Jitter Slider The scale goes from 0 to 300 e Press OK to set the value and remove the popup Jitter Paint can be used with all other Paint Modes including Paint On Mask as well as with Line Curve and Shape Draw 4 13 9 Pressure Button Pressure Paint is a mode which when enabled invokes the pressure sensitive features of the tablet With the Pressure Popup pen pressure can control brush size jitter rotation and color as well as trans parency If you are using a mouse or if the current Paint Environment 4 286 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual tablet is not pressure sensitive the Pressure Button does nothing Pressure Mode works with all Paint Modes including Paint On Mask Press the Pressure Button to turn on off pressure sensitive mode Pressure Popup ramp sine smooth poster invert um EB Num OK Cancel Jitter Recall Save Alpha 4ngle Size Reset Figure 4 90 Pressure Popup Press the corner button of the Pressure Button to call up the Pressure Popup Use the Pressure Popup to assign different painting functions to pressure sensi tivity They include Angle Size Alpha transpar ency Jitter and Color You can use any combination of these modes at one time NOTE Angle only works with user brushes since the other brush types
568. t to video The Frames Window is automatically updated to the number of frames in the clip based on the size of the file Then exit the popup and hit the Show Button The entire clip will be played through the video device The clip can also be played through the File Man ager interface When bringing up the File Manager and browsing any saved clips you can see that they have the VTR type controls available lt lt I l gt gt T You can use these controls to play and step through the clip interactively through the video board directly from the disk array Thus you can play and examine the clip in full resolution on the video monitor Paint Environment 4 156 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Set up for Grab and Show You set up Grab and Show using the Video Panel in the Configuration Environment Consult the Liberty Technical Reference Manual for details The Grab function uses the Source recording device on the Paint Environment s VTR Panel and the Configure Environment s Video Panel The Show function uses the Target channel Target on the Paint Environment s VTR Panel and Tar on the Configure Environment s Video Panel Revision A 4 157 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 11 RECALL SAVE FILE FUNCTIONS These buttons are used for saving files to disk or recalling images or files from disk storage 4 11 1 Recall File Button Host local Dir newui Disk File ripple Canv
569. t up Popup In addition when setting up the disk path the file pathname for the clip an extension of raw must be added to the filename Once you have rendered a RAW YUV clip file you can recall frames from the clip by selecting the clip as a disk path in the Source VTR Set up Popup The Grab Button in Paint will then grab individual frames from the clip file based on the disk path s source timecode frame number Or the Filmstrip Revision A 4 455 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Actor in Animation can be used to input frames from the clip to do this put the Filmstrip Actor in Source VTR mode and assign the clip as the disk path for Source VTR see page 5 120 for more details In addition if the RAW YUV clip is rendered to a Disk Array and if your SGI system has an O2 Octane or Impact video board you can play the clip in real time through the video board See the section on Showing Video from a Disk Array see Show Button on page 4 155 for details on how to do this Note also that for the above real time playback through the video board to work the video clip has to be rendered in 601 PAL 720 x 576 or NTSC 720 x 486 resolution If the canvas resolution does not match one of these you can use the Target Re scale Button described in the section below to re scale the clip to the proper resolution as it is ren dered Target Re scale Button With a device or disk path active
570. te and De saturate require an image in the File Button to work on Smear Warp Blur Sharpen Emboss Burn Dodge Saturate and De saturate modify the rendered result of the layers below the write on actor while Normal Mode just paints with the selected colors Write on Actors have the following choice of Paint modes Normal Smear Warp Blur Sharpen Emboss Burn Dodge Saturate De Saturate Reveal Tint Hue Tint Paste Pick Noise lumi nance and Noise color File Button Press on the File Button on the Write on Actor Popup to choose a source file for the modes that require it Animation Environment 5 134 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Write On Actor Keyframe Popup When the Write on Edit Keyframe Button is acti vated an additional write on actor keyframe popup appears Brush Size Brush Gap i rotate scale slant Figure 5 35 Write on Actor Keyframe Popup The Write on Size Slider The left slider Press and drag to set the size of the brush The range is 1 to 127 pixels the same as in the Paint Environ ment The Write on Gap Slider The right slider Press and drag to change the gap between brush place downs The gap is expressed in percentage of the diameter of the brush At 100 the brushes are placed edge to edge At more than 100 there is a gap between brushes At less than 100 the brushes overlap Defaultis the minimum gap 1 Revision A 5 135 Animatio
571. te mode displayed in the mode window Paste Mode Selection Once the Paste Popup is on the screen the bottom right corner of the popup will identify the Paste Mode selected Normal Color Shadow Extrude Emboss or Distort To change the Paste Mode press on the arrows on either side of the Paste Mode name to cycle through the six modes stopping at the desired mode 4 9 5 Paste Normal Mode Paste Normal is the only paste mode with no effects It pastes the contents of the Transfer Panel into the Canvas without altering them although you can vary the transparency of the pasted image depending on the setting of the Transparency Slider Scale in the Palette Panel To access the Paste Normal Popup press the corner button of the Paste Button when Normal is dis played in the mode window of the Paste Button The Paste Normal Popup appears and a preview of the pasted image appears on the Canvas Paint Environment 4 112 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Paste Normal Popup Preview Erase OK Final Alpha Cancel LE Woe name of settings Adjust Center Inplace Pen Position Normal Paste Modes Figure 4 41 Paste Normal Popup The Paste Normal Popup contains commands for precise placement of the pasted image These stan dard placement functions appear on the popups for all the other paste modes The Preview Button This button changes preview modes for the pasted im
572. te button will delete the password from the system so that it is not activated when entering the Configuration Environment 3 2 1 User Popup Press any of the top three buttons in the User Panel to call up this popup menu User Number Text Window Press to enter a User Login Account number 1 through 99 The default is the lowest unused num ber User Name Text Window Press to enter the User Login Account name up to 20 characters User Password Text Window Press to enter the User Login Account password if any up to 20 characters Next Button Press to display the name of the next User Login Account Prev Button Press to display the name of the previous User Login Account Cancel Button Press to cancel any changes you made to the User Login Accounts and exit the User Popup Revision A 3 15 Configuration Environment CHYRON Corporation OK Button Press to confirm any changes you made and exit the User Popup 3 3 CANVAS PANEL 64 bit Color Range Display Linear Cineon messages 8 65535 8 255 Canvas Resolution 728 548 Horizontal Yertical Defaults Dropfr NTSC PAL FILH 30 frs 25 5 24 fr s Canvas Configuration Figure 3 4 The Canvas Panel Configuration Environment 3 16 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 64 bit Color Range Display Liberty 64 Only When using Liberty 64 the monitor of your com puter can t display th
573. te directory If it does you are prompted to Revision A 4 453 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation confirm that you want to over write the file If you answer Yes the FTP transfer will commence When the transfer finished the message FIP Transfer Complete is displayed in the Prompt Win dow If the FTP transfer fails a red error message appears in the Prompt Window for example if the user name or password for the remote system is incorrect Re scaling for Realtime Playback To achieve realtime playback on the iNFiNiT Chy ron Motion Files must normally limited in size for example 224 x 200 pixels You can do this most easily using the Re scale Button in the Target VTR Set up Popup where you can enter the target X and Y resolution for each disk path For example turn ing on Re scale and setting the X and Y rescale con trols to 224 and 200 would cause each rendered frame to be re scaled to 224 x 200 before being writ ten to the Chyron Motion File Recalling Chyron Motion Files You can recall Chyron Motion Files using the Recall and File Manager Tools just like any other image file format This only recalls the first frame in the clip however To recall multiple frames in the clip you must select the file as a disk path in the Source VTR Set up Popup The Grab Button in Paint will then grab individual frames from the Chyron Motion File based on the disk path s source timecode frame number Or
574. te on Macros containing hand painted brush strokes using Pressure Paint for example When the Macro renders as an animation layer Lib erty switches momentarily to the Paint Environment then back to the Animation Environment for the next frame To create a Macro Actor that plays through at each frame e Create a Macro in the Paint Environment See page 4 394 Inthe Animation Environment clear the Time line if necessary e Adda Macro Actor to the Timeline e Press the File Window at the right of the Time line and assign the Macro you just made This creates a Macro Actor that plays the entire macro at every frame e Render a Storyboard of the animation and play it back To create a Macro Actor that plays incremen tally e Repeat steps 1 through 4 above Revision A 5 151 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press the Edit Keyframe Button at the right of the Timeline The Keyframe Popup appears e Press on the first Keyframe to edit it The Macro Keyframe Popup appears e Press in the End Line Window in the Macro Keyframe Popup then type in 1 The Macro plays one line of the Macro per frame e Render a Storyboard of the animation and play it back Macro Actor Keyframe First amp Last Line Numbers These windows set which lines of the Macro are to be rendered at the keyframe They are set by default to the first and last lines of the Macro assigned to the actor When
575. te on animation In the Write on Actor Popup press on the arrows next to the Text Window in the Brush Mode Button to choose a brush mode Prog Solid Air Custom or press on the Text Win Revision A 5 131 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation dow itself to call up a popup with all the brush modes The Brush Mode Button you press dis plays in the Text Window e Press on the arrows next to the Text Window in the Paint Mode button to choose a paint mode see Figure 5 34 or press on the Text Window itself to call up a popup with all the brush modes The Paint Mode Button you press displays in the Text Window If you choose Paste Tint Noise Hue Pick or Reveal you can give the Write on a file to use in the File Win dow this takes the place of the file in the Temp Buffer that would be normally used in these modes in the Paint Environment Write on Color Button The Write on Color Button allows you to choose two colors for display of the write on one beginning the write on and one ending it with a smooth gra dated ramp between the two To set the color of the Write on actor e Press the left color box in the Write on Color Button The Color Palette identical to the Pal ette in the Paint Environment appears at the upper left of the Animation Environment e Choose modify a palette box for the beginning write on color e Press again the left color box in the Write on Color Button The Color Pal
576. tep whose image file you want to change for example 3 of 10 You can also press directly on the number window and type in a new number e Press the window in the File Button The File Popup appears e Select a picture file from the File Popup by pressing on or typing its filename The file name appears in the File Button This image or filmstrip is now assigned to the current step of the cycle Multiple Cel File Button Displays the current step image file or filmstrip in the cycle Multiple Cel In and Out Number Windows The In and Out Buttons treat a step in the cycle as a sequence of numbered files For the filmstrips sequentially numbered files these designate the numbers that the filmstrip starts and ends with The In number is the number of the first file in the film strip and the Out number is the number after the last file in the filmstrip Using these numbers you can designate a section of the filmstrip instead of begin ning at the very beginning and ending at the very end which is the default If the file has a number in it butis only a single file then the In number should be the number of the file and the Out number should be one more than that Animation Environment 5 116 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Multiple Cel Num Button Displays the number of the current step in the cycle and the number of total steps files or filmstrips in the sequence A filmstrip is disp
577. text one beginning the animation and one ending it with a smooth dissolve between the two To animate the color of the Text actor Press the left color box in the Text Color But ton The Color Palette identical to the Palette in the Paint Environment appears at the upper left of the Animation Environment e Choose modify a palette box for the beginning text color e Press again the left color box in the Text Color Button The Color Palette disappears The beginning text color is now set Repeat steps 1 through 3 using the right Color Box in the Text Color Button The ending text color is now set Animation Environment 5 130 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 5 7 6 Write On Actor Popup Name Loops 1 Begin 0 End 480 File Mode lt gt Paint Brush lt gt Air Color E Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 32 Write On Actor Popup The Write on actor allows you to animate a paint brush along a curve path to create write on anima tions You can use any of the four Brush Modes the same as in the Paint Environment You can nest Write on actors to create complex brush effects You can create a Cycle actor to run along with a Write on actor to create burn in effects To create a Write on Actor Adda Write on Actor to the Timeline The new actor is selected in the Timeline See adding actors page 5 51 e Press the Edit Path Button and create a curve path for the wri
578. th a device or disk path active press on the Rescale Button to enable it it becomes highlighted causing the input images to be re scaled The Rescale Button controls only the current high lighted device disk path When the Rescale Button is active you can use the X and Y windows to enter new resolutions in pixels for the images to be re scaled to Revision A 5 21 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Target Setup Popup NOTE The Source and Target Setup Popups are identical in appearance except that the Source Popup has a large blue button at the top labeled Source and the Target Setup Popup has a large pink button at the top labeled Target Each popup provides for the configuration of six possible devices VTRs DDRs etc and six possible disk paths Liberty allows you to record to more than one target device at a time at different resolutions if desired You can record either a full color image or a matte image a black and white rendering of the image s alpha channel Liberty renders each animation frame once saving the result in the Canvas The frame is then output to each active Target VTR and or disk path The frame is re scaled if needed for each out put device and either full color or matte information is recorded to each device The only difference between setting up source devices as outlined above and setting up target devices is that when setting up a target device
579. th a slider with 30 levels for posterization The lower the slider values the heavier the poster ization effect as the slider represents the number of colors the canvas is being reduced to Preview and the Active Preview Button Press Preview to see a preview of the posterization When the Active Button is on every change you make on the slider updates the previewed image Pressing Cancel restores the original Canvas image unchanged Pressing OK performs the posterization on the masked area Paint Environment 4 314 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 15 7 Map Button Press to map selected palette colors onto the Canvas using the active mask Map takes the chosen underlined colors in the pal ette and uses the active mask to map them to the Canvas For example with red as the first and blue as the second color chosen in the palette unmasked pixels become pure red completely masked pixels become pure blue and any in between mask values become some shade of purple Of course you can use as many colors as you like and they are interpo lated across the whole range of mask values The Map Window Green Blue Hue Saturation Val tie Figure 4 98 Map Modes Popup The Map Window displays the current Map Mode Pressing on the mode label calls up a popup with 7 mode buttons Press on one to activate it If Color Mode is on the colors map onto the RGB of each pixel as described above
580. the toggle button above the y window displays the label Image the coordinates indicate the center of the image to be pasted When that button displays the label Axis the coordinates indicate the XY posi tion of the rotational axis of the image It is possi ble to separate the axis from the image center using the Lock button see below Axis Lock Button Global and Local Above the Z window is a Lock Button which when turned on locks the axis to the image This is Glo bal Mode because the locked axis and image move around together inside a world defined by the Canvas When the Lock Button is turned off the axis is free of the image and can be moved com pletely away from it This is Local Mode because the axis now defines local coordinates that the image refers to It is generally better to perform Global moves first then Local ones Image Axis Button Above the Y window is an Image Axis button When the Lock button is off and the Image Axis button is in Image mode dragging the on screen handles moves the image independent of the axis When the Image Axis button is in the Axis mode dragging the on screen handles moves the axis inde pendent of the image When the Lock button is on dragging the on screen handles positions both the image and the axis together Rotation Button Press on the word Rotation to enable Rotation Mode Press and drag on the wireframe s handles to rotate the image in X
581. the Gravity Button is on the Move Button will snap the point being moved to any point it gets close to This allows you to lock curve points together after the points have been added Thus two existing points can be made into duplicates in order to create a animation keyframe hold Point List Button Press this button to recall Point Lists which are curves created with the Motion Tracking function in the Image Tools 2 Panel in the Paint Environment If the Motion Tracking option is not installed the Point List Button will be grayed out Revision A 5 63 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Pressing Point List brings up the file popup allow ing you to select the desired point list file The tracked element can be anything that can be dis tinguished from its surroundings in some way usu ally by its luminance value The Tracking function will create a series of points generating a motion curve path which is saved on disk as a Point List Or it will generate a set of four points defining a warp rectangle that follows an area in the target sequence which is saved on disk as a Corner List which you can recall using the Corners List Button To recall a Point List you must have first created one using the Motion Tracking option in the Image Tools 2 Panel in the Paint Environment For this procedure see below Corners List Button The Corners List Button is used to recall a Corners List which is a speci
582. the Macro to play The Macro plays the appropriate num ber of times You can use this technique along with the Increment Buttons in Save and Recall or with the Rotoscope Buttons to recall process and save large numbers of sequentially num bered files Pause Macro Button Press the Pause Button during a Macro recording to suspend recording until you press Pause again Nei ther the two presses of Pause or anything between is recorded While Pause mode is active the Pause Button is highlighted This can be useful if you dis cover during recording that the right menu wasn t installed etc Revision A 4 415 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Stop Macro Button Press to terminate recording Every Macro must end with Stop Delay Macro Button Press the Delay Button during a Macro recording to insert a pause in the playback You are prompted to enter a number of seconds for the duration of the pause This function is often used to slow the pac ing of the playback of a Macro when it is being used for display purposes Delete Macro Button Press to bring up the File Popup with the list of Mac ros on disk Press on one of the filenames to delete it You are prompted to confirm the deletion Save and Recall State Buttons Save State helps you set up your menus for playing back a Macro Often when you play back a Macro you want certain menu set ups in order that it runs correctly yet t
583. the canvas con trols either the image position or the position of the shadow based on whether the Position Off set and Angle of Shadow buttons are highlighted on If all buttons are highlighted the pen moves the image and shadow together If the offset and angle buttons are highlighted moving the pen only controls the shadow position If just the Angle but ton is on moving the pen only changes the shadow angle and so on The Pen Position Buttons work the same as in all other paste modes controlling the position of the original image to be pasted The Adjust functions allow fine positioning for the original image to be pasted as in other paste modes The Blur Sliders work the same as Paste Color and control the blur of the drop shadow The Transparency Slider on the Paste Shadow Popup controls the transparency of the drop shadow not the image itself Paint Environment 4 118 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Preview Final Alpha Center Inplace Pen Position F Offset Erase K Palette 38 Cancel Blur Alpha of Shadow E name of settings Adjust Shadow Paste Modes igure 4 43 Paste Shadow Popup Shadow Angle Button The clock like button is the Shadow Angle Button and controls the angle of the shadow The preview of the drop shadow is always a wireframe box regardless of what preview mode is active for the image to be pasted
584. the center cross allows you to move the entire wireframe NOTE Warp Corners is part of the Motion Tracking software option and requires that the appropriate licensing be activated Distort Filters Distort has its own rendering filters three pre set and two user definable You should experiment to determine which ones are best for your applications The Point Filter corresponds roughly to the coarse Revision A 5 91 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation filtering the Bilinear Filter corresponds to medium filtering and the Adaptive Filter to fine filtering Point Filter is the default fast but a bit coarse About Filters Two stages are required to properly reconstruct an image in 3 D perspective The first stage is an inter polation or reconstruction stage and the second is an anti aliasing stage If you want to understand fil ters better the following will give you a quick explanation of how filters work This will also help you understand the User defined filters Interpolation There are two methods used to interpolate or recon struct the image from two dimensional space into the specified three dimensional space The two methods are 1 nearest neighbour and 2 linear Nearest neighbor chooses pixels based on the near est sample pixel This maintains sharpness when the image is enlarged and reduced However when you scale an element up from small to very large this method
585. the current keyframe into the next key frame Revision A 5 81 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Prev Button In the Keyframe Distort Popup you can press the Prev Button to move to the previous keyframe in the actor Press the Copy Prefix first then the Prev But ton to copy all the attributes excluding X Y Z position of the current keyframe into the previous keyframe NOTE When you copy keyframes with the Copy Prefix Button all values are copied except position Keyframe Copy All This is a feature that allows you to copy a key frame s settings including its position to another keyframe With a Keyframe Matchstick highlighted for editing press the Add Prefix Button then the Copy Prefix Button then the Next or Prev Keyframe Button This only works for two keyframes with curve points that are adjacent on the timeline This is perhaps the easiest way to create a hold on exist ing keyframes Keyframe Alpha Slider Scale Press and drag to change the transparency of the keyframe Alpha Attribute Button When the Alpha Button is on the transparency of the keyframe is controlled by the setting of the Key frame Alpha Slider Scale just above the Alpha But ton When the Alpha Button is off the keyframe s alpha is interpolated from the nearest neighboring keyframes with the Alpha Button on Animation Environment 5 82 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual You can use the Al
586. the individual Layers because they are still separate To save rotoscoped output as Layers files eT Set up a disk path in the Target VTR Set up Popup Revision A 4 449 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 2 Press the File Type Button at the right of the disk path s File Window The File Type Popup appears 3 Press the Layers Button in the Liberty File Formats section of the popup The button is highlighted and the Layers File Type is assigned to the disk path Eag Press OK and exit all the popups e 5 Proceed with the rotoscope as usual Rendered composited frames are saved to the specified disk path as Layers Files Layers Undo in Rotoscoping Unlike Undo for Temps which undoes the last change made to the current Temp which is most likely turned on as a layer Undo for Layers applies to rotoscoping of layers see above Layers Undo is available when it is enabled in the Undo Configura tion Panel and when layers are active and being rotoscoped for example if the user has layers 1 and 2 on and is rotoscoping the layers and the Canvas In such a case each time you press the Roto Button on the VTR Panel the current set of layers is saved to a Layers Undo file prior to being written out to the current target device After writing to the target device rotoscoping updates the Canvas and the active layers with the next image from the active source devices At this point you can use Layers Undo
587. the recorded Normal rate Double Button Press to high light and set the requested rate at twice the recorded Normal rate Resolution Windows These buttons are for information only The Storyboard can be played back only in multiples of its recorded resolution The Recorded Windows show the X and Y dimensions of the recorded Story board file The Actual Windows show the X and Y dimensions of the images on the Canvas Magnifying Storyboards You can use the In and Out Magnify Buttons to decrease or increase the resolution of the Storyboard frames on the Canvas but there are some limita tions You can magnify the Storyboard to a resolu tion larger than the current Canvas resolution However a Storyboard recorded at a higher resolu tion than the current Canvas will be displayed as well as possible You cannot zoom out farther than the resolution of the recorded Storyboard so a Sto ryboard recorded at Full resolution cannot be zoomed out Displaying Full Screen Storyboards Press the On Button below the Animation Timeline to enable the Permanent Storyboard display Then press the Canvas Button to display the Storyboard full screen on the Canvas The Permanent Story Animation Environment 5 244 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual board Buttons are available at the bottom of the screen for various playback options See page 5 251 for a full description of these fun
588. the three Keep Colors Sliders to preserve cer tain colors in the Canvas image that would other wise be keyed out Each slider has two markers Keep H Hue Slider Use the Keep H Slider to keep certain hues in the Canvas from keying out For example in a blue screen Canvas you may want to keep certain areas of cyan from keying out Adjusting the Keep H Slider so that the bottom marker is at the beginning of the cyan s range and the top marker is at the end of the cyan s range will preserve that range of colors in the Canvas The Keep H Slider defaults to 0 for the bottom marker and 255 for the top marker 1 the slider has no effect Keep S Saturation Slider The Keep S Slider is similar to the Keep H Slider except that the bottom and top markers work inde pendently For example if you want to keep the Paint Environment 4 358 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual least saturated colors in the Canvas from being keyed out you can raise the bottom marker of the Keep S Slider to 20 for example This will keep all pixels whose saturation is less than 20 Likewise the top marker allows the user to preserve very saturated colors For example moving the top marker of the Keep S Slider down to 100 will keep all pixels whose saturation is more than 100 Keep V Value Slider The Keep V Slider works in a similar fashion for value Raise the bottom marker to keep dark colors from keying and lower the top marker t
589. ther Popup Figure 4 112 contains a host of tools for controlling the application of different kinds of quantization to the Canvas The two basic modes of quantization are Uniform and Optimal The Noise and Greyscale Buttons can be on or off for either Uniform or Optimal Mode but the Dither Mode can t be used with Optimal Mode Uniform Mode Press to activate Uniform quantization splits the color space into equal partitions Optimal Mode Press to activate Optimal quantization computes the best color table for the specific image that you re quantizing Optimal quantization performs very well on most images even at low levels few bits per pixel Dither Button When the Dither Button is high lighted the quan tized image is also dithered This is the technique used in newspaper photos where the appearance of higher color resolution is achieved by varying the density of colored dots Dither only works with Uniform Mode The Noise Button When the Noise Button is high lighted some noise is added to the quantized image This tends to smooth out color banding artifacts that may appear at lower levels bits per pixel Greyscale Mode and the Greyscale Slider Reduces the quantization to levels of grey When activated you can set how many levels of grey using the Greyscale Slider Revision A 4 347 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation RGB Level Sliders Moving the RGB Level Sliders allows you t
590. ther end of the Frame Slider Insert Before Mode To insert frames into an existing Storyboard file activate the Insert Before Button Set the Start Win dow to the frame before which you want to insert the new frame s The insert frame is displayed on the Canvas Append Mode To append frames to the end of an existing Story board file activate the Append Button The last frame is displayed on the Canvas Erase Functions The Erase Functions allow you to selectively delete frames from a Storyboard file Animation Environment 5 234 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Erase Block Press to delete the frames between the frames dis played in the Start and End Windows inclusive Erase One Press to erase the Start frame Erase All Press to erase all the frames in the Storyboard file Record Rate Window Press this window to change the default rate at which the Storyboard will be played back during normal play When you play back the Storyboard the Playback Popup allows you to select a different playback rate than the one recorded in the file Storyboard Resolution Modes Press one of the Storyboard Resolution Modes to activate it Choices are Full Fine Normal or Coarse Full Resolution The resolution of the frame recorded to the Story board is the same as the Canvas resolution Fine Resolution The resolution of the frame recorded to the Story board is one
591. these buttons to select either NTSC or PAL TV standards Elevator of Pre sets To allow the user to configure set ups for multiple ImageStore s and Infinits the ImageStor set up menu has a 6 level elevator This allows the user to set up and save up to 6 different configurations for Revision A 4 183 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation ImageStore network transfer A name is provided for each elevator level as well immediately above the elevator itself When the user exits Liberty the settings are saved and will be restored next time Liberty is started up If the copy prefix is on when switching elevator lev els the contents of the current elevator are copied to the new one before switching After filling in the fields and highlighting the appro priate buttons confirm the IMAGESTOR Setup menu by pressing the OK button IMAGESTOR Save As Popup ImageStor Database Info description enter the database field 1 fields here field 2 field 3 field 4 Figure 4 63 IMAGESTOR Save As Popup When IMAGESTOR is the current File Save As Mode first press the Save As Button then save the file to a directory filename path and press Enter At this point the IMAGESTOR Save As Popup Paint Environment 4 184 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual appears which provides 5 editable text fields for entering descriptive information and or key word parameters for the IMAGESTOR data
592. tile offset The element is again pasted where you press Double click the Erase All Button to clear the Canvas Press the main Tile Button The tile fills the Canvas row by row according to the offsets you set NOTE Once the offsets have been set you need only press the main part of the Tile Button to automatically tile the whole screen with the image using those offsets Tile Set Corner Button with the Copy Prefix Sets the tiling positions to a rectangular grid with no gaps Revision A 4 143 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To automatically create a tiled pattern with no spaces between tiles Cut the element to be tiled into the Temp Buffer e Press the Copy Prefix then the Tile Set Cor ner Button e Press the main Tile Button The element is tiled with no gaps For information about creating rectangles for seam less tiles see Fold Paint on page 4 283 FTP Button Liberty s FTP function allows you to display navi gate and browse directories on remote systems as well as recall files from them using Liberty s File Manager tools Using FTP allows you to access any remote system on your local network You can also access remote FTP sites over the Internet Press the FTP Button to display the File Manager in the currently selected remote directory The Full Screen File Manager comes up by default with Browse Mode on During FTP operation you can use only Recall functions
593. time code is the frame number within the clip which starts at zero Paint Environment 4 150 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual You can also create a clip file through the VTR interface Set up a target disk path in the Target VTR Set up Popup and change the file type in the Target VTR Set up Popup to RAW yuv Rendering to this disk path in the VTR Panel in the Paint Envi ronment or when rendering an Animation then generates a video clip The saved clip can be dis played through the video as described in the section on Showing below Revision A 4 151 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual INFINIT Prisms External Image file formats AU 288 ImageSt r RLA Liberty Image file formats BHP DIH Cineon Liberty im PDI Layers Scitex SGI rgb Softim Vertigo vuv Figure 4 54 Disk Path File Type Popup Clip file formats Chyron Motion File rau Revision A 4 153 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual 4 10 2 Note that file type for a target disk path is selected by clicking on the File Type Window for the disk path in the Target VTR Set up Popup This brings up the Disk Path File Type Popup The popup has a section for Clip file formats corresponding to files which contain multiple frames Select the Raw YUV button under Clip file formats to specify a clip file format Show Button The Show Button transfers the contents of the C
594. time playback The VTR Panel in the Paint Environment page 4 409 has the same access to saving in the Chyron Motion File Format Note that when saving to a Chyron Motion File the disk path s frame numbers must always start with zero For example when recording to a Chyron Motion Path in the Animation Environment the In frame number timecode must be zero or the record will fail This is because the software uses frame Revision A 5 27 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation zero to trigger the start of a Chyron Motion File Once you ve created a Chyron Motion File how ever you can record to different frames within it by altering the target disk path s frame number accord ingly for example for a fix you could re render frames 10 20 over the original frames 1 20 When rendering to a Chyron Motion Hle is finished you can transfer the file via FTP to a remote direc tory on an iNFiNiT or other system The File Type Popup contains a Setup Button which is active only when the Chyron Motion File Type is selected This button brings up the Chyron Motion File Setup Popup which allows you to enter the host and direc tory path names of the remote system where you want to store the Chyron Motion File Chyron Motion File Setup Popup remote system FTP set up node user name guest path temp dir usr tmp offset position 8 Y BCEA Figure 5 7 Chyron
595. tings on the Adjust Popup The function works identically to the Adjust function on the Image Tools1 Panel in the Paint Environment Animation Environment 5 172 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Mane Beyin End File local hd update r ipplepop Invert IaplTace Noise Bump Map Gamma Edit Keyfr Edit Path Recall Cel Figure 5 45 Mask Actor Popup 3 Noise Mode Press the Noise Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Noise Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below has noise applied to accord ing to the settings on the Noise Popup The function works identically to the Noise function on the Image Tools1 Panel in the Paint Environment Bump Map Mode Press the Bump Map Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Bump Map Mode When turned on the masked area in the actor below is bump mapped The function works identically to the Bump Map function on the Image Tools 1 Panel in the Paint Environment Revision A 5 173 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Gamma Mode Press the Gamma Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Gamma Mode When turned on the gamma of the masked area in the actor below is changed according to the Gamma Slider on the Mask Mode Popup The slider works identically to the Gamma Slider on the Adjust Popup on the Image Tools1 in the Paint Environment NOTE This actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row
596. tion Preview Handle Figure 5 57 Animation Timeline Revision A 5 227 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The Preview Handle is a cursor at the top of the Timeline Its default position is at the left end of the Timeline Press and drag it along the top of the Timeline to manually display the animation in the current Preview Mode In Wireframe and Outline Modes as you drag the Handle the animation plays back according to the position of the moving Han dle In Render Mode one frame is rendered at the point where you lift the pen or mouse The handle changes color to red in Render Mode to alert you that it will render over the canvas if dragged on the timeline When selected an actor with multiple files Film strip Cycle or Multiple Cel Actors in the anima tion displays its current filename and thumbnail as you drag the Handle along the Timeline Thus you can watch the multiple files animate in the Browse image in the Actor Popup The filename shown in the File Button Text Window changes as well When dragging the Handle in Preview Mode you can drop down inside the Timeline where the wire frame of the actor that the pen is over on the Time line highlights The Prompt Window at the bottom of the screen dis plays the frame number of the cursor s position as it moves across the Timeline The Handle works in the Keyframe Timeline Popup as well In Storyboard Preview the Preview Handle manu
597. tion of this actor type Write on Actor The Write on Actor allows you to animate the cur rent paintbrush along a curve path to create signa ture type write on animations See page 5 131 fora full description of this actor type Animation Environment 5 46 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Morph Actor The Morph Actor can use one of two different morph programs Each animates a metamorphosis type distortion of a single image or a morph between two images Triangle Morph uses a triangular grid system and is the faster of the two Line Morph uses free line segments and is much easier to use but ren dering takes longer Line Morph gives more pleas ing organic distortions See page 5 137 for a full description of this actor type Macro Actor The Macro Actor allows you to animate a Macro as part of an animation Plug in Actor The Plug in Actor applies a plug in filter to the actor s below it Switcher Actor The Switcher Actor can call an image from disk and use its alpha data to animate a reveal or wipe The Switcher Actor can also animate simple fades and dissolves See page 5 154 for a full description of this actor type Color table Actor labeled Colortab The Color table Actor calls up a picture file from disk and assigns its gray scale to a set of colors cho sen on the palette Then the assigned colors can be cycled or revealed for flow effects See page 5 159 for a full de
598. tion without seriously altering its content except at very short durations like 15 frames or under sometimes used for quick preview purposes The duration can be expressed in frames or timecode see the Timecode Button above When you save an animation to disk its duration is saved as well Revision A 5 37 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation To change the duration of an animation 1 Press in the Duration Window e 2 In Frame Mode type the number of frames that you want the animation to last In timecode Mode type the timecode duration that you want the animation to last In timecode Mode if the animation is to be 3 seconds and 15 frames long type 3 15 separating the seconds and frames with a space If it is to be an even 3 seconds long type 3 0 e 3 When finished typing press the Enter key If Liberty is configured for NTSC one second is cal culated at 30 frames For PAL one second is calcu lated at 25 frames For film one second is calculated at 24 frames The Duration Button with Add Prefix Use the Add Prefix to add empty time at the end of the animation without changing the duration of the actors in the animation Press the Add Prefix then the Duration Button then type the total longer dura tion An empty space is added at the end of the ani mation If there is empty time at the end of an animation pressing the Add Prefix and then typing a smaller duration will cause the actors to k
599. to indicate that Re scale is active The Shrinkwrap Button When on the file is saved with only its bounding box ignoring any transparent areas of the Canvas outside it Paint Environment 4 168 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Save Inactive Layers Button By default only active layers in RAM are saved in a Layers File As an option you can save the inactive layers in addition to those turned on in a Layers File You control this with the Save Inactive Layers Button in the Save Pop up accessed through the comer button of Save in the Transfer Panel Press on this button to turn it on it becomes highlighted As long as it is on inactive layers will be saved when you save a Layers File 4 11 4 Save File As Button The Save As function allows you to save the Canvas as different file formats Press the main part of this button to save the current Canvas as a file in the cur rent non Liberty file format the one displayed in the text window Press the corner button in the Save File As Button to call up a popup that offers you a choice of foreign file formats in which to save the picture Pressing on the center of the word in the text window also calls up the popup Pressing on either side of the word in the text window toggles through the available file types one by one To save a picture in a non Liberty format e Press the corner button of the Save File As Button The Save As Popup appears Press
600. to the location of the tracked area for every frame in the sequence In Point Mode only the top row of Point Buttons are active the rest are grayed out Point Mode is used to track one element over a film strip with only positional information with no size or rotational change to the tracking element Corner Mode Corner mode works the same as Point Mode except that you define four tracking paths You should usu ally but not always define the four points starting with the lower left corner as Point 1 and move Revision A 5 205 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation counter clockwise This simplifies the task of the Warp Corners functions in the animation actor that the corner paths will be used in Corner Mode is used so that the tracking element will be changed to match the reference area size perspective rota tion Animation Environment 5 206 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual File Luminance Start Lock Frame Current Point 1 Size X 18 Y 186 Move X 10 Output Figure 5 54 Motion Tracking Revision A 5 207 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Motion Tracking Popup Press the Motion Tracking Button on the Image Tools 2 panel in the Paint Environment to call up the Motion Tracking Popup File Button The File Button specifies the target file sequence to work with This is a sequence of files that contains a moving point or area that can be distinguished
601. ton 4 13 Canvas Configuration Panel Menu 3 21 Dots Per Inch Button DPI 3 25 Frame rate Buttons 3 27 5 36 Other Resolution Popup 3 22 X Resolution Button 3 22 Y Resolution Button 3 22 CanvasButton 4 64 Cel Actor 5 45 5 106 Center Button text 4 404 Index 4 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Change Step Button 4 423 Check Animation Button 5 36 Chroma Key Mode 5 165 Chroma Key Popup 4 351 Chyron Motion File 4 448 Chyron Motion File cmf Format 4 447 Chyron Motion File format 5 27 Chyron Motion Files recalling 5 31 Circle Mask Button 4 369 circles making 4 262 circular 4 310 4 311 Clamp Mask Button 4 391 Clear Button Color Mixer Mode 4 50 Clear Color Button 4 37 Clone Paint Mode 4 278 CMYK Mode 4 42 Color Adjust Menu 4 461 Color Correct Button 4 299 Color Mixer 4 49 Color Palette 4 33 4 34 4 35 copying colors 4 52 elevator 4 34 Global Mode 4 36 color ramps 4 35 Color Slider Scales 4 46 changing colors with 4 51 using with multiple colors 4 50 Color Space Button 4 42 Revision A Index 5 CHYRON Corporation colors blending 4 35 4 37 4 309 changing 4 51 mixing 4 49 black and white monitor 4 48 picking from the Canvas 4 38 Color table Actor 5 47 Color table Actor Edit Popup 5 160 Color table Cycle Button 5 161 Color table Duplicate Button 5 161 Color table Edit Col Button 5 162 Color table File Button 5 161 Color table Smooth Button 5 162 Compress Butt
602. ton to start playback As another example Text Actors dis play as outlines in this mode To display its outline a file must have been saved to disk in Liberty 5 5 or later If the file was saved in an earlier version of Liberty it will display as a rectan gle wireframe To display it as an outline simply recall it and re save it in the Paint Environment Render Preview When this mode is active the animation renders the current frame to the screen in full resolution The current frame is determined by dragging the Preview Handle the red cursor at the top of the Timeline along the top of the Timeline to its desired position and releasing Animation Environment 5 224 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual To render a frame with Render Preview Mode 1 6 Press the corner button of the Animation Preview Button The Preview Animation Popup appears Press the Render Mode button to activate it if it s not already high lighted Press OK to remove the popup Press and drag the red Preview Handle cursor along the top of the Timeline until it is at the frame you want to render Lift up on the pen or mouse The current frame renders to the screen Repeat as desired Render Preview mode does not use the Run Button for playback If you press the Run Button while Render mode is active the animation plays back in Wireframe Revision A 5 225 Animation Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Anima
603. tor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the brightness layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Contrast Mode Press the Contrast Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Contrast Mode When turned on the con trast of the masked area in the actor below is changed according to the Contrast Slider on the Mask Mode Popup The slider works identically to the Contrast Slider on the Adjust Popup in the Paint Environment The default is 0 no change NOTE The Contrast Actor operates on all layers below it To make it just affect the row directly below it place a mask actor in mask mode directly above the Contrast layer a fully opaque mask can be used for the mask layer Tint Mode Press the Tint Button on the Mask Actor Popup to turn on Tint Mode When on a tint is applied into the masked area in the actor below Works like the Tint function in the Image Tools 1 Panel in the Paint Environment Set the beginning tint color by pressing on the left Tint Color Button The Color Palette appears Set the first selected color to the value you want to start the tint with Press the left Tint Color Button a sec ond time to remove the Color Palette and set the Revision A 5 167 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation color In the same way set the right Tint Color But ton to determine the end Tint color
604. tton high lights the Rescale Button Pressing the Orientation On Button high lights the Orientation Mirror Button Re scale Button Press to display the Re scale Popup Paint Environment 4 160 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual With the Rescale function you can automatically change the aspect ratio and or size of pictures during recalls or saves there is a Re scale Button in the Save File Popup also This is especially useful for images larger than the current Canvas size or for images generated on systems with different pixel aspect ratios Rescale calls up a popup that allows you to set the special scaling parameters The default mode for both Recall and Save is No Scal ing When a file is rescaled during Recall or Save Lib erty displays a message in the Prompt Window dis playing both the original and the rescaled xy dimensions of the image Revision A 4 161 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Rescale Popup Scaling for RECALL No sealing Automatic Scale by XY File X Canvas Scale by Percent x 100 Y 100 Interpolation On Reset Cancel Figure 4 58 Rescale Popup Paint Environment 4 162 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual The No Scaling Button When this mode is on the default Liberty disables all file rescaling for subsequent Recalls or Saves Images are recalled in the current Canvas resolution Images larger than the current Canvas re
605. tween 10 and 10 the number can be for example 2 377564 This number is the number of input source frames per rendered frame The default is 1 meaning one input source frame for every rendered frame The entire input stream will be given this fixed playback speed You can also press on the numerical window to type in a speed setting The following are exam ples of speed values 2 Renders the Filmstrip Actor twice as fast as normal every other source frame is skipped Animation Environment 5 126 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 0 5 Renders the Filmstrip Actor at half speed every source frame is used for two ren dered frames 1 Renders the Filmstrip Actor backwards at normal speed For this to work the in point must be set to a timecode frame number towards the middle or end of the source stream the actor always starts at this point Dynamic Speed Control Speed Keyframe Button Blur hefore Blur after alpha u warp Reset trail off trail off under Keufr Time 8 Auto Smooth Preview next prey rotate scale s lant Figure 5 30 Filmstrip Keyframe Popup Press on the Keyframe Button inset in the Speed Slider to high light it This turns off the Speed Slider s fixed setting and allows you to assign dynamic keyframed settings to the playback speed Now when this button is high lighted when you press the Edit Keyframe Button and edit a keyframe the popup disp
606. ty Button Curve Popup 4 255 Grid Button 4 54 grid functions applying color to a grid 4 58 functions constrained by grid list of 4 59 setting grids 4 57 H Hardware 4 457 hardware platforms 1 2 3 7 Help Button 1 6 Holdin and Holdout Buttons 5 40 Index 12 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Holdin Button 5 40 Holdout Button 5 40 Home Button 5 9 5 51 Horizontal Vertical Buttons 4 59 Host Button 4 206 HSL Color Space 4 48 HSL Mode 4 42 HSV Mode 4 42 Hue Button 4 318 Hue Paint Mode 4 280 Image Tools 2 Panel 4 339 Insert Step Button 4 423 Install Option Button 3 52 installation 1 2 3 52 Inverse Colors Button 4 37 Invert Prefix Button 4 63 J Jitter Paint Mode 4 285 Jitter Paint with pressure 4 289 K Kerning Button 4 406 keyboard entry 1 4 Revision A Index 13 CHYRON Corporation numeric 1 4 4 13 5 2 keyboard keys assigning functions to 4 416 assigning macros to 4 416 list of functions assigned to 4 417 keyframe attributes 5 79 Keyframe Attributes Popup 5 79 Keyframe Elevator 5 72 Keyframe Popup Menu 5 65 Keyframe Timeline 5 65 5 70 keyframes 5 65 adding and deleting 5 71 attrubutes 5 69 5 70 copying 5 74 5 81 editing 5 80 moving 5 72 L Last Step 71 Button 4 423 Layer Number Button 5 54 5 55 layers animation 5 5 5 6 copying 5 55 moving 5 54 turning off 5 53 zero layer 5 6 layers animations inserting 5 52 Leading Button Text 4 405 Line
607. u have created a useful curve you can save it on disk for later recall back into the Diagram Press the Red Reset Button to restore the diagonal straight default Diagram Press the small gray Reset Button to reset only the sliders The best way to learn to use the Diagram Curve with Apply is to experiment Paint Environment 4 312 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 4 15 5 Color Clip Button 1 000000 Gamma Figure 4 96 Color Clip Popup Press the Color Clip Button to clip the colors in the masked area of the Canvas to legal NTSC or PAL colors Press the corner button of Color Clip to call up the Color Clip Popup NTSC Mode Press to enable NTSC Mode which causes Color Clip to clip colors to NTSC legal values PAL Mode Press to enable PAL Mode which causes Color Clip to clip colors to PAL legal values Gamma Correct Window Press in the window to type in a gamma correction value which is utilized in conversion to from NTSC PAL Color Space A value of 1 means that no gamma is applied in this conversion NOTE Ths Color Clip button is inactive in Liberty 64 since it does not pertain to film or the 64 bit color space Revision A 4 313 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 15 6 Posterize Button Poster ok 7 activa Reset Figure 4 97 Posterize Popup Press to posterize the selected area The corner but ton calls up a popup wi
608. u have questions about the video board application consult the documentation for the video board or contact the vendor of the video board Config OK Button Press the Config Button to confirm all changes you make in VTR configurations None of your VTR configuration changes are per manent until you press the Config Button Any VTR number that does not have a device asso ciated with it should be configured as none if not it takes longer to complete the configurations when you press Config and when you login to Liberty To abort the configuration process after hitting the Con fig Button press the gray End key on the keyboard not the white Esc key When you exit Liberty after configuring VTRs your VTR configurations are remembered in the current User Login Account After you log back in to that User Login Account Liberty configures the record ing devices the first time any of the VTR menus or controls are accessed If while using a certain login account you only use one or two of the total VTRs configure only those in that login account Configuration Environment 3 46 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual 3 8 VIDEO FRAMER PANEL When you are using the Video Framer as your video board Liberty supplies a panel below to choose a video format Press one of the buttons to choose among RGB NTSC PAL D1 D2 RY S Video and a custom format The Video Framer video board is used only on a SGI Personal
609. u when the file was saved Paint Environment 4 192 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual For the above procedure to work both the local SGI system and the infinit host system s need to have a user account named guest with the password anonymous In addition the SGI system s etc hosts file needs to contain an entry for the infinit host system this can also be set up using the Sys tem Manager menu in the SGI desktop toolchest Also networking needs to be set up on the infinit system itself refer to the User Manual or Chyron Customer Support for instructions The Liberty software generates an FIP script to do the transfer The script is equivalent to the following commands gt ftp in lt still store host name gt gt user guest anonymous gt binary gt put lt local file path gt lt file path on still store gt gt close gt quit Check for Overwrite When a file is being transferred to the iNFiNiT Liberty checks the target directory to see if the file already exists If it does a confirmation pop up appears allowing the user to either overwrite the file or cancel the operation If the user confirms over write of the file it will be written to the iNFiNiT This write will overwrite the old copy of the file TIFF File Format Liberty allows the user to save RGB RGBA CMYK color mapped and greyscale TIFF files This is selected via the TIFF setup menu accessed
610. ual Point List Button Motion Tracking option 4 260 Point Mode 5 205 polygons making in Curve Popup 4 257 polygons making in Shapes Popup 4 265 Posterize Button 4 314 prefix buttons 4 15 4 60 on the Full Screen File Menu 4 235 pre press applications 4 47 Pre roll 4 435 Preroll Button 4 435 4 453 5 18 5 33 Pressure Diagram 4 290 Pressure Paint 4 288 Pressure Paint Mode 4 286 Previous Step 4 422 Programmed Brush Mode 4 26 Prompt Window 1 3 1 4 4 13 R Read Button 3 7 Recall Button 4 158 Recall Cel Button 5 105 Recall from Temp Button 4 85 Recalling multiple files 4 61 recalling animations 5 34 curves 4 254 File Mode Button 4 207 Revision A Index 21 CHYRON Corporation File Popup Menu 4 205 foreign file formats 4 159 masks 4 364 text 4 410 Recalling pictures 4 106 Record Animation Button 5 255 Record Macro File Button 4 160 4 413 recording animations 5 43 in and out times 5 39 one frame of 5 41 partially 5 41 to disk 4 439 4 443 5 21 5 24 Rectangle Mask Button 4 367 rectangles making 4 264 Reference Actor 5 48 Show Troupe Button 5 56 Rename Directory Button 3 34 renaming files 4 225 multiple files 4 226 Render Text Button 4 408 Repeat Prefix Button 4 60 Reset Button 3 6 Reset to Zero Button 5 241 resolution Canvas functions 3 22 maximum 3 21 Reveal Color 4 317 Reveal Hue 4 318 Reveal Luminance 4 318 Reveal Paint Mode 4 279 Index 22 Revision A
611. ue distortions You can use a large negative depth behind the Canvas to achieve a parallel projection You can set the depth to the height of each image to provide the same look for both large and small panning objects Fixed mode is useful for animations that need to use the same center of projection for objects on individ ual paths Experiment to see what kind of look you can achieve Animation Environment 5 90 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Reset Button Press the red Reset Button to zero out the current settings Reset has soft and hard modes If a distort effect Rotation Scale etc is active press ing the Reset Button resets only the setting of that effect soft reset If no distort effects are active pressing Reset resets all the settings in the Distort Popup including changes made to the Eye settings Warp Corners When the Transform Warp Button label says Transform press it to change to Warp Corners mode The current Perspective Transform wire frame is mapped to a Warp Corners wireframe This allows you to do touch up work on the three dimen sional distortion The Warp Corners Popup is much simpler than the Perspective Transform Popup Warp generates the entire three dimensional world simply by interpret ing how you deform the wireframe Dragging a cor ner of the wireframe allows you to position one corner at a time to distort or warp the wireframe Dragging on
612. ular area for mixing colors and four but tons Real Adjust Edit and Clear e display the Color Mixer Press the Color Space button When the Color Space Popup comes up press on the Color Mixer Button fol lowed by the OK button To put color into the Color Mixer Press the Edit Button to enable painting directly into the Mixer area After you ve painted some colors into the Mixer use Smear Paint to smear the col ors around creating a range of colors to choose from Most paint modes such as Reveal Erase Paint and pressure sensitivity work with the Mixer Clone Paint and Paste Paint do not work with the Mixer Revision A 4 49 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To put color from the Color Mixer into the Palette When the Edit Button is turned off pressing in the Color Mixer area picks the pressed on color into the currently underlined color box in the Palette Edit Button A mode button that enables you to paint directly into the mixer Clear Button Clears the Color Mixer of color The Real Button Real time color pick When this mode button is on as you press down and drag the cursor over the Mixer area the current color box is continuously updated with the corresponding color Repeat Prefix with the Color Mixer With the Real Mode off and the Repeat Prefix on pressing continuously on the Mixer area fills all the palette boxes in the Palette with colors from
613. ult to Canvas if only one device is set up 4 Enter the target timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the record sequence Revision A 4 445 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 5 Press OK The popup disappears Recording will now use the indicated device s as target To set up a target hard disk path 1 the VTR Panel press the corner button of the Target Button The Target Set up Popup appears Press on one of the Disk Buttons Disk 1 Disk 2 etc not the windows to set it up as a target The Disk Button you press becomes highlighted Press on the window in the highlighted Disk Button The File Popup appears Type in a filename to begin the target path There must be a number in the filename Usually it would be the starting number 0 or 1 Enter the target timecode in the timecode window This should be the start point of the record sequence Use the Timecode Frame Button at the right to select which mode you want often you will use frame numbers for a disk path Press OK The Set up Popup disappears Recording will now use the indicated disk path The Disk Path File Type Buttons Every target disk path has a File Type Button at the right of its File Window Press this button to bring up a File Type Popup that allows you to choose from Liberty s wide range of file formats for the images to be saved Paint Environment 4 446 Revision A Libert
614. uration Environment CHYRON Corporation 3 4 MENU PANEL Number Temps 7 Number 7 Fast exit Temp Into Cels Info Mask Into Surface Black Border Alt Style Henu Configuration Figure 3 8 Menu Panel This panel allows you to configure how many of Liberty s temporary picture buffers temps and mask buffers you want to have and how many are saved in RAM instead of on disk You can also con figure Liberty for fast exits and customize the look of your menu buttons Configuration Environment 3 28 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Temp Number Button Liberty s Paint Environment provides by default six temporary work pages or picture storage buffers called temps You can configure as many temps as you want by pressing in the Temp Number Button and entering the number of temps you want When you go back to the Paint or Animation Environment you ll be prompted for a re start of Liberty before the new temps are configured Fast Temps Button Depending on the amount of RAM Random Access Memory on your system you can assign some or all of the temps to RAM for fast access The other temps are stored on disk and are accessed more slowly The minimum and default number of fast temps is 1 the maximum depends on how much RAM you have and how big your temps are Only Fast Temps can be used as Layers in the Paint Envi ronment Press inside the Fast Temps Button to type the num ber o
615. ursor appears e Press on the Canvas at each position where you want to deposit a point A spline is dis played through the points as you put them down If there are already curve points on the Canvas the line changes to reflect each added point Move Points Button To move one at a time e With no points selected press the Move But ton Tangents of the points appear on the Can vas represented by white lines e Position the cursor over a point or over a tan gent end point e Press and drag the point or tangent end point to its desired position The curve changes as you move the point Move as many points as you like To move groups of selected points e Select some curve points e Press the Move Button Tangents not dis played when points are selected Tangents can not be moved as a group e Press and drag the selected points as a group Delete Points Button To delete points one at a time e With no points selected press the Del button Revision A 4 251 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation e Position the cursor over a point and press down The point is deleted The curved line changes to reflect the deletion You may delete as many points as you like To delete groups of points e Select the points to be deleted e Press the Del button The selected points disap pear Paint Points Button To paint with points Press the Paint Button e On the Canvas pres
616. ush type Brush Chooses the type of brush to draw with Color Chooses the start end colors used to draw the shape outline when in Outline Mode Colors are interpo lated between the Start and End Color Buttons as the Actor renders Press the Start or End Color Buttons to display the color palette Modify the upper left palette box to the desired color then press the Start or End Color Button again to confirm the new color Mode Chooses the paint mode Paint reveal Smear etc Other Canvas Mode variations Outline Draws only the outline of the shape By default the entire shape is drawn at every field See below Continuous Modes 1 and 2 Fill Fills the shape with the current color Animation Environment 5 192 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Continuous Mode 1 Draws the shape a piece at a time over the entire ani mation Brush size and gap can change over the course of the shape s render Continuous Mode 2 Same as above but brush size and gap are constant for any particular field Brush size and gap do not change during the render Mask Mode The Mask Modes in the Shapes Actor are similar to the Modes in the Mask Actor see page 5 163 Plug in Actor The Plug in Actor allows you to apply a plug in fil ter to the actor s below it The Plug in Actor s File Window The Plug in Actor s File Window allows you to assign a file from the disk to use as a m
617. utting and pasting It gets its name from the fact that its functions all transfer a picture or part of a picture from one place to another The Transfer Panel usually appears in the leftmost panel position at startup It s a good idea to leave it in that position though you can put it in any of the four panel positions It s easier to use if it s always in the same familiar place Disk Recall and Save A Quick Look The Save File and Recall File Buttons are treated in detail on page 4 158 For simple save or recall of Canvas pictures e Press either the Save File or Recall File But ton The File Popup appears the filename you want to save or recall then press the Enter key Or instead of typ ing the filename you can press directly on the filename in the file list displayed in the File Popup If you are saving the contents of the Canvas picture is saved on disk under the file Paint Environment 4 106 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual name you type If recalling the file whose name you type is recalled onto the Canvas after eras ing the previous picture Afterwards the File Popup automatically disappears Cut amp Paste Functions 4 9 1 For all cutting and pasting Liberty uses the currently selected Temp Buffer in the Buffers Panel and Cut and Paste functions in the Transfer Panel The Cut Button cuts the whole Canvas the default or the masked area of the Canvas when a mask is a
618. utton Revision A 4 329 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation The first 7 Filter Elevator levels are from the left Sharpen Edge Enhance Edge Detect Relief Rattle Invert and Blur Filter Divisor The number in the Divisor is used to re scale the result of the Filter Array so that it doesn t over flow If you run a filter and its result is a mostly white or all white screen increase the Divisor and try the filter again Normally if the sum of the val ues in the filter array is greater than one the divisor should be set to that sum to normalize the result of the computation the sum of the values is displayed in the prompt window at the bottom of the screen when a filter elevator level is selected Filter Delta Press on the Delta Button to enter a number from the keyboard to change the brightness of the Filter result Plus values brighten the result minus values darken the result Filter Modes The mode buttons determine what components of the image are acted on by the Filter Only one Mode Button can be on at a time all All components R Red only G Green only B Blue only Paint Environment 4 330 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Filter Name Button Displays the name of the current Filter Press and type in a name to name a custom filter Filler Save Button When you save a filter to disk the Filter Array the divisor the Delta and the filter name are all also s
619. utton Use the Triangle Button to create a triangle shape Press the Replace Kf button Press the Move Next Kf pt Button The point where multiple points originate turns blue In this case it s the lower left point of the triangle Press and drag the seven multiple points out of the blue point As long as multiple points remain the point stays blue You can drag the points one at a time past other points in the shape to distribute them evenly two points to a side Note that the points turn green as you move them Press the necessary OK Buttons to return to the main Animation Timeline Revision A 5 189 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Render a Storyboard and play it back When the second shape has fewer points than the first shape the procedure is the same except that you choose the second keyframe and use the Move Prev Kf pt Button Shapes 3D Paste Popup Position Rotation 8 8 Scale 1 68 1 86 reset Figure 5 49 3D Paste Popup This popup appears when you click on a Keyframe Matchstick to edit it It s the same popup as the one you use for scaling rotating and slanting shapes in the Paint Environment You can also bring up the 3D Paste Popup after you have pressed the Edit Shapes Button by pressing the Transform Button on the Edit Shapes Popup Either way the results are the same Animation Environment 5 190 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Shapes
620. utton Right Arrow Decrement Cue Button Left Arrow Stop VTR Button VIBR PANEL MENU esto ernst Play VTFG BULOFI aae tiere tec Grab BUOM nics eis cane er nere nee Pe ie 4 428 Grab Popup ov eoo RE NIE 4 429 Record Button 4 430 VTR Set Up Popup eeeeeeenemenee 4 432 Source Target Set Up 4 437 Layers Auto compositing 4 439 Target Set up Popup sse 4 441 Saving Output as Layers 4 445 Layers Undo in 4 446 Chyron Motion File Set up 4 448 RAW YUV Files for Disk 4 451 Target Re scale 4 452 Dropframe Bultor rnt toties 4 453 Preroll Button 4 453 Table of Contents xvi Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Rotoscope Button Roto 4 453 4 23 DISK PANEL MENU nose hana nina s ca naa 4 453 4 23 1 Delete File Button eese 4 454 4 23 2 Move File Button eene 40454 4 23 3 Copy File Button eere 4 455 4 23 4 Browse Button nnmnnn 4 455 Vidjet BUOM enn
621. utton to tog gle between the six blur modes Fast Gaussian Min Max Median and Despeckle Fast Blur This mode applies a heavy uniform blur to the canvas The effect is fast to process but can introduce some slight artifacts especially on corners of objects Paint Environment 4 322 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Gaussian Blur This mode applies a softer weighted blur to the canvas This effect is slower to process than Fast Blur but produces a cleaner effect Min Filter The Min Filter works by taking the min imum value of each pixel and its neighbors within the area whose size is defined by the X and Y slid ers This tends to make dark areas of the image spread out and tends to give the image a hand painted impressionist or cubist look Its effects are especially pleasing when applied to background images Using large X and small Y values or visa versa tends to provide the appearance of a wood carving Max Filter The Max Filter works by taking the maximum value of each pixel and its neighbors within the area whose size is defined by the X and Y sliders This tends to make bright areas of the image spread out and tends to give the image a hand painted impressionist or cubist look Its effects are especially pleasing when applied to back ground images Using large X and small Y values or visa versa tends to provide the appearance of a wood carving Median Filter The Median filter is commo
622. uttons work in the same way Paint Environment 4 12 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Prompt Window Image size 720 x 486 at 0 0 Figure 4 7 Prompt Window and the Canvas Button The wide text window running across the middle bottom of the screen where alphanumeric informa tion about the current function is displayed The left 80 of the window displays system messages the name of the current function help information etc The right 20 displays the numeric value of the cur rent function and allows numeric entry to modify the value of the current function Pressing in the right end of the prompt window calls up the calculator see page 4 67 Canvas Button The Canvas Button is at the bottom of the Paint Environment screen near the right side Pressing this button causes the canvas to fill the entire SGI screen replacing the menus The Canvas button then changes to read Menus to allow restoring the menus to the screen The F8 key on the keyboard performs the same function as the Canvas Button Revision A 4 13 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE When you press the Canvas Button it automatically zooms the Canvas image so that it fills the screen The exceptions to this are 1 If you ve already zoomed when you press Canvas your current magnification is preserved and 2 If the image is too big to fit into the standard Canvas screen no zoom is perfo
623. vantage is that the text file is re rendered for each field or frame of the ani mation so that even when it is scaled up it is dis played at full resolution The Text Actor also can animate the color of the rendered text The Text Actor can contain a curve path for the text to follow during the animation as well as keyframes for DVE type rotation in x y and z These keyframes also control attributes such as Transparency Scale Slant Mirror and Under To create a Text actor Adda Text actor to the Timeline new actor is selected in the Timeline See adding actors page 5 51 Revision A 5 129 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation e Press the Edit Button in the Text Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline The Text Panel appears along with a wire frame of the current text if any on the Canvas The Text Panel called up by the Text actor is identical to the Text Panel in the Paint Environment except that the Render Button is replaced by an OK Button e Create or edit a text file using the Text Func tions in the Text Panel e Press the OK Button in the Text Panel The Text Panel disappears The text file you created or edited is now in the Text Actor You can save the animation with the Text Actor to disk and later when you recall it the data in the actor s text file is recalled as well Text Color Button The Text Color Button allows you to choose two colors in which to display the animating
624. vas operation the last Temp operation or the last Mask operation The Browse Undo Button brings up the Undo Popup which displays browse images of all the Canvas Temp Roto Layers and Mask images cur rently saved See page 3 57 for details about setting the number of Undo levels in the Configuration Environment Revision A 4 7 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Undo Button Press this button to undo the last operation whether it was Canvas Temp or Mask Pressing the Undo Button repeatedly undoes the last series of opera tions up to the number of levels set Redo Button Press this button to redo the last undo whether it was Canvas Temp or Mask Pressing the Redo But ton repeatedly redoes the last series of undone oper ations Paint Environment 4 8 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Undo Popup UNDO Current uw Roto Layers Newest Oldest Erase All Figure 4 5 Undo Popup Revision A Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual Press the Browse Undo Button to call up the Undo Popup It displays browse images of all the levels of Undo Six browse images fit on the normal screen but if you have more levels of Undo you can scroll the popup left and right to see all the browse images Controls are provided for scrolling and for deleting the Undo levels One set of Undo images can be browsed at a time Canvas Temp Mask or Roto Layers A colored mode butto
625. ve spotlight Experiment with this mode on and off to get a feel for its effect More About Mask Actors Mask Actors are controlled by their Keyframe Alpha Slider Decreasing alpha on a mask mode Brightness Mask Ripple Mask etc causes the effect to become more transparent relative to the original image Decreasing alpha on a mask the Mask Actor s Mask Button is highlighted causes a dissolve between the masked and un masked image At full opacity 100 alpha the mask actor fully blocks out the un masked area As alpha comes down the unmasked area dissolves in NOTE To fade the masked element apply the alpha change to the element itself not its mask You can perform any combination of layers and keyframe attributes Thus you can use any combina tion of Mask Actors Switcher Actors and Morph Actors All keyframes attributes including Alpha and Under will work regardless of how you layer the actors Also the Mask In place function will work regardless of how many layers of Mask Animation Environment 5 180 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Actors you use If a Mask Actor has In place turned on all Mask Actors directly below it become In place as well REMINDER When a Mask Actor s In place Mode Button is turned on the mask is applied before the next lower actor s rotation scaling position etc is calculated Multiple layers of Mask Actors are calculated multi plicatively This all
626. ve the pointer under an existing keyframe marker and press the Copy Button again e Press below another keyframe marker on the Keyframe Slider The data from the first key frame is copied into the indicated keyframe Paint Environment 4 484 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual NOTE Do not press directly on the keyframe marker itself but under it on the same level as the pointer A successful copy prompts Keyframe copied successfully If you try to press directly on a keyframe marker you are prompted Cannot copy to source keyframe Triangle Morph Delete Keyframe Button To delete a keyframe Position the pointer beneath the keyframe marker you want to delete e Press the Delete Keyframe Button The key frame marker disappears from the slider Rendering a Morph Keyframe After creating a keyframe you can render it by pressing the OK Button when the pointer is under the keyframe you want to render If you want to ren der at a place between keyframes you need only place the pointer there instead Rendering takes place wherever the pointer is positioned regardless of whether it s right under a keyframe or not Triangle Morph Reset Button Press to reset the morph functions All keyframes including points connecting lines and the bounding box are deleted You are prompted Restarted MORPH Please specify bounding box Revision A 4 485 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporat
627. ved thus revealing luminance from element A into element B is identical to revealing color from element B into element A Reveal Hue Reveal Hue reveals only hue leaving saturation unchanged Use to put a color texture on an object with white highlights because white remains white Reveal Hue really does the same thing as Tint Hue but can reveal the hues from an entire pic ture instead of just tinting with one color 4 15 9 Tint Button Press to tint the masked area on the Canvas using the slider settings in the corresponding popup There are two modes on the popup Hue which changes hue only and Hue amp Sat which changes both Hue and Saturation Paint Environment 4 318 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Tint Popup n OK preview active Hue Sat 0 255 Reset Figure 4 101 Tint Popup Press the corner button of Tint to call up the Tint Popup Hue Mode Press to tint the masked area on the Canvas with the hue slider value ignoring saturation If no mask is active on the Canvas the entire Canvas is tinted Saturation Mode Press to tint the masked area on the Canvas using the hue and saturation slider values The current color must not be white black or gray If no mask is active on the Canvas the entire Canvas is tinted Revision A 4 319 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 15 10 MultiTint Button This function allows you to tint using two or
628. vel The File Popup appears If the font direc tory is not displayed press on DIR to see a list of directories press the directory named fonts You can browse fonts just like pictures in the Full Screen File Menu When the list of available fonts is displayed press on a font name in the list The name of the font appears in the elevator level and the File Popup disappears Paint Environment 4 402 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual On the right of each elevator level is a Set button Press on the Set button to change the style of the text currently being edited into the font in that elevator level If there is selected text only the selected text will change font style but if there is no selected text then all text will change font style Move Button Use to move the text outline around on the Canvas It works on the selected characters and if no charac ters are selected it works on all the characters If characters are selected they change color while being moved To move text e Press Move e Press on the selected text and drag to its new position e Press Move again to turn it off You cannot select new text while Move is on Refresh Text Button Updates the displayed text The displayed text auto matically updates when most functions are used but when new text is typed in there can be update prob lems which will be corrected by pressing this button Text Elevator Unde
629. ves the currently defined morph in a morph file Pressing on it brings up the file save menu allowing the user to browse directories and select a file name to save to The Save button is grayed out when there is no morph defined yet before morph lines have been added or before the Lock button has been pressed Line Morph Cancel Button The Cancel button exits the popup without perform ing a morph Line Morph OK Button Press to render the morphed distortion as deter mined by the position of the pointer in the Line Morph Slider Renders on top of the existing picture on the Canvas or under it if the Under Prefix is on The corner button renders at one fourth resolution Paint Environment 4 480 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Line Morph Erase Button Press the Line Morph Erase Button to erase the Can vas before rendering The corner button renders at one fourth resolution 4 25 3 Triangle Morph Del Move recall Lock erase cancel Figure 4 156 Triangle Morph Popup The discussion of Triangle Morph begins with a step by step description of how to create a morph distortion of an image followed by a button by but ton description of the Triangle Morph Popup To morph a distortion of an image with Triangle Morph 1 Cut the image to be distorted into the Temp Buffer 2 Press the Triangle Morph Button in the Tools 2 Panel The Triangle Morph Popup appears If an
630. vision A Liberty Artist s Manual The characters that you type in must be enclosed in double quotes Line 1 can be up to 70 characters and Line 2 up to 20 characters not including quotes If the monitor only displays a color video input in monochrome sure the monitor is not a monochrome only monitor NOTE If using Secam and Composite input the monitor will display the color image in monochrome but print it in color If the image size won t change sure one of the predefined layouts Sto ryboards and Logsheets isn t chosen If the print out should be multi column but is only a single column e Only the laser jet printers the Deskjet 1200C the PaintJet XL300 and the DesignJet 650C support multi column printing If there is a long delay between copies If the printer you are using doesn t support multiple copy printing the Vidjet must repro cess and send the image data for each copy If black bars appear at edges of the printed images Turn the Under toggle button in the Install Menu off If the edges look uneven or there are bands through out the image Revision A 4 469 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Check the setting of the Printer Mode but ton Banding may occur if it s set to Fast Also check the resolution Res and print fields Fields If the monitor display is not what you expected
631. vision A Liberty Artist s Manual ple recalling a Point File while editing a Cel Actor s path makes the actor s image follow the path defined in the Point File as defined for each frame Corner List Button The Corner List Button is only enabled if you have Liberty s Animation Option When editing an Ani mation actor s path using the Edit Path button in the actor edit menu press the Corner List button to recall a Corner File Corner Files are created with the Motion Tracking function in the Image Tools2 panel when the tracking function is in Corner mode tracking four corner points The Corner File is utilized to apply corner warping to an animation actor For example recalling a Cor ner File while editing a Cel Actor s path puts the cel actor s keyframes in Distort Warp mode and warps the cel actor s image using the four corner points defined in the Corner File for each frame Revision A 4 261 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation 4 13 3 Shape Popup Hove Center Transform Erase Polu Draw Recall Save i Figure 4 82 Shape Popup The Shape Button calls up the Shape Popup which is used to create simple wireframe shapes to be ren dered as a solid in the current color or as an outline with the current brush Circle Button To create a circle Press the Circle Button e Press on the Canvas The place you press becomes the center of the circle Paint Environme
632. w megabytes of free space FTP Settings Elevator Use the six levels of the elevator to save settings for different remote hosts directories FTP Local If the FIP Button is on the file is transferred via FTP to the specified remote host and directory If the Local Button 1s also on the file is saved to the local hard drive as well If only the FTP Button is on the file will be deleted from the local hard disk after the FTP is completed Save Browse Button When this button is on a browse file is FTP d along with the image so that Liberty can later browse the file remotely iNFiNiT and ImageStor each have their own FTP settings which are brought up by pressing either the Set up Button or the FIP Button when iNFiNIT or ImageStor is the current file format When the cur rent file format is INFiNiT or Imagestor the FTP button highlights depending on whether FTP is turned on in the FTP settings for that file format Paint Environment 4 202 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Note that the enabled Button on the Save As Popup causes animation files being rendered to disk in non Liberty image file formats as they appear in the SaveAs Popup to be saved to a remote direc tory To prepare to save via FTP with Save As 1 Bring up the Save As Popup chose the desired file format and press the FTP Button The FIP Popup appears Enter the desired settings in the FTP Popup and press on t
633. w the animation Mask Mode Popups When you press the Edit Keyframe Button to call up the Keyframe Timeline a popup also appears for the current mask mode at the right of the Timeline This popup allows you to set keyframe able mask attributes It contains options for the current mask mode For example if the Mask Actor is in Bright ness Mode then the Mask Mode Popup has a slider for brightness Revision A 5 163 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation The values set by sliders and buttons in the Mask Mode Popup are keyframe able For example in Brightness Mode you could set the first keyframe to a brightness of 0 and the last keyframe to a bright ness of 200 In the animation the masked area would begin with no change to its brightness and gradually become very bright A value of 100 will set the masked area to black If you want you can add keyframes in between to control the brightness further the Mask Mode Popups have Next and Prev But tons for moving between keyframe matchsticks the same as on the Distort Popup There is also a large Preview Button which you press to see a preview of the current Mask actor applied to the actor below it The only Mask modes that don t have or need Mask Mode popups are Mask and Tint Modes Naine Loops Begin I Fnd Df 4 File Jaecal Canned Demo imace trackine mUtl t im Invert 1 next gt Mask Key Hue Bright Contrast M _ Rip
634. way to permanently store your custom created Programmed Brushes is to save the Diagram Curve on disk using the Save Button in the Diagram Popup Or you can make a copy of it on the Canvas and make a User defined Brush out of it User defined Brushes can also be stored on disk see page 4 32 NOTE Changing the amount of fall off steepness of the curve strongly affects some Paint Mode functions such as Touchup Paint Paint Environment 4 28 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual User Brush Button ULL EENE OK Hard Norm Save ES Recall Def Figure 4 16 User Brush Popup The User Brush allows you to create a brush from any image on the Canvas up to 120 pixels square Regardless of its original on screen color after it has been defined the User Brush paints using the cur rent color in the Palette like the other three brush modes Press the User Brush Button to choose the current user defined brush Revision A 4 29 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation NOTE If you have just booted up the system there is no current user defined brush loaded Pressing on the User Brush Button automatically calls up the User Brush Popup Menu so you can choose a user defined brush from the popup To change the current User Brush 1 3 Press the corner button of the User Brush Button The User Brush Popup appears displaying ten of the existing User defined Brushes Pres
635. which become yellow when they are selected Press the Color Button to reverse this Revision A 4 475 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation Line Morph Tune Button cancel biend dist length reset Figure 4 155 Line Morph Tune Popup Press to call up the Tune Popup In general the fur ther away a line segment is from a pixel the less effect it has on that pixel Tune allows you to adjust three slider settings Blend Distance and Length The best way to understand these settings is to experiment It s sometimes difficult to predict what the exact effect will be for a combination of set tings Blend Slider The Blend Slider controls the smoothness of the morph or the amount of blending between line seg ments Distance Slider The Distance Slider controls how the effect of a line segment diminishes with distance Paint Environment 4 476 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Length Slider The Length Slider if non zero makes longer line segments have a greater effect on the morph Press the Cancel Button on the Tune Popup to can cel any changes you ve made to the Tune settings Press the Reset Button to reset the Tune settings to their defaults Line Morph Select Button Press to select line segments Press near a line seg ment to select it The selected line segments change color Pressing a selected segment un selects it Press the Move Button to move all the selected s
636. window of the color to be changed The color palette appears 205 Choose and modify a palette color e 3 Press the OK Button beneath the palette The palette disappears and the color window is changed to the new color updating the appropriate layer borders Loading Layers Graphically The most convenient way to load a number of Temp Buffers with images from the disk is to graphically load them from the Full Screen File Menu Revision A 4 99 Paint Environment CHYRON Corporation To load layers graphically eL 2 3 4 2 5 6 Press the File Manager Button on the Transfer Panel The Full Screen File Menu appears Press the right end of the pink Canvas File Mode Button to change it to Temp The Temp Loader appears across the bottom of the screen Press on the browse image you want to load into a Temp It becomes highlighted Press on the Temp browse window you want to load into The chosen browse image appears in the indicated Temp browse window Repeat for as many pictures as you want Press Cancel to remove the Full Screen File Menu Pressing OK also loads the last browse image into the current Temp Loading masks graphically works in a similar fash ion except that in Step 2 you switch the colored File Type Button to Mask Paint Environment 4 100 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Recall F 188844 18 free Host local Disk Dir awards File Browse
637. with painting The Paint Gap Modes There are three mode buttons on the Paint Gap Popup Max Exact and Nofill Press on one of them to turn on the corresponding Paint Gap Mode The Paint Gap Modes control the way Liberty inter prets your moving pen when painting The Exact paint gap mode is the most commonly used one It is the default and results in the fastest brush speeds Max Mode In Max Mode there is no filling between tablet coordinates as long as the gap between them does not exceed the value on the Paint Gap Slider If the gap between the tablet coordinates exceeds the value on the Gap Slider a straight line is drawn between the tablet coordinates using the value on the Gap Slider Thus the maximum gap between the brush pen downs will be whatever the value on the Paint Gap Slider is set to Exact Mode In Exact Mode Liberty places brushes exactly at equal distances according to the setting of the slider Liberty will not allow brushes to be placed any closer without lifting the pen and pressing again The Line and Curve Gap Popup always use Exact mode and thus do not have the Max Exact and Nofill Buttons Paint Environment 4 244 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Nofill Mode In Nofill Mode Liberty places the brush without filling and ignores the slider value The density of the dotted line varies with painting speed OK Button Press to confirm the gap setting and remove the Gap Popup
638. ws are the same as number windows but you type text into them usually one or two words These are almost exclusively found in the optional Animation Environment Keyboard While using Liberty artists can create images and adjust the great variety of parameters using the sys tem s mouse and or tablet pen as well as slider and diagram controls found in various menu pop ups The SGI keyboard is used to input specific numeric values text editing binding menu functions and Revision A 1 5 Introduction CHYRON Corporation 1 3 7 macros to keys and adjustment of paste position ing All text and numeric input from the keyboard must end with the Enter key Help Liberty provides a green Help Button at the upper left corner of the Paint Environment near the brush Display In the Animation and Configure Environ ments the green Help Button is at the lower nght comer of the screen Press the Help Button then press the button that you need help with The name of the pressed button and a short description appears in the Prompt Window Introduction 1 6 Revision A 2 Login Environment 2 1 THE LOGIN ENVIRONMENT Liberty automatically logs on as art but you can create 99 user defined login accounts in Liberty To login using a different account press on the name or number of the account you want to use If prompted type the appropriate password Once you are logged in to the account of your cho
639. y them to change their length and to delete them Each Actor Edit Button turns off after performing an operation once except the Main Actor Edit Button To perform repeated actor edit operations press the Repeat Prefix Button before pressing an Actor Edit Button Only one Actor Edit Button can be active at a time Main Actor Edit Button Press the Main Actor Edit Button to end any Actor Edit function The Main Actor Edit Button Edit is active by default indicating that no other Actor Animation Environment 5 50 Revision A Liberty Artist s Manual Edit Buttons are active When any other Actor Edit Button finishes an operation the Main Actor Edit Button becomes active again Home Button Corner of Main Actor Edit Press the Home Button in the corner of the Main Actor Edit Button to home the Timeline to the Zero layer When you have scrolled away from this layer on the Timeline this button resets the Zero layer to the second line from the bottom Add Actor Button To add an actor to the Timeline Press the Add Actor Button Press in a layer of the Timeline at the point that you want the actor to begin e Press a second time in the same layer at the point that you want the actor to end The actor appears between the two indicated points The begin and end times of the actor appear in its Actor Popup at the right of the Timeline NOTE To automatically fill up all the space i
640. y Artist s Manual To change a value in the Filter array e Press a box in the Filter array Type a number followed by the Enter key Prefix Buttons with the Filter Array The Prefix Buttons provide a quick way to repeat edly enter the same values into the Filter boxes You can press the Copy Prefix page 4 62 then one of the Filter Array Boxes to put the last entered value into the box Pressing the Add Prefix then pressing a Filter Array Box adds the last entered value to the number in the box Pressing the Add and the Inverse Prefixes then a Filter Array Button subtracts the last entered value from the number in the box Filter Slider Press and drag the slider to proportionately adjust all the values in the Filter Array Often you ll get the best results by incrementing the Filter Slider one unit at a time by pressing the arrow buttons at the top or bottom of the slider If some values in the Fil ter Array don t change enough with the slider you can always enter values numerically by pressing in the Array Box you want to change and typing the number on the keyboard followed by the keyboard s enter key Filter Elevator The Filter Elevator has 20 levels the first 7 of which are pre set and can t be modified The last 13 are empty for you to put your own filters into You can copy an existing filter to an empty level using the Copy Prefix Button You can add an entire filter to another with the Add Prefix B
641. y Artist s Manual File Type Popup External Image file formats AU 288 BMP DIB INFINIT ImayeStor Prisms RLA Scitex Vertigo Liberty Image Tile formats Cineon Liberty im Layers SRI rgh Softim Figure 4 150 File Type Popup tlip file formats Chyron Motion File Rau YUY set up Cancel Revision A 4 447 Paint Environment Liberty Artist s Manual The File Type Popup allows you to choose from Liberty file formats and External file formats for still images and Clip file formats for animations External Image File Formats The normal still image file formats from the Save As Popup such as TIFF and Targa Liberty Image File Formats Standard Liberty and Liberty Layers file format Clip File Formats Raw YUV for use with the RAID Disk Array see the Liberty Technical Reference manual and the Chyron Motion File Format for realtime playback on iNFiNiT Saving Output as Layers Files As an alternative to using Auto composite to com posite Layers and Canvas before recording you may want to save the rotoscoped frames to a sequence of Layers files on disk In this case you would disable Auto composite and set up a disk path to which each active Layer and the Canvas would be saved in a Layers file frame by frame The advantage of this is that later you can recall the sequence of Layers files frame by frame and you can make further changes to
642. ype Popup appears on top of the Actor Edit Menu The following are brief descriptions of the actor types and their functions in an animation Detailed descriptions of each type of actor start on page 5 106 Cel Actor A Cel Actor calls a single image or a group of images from disk for display in the animation See page 5 106 for a full description of this actor type Revision A 5 45 Animation Environment CHYRON Corporation Cycle Actor A Cycle Actor calls a series of images from disk and displays the sequence in the animation The Cycle Actor takes filenames that are dissimilar and not sequentially numbered unlike the Filmstrip Actor The Cel Actor in Multiple Mode can perform the same operation See page 5 119 for a full descrip tion of this actor type Filmstrip Actor A Filmstrip Actor calls a sequence of images with a common name and incrementing numbers like anim anim2 anim3 anim4 etc from disk and displays the sequence in the animation The Film strip sequence can come from another source such as a 3D software package or a recording device The Cel Actor in Multiple Mode can perform the same operation See page 5 120 for a full description of this actor type Text Actor The Text Actor is similar to a Cel Actor but calls up a vector based text image rather than a picture file The Text actor allows text to be greatly magnified while keeping full resolution See page 5 129 for a full descrip

Liberty Paint Liberty 32/64 Artist`s Manual rty Paint ty 32/64 t`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents